diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-8.txt | 7579 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 132038 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1376186 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/20614-h.htm | 7967 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig1.png | bin | 0 -> 5544 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig10.png | bin | 0 -> 8886 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig11.png | bin | 0 -> 8306 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig12.png | bin | 0 -> 15547 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig13.png | bin | 0 -> 28698 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig14.png | bin | 0 -> 19211 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig15.png | bin | 0 -> 29224 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig16.png | bin | 0 -> 24486 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig17.png | bin | 0 -> 4528 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig18.png | bin | 0 -> 7429 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig19-19a.png | bin | 0 -> 8627 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig2-3.png | bin | 0 -> 76362 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig20.png | bin | 0 -> 10336 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig21-22.png | bin | 0 -> 15466 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig23.png | bin | 0 -> 30324 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig24.png | bin | 0 -> 73315 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig25.png | bin | 0 -> 15207 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig26.png | bin | 0 -> 13450 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig27.png | bin | 0 -> 13756 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig28.png | bin | 0 -> 31122 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig29.png | bin | 0 -> 24121 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig30.png | bin | 0 -> 46544 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig31.png | bin | 0 -> 11818 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig4.png | bin | 0 -> 11572 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig5-6.png | bin | 0 -> 9750 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig7.png | bin | 0 -> 14416 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig8.png | bin | 0 -> 5968 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/fig9.png | bin | 0 -> 24015 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/illus1.png | bin | 0 -> 141155 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/illus2.png | bin | 0 -> 186210 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/illus3.png | bin | 0 -> 169570 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614-h/images/illus4.png | bin | 0 -> 148700 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614.txt | 7579 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 20614.zip | bin | 0 -> 132037 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
41 files changed, 23141 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/20614-8.txt b/20614-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f0364e --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7579 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the +Caverns, by Roger Thompson Finlay + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the Caverns + + +Author: Roger Thompson Finlay + + + +Release Date: February 17, 2007 [eBook #20614] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: THE +MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS*** + + +E-text prepared by Joe Longo, Mary Meehan, and the Project Gutenberg +Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net/c/) + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 20614-h.htm or 20614-h.zip: + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614/20614-h/20614-h.htm) + or + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614/20614-h.zip) + + + + + +The Wonder Island Boys + +THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS + +by + +ROGER T. FINLAY + +Illustrated + + + + + + + +The New York Book Company +New York +Copyright 1914 + + + + +[Illustration: _"The professor was reading the scrap, and silently +handed it to George"_] + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF THE TEAM + + The runaway team. Circumstances leading up to the present + condition. The singular occurrences. Examining the tree. The search + for the yaks. Red Angel as a scout. On the tracks. Losing the + trail. Red Angel's discovery. The wrecked wagon. The lost weapons + and ammunition. Breaking in new steers. The planting program. + Different plants and soils. Prospecting for ores and vegetation. + Discussing hunting trip. How people of different countries select + soils. Wild fruit and vegetables. Lessons from the actions of their + animals. Propagation of fruit and vegetables. Chemical changes + produced by different soils. The wild potato. + + II. WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT + + Determine to bring in the newly discovered lifeboat. Trip to South + River. Finding the broken yoke of their team. Recovering the + lifeboat. Uses for the bolo. Decision to row the boat around the + point. Making more guns. Preparing new tools. Alloys and their + uses. Hardness of metal. Bronze. Ancient guns. Manganese. Making + stocks for the guns. Commencing the hull of the new boat. Size of + the vessel. About shape or form of hulls. Momentum. Resistance. Red + Angel's attempt to whistle. Amusing performance. Teaching Red Angel + accomplishments. Vibration, the universal force. + +III. THE HIDEEN MESSAGE + + The new yoke for the yaks. Some of the mysteries. Discussion + concerning future discoveries. Rainbows. Musical pitch and colors. + Reflection and refraction. Riding the yaks. Completing some of the + guns. The trip after the wrecked wagon. Finding their runaway team. + Accounting for their disappearance. Prospecting. Sugar cane + discovered. Sorghum. The Tamarisk. Rigging up the lifeboat with + sails. Discovery of a hidden message in the lifeboat. Examining the + place where it was found. Determining the time when the message was + written. Rushing preparation of guns and ammunition. Galena. Lead. + Getting rid of the sulphur. Making bullets. + + IV. THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS + + Completing the guns. Description of the new ones. Polishing grit. + Emery. Corundum. Laying the keel of the big boat. Terrible winds. + The monsoons. Trade winds. Length of summers north and south of the + Equator. Disappearance of the flag from Observation Hill. George + and Angel's hunt for the flag. Disappointment. Angel finding the + flag. Angel's laugh. Facial expression in animals. Brass. The form + of bullets. Why pointed at one end and hollow in the other. Rifling + guns. Spiral movement. Molds for castings. The Professor's desire + to fully explore the cave. Weaving the sails for the new boat. + Angel's work on the loom. + + V. THE VOYAGE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ANGEL, AND THE DISCOVERY + + Completing the hull of the new boat. Making manilla rope. Decide to + take Angel along. Enticing him aboard. His consternation. Rounding + the cliffs. Discovering their first boat among debris. Taking it + along as a trailer. Sailing up Cataract River. Evidence that their + boat had been used by some one. Proof of its use by the natives. + One of the signs of civilization. Leverage. Fulcrum. Mechanical + powers. Delay of voyage owing to weather. Tourmaline. Harry's + invention. The bamboo tubes. Testing how fast the guns could be + loaded and fired. Cartridges. The marine works. The boats. Three + cheers for the new ship. + + VI. THE GRUESOME FINDS IN THE CAVE + + The cave. Taking the boat to explore the interior. The air pocket. + A board for charting the cave. The boat on the wagon. Entering the + cave. The lights. Returning for the boat. The peculiar noise at the + cave entrance. Methods for searching the cave. The domed chamber. + Making a circuit within it. The outlet. The second chamber. The + chalk icicles. Limestone. Volcanic action. Carbonic acid, and what + it produced. The caves of the world. What is learned in searching + caves. Their archaeological knowledge. A peculiar formation in the + large chamber. A platform within a recess. Skulls and skeletons. + Ancient weapons. Evidences of a terrible conflict. Musket balls. + Dirks and unknown forms of weapons. Singular copper receptacles. + Curiously wrought knives. Articles of furniture. Decayed clothing. + Kitchen utensils. Why the cave takes care of the smoke. + +VII. THE TREASURES OF THE CAVE + + The couch in the recess. Chests of gold. A pirates' lair. The + ancient coins. Peculiar articles of ornament. The lid with mocking + lock. Rings; bracelets. The buccaneers. The sermon. Ghastly relics. + A perceptible movement in the atmosphere. Startling supposition. A + possible outlet in the side of the hill. The slab of carbonate. The + writing on it. An accident and the finding of other skeletons. The + light shining into the cave. Discovery of the outlet. View of the + cataract from the opening in the hillside. The boat in the cave. + Taking it out by the hillside opening. The Professor's search. + Return of the boys with the team. Re-enter the cave. The Professor + lost. Hunting in the unknown passages. Return of the Professor. + Taking two of the skeletons to the laboratory. + +VIII. REMOVING THE VESSELS FROM THE CAVERNS + + Completion of the boat. Making a trial voyage. Rounding the cliffs. + Trip to the south. The forests and the mountains. On the south + coast. A raging storm. Seasickness and dizziness at great heights. + The calcareous slab from the cave. The letters on it. Photography. + Reagents. Photographic light. X-rays. Taking the copper vessels + from the cave. Gathering up the bones. Evidences of the strife. + Spanish inscriptions. Gold bullion. Silver ornaments and vessels. + Decayed chests. The coins. Peculiar guns. Non-effective powder. + Disappearance of Angel. Return of Angel with a rusted modern gun. + Iron or steel guns. Powder as a factor in making weapons. + + IX. MAKING ELECTRICITY + + Their present condition. What they had accomplished. Working for + love. Contemplating the hoard in the cave. Selfishness at the + bottom of the pirates' lives. Gathering sugar cane. Honey, and its + uses in ancient times. Beets and various tubers. Fattening + properties. Nitrogenous matter. The load of cane. Making a sugar + mill. Lime in sugar-cane juice. Clarifying sugar. A candy pulling. + Granulating sugar. The earth as a magnet. Electricity. Positive and + negative. Magnetic poles. Likes and unlikes. Making a magnet. + Retaining magnetism in a bar. + + X. STARTING ON THE VOYAGE TO THE WEST + + A barometer. Air pressure. A compass. The atmosphere. Dry weather. + Observing weather conditions. Providing compartments in the boat + for provisions. Bedding. Water supply. Faith. Preparing a tablet + for the Cataract. A terrific storm. A delayed departure. How delays + have often proved valuable to investigators. Starting the voyage to + the west. Striking a course. Observations on speed. Going with the + wind. Tacking. Angles of incidence. The action of air on a surface. + Determining the pressure of air by its velocity. Flying machines. + Time and speed in a vessel. Qualities necessary in a sailor. + + XI. A TERRIBLE VOYAGE AND THE SHIPWRECK + + The shadows of night. Recalling memories of their shipwreck. The + charting board. Cardinal points of the compass. How direction + traveled is laid out on the chart. Measurement by angles. A weary + night. The watches. The wind changing. The second day. Cliffs + beyond. Sailing against the wind. Rounding the northern point. The + fourth day. The increasing gale. Night. The lights to the south. + The gale turning to a storm. Driven back. A night without sleep. An + appalling monsoon. Springing a leak. The Professor exhausted. + Danger ahead. The cliffs. A maelstrom in sight. Averting the + danger. Recovery of the Professor. Steering for shore. Striking the + beach. The vessel shattered. Stranded miles from home. Taking up + the march. Putting an inscription on the boat. Nearing home. + +XII. THE RETURN TRIP. THE ORANG-OUTANS + + The blackened fire space. Discovery of their own camp in the + forest. An adventure in the woods. A huge bear. George's shot. + Charging the Professor, and his shot. Attacking George. Safety + behind a fallen tree. Search for the luggage. The cries of Angel. + The bear finding their packages. The bear making use of their + things. What they had left. The yellow pear. Guava. The coffee + tree. Cherries. Gathering coffee berries. How Angel made himself + understood. His excitement. The discovery of a number of + orang-outans. Red Angel visits them. He is not welcomed. Return of + the animal. The clearing in the woods. Recalling the fight of the + bears over the honey. + +XIII. THE STRANGE VISITOR + + The flag on Observation Hill. Approaching Cataract. The alarm by + Red Angel. The house intact. Discovery of a man at the stable. His + peculiar actions. Lost memory. Aphasia. Unable to speak. + Recognizing the signal flag on the strange man. Provided with + clothing. A peculiar malady. The instinct of self-preservation. + Going with George to Observation Hill. The actions of a sailor. The + stranger visits the workshop. Expert with the use of tools. + Projecting an exploring trip by land. Naming the stranger John. + Startled at sound of the name. Mechanically performing work. + Examining the skulls. + +XIV. AN EXCITING TRIP TO THE FALLS + + The food supply. Butter. Cream. Centrifugal motion. Difference in + specific gravity between cream and milk. Making a cream separator. + Vegetables. Onions. Chives. The stranger as a prospector. Procuring + samples. Peculiarities of his malady. An exciting encounter with a + bear. John's skill as a hunter. Another honey tree. Killed with a + spear. The bear pelt. Visiting the falls. Action to indicate that + John recognizes the falls. + + XV. THE STORY OF THE CAVE + + Mystery about John. Humanity's search. The desire to know and + acquire. Gathering supplies for an extended trip by land. The boys + visit the cave. Determine to search the chamber visited by the + Professor. Gorgeous calcareous hangings. The ghosts of past + centuries. Gold and silver vessels. Skeletons. A recess. A row of + chests. Spanish guns. The chained skeletons in the recess. An + arsenal. The struggle. Locked in the embrace of death. Ancient + origin of the cave. Paleontology. Stone and bronze ages. Atlantis, + the great continent in the Atlantic, which disappeared. Story of + the Egyptian priests. The actinic rays. Purifying action of + sunlight. Bacteria. Glass houses. The eye. How it expresses + character. Laughter. How it brightens the eye. Fishhooks. A fishing + party. The salmon. + +XVI. MUSIC AND ANIMALS + + Preserving fish. Why heat is used. The use of tin for cans. Music. + The violin made by the boys. Violin strings; what they are made of. + How they are prepared and treated. The concert. How the music + affected Red Angel. John enraptured. How it touched him. The change + in his eyes. The field mouse. How different animals are moved by + music. The lion. Hippopotamus. Tigers. Monkeys. Momentary flashes + of intelligence in John. Building a new wagon. Finding and making + paint. Lead. Fermentation. Flax. Driers. Turpentine. Synthetic + food. Analysis. Tubes for powder. Completing the guns. Stocking the + wagon with provisions. Starting on the trip. Jack and Jill. The + sixth trip. + +XVII. THE TRIP THROUGH THE DENSE FOREST + + The trip along Cataract River. The great forest. How Angel + traveled. Reaching South River. Discovering a second falls. Where + the debris on a seashore comes from. The jungle. Leaving the river. + The two animals in the night. The camp aroused. A fight in the + dark. The puma. The frightened team. The injured yak. Animal + language. The panther. Trying to avoid the forest. Growing denser. + John and Harry scouting through the forest. Blazing a trail. The + hidden luncheon. End of the forest. Returning to the wagon. The + noise in their path. The wagon following the trail. The injured yak + improving. + +XVIII. SEEING THE FIRST SAVAGES + + Teaching Angel. Finding a campfire. Determine from the conditions + that it was recently made. Prospecting from the tops of trees. A + climbing ring. How made and used. The climbing operation. Harry + sees another forest to the south. Clear in the west. The wounded + yak calls a halt. Resuming the journey. Harry in the grasp of a + giant anaconda. John severs its body with a bolo. Boa constrictor. + The python. The Cashew tree. Gum arabic. Seeing the West River. + Discovering signs of habitations to the south. Course to be + followed in meeting the natives. Hearing voices in the night. + Crackling of twigs. A party of savages. The next morning. Examining + the tracks made by the midnight party. Following the trail thus + made. The open country. The first view of the inhabitants. + + + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + + +"The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George" + +"'We have probably found a pirate's lair, and here is the booty'" + +"The Professor walked toward him and held out his hand" + +"With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last +coil" + + + + +LIST OF FIGURES + + + 1. The Broken Yoke + + 2. Top View of Boat + + 3. Side View of Boat + + 4. Cross Section of Boat + + 5. Force of Momentum + + 6. Red Angel + + 7. The Color Spectrum + + 8. Reflection Angle + + 9. The Hidden Message + +10. The First Gun + +11. The Bullet + +12. The Sea-going Boat + +13. The Cave + +14. The Slab Found in the Cave + +15. Old Coins Found in Cave + +16. Cane Crusher + +17. A Magnet + +18. Magnetic Induction + +19. The Two Magnets + +20. Making a Permanent Magnet + +21. Illustrating Wind Pressure, 1 + +22. Illustrating Wind Pressure, 2 + +23. Mariner's Compass + +24. Chart of the Voyage + +25. The Charting Board + +26. Guava + +27. Coffee + +28. Cream Separator + +29. The Lion and Cubs + +30. The Puma + +31. The Acajou + + + + +THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS + + + + +CHAPTER I + +MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF THE TEAM + + +The boys looked at the Professor in amazement. They were too much +excited and concerned at the new situation to be able to interpret what +the sudden disappearance of their team meant. + +The Professor turned to the boys: "Are you sure the yaks were tied +before we left them?" + +"I was particularly careful," answered Harry, "to tie both of them." + +"I am pretty sure that both were securely fastened, and they were in +that condition when I came back the last time," was George's reply. + +To understand the peculiar situation above referred to, it will be +necessary to go back and briefly relate some of the remarkable events +which had taken place in the lives of the three people concerned in this +history. + +George Mayfield and Harry Crandall, together with a Professor, were +mates on a ship training school, which sailed from New York one year +before. A terrific explosion at sea cast them adrift in mid-Pacific +Ocean, and after five days of suffering they were cast ashore on an +apparently uncharted island, without any food, and entirely devoid of +any tools, implements or weapons. + +Exercising the knowledge of the Professor, and the ingenuity of the +boys, they gradually dug from mother earth and from the rocks and trees +the articles necessary to sustain life, and eventually they found +different ores from which various implements and weapons were made. They +constructed numerous machines, crude, at first, and gradually developed +them. They succeeded in capturing yaks, a bovine species of animals, +some of which were trained like oxen; wagons were built; a shop +constructed; a water wheel installed; a primitive sawmill put up; a +primary battery made; articles of clothing woven; felt made; and +numerous things of this character originated from material which nature +had furnished in its crude state. + +While doing all this the desire to explore the island was a +predominating one. Four trips into the interior had been made in order +to ascertain whether or not it contained any human beings. During those +trips numerous evidences were found to show that savages were there, and +some indications that civilized people had visited the island. + +The peculiar happenings which excited their interest were the mysterious +things that occurred at various times, among which the following may be +briefly enumerated: The disappearance of a boat, which they built, and +which was left at the place where the team was lost; the subsequent +finding of the boat among debris on the seashore, having oars and rope +in it which were strange to them; the removal of the flagpole and flag +which had been erected up on a high point near the ocean, called +Observation Hill, and the fire in the forest. + +To the foregoing may be added the discovery of a prospecting hole, which +had been dug, evidently, by some one in the hope of finding mineral; a +yak with a brand on it; wreckage of a boat, which, undoubtedly, belonged +to their ill-fated ship; a gruesome skeleton on the seashore; and +finally one of the lifeboats of the schoolship and a companion to their +own, found on the shore of the stream where they now were. + +All these things were sufficient not only to cause alarm, but the +greatest consternation on the part of the boys. It must be said, +however, that the trials of the boys, under the calm, calculating +deportment of the Professor, had done much to make them self-reliant. +George, the elder, was of an exceedingly inquisitive turn of mind; he +was a theorist, and tried to find out the reason for everything. On the +other hand, Harry was practical in all his efforts; he could take the +knowledge obtained and profit by it, as the previous volumes show. It +was fortunate, therefore, as the Professor put it, that theory and +practice were personified in the two boys, who, although companionable, +were the exact opposites as types. + +The Professor never showed a preference, in any manner, for either. Like +the true philosopher he saw the value of the two distinct qualities, the +one useless without the other. + +When they had fully recovered from their astonishment, George was the +first to speak. "They may have broken the fastenings." + +The Professor, who had been intently examining the tree to which they +were hitched, said: "I can find no evidence of any undue wrench which +might show that they had gotten away by their own exertions. Let us see +whether we can follow the trail." + +The ground was covered with leaves, so that no earth was visible, and +the only sort of trail left in a forest, under those conditions, is the +slightly depressed tracks which the wheels make. They examined this, +noting also the overturned leaves, which are usually left in the wake of +cattle. + +The latter means seemed to be the only available way in which any trace +could be made out, and this they followed. It led directly to the west, +and toward the section they were desirous of exploring at the time the +present trip was inaugurated. + +"How fast do you suppose the team is traveling?" + +"Certainly not faster than we are now going. They cannot be hurried very +well, as you know, and we should be able to overtake them within an hour +or two." + +"But what shall we do if we find them in charge of somebody?" + +That suggestion brought up at once a very serious question. They had +made six pistols, very crude, it is true, but which served admirably as +weapons of defense; but the hazardous part of the present situation was +that only the Professor had one of the pistols, the others having been +left with the team. The only thing which added some comfort was the +knowledge that as the pistols required a special hook to enable them to +cock the firing plug, and as the Professor had this hook, those who took +the team might not be able to use the weapons against them. + +At this place it might be well to refer to Red Angel. Nearly nine months +before, on one of their trips, a baby orang-outan had been captured, and +the boys educated him, as best they could, and he really developed many +reasonable instincts. It was Red Angel who left the wagon and followed +them down the river, and who by his peculiar actions attracted attention +to their missing team. + +"We owe something to Angel for his cuteness in coming for us," said +Harry. + +The orang progressed rapidly, swinging, as he did, from tree to tree on +the route, and when no trees were in sight, would shamble along in a +peculiar way, as it is difficult for them to walk erect. Their feet are +not adapted to promote a graceful gait. + +"The track seems to be lost," said the Professor. "I cannot make it out, +either from the leaves or the depression. However, it appears best to +follow this course." + +Without stopping they proceeded in the same general direction. Red +Angel, who up to this time had followed the route taken by the party, +now turned to the right, and when George called, refused to return. As +George walked toward him, he kept advancing to the right, and could not +be induced to come back. + +"Probably we should follow him," was the Professor's conclusion. + +It was evident from Angel's antics that the change in the course +delighted him. + +George, who was ahead, soon stopped, and shouted back, gleefully. "Here +are the tracks! Good fellow, come here!" + +Angel understood this. He had actually sensed the direction taken by the +missing team, for here were the tracks. The only thing that grieved +George was the absence of the honey pot. Angel's weakness was honey, and +that was now with the team. + +Suddenly Angel, who was now in one of the large trees which grew all +along the course, began an excitable chatter, and vigorously jumped from +one limb to the next, and George, who knew his antics pretty well by +this time, stopped and prepared himself for some new and unexpected +development in this remarkable journey. Angel, on the other hand, +started off through the trees with wonderful agility, and it was all the +boys could do to follow. + +There, ahead of them, was the wagon perched against a tree, one of the +front wheels and an axle broken, and the tongue wrenched off; but the +yaks had disappeared. It is singular that the team had gone thus far +without meeting an obstruction. As it was, one wheel had locked with a +tree, and the yaks, by their tremendous power, had broken the parts +mentioned and gone on. + +Before the wagon was reached, however, numbers of articles were found +scattered along the trail, which were gathered up. + +The finding of the wagon was an intense relief. Their minds had been +perturbed with this occurrence, as never before, and they had met +numerous thrilling episodes before. + +"Something must have frightened the yaks, and they were going at a much +greater speed than at a walk when they collided with the tree," observed +the Professor. + +"Why do you think so?" asked Harry. + +"In the first place, the fact that our articles were scattered along the +path before they reached the tree; and, secondly, the wagon pole and the +wheel were strong enough to hold the yaks against the tree if they had +been moving along at their usual gait." + +"Well, I am thankful that we have the wagon, even though the yaks are +gone," said George, as he crawled into it. He peered out and continued +in a surprised tone: "Where do you suppose the pistols are? Did you +leave yours in the box, Harry?" + +"Yes; on the right side. Yours were there at the time. I saw all of +them." + +"They are not here now, and it is likely they have been lost with some +of the other things." Harry was up in an instant. + +"Where is the ammunition?" + +"It was all in the bottom of the box." + +It did not seem at all likely that the pistols or the ammunition could +fall out of the box. It is true other things had fallen along the way, +but this seemed to be such an unlikely occurrence that they could +scarcely credit it. + +The provisions were safe, and you may be sure that Angel was not only +petted, but he received a good share of the delicious sweet. + +It was now nearing night, and they were fully ten miles from home. Ten +miles is not a long tramp, but to travelers like ours, already weary +with their trudging and with the excitements of the day, it was +concluded to camp in the wagon for the night, and then proceed home +early in the morning. To take the wagon would be an impossibility. + +They really learned to love the patient yaks. For fully five months they +had been daily companions, and were now so well trained that some +discouragement was felt at being compelled again to break in others. +They had an ample supply of good material in the herd to pick from, but +it took time and patience to develop such a team as had been lost. + +During the entire night one of the trio kept watch, not so much from a +feeling of fear as in the hope the yaks would return during the night; +but they were doomed to disappointment. Morning came, but the yaks did +not, and after gathering together the most useful belongings, and +putting them into convenient bundles for carrying purposes, set out for +home. + +The first question taken up by the boys after their return was the +selection of a pair of young steers for the new team; and the work of +making a new pair of yokes was carried forward with energy. They were in +the midst of the planting season which had been interrupted when the +last journey was undertaken. + +Hitherto it had been the custom to devote at least one day each week to +hunting, on which occasions they also made trips to such points in the +island as had not been previously visited; and it was also a part of +their duty to examine the woods and the fields to find new specimens of +plants, fruits and flowers; and among the hills and ravines were many +kinds of ore, some of which they had been fortunate enough to find on +their entry to the island. + +The metals thus found were utilized, because they had set up a workshop +alongside the sawmill, and in it had a crude lathe adapted to work in +wood or iron. It will thus be seen that each tour was for prospecting +purposes, to supply their needs, as well as to learn what the island +contained. + +Each evening it was the habit to have a general discussion concerning +the events of the day, or with reference to matters of moment about the +work to be done on the morrow. + +George was much interested in the planting program. "What kinds of +vegetable would it be most advisable to plant in the space we have +prepared?" + +"One of the important points to consider in the planting of all crops is +whether the soil is adapted for it. When the United States were first +settled it was a surprising thing that many of the original settlers +would go miles inland, exposed to every sort of danger, to find land, +when there was plenty nearer the seashore or close to civilization. +There was a reason for that which we are only now beginning fully to +understand. Plants have a habit of growing in soil adapted for their +needs, and it would be an interesting study in going over our island to +consider the habits of plants in this respect." + +"Is that the reason why different countries have such different kinds of +plants?" + +"Yes; plants select their soil, and owing to these habits, every variety +of soil, in every climate, supports its own vegetable tribes. Of the +five thousand flowering plants of central Europe, only three hundred +grow on peaty soils, and those are mainly rushes and sedges. In the +native forests of northern Europe and America, the unlettered explorer +hails with joy the broad-leaved trees glittering in the sun among the +pines, as a symptom of good land, which he knows how to cultivate. The +rudest peasant in Europe knows that wheat and beans seek clay soils; the +northern German knows that rye alone and the potato are best adapted for +the blowing sands of that country; the Chinese peasant, that the warm +sloping banks of light land are fitted for the tea plant, and stiff, +wet, impervious flooded clays for his rice. Even the slaves in the +Southern States were aware that open alluvial lands were best suited to +cotton; and the degraded slaves of Pernambuco know that the cocoa grows +only on the sandy soils of the coast, just the same as in west Africa +the oil palms flourish on the moist sea sand that skirts the shore, and +the mangroves where muddy shallows are daily deserted by the retiring +tide." + +"Some time ago you stated in one of our talks that soil was the +necessary thing to select in order to propagate, or make good fruit and +grain out of the poor or wild kind. Were all our vegetables and grains +originally wild?" + +"Originally nothing in the way of fruit, flower, grain or garden +vegetables was anything but wild and unproductive, or bitter, tasteless +or unprofitable. Chemical changes are made in the plant by the soil in +which it grows, because it is from the soil that it gets its food. The +large and juicy carrot found at home is nothing but the woody spindle of +the wild carrot, and I have found several species of it here. Cabbages, +cauliflowers, Brussels sprouts and a host of other like vegetables were, +in their natural state, poor, woody, bitter stems, and had useless +roots. As I have already stated, the wild potato, which we are now +cultivating, has, in its original state, a bitter root, as you have +discovered." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT + + +Early the following morning Harry sprang out of bed and hurriedly +shouted: "What did we do with the lifeboat in South River? Do you +remember whether we secured it when Angel came up and let us know about +the team?" + +The Professor and George were up in an instant. George was the first to +answer. "I left it the moment Angel came up." + +"I cannot remember," said the Professor, slowly, "but it seems to me, +now that I think of it, we left it on the banks, and it wouldn't do to +leave it there. You must go for it at once, and bring it down to the +bay, even though you cannot bring it around the cliffs." + +A hurried breakfast was prepared and the boys started off at an eager +pace for the river. They went directly southwest, aiming to strike the +river near the falls, and after passing over familiar ground, came +within several miles of it, when, in going down one of the sloping +descents, saw, in the distance, what appeared to be portion of the yoke +which the yaks carried. + +They hurried forward, and great was the delight at finding it was really +one of those they had made and used for months. It was a gratification +to know that the animals were east of the falls, and, probably, sooner +or later, would turn up at their home. Only one of the yokes was found, +but there was evidence that both of the yaks were freed, since the part +of the other yoke was still attached to the part found. + +The boys were glad of this, as they had such a friendly feeling for the +animals that they could not but feel that to be yoked together in the +forest would be a cruelty to them. + +"The Professor will be glad to know this," said George. "Look at this +part of the yoke, where it has been broken. I have no doubt that this is +where they struck the tree where the wagon caught." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 1. THE BROKEN YOKE_] + +"Let us take it with us, by all means," said Harry. An examination of +the yoke plainly showed where it had come in contact with bark with +considerable force. "What do you suppose caused them to be so frightened +as to run away?" + +They quickened their steps, and soon reached the river. There, on the +shore, was the lifeboat, as they had left it, and it was the work of +minutes only to set it adrift, and after depositing the yoke in the +bottom, the first task was to supply themselves with a pair of oars. + +The first article turned out in the way of tools was a bolo, a heavy +cleaver-like blade, used by many primitive tribes. This article was +duplicated by them, and always carried on all their expeditions. With +this several small trees were cut down, and a pair of oars fashioned for +each, and within an hour they were on their way down the stream, and in +two hours more had rounded the point of projecting land east of the +river mouth. + +"Don't let us take any more chances of losing this boat. I am in favor +of taking it around, and am willing to risk the tide, whatever it may +be." + +Harry's suggestion met with favor on the part of George, and when the +point was rounded and they were out in the ocean, the tide, although +coming in, had no terrors for them, but they boldly plied the oars, and +before four o'clock had rounded the cliff point, and steered the craft +into the mouth of Cataract River. + +The Cataract was a much smaller stream than South River, and it was on +the northern side of the island; whereas South River was on the +southerly side of the island. Less than a quarter of a mile from the +open sea was a cataract, at which their home was located, and the +cataract was utilized as the means for producing water power. + +Their appearance below the Cataract was hailed with delight by the +Professor, and you may be sure that when the boat was finally landed and +hauled up on the beach, all of them joined in the congratulations, which +was their due. + +"Just to think of it. If we had the boat we made, our lifeboat and all +the parts of the wreck of the other boat, we would have a pretty +respectable navy," was Harry's observation, when they landed. As it was, +they now had the wrecked after part of their own lifeboat, and here was +the other lying alongside. They knew the history of one of them. Would +they soon know why the other should have been found in the interior of +the island under such peculiar circumstances? + +"And where did you get the yoke?" asked the Professor, as his eye caught +sight of it. + +"Two miles this side of the falls." + +They little knew at this time what an important bearing the finding of +this boat would have on their future course, nor could they know how +this little incident would be of the greatest value to some of their +companions on the ill-fated ship. + +They now had possession of a boat which, while it was practically +unsinkable, was not of such size as to meet their demands for the +intended explorations. They felt that to attempt to circumnavigate the +island and take all the chances which a meeting with natives might +involve, would necessitate a much larger vessel. To add to the +difficulty, all the pistols but one had been lost in the last trip, and +to attempt to make explorations without proper weapons would be +foolhardy. If they knew one thing, with any degree of certainty, it was +that the island contained savages of some description, and provision +must be made for every contingency. + +Harry took upon himself the task of turning out more of the weapons, and +with the experience of the past four months in this line of work, +concluded he would attempt a better job than simply making pistols. It +was his ambition to make a firearm that would enable them to bag the +largest game, and also, at the same time, carry the bullets a greater +distance than the short eight-inch barrels could. + +To do this it was necessary to provide longer bits, and as the design of +the new guns contemplated a barrel at least eighteen inches long, the +bits had to be longer, in proportion, and the making of these consumed +nearly as much time as the actual drilling out of the barrels. + +George and the Professor put in a great deal of time with the new team. +Their knowledge of training, in view of the former experience with these +animals, was such that within a week they could drive the yaks without +much difficulty, although the new team was not by any manner of means as +efficient as the lost one. + +When the question of the kind of material for the guns came up, Harry +was much concerned, as in making the barrels that length would +necessarily greatly increase the weight. + +"I think it would be better to make an alloy for your purposes," said +the Professor, as they were discussing the matter. + +"What is an alloy?" + +"It is the combination of two or more metals." + +"In what way does the alloy make it better than the hardest steel?" + +"It is not hardness you want, but toughness. Metals have several +properties, which are utilized for various purposes in the arts. +Surprising as it may seem, wood has greater resisting power than +diamond, and yet the precious stone is the hardest of all substances." + +"But if we unite two metals are we not then making a new metal?" + +"Not necessarily so. In the case of brass it is true. This is made by +uniting two parts of copper and one of zinc. Both copper and zinc in +themselves are very soft, and copper cannot well be polished in its pure +state. Brass, however, is not only much harder, but is susceptible of a +very fine polish." + +"Are the alloys of all metals harder than the metals of which they are +made?" + +"This seems to be a universal law in the compounding of metals. Very few +metals are used alone in the various arts and manufactures. For every +purpose some combination has been found which makes the product better. +Even coins are so alloyed. Silver and gold in the form of money would be +entirely too soft, unless alloyed with some hardening metal. Some +substances, like arsenic, antimony and bismuth, are too brittle to be +used alone. The only metals which can be used alone are aluminum, zinc, +iron, tin, copper, lead, mercury, silver, gold and platinum." + +"What is bronze, of which all the ancient guns were made?" + +"That is a combination of copper and tin. This product was known fully +seven hundred years before the Christian era, and was used in the making +of guns until superseded by the various steel alloys of our day." + +"In what proportions are copper and tin united to make bronze?" + +"The proportions vary greatly. Ancient Celtic bronze had 12 parts tin +and 88 of copper; Egyptian, 22 tin, 78 copper; Chinese, 20 tin, 80 +copper; Roman, 15 tin, 85 copper; and in many specimens lead and zinc +were also used. Tin has a capacity to harden almost any metal." + +"What is the best metal to harden steel?" + +"Manganese, of which you will remember we have some samples; it is the +most serviceable, as we have neither nickel nor chromium." + +"What amount of that metal should we use to get the best results?" + +"About 14 per cent. of manganese has been found the best for such +purposes as would be required in gun barrels. There is a curious thing +which has been discovered in uniting manganese with steel. It becomes +fairly tough if 1 per cent. is used with the steel; if the quantity +added is between 1-1/4 and 3-1/2 the strength and ductility decrease; +but above that, up to 5 per cent., the steel becomes brittle; above +6-1/2 per cent. it again returns to ductility and toughness and its +maximum strength is found at 14 per cent." + +During the evenings all took a hand at cutting out the stocks for the +guns, and the plans upon which they were constructed will be fully +explained and illustrated in the order of the work done. + +Meanwhile it must not be supposed that work on the new boat had ceased. +Harry's plan, when fully worked out, provided for one twenty feet long +and six and a half feet wide amidships. + +The drawing (Fig. 2) shows the construction of the hull. As they had no +means for doing any fancy bending of the boards, the bottom was made +flat, and the sides sloping. The bottom and the sides were made in the +following manner: Two stringers (A, A) were first constructed, which +were made up of thin pieces nailed together, so they could be bent in +the proper shape for the bottom boards, which were laid crosswise and +nailed to these stringers. + +[Illustration: _Fig 2. TOP VIEW OF BOAT_] + +[Illustration: _Fig 3. SIDE VIEW_] + +For the upper edges of the sides, called the gunwale (B, B), similar +stringers were provided, but they extended farther fore and aft, and +amidships were fully six and a half feet apart, whereas the lower +stringers amidships were four and a half feet apart. This arrangement, +therefore, provided for sloping sides, and the side pieces ran up and +down on the inner course. It will be understood that the sides and +bottom thus formed were to be overlaid with thin boards running fore and +aft, as in Fig. 2, as they had no means for matching the boards and thus +putting them together tightly. + +The sides were two and a half feet high. Six and a half feet from the +forward end was a cross beam (C), into which the mast was to be stepped. +At the stern the bottom was sloping upwardly at an angle and brackets +(D) were extended back and joined at their rear ends, to which the lower +end of the rudder post was attached. + +Amidships a keel (E) was formed, projecting down from the bottom, this +keel being, at its widest part, two feet, and tapering down to merge +with the bottom, fore and aft. The cross section (Fig. 4) shows how well +he had formed the vessel, proportionally. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Cross Section._] + +In addition to the cross seats, similar arrangements for comfort were +made along the sides, and beneath the side seats were spaces in which +their supplies were to be placed. The space forward of the mast was +entirely closed over with a roof which sloped in both directions, and +here provision was made for two berths. This would also afford them +protection and serve as a means to keep out the water and insure at +least one dry spot for their comfort. + +As usual, George had some inquiries to make about the boat. "It has +always been a matter of wonder why all boats are made with the big +bulging part nearest the forward end?" + +The Professor's eyes twinkled. "Probably there are a great many others +who have had such thoughts. There is really no reason for it. It is not +known how the custom originated, except that in sailing vessels the +claim is that the ship can be maneuvered more easily by such +construction." + +"In what way does it make it easier to handle?" + +"When a ship is driven forward by the wind, all the force exerted on the +sails is transferred to the forward part of the ship, hence if made +narrow at its forward end it would be driven down into the water, and +the hull would, therefore, be submerged more at the forward than at the +rear end. Furthermore, by having a tapering rear end, the rudder has a +better opportunity of veering the ship around and you can see that the +bulging part, being located forward of the middle portion of the ship, +acts as a sort of pivot." + +"But it seems to me that none of the reasons given will apply to a +steamship, and still all the ships I have seen are made in the same way +as the sailing vessels." + +"That is exactly what I inferred in my answer to your first question. +The truth is, that in experiments which have been made, it is shown that +to have the widest part of a steamer near the stern, gives lines to a +hull which has less resistance than if made in the conventional way." + +"I thought probably the reason for making them so was just the same as +in the case of an arrow, where the heaviest part is at the forward end." + +"In that case an entirely different principle is involved. A body falls, +or is projected through the air, with its heaviest end foremost, because +of the greater momentum in that portion." + +"It is the force of a body in motion. When a body is projected through +the air it meets with the resistance of the atmosphere, and this also +serves to turn the heavy side around to the forward end, because the +force of momentum in the heavy end is much less affected by the +resistance of the air than the lighter end." (See Fig. 5.) + +[Illustration: _Fig. 5._] + +Red Angel had now been with them more than six months, and he was +probably a year old. When first captured he was a scrawny infant, dull +and stupid, like all of his class. He had wonderful powers in the way of +imitating habits and customs. The boys were very good vocalists, and +while at work Harry would sing, but George whistled. It was an amusing +sight to watch Red Angel when the boys engaged in the frequent concerts +at night. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 6. Red Angel._] + +But of all the screamingly funny exhibitions, the attempt of Angel to +imitate whistling was the most ludicrous. The orang's lips project too +much to a point, and the jaws are so narrowed that the lips will not +pucker. Whenever the boys commenced their concert Angel would be on +hand, and enjoyed every moment of the time, and the boys had many a +concert purely for his benefit. + +At the end of each concert the whistling would begin. This invariably +brought Angel to the front, and his exhibitions would be given with the +utmost gravity and earnestness. The invariable result would be such +uproarious fits of laughter on the part of all that he would take part +in the jollification, little suspecting that the laughter was at his +expense. + +The only sound which he could emit during these performances sounded +like a high-pitched stick rattling along a pale fence; but he was +inordinately proud of it. It had always been on one key, heretofore, and +without variation; but this evening Angel startled himself, as he did +the others, by actually sounding two additional notes. He repeated this +over and over. + +"I wonder if we could make him talk?" asked George, after the laughter +had subsided. + +"There is no reason why some tones cannot be imitated. As the orang +possesses wonderful powers of imitation and has, in captivity, developed +many traits, I see no reason why simple words, or sounds, cannot be +taught." + +"I know there are words which he does understand. Time and again I have +told him things, which he seems to understand. Now see if he understands +this: 'Angel, do you want some honey?'" + +His attempts at whistling ceased, and in a moment more was in the +kitchen. Harry, who by this time had recovered from his mirth, thought +it would be a good idea to attempt to teach him. + +"If canary birds and dogs can understand language, I do not see why +Angel shouldn't." + +"Unquestionably, any animal, by patience, will learn the meaning of +sounds. Constant repetition of certain notes causes birds to repeat +them. I have known dogs to perform almost anything they were told to do, +although they are not able to utter a single sound of the words emitted +in giving the command." + +"Well, what is it that causes sound?" + +"The most wonderful thing in nature is, that she manifests herself in +only one way, namely, by a movement, or a motion of some kind. Vibration +is the term used to designate this. Sound, light, heat, taste, smell, +and everything which becomes sensible to us is produced by vibration. +The movements of the heavenly bodies, swinging back and forth around the +sun, like huge pendulums, the movement of the sap in trees, up and down, +the beating of the heart, the winking eyelids are all motions which show +energy, development, life." + +"But what is it that makes us understand one sound from the others?" + +"Simply the difference in the kind of vibration. There are three things +which characterize sounds; namely, pitch, intensity and character. Pitch +depends on the rapidity of the vibrations; intensity on the extent or +the amplitude of the vibrations; and character on the substance or +instrument producing them. To illustrate: When you sing a very high note +the vibrations may be five thousand vibrations a second, or there may be +only two thousand during that time. That represents the pitch. In +singing that note you may sing it so loud that, like a pendulum, it will +swing way over to one side, or it may move only a short distance. That +represents intensity. If either you or George had sung that note I +should have been able to detect it, whatever its pitch or intensity, +because your voices are as unlike as different musical instruments, and +that is character, or timbre, as the French call it." + + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE HIDDEN MESSAGE + + +While the work of getting out the planking for the boat was going on, +and the plowing had now been resumed, since the new yoke of oxen were +fitted to do the work, the boys were not forgetful of the usual weekly +outing. They had several quite important things right at home which +needed looking into, if they wanted to solve some of the things on the +island. First, the cave, which they had twice attempted to explore; the +search for their lost boat, which had the strange rope and oars; and the +mystery of the flag and pole. + +These things weighed heavily on their minds, because these happenings +were close at hand. But what made the greatest impression on the minds +of all was the finding of the _Investigator's_ lifeboat. It seemed +almost like a call to them from the interior. The impatience of the boys +was almost beyond restraint, at times. + +"It does seem to me that we should not delay an hour in making some +effort to explore the direction the boat came from," was George's view +of the situation as they canvassed the subject. + +"That is my idea, also, and I am not in favor of giving much more time +to hunting or other forms of recreation until we know how that boat came +to South River." + +"Yes; I can appreciate how anxious you are," said the Professor, after +the boys had given their views. "What we are doing, however, is +essential from every point of view. We must prepare provisions, so that +we shall be able to know where we can get them in case of need. On the +other hand, weapons are necessary, which take time to construct. If, +however, it is thought advisable, we might make a trip of explorations +along the South River, beyond the falls, the time to be limited to a +week; but I have my doubts of the wisdom of such a course." + +This suggestion appealed strongly to the boys, who were always keen for +anything which savored of adventure, and it was some time before the +boys could reconcile themselves to the saner and more business-like +course of completing the boat and making the trip by water. + +The weather was beautiful, and vegetation was springing up in abundant +profusion everywhere. Magnificent showers fell at intervals, and the +rainbows, more beautiful than any they had ever heretofore seen, spanned +the heavens after the showers. + +This had been noticed during the previous year, but now, after nine +months of their life, with the wonderful insight which their needs had +instilled into them, made them very observant of every phenomenon. + +"I have often wondered," observed George, as he gazed at the beautiful +broad band which formed a crescent across the heavens, "why there are +never any rainbows in the middle of the day. They are never seen except +in the morning or in the evening, and usually only in the evening." + +"In order to understand that it will be necessary to explain what a +rainbow is. As I stated previously, light is merely vibration. Now +colors are formed by the different lengths of the vibrations, just the +same as the different musical notes are made by the different vibratory +lengths. To understand this more fully, I make a sketch (Fig. 7), which +shows just what I mean. You will see that red is the lowest musical +pitch, which we will call C, and to the right is a long, wavy line. D, +the next pitch higher, might resemble orange, with the wavy line a +little shorter, and so on, until we reach the highest note in the scale, +where the wave lengths are very short. You have probably noticed that a +drop of water in the sunshine glistens, and, if closely observed, may +have seen that it was colored, particularly blue or green. As the rays +of the sun strike the globe of water, they produce different wave +lengths, and in that way make it appear to you as being possessed of +colors. Now, a rainbow is nothing more nor less than sunlight passing +through the drops of water which are suspended in the air and causing a +refraction of the light. At noon the sun shines down from overhead, and +we are not in the proper position to see this refracted light; but in +the morning or in the evening the sun shines against the earth at an +angle. At those times we are able to see the effect of refraction by the +colors produced. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 7. THE COLOR SPECTRUM_] + +[Illustration: _Fig. 8. REFLECTION ANGLE_] + +"When you throw a ball against a wall at an angle, it bounds away at the +same angle. That is reflection, and is just exactly what light does when +a ray strikes a mirror. If, on the other hand, the glass had no mercury +on it to reflect the light, the ray would not go straight through, but +would bend, just as you have seen a stick in a glass of water appearing +as though it was bent below the water line. That is refraction." + +Two weeks of very vigorous work had now been put in since the yaks had +disappeared, and the wagon was still at the edge of the forest. George +was anxious to recover it, with the new team, and with Harry started out +early in the morning to make up as much as possible lost time, as every +hour was considered valuable in their enterprises. + +The yaks could be ridden as well as horses, but the greater part of the +way were driven. One of the guns which had been completed was taken +along, as well as the only pistol which the Professor had saved. In less +than three hours the forest was reached and they were soon within sight +of the wagon. + +"What have we there?" cried Harry, as they neared the spot. + +"Our yaks! And where do you suppose they have been?" + +Close by the wagon were the yaks, as though patiently waiting for the +boys. They made no resistance, nor show of fright, when the boys +approached. One of them, Jack, still had the strap tied to the horns, +and it was the halter which had been attached to the tree at South +River. + +A hasty examination was made, but if either of the boys came to any +conclusion concerning it, nothing was said. Without wasting time, the +team brought with them was yoked up and the broken wheel replaced by a +new one. The repairs to the wagon tongue did not take long, and they +were ready for the return. + +"What shall we do with Jack and Jill?" Those were the names bestowed on +the first team. "Let us see if they will follow us." + +They had gone fully one hundred feet before the yaks made any sign, and +then slowly followed, thus assuring them that no care or attention would +be required in that direction. Both boys were intensely delighted at the +recovery of their favorites and could not get home fast enough to give +the Professor the good news. + +Nearing home, the Professor, who was on the watch, came out to meet +them, waving his hat at the sight of Jack and Jill. When the latter came +up he went over and affectionately petted the creatures, who seemed to +realize the welcome. + +"I hope they are as glad as we are; I can understand why they got away; +look at the end of this thong." It plainly showed the teeth of some +animal which had gnawed the leather of which it was made. + +"So you have been out prospecting, too?" was Harry's query, as he saw +the queer-looking reeds on the table in the laboratory that evening. +"What do you call that?" + +"Our honey has been getting low, and I took the occasion to-day to bring +in some samples of sugar." + +"Is that sugar cane?" + +"Yes; the true sugar cane." + +"Is that different from sorghum?" + +"This is the species which grows in the southern part of the United +States. The kind you know and which is cultivated in the Northern +States, is the Chinese Sorgo, or, as we call it, sorghum. It is equal in +quality and in quantity to the southern species and is readily treated +to produce molasses or sugar." + +"What is that peculiar flower, if it is a flower? I never saw a flower +like that; it seems to be hard." + +"I was surprised to find this. It is called the Tamarisk. This long, +oval-shaped part is made by an insect which inhabits the plant, and is +eaten by the inhabitants in the plains east of the Mediterranean Sea. It +is there called Mount Sinai Manna, and is supposed to be the Manna which +the Jews found when they were in the Wilderness after the Exodus." + +"I think we have properly named this place Wonder Island." + +In the volume preceding this, when they first considered the building of +a new boat, it was decided to graft an extension to the after part of +their wrecked lifeboat; but when the second one was found, and +calculations were made as to its usefulness, it was discovered that such +a course would not be wise; hence the larger vessel was found to be the +only solution. + +The newly discovered boat was, however, a valuable addition, as it +afforded a means by which short trips could be made, and Harry quietly +set to work making a sail and rigging up a mast, so that the +long-cherished desire to make these trips could be undertaken before +they were ready to launch the real vessel. It was hauled up on shore and +caulked and new parts added to make it adaptable for the purpose. + +While engaged at this work he removed the cross seat which still +remained, and in doing so was surprised to find a piece of cardboard +which had been hidden, apparently, at the end of the board. Eagerly +picking it up, he saw writing on it, with the following words: "We +cannot hold out much longer. Wright and Walters were captured yesterday. +WILL." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 9. THE HIDDEN MESSAGE_] + +Harry could hardly contain himself, as he rushed up to the laboratory, +crying out: "George, come here, quickly! I have found something!" +Without waiting to see whether George heard, he rushed into the +Professor's den with the paper in his outstretched hand. "Look at this; +don't you remember Will Sayers? I am sure it is Will." + +George heard his excited voice, and appeared without any delay. + +"What is it now?" + +The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George. +"Did you know either of the boys mentioned in this?" + +Neither had any recollection of Wright or Walters, but they inferred +that the writer must be Will Sayers, one of the companions. The +Professor had no recollection of the boy, nor could he remember the +other names. + +"Let us examine every part of the boat," was the Professor's first +suggestion. "We may find something more to give some clue." + +The boys rushed down to the beach where the boat was moored, the +Professor following. + +"Show us the exact location of this strip." + +"I had just taken off this cross seat, and as I did so this piece fell +from the end." + +"Let us put it back again and see how it fits into that place." + +When it was replaced they noticed that a crack was left at each end of +the seat, not exceeding an eighth of an inch. + +"It is very plain that the piece you found was at this end, and if it +was folded as this crease indicates, it could have been concealed there +and thus escaped our observation." After some minutes' examination, he +continued: "This piece must have been there for some time." + +"Why do you think so?" + +"You will notice that the end of the board has the marks of the folded +paper, showing it must have been in its place of concealment for some +time. Furthermore, the paper itself indicates that it has been there for +some time, by the discoloration on its outer side." + +"How long do you think it may have been there?" + +"It is impossible to say; but certainly for several months." + +"Doesn't it seem reasonable," Harry inquired, "to think it was some one +from the _Investigator_? Otherwise, how is it that they had possession +of the boat?" + +"That is the problem we shall now have to find out." + +Thus, in another direction, was found an evidence that savages were on +the island and that others had been wrecked and found a refuge there. +How much of a refuge it was to them they had no means of knowing. They +were thankful their own lives had been preserved and had been permitted +to accomplish so much during their enforced stay. + +"We are now vigorous and strong and have been blessed with energy as +well as health. It is our first duty to take up the task of finding our +comrades, whatever the cost may be. If that is your view, we should +proceed with that determination, but let us prepare for it in the best +manner possible. How long will it take to finish the six guns you are +now at?" said the Professor, looking at Harry. + +"I will try to have them ready within another week," was his reply. + +"In the meantime, George and I will prepare a new lot of powder; and for +your further information, I will state that I have been busy during the +past week in making preparations to extract some lead for bullets." + +This announcement was hailed with joy. Heretofore they had to depend on +the iron slugs which had been turned out, and they were not at all +satisfactory, because they lacked the proper weight. + +"Which is the lead?" asked George, who was examining the samples. + +"It is this bluish-gray sample of galena, which, as you see, looks like +lead itself, and is often mistaken for it; but it is far from being lead +of the kind we can work." + +"Why not?" + +"Because it is in what is called a sulphide form. Do you remember what a +sulphide is?" + +"Yes; it is where it is in combination with something." + +"That is a fairly good definition. More or less sulphur is found in all +metals, but when found in large quantities the ore is called a +sulphide." + +"How can we get rid of the sulphur?" + +"We can cook it and drive it off like steam. Lead melts at a low +temperature, comparatively, about 600 degrees Fahrenheit, so that with +our furnaces it will be a very easy matter to get a pure lead." + +During the rest of the day all were in the laboratory, superintending +the preparation for the work, and at the Professor's suggestion the boys +took the team in the morning and brought in over a hundred pounds of +galena to be treated. + +Before noon they had forty pounds of a very fine quality lead, and the +work of making molds for the bullets was begun. The Professor, however, +suggested that the boys should devote their time to the construction of +the boat and guns, and it was difficult to decide what was the proper +thing to do first. + +The Professor saw the dilemma and had a very earnest conference on the +subject. + +"You must not, by any means, be carried away with undue eagerness and a +desire for haste. The first essential of good business is to do +everything in order. It is better to plan carefully every step in +advance, so that you will know just when your energies will be required +for the next step. An eminent engineer, on one occasion, in answer to a +question as to why he was always prepared for an emergency, laid down +this rule: Whenever you have a problem to solve, work it out in more +ways than one. If one fails, you can apply the other immediately. +This can be done without a moment's delay. Therein lies the +answer--preparedness." + +The boys readily saw the force of the lesson. From that time on it was +not necessary to direct the order of events. Each saw to it that the +part allotted to him was carried out in a determined spirit. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS + + +Of the two most urgent articles, namely, weapons or the boat, it was +decided that the guns should be completed first. The feeling that the +time would come when a visit from the savages might be expected at their +home, contributed to this decision. + +Six barrels, each eighteen inches long, and with a bore three-eighths of +an inch in diameter, had been turned out, and several of the stocks had +been made at odd times during the evenings. As Harry had sufficient +steel left for four barrels more, two days were devoted to boring them +out, in the hope that they would ultimately be able to finish them up. +They would then have a battery of ten guns, and the necessity of having +a number arose from the fact that they were muzzle-loaders, and could +not be reloaded rapidly. + +A sketch of the gun with the firing mechanism is furnished, in which it +will be seen that the firing plug travels in a bore formed through the +stock; in a line with the barrel. This plug had an upwardly extending +finger, so it could be drawn back against the resistance of the spring. +Below the plug was a trigger, with a hook-shaped forward end, in such a +position that when the plug was drawn back the hook would catch and hold +the plug until the lower right-angled projection of the trigger was +pulled back. This would release the plug, and the spring would then be +driven forward and explode the cap. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 10. THE FIRST GUN_] + +"It would be well," said the Professor, "to polish the inside of the +bored barrels, and thus make a much better weapon." + +"How can we do this?" asked Harry. + +"There are several ways, but the better plan would be to take a good +polishing material, in the form of a fine sand or grit, and mix it with +oil. This can then be put on a wiper which will snugly fit the bore, and +the barrel may then be put in the lathe and rotated at a high rate of +speed with the wiper in the bore, and during the rotation the wiper is +drawn in and out. This operation should be continued for an hour at +least, frequently withdrawing it to add more of the polishing grit." + +"What is the best grit to use?" + +"If we can find a sample of the adamantine spar, in sufficient +quantities, it would be the best substance." + +"What kind of material is that?" + +"It is a substance known as corundum." + +"Is that the same as emery?" + +"What is known as emery is the more or less impure product from the same +source. I think I have stated heretofore that both of these products +come from the precious gems; the blue variety is known under the name of +sapphire; the red as ruby; the yellow as oriental topaz, and the violet +as oriental amethyst." + +During that and the following day the Professor spent some time in +prospecting for the gems, but if he succeeded in finding any samples he +did not make the discovery known. + +A few days after this Harry announced that he was ready to lay the keel +of the new boat. All the material had been prepared, and was at the +beach. Prior to this the island had been visited by a heavy storm. They +had been frequent within the past month, but this was not considered +unusual. + +The Professor insisted that a temporary shed should be erected to cover +the material, as moisture would make it very undesirable for the vessel, +and a day was occupied in putting up the structure. + +An entire week thus passed, every hour of which was devoted with the +utmost diligence to the various enterprises. The keel was laid and the +work of putting on the bottom boards was progressing rapidly. One night, +a few days after the laying of the keel, a brisk wind sprang up, which +continued during the night, increasing in fury, and in the morning +evidences were seen on all sides of the effect of the tempest. + +"It seems very singular," was George's observation, "that we should have +such terrible winds here." + +The Professor had evidently expected the storms. "Do you remember the +experience we had less than a year ago? We had five days of this on the +ocean." + +"I had forgotten that. Do they occur every year?" + +"You may have heard of the monsoons, a periodical wind in the Indian +Ocean, which is a northeast wind, and they blow with greater or less +force from November to March." + +"What causes them to blow with such regularity during those periods?" + +"Ah! that is one of the things which it has been difficult to determine. +They appear to be modifications of the trade winds. While, as stated, +the northeast winds blow during the periods mentioned, they have the +southwest monsoons, which blow from April to October. As these violent +winds are the most tempestuous during the period when the sun crosses +the equator, it has been argued that it is due to the action of the sun +being in such a position that its rays strike the earth in the center of +its rotation, thus heating up the air and causing it to rise rapidly +along the middle belt." + +"Is that what we understand by the equinoctial storms?" + +"The equinoctial storms come in March and September, when the days and +nights are of equal length." + +"I was told by a teacher that the summers are longer north of the +equator than south of it; is that true?" + +"Yes; the summer north of the equator is about seven and a half days +longer." + +"What is the cause of that?" + +"The earth is at its greatest distance from the sun during the summer +months, and the angular motion of the earth in its orbit is slower. The +result is, that the interval from the March to the September equinoxes +is greater than from September to March." + +Harry made his way through the violent wind and rain to the boat shed. +He came back with a sorry-looking countenance. "I am afraid everything +is soaked beyond recovery." He was almost on the verge of tears. + +Before noon the rain abated somewhat, but the winds still blew strongly, +and when they ventured out to take stock of their surroundings, George +was the first to notice the disappearance of the flag on Observation +Hill. Rushing in to the Professor, he cried: "Our flag is gone." + +Harry was at the boathouse, and when George went down to inform him of +the new calamity, he was almost heart-broken. The Professor, however, +was not in the least perturbed. He laughingly chided them and soon +restored the boys to their usual gay and happy demeanor. + +"Such little incidents as we have met with this morning only give us +variety. We need something of this kind to add zest to life. Just +imagine what life would be if everything turned out just as you wanted +it or willed it? You would commit suicide within a week." + +The boys smiled, but at the same time their eyelids did double duty in +the blinking line for a little while. + +George straightened himself out and looked up the hill. "Well, I am +going for that flag whether it blows or not," and he started for the +hill. Angel, who was in the loft, swung down and made his way out of the +door, and before George had gone fifty feet, was at his heels. "And you +are going, too? Good boy!" and George actually hugged Angel. He +understood. + +Arriving at the hill he made an examination, and found that the +halliards had been broken and the wind carried away the flag, halliards +and all. As the wind came from the sea, the flag must be inland +somewhere. Search was made in every direction, but to no purpose. Every +rock and lodging place was examined, but it had disappeared. Angel was +an interested searcher. He really seemed to divine George's mission. At +every bush, or rock, or other possible landing place, he would be the +first, and peer around, and look up and down, just as he had seen George +do. + +The quest kept up for over an hour, and, sadly disappointed, he returned +with the news of his failure. The Professor took the loss lightly. "I +presume it is intended that we should work out our own rescue. After +all, I think that is the proper thing to do. If we depend on others we +are sure to meet with disappointment and failure. Cheer up, boys; flag +or no flag, let us do our duty." + +"I don't mind the loss of the flag so much because it prevents us from +having a signal, but I hate to think that we lost so much good time in +making and putting it up." + +The flag alluded to was sixteen feet long, laboriously made out of ramie +fiber, which was woven, and then dyed, and it was a hard task to haul +the pole, which was over fifty feet long, from the forest ten miles +away, to say nothing of the labor required to raise it. + +As soon as the thoroughly drenched material at the boathouse could be +brought out and dried in the sun, which now came out bright and warm, +the work proceeded with renewed vigor. Late that evening the Professor +appeared at the rear of the laboratory, and called loudly to the boys. + +When they appeared at the laboratory he was laughing immoderately, and +Angel stood on one of the tables with a simian grin. + +"What is the matter? Has Angel been experimenting again?" + +Before the Professor could answer, George caught sight of the flag. + +"What! The flag! Where did you get it?" + +"Ask Angel." + +The boys laughed, and George actually hugged the animal, in his delight. +Did Angel know what he had done? Ask those delvers into the mysterious +realms of thought, what prompted him to search for and restore the flag? +Is that any more remarkable than the recorded tricks of dogs and many +other animals? + +You know just how boys can laugh when they are really happy. Angel +imitated that laugh, and he had not been taught to do it, either. It +came without teaching. + +When the Professor had wiped away some of the tears which had come from +the excess of laughter at the imitating efforts of the animal, he said: + +"Did it ever occur to you why Angel has always had a solemn look? The +facial expression seldom, if ever, changes, and they rarely ever exhibit +mirth. You may imagine the condition of those animals, living in the +forests, with enemies all about them, and the struggle for existence an +everlasting one. They have never known amusing incidents as we +understand them. Naturally, the muscles of mobility in the face, which +express pleasure, never have been exercised, and those indicating fear +and anger unduly developed. Here is Angel, in a new atmosphere, where he +sees delight depicted on the countenance, and, gifted as he is, with +wonderful powers of imitation, has learned to actually laugh, and to +enjoy the scene." + +"Well, Professor, as we have one of the guns polished up and completed, +wouldn't it be well to make the bullets?" + +"For that purpose I suggest that we make the molds out of a metal or +alloy which has a higher fusing point than lead." + +"What is best for the purpose?" + +"We might make an alloy of copper and zinc." + +"Oh! You mean brass?" + +"Yes; that is readily cast and easily worked." + +"But what shape shall we make the bullets?" + +"They should be made long, with a pointed forward end." + +"Why is a long bullet better than a round or globe-shaped ball?" + +"There are several very important reasons. First, momentum is a prime +element in a missile. A long one contains double the metal of a +spherical one. Second, it can be made so that it will expand when the +explosion of the powder takes place." + +"In what way does it expand?" + +"You have noticed that the rear end of the bullet has a cavity. When the +explosion takes place the thin shell at the rear end of the bullet +expands, so that it tightly hugs the bore of the gun." + +"What is the object of having it do that?" + +"To give the ball the benefit of the charge of powder exploded. If it +does not fit tightly in the bore, more or less of the powder will pass +the ball, and thus the ball loses part of its force." + +"What is the object of rifling the gun?" + +"The object is to impart to the bullet a spiral motion, as it moves +through the air. Metals have not the same density on all sides and this +is particularly true of molded balls. As a result, when projected from +the gun, the heaviest side has a tendency to divert the ball and make it +more or less erratic in its motion, and, therefore, inaccurate. The +spiral motion has the effect of minimizing this difficulty. The cavity +formed at the rear of the projectile was devised particularly to cause +the thin lip of the bullet to be driven into the grooves formed in the +gun barrel, and by that means the boring motion was transmitted to the +bullet." + +"But as we have no means of rifling our guns, there will be no necessity +of putting the cavity in the rear end of our bullets." + +"We must have the cavity there, by all means." + +"What for?" + +"Simply because we do not want the bullet to turn around and travel end +over end after it leaves the gun." + +"How does the cavity prevent this?" + +"You have probably forgotten that a body travels through the air with +its heaviest end foremost. When a cavity is made it is lighter at that +end. Without the cavity, if the forward end is pointed, it will, on +leaving the gun, turn around and go through the air with the blunt end +foremost." + +The molds were made, as directed, of a hard brass composition, and when +they were ready to cast them the Professor cautioned against making any +castings with the molds in any position except upright, so that any +inequality in the density of the metal would not form itself on the side +of the cast article. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 11. THE BULLET_] + +Quite a time had now elapsed since the last exploration of the cave +beyond Observation Hill. The Professor had spoken about it on several +occasions. For some reason he was intensely interested in doing that. In +fact, he appeared to be more concerned about that than any other of the +unknown things about the island. + +The boys could not understand this peculiarity. He had never been +questioned on the subject directly, but it was evident he had a reason +for this predominating wish to continue the exploration. + +George was just as much interested, but, as the sequel will show, for an +entirely different reason. Ever restless, and always willing to +undertake anything which promised to delve into hidden things, he +approached the Professor one day with the suggestion about the cave. + +"I think we ought to take one day off and go to the cave." + +The Professor was interested at once. "It will not do to attempt it +now." + +"And why not?" + +"I am afraid we could not get in very far, unless we had a boat." + +"Then why not use our lifeboat?" + +This suggestion met with instant favor. + +"True, I had forgotten about that." + +It did not take George long to reach Harry with the news that the cave +was to be explored by means of the boat. After considering the matter +for some time it was decided to put off the trip for several days at +least, principally because the late heavy rains had, in all probability, +so filled the cave that they might be stopped in their progress before +going very far. + +It should be stated that when they entered the cave the first time, +water was found about two hundred feet from its mouth and that barred +their further progress. On the second trip the water had receded, so +they could go in six hundred feet before coming to the water's edge. The +late rains may have filled the cavities, thus making progress still more +difficult. + +Harry was carrying forward the boat construction, and by the occasional +aid of George was bringing the hull to a completed state. While this was +being done, George was at work with the loom, slowly weaving out the +fabric for the sails. As the mast had been stepped back over six feet +from the prow, it was concluded to make a mainsail and a jib, a small +triangular sail which is attached to the forwardly projecting jib-boom. +The two sails would afford greater speed than a single sail, and that +was one consideration. The other was, that with two sails the mast would +not need to be so long, and the dimension of the mainsail could be +reduced, and still get the same efficiency. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 12. THE SEA-GOING BOAT_] + +The weaving of a large sail in one piece was impossible, as the loom +could turn out goods only thirty inches wide, and as it could be +operated by hand power solely, it will be seen that the sails required +not only time, but an immense amount of patience. It is no wonder that +George was anxious to take a day off at the cave, or anywhere else that +afforded a change. + +While at work Angel was his constant companion. It is remarkable what a +degree of friendship and companionship grew up between the two. In the +course of time the weaving process became so familiar to Angel that +whenever George would throw the bobbin, containing the weft, through the +opening of the woof threads, the animal stood ready to pull the heddles +forward, so as to force the last weft thread up against the one +previously threaded across. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE VOYAGE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ANGEL, AND THE DISCOVERY + + +Within the next week the boat hull was practically completed, and now +needed caulking. For this purpose the hemp, which had been found, as +previously stated, was broken up, and as much of the woody portions +removed as could be taken out, so as to make it available for filling in +the crevices between the planking. + +The mast was stepped in, and a sufficient quantity of manilla rope +twisted for the sails, and also a supply put aboard for other needs. The +sails were not yet completed, but they would doubtless be ready by the +time the other parts were. + +In one of their evening conferences George expressed his concern about +the future of Angel. + +"For my part I do not want to leave him behind." + +"Then why not take him with us?" asked the Professor. + +Harry had some doubts on this point, but George was too insistent to +brook any thought of leaving him behind. + +"I make this suggestion, George: Before the time of sailing it would be +advisable for you to make several trips with Angel in the small boat, +and see how he behaves. In some respects he would be an acquisition to +us." + +The boys had not forgotten how the animal, during their various trips, +had been of material assistance, nor the times when nutting how Angel +understood what they were after, and would climb trees and shower them +down, and then gravely help to load them into the wagon; and they +remembered the recovery of the flag. Such service was appreciated. + +As it was, Angel was invited to take a sail. The lifeboat recovered in +South River had been named No. 2, as they insisted on calling their own +wrecked vessel No. 1. + +No. 2 was launched. A small sail, had been rigged up, and two good oars +provided for it. Angel was completely at the command of George, and when +he was called and taken down to the landing in front of the boathouse, +he went without any hesitancy. But to induce him to enter the boat was +another matter. + +Suspecting there would be some difficulty, George pulled a small jar of +honey from his pocket, and silently began to eat it. Angel's eyes +blinked. It was such an unheard of thing for George to do this without +extending an invitation to join. He shambled over, but George walked to +the boat and sat down in it, not appearing to notice the eager look on +the animal's face. + +Without further urging he stepped aboard, and George put his arm around +him, as Harry, with oar in hand, pushed the boat from the shore. Angel +was startled, and tried to get away, but soothing words soon quieted +him, and before they reached the mouth of the Cataract he was leaning +over the gunwale and playing with the water in the most approved +boy-like fashion. + +When, however, they had passed the comparatively calm waters in the +estuary, and were rounding the cliffs, poor Angel forgot his sport, and +sat as one paralyzed, gazing at the sight of the waves beating against +the shore line. George went up to him, and spoke encouragingly, and it +was fully a half hour before he was restored to his usual calm. Then, +apparently, he noticed for the first time the peculiar rocking motion of +the vessel. Every time it swayed to the right or to the left he would +give that peculiar chuckle which always indicated delight. + +They went around the point to the east, and passed down the coast in a +southerly direction, going as far as the cape north and east of the +mouth of South River. + +"Steer for the shore, George; steer for the shore; what is that to the +right?" said Harry, pointing to the beach. + +"It looks like a boat, sure enough." + +As the wind was coming directly from the shore they had to depend on the +oars to bring the vessel around, and as they came in could distinctly +make out the side of a boat lying among debris, in an inclined position, +against a rather steep beach. + +"It is our boat, Harry." The moment their vessel came alongside, Angel +jumped off and leaped over to the boat on the shore. Evidently he also +had recognized it. + +"Well, isn't this a find?" + +"How long do you suppose this has been here? I am glad we gave Angel an +outing." + +"Shall we take it with us?" + +"Yes; if we have to carry it overland," was Harry's reply. + +"Let us float it." + +It was not much of a task to do this, and with a short rope it was +hitched to the stern of No. 2. Angel remained in the recovered boat, and +when No. 2 was pushed from the shore, and the sail set, its movement did +not seem to perturb him in the least, but when the oscillations again +began to be perceptible, he commenced to gurgle, and George knew they +had a good sailor to take with them. + +The sail took a little over three hours, and as they passed up the +Cataract River, and approached their home, the boys set up a welcoming +shriek, in imitation of incoming steamers, which so delighted Angel that +he scampered in a delirium of joy from one end of the craft to the +other. It is doubtful whether he had ever in his short life had such a +glorious time, and that he remembered it his subsequent history +furnishes the best evidence. + +The Professor was just as much delighted as the boys at the sight of +their first marine production, which had gotten away from them and +stranded them on the cliffs three months before. "I am sorry now that +you named the other boats, because this is really No. 1." + +"Never mind; this is good enough to be No. 3. Just look at our navy!" + +"Where did you find it?" + +"Near the point, south of the bay." + +"Then it must have been washed there during the late storms, because I +do not think it is possible that it could have gone there at the time it +escaped you, as the wind was blowing directly to the west at that time." + +The boys now remembered the circumstance, and as they recalled the +condition of the driftwood around it when they found it on the beach, it +was plain that the storm had been their friend in this case. + +"Have you been using oars on the boat?" was the Professor's inquiry, as +he bent over the side and examined the notches which were made for the +oars. + +"No; why do you ask?" + +"This boat has been used by some one, and not very long ago, at that. +Notice how the forward sides of these notches are worn. It also seems +that civilized people have been using the boat." + +The information was so startling that neither of the boys could answer +for a moment. Did they have another mystery to contend with? + +But George was alert on the questioning end of any proposition. "Do you +really think white people have had the boat? I do not see anything that +would make you think so." + +"If they were savages they wouldn't use the oarlocks or notches, as they +row free-hand, almost without exception; but get a white man in a boat, +and the first thing he looks for is a place to put his oars in. This +incident in itself shows one of the distinguishing features between the +civilized and the uncivilized people." + +"In what way is one civilized and the other not?" + +"I did not say one was civilized and the other uncivilized. The most +wonderful thing in the advancement of the human race from a state of +savagery to civilization, was the discovery and utilization of a +fulcrum. Whenever man, in an advanced state, undertakes to do anything, +he uses a fulcrum of some kind." + +"In what way is it so useful?" + +"Primarily, in the form of a wedge, a pulley, a wheel and axle, an +inclined plane, a screw or a lever. All these forms do the same thing as +the simple lever; and what sort of mechanism could be made without some +of these elements? The row-lock is simply the fulcrum for the oar, is it +not? When Archimedes discovered the principles of the lever, he was so +excited that he declared he could move the earth if he could find a +fulcrum." + +A careful examination of the notched gunwale showed conclusively that it +had been used to a considerable extent. George sat and pondered over +this. "I am sure we never used the boat enough with the oars to wear it +in this way. Had you examined this when you said that the boat had not +been long at the point where we found it?" + +"No," answered the Professor; "I simply remembered that on the day you +lost it the wind was blowing to the west, and as you found it to the +east of the cliffs, I inferred it must have been carried around since +that time." + +"It is evident then that the people who used this boat live to the west +of us?" + +"That is my only conclusion." + +"Then you think the fire in the forest, and the light which we saw that +night beyond the West River, were made by those people?" + +"I am sure the fire we saw was made by savages, but I am not so certain +about the lights having been made by them." + +Harry looked at the Professor, and then at George, and slowly shook his +head. "Wasn't it lucky we didn't meet them when we made our trip to the +river?" + +That evening the inevitable subject of their forthcoming voyage was +again discussed, and to the surprise of the boys, the Professor urged +delay. His reasons were expressed as follows: + +"While we have had some very severe storms of the kind which may be +expected, we are not sure that the weather is yet fully settled. That is +the only reason I urge delay. If, on the other hand, we should decide to +take an overland journey, we could set out at once." + +Harry was opposed to taking another trip by land. "We have really found +out more by the water route than going by land. For that reason it would +be well for us to make at least one adventure by sea." + +These arguments prevailed in the minds of all, and while it would take +some time before all preparations could be made, all were happy at the +thought that when they did undertake the journey something definite +would be learned to clear up a few of the mysteries of Wonder Island. + +The Professor did find some samples of tourmaline, in a finely divided +state, and this gem was used to polish the gun barrels, so that all the +weapons were finally put into condition where they could be used. During +an hour each day all took a part in practicing in a range specially +prepared near the workshop. Distances were laid off accurately, and the +regulation targets set up. In this manner they became accustomed to +loading and firing with facility and a considerable degree of accuracy. + +If anyone, not knowing the situation, had dropped in on this scene, he +would have considered himself in the midst of a great naval and military +camp. At the workshop were the guns, arranged in order; boxes provided +for the bullets; small turned out wooden cups for powder, each cup +carrying twenty little tubes of bamboo, each with a measured charge of +powder, and longer bamboo tubes with percussion caps in them. + +It was Harry's brilliant idea to separate each charge of powder and put +it into a special tube. This tube had one end closed, and the other +provided with a stopper, so that in loading the stopper could be drawn +out and held by the teeth while the powder was poured into the gun. The +caps were put into a bamboo tube which was just large enough to take the +caps, which were dropped in, one after the other, and it can be seen +that it would be an easy matter to turn the tube upside down, and thus +bring out one cap at a time. This also facilitated the reloading of the +gun. + +During the practice with the gun one serious defect was found; and that +was to remove the cap after each shot. Sometimes the body of the cap +would not split, and as a result, a knife or some pointed instrument +would have to be employed to dislodge it so as to make room for the new +cap. + +Harry found a way to remedy this. An opening was made through the stock +at one side, and a sliding piece, like a collar, put over the nipple +which holds the cap. A finger attached to this collar enabled the +marksman to draw back the collar, and this would bring with it the cap, +which would then fall out of the side opening. + +All these little details may seem to be useless care, but rapidity in +loading and firing, with muzzle-loaders, in an engagement might be their +salvation. + +A test was made of the improved firearm, to determine how fast the gun +could be loaded and fired. The test made by Harry showed that it took +two seconds, after a shot, to bring down the piece, and draw back the +collar to release the cap; three seconds to grasp one of the powder +tubes, remove the stopper and bring it to the muzzle of the gun; two +seconds to pour in the powder; two seconds to drop the tube in its +receptacle and grasp the bullet; two seconds to ram it home, and three +seconds to put on the cap and cock the gun for firing. That was nearly a +quarter of a minute. + +He was very much dissatisfied with this exhibition of speed--or rather +of slowness, so after considering the matter for some time, hit upon the +plan of reducing the rear end of the bullet, so he could wrap a paper +tube on that and tie it. Then he purposed filling the tube with powder, +and closing the rear end by folding over the end of the tube. In this +way he would entirely overcome the need of the little bamboo tubes for +holding the powder. + +But no paper was available, nor could he think of anything which could +be used as a substitute. In despair he repaired to the Professor. + +"What is the difficulty now?" said the Professor, with a smile. + +"No difficulty, particularly, but I wish we could have paper, or +something like it. I want to make cartridges." + +"I thought you had all that arranged for?" + +"So I did, but it takes me a quarter of a minute to load, and I must do +better than that." + +He mused a while. "We could make paper, and I think we have the +facilities at hand for doing it; but it will take quite a time to +arrange for it. Aside from that I do not, at this moment, know of +anything which will be a fair substitute." + +He was chagrined at this failure. But, after all, four shots a minute +were not so bad. The perfection of the guns must await their return. + +Now, let us go down to the marine works, on the shore below the +Cataract. Here were the three vessels lined up side by side, and also +the after part of the lifeboat. The shed, which was the boathouse, had +nearly all their tools, and besides the bench, was a forge and the +primitive blower which the Professor and George had made and set up. +Wood, parts of planks, thin boards, of all sorts and description, were +scattered about. It looked business-like, and Harry was intensely proud +of it. + +The sail was completed, and taken down to be bent on the cable. The jib +had already been installed in place, and when the sails were hoisted and +they walked out from the shore and glanced back to get a full view, the +entire Naval Bureau congratulated itself on the magnificent appearance +of the fleet, and particularly of the new creation in maritime +architecture. + +It is not out of place to say that the Professor and George both +showered the highest compliments on Harry, for he deserved it. But the +officials of the establishment were not the only ones to admire the fine +sight. Angel came, and he took it in. It was the finest climbing he had +enjoyed in many a day. The Professor took off his hat. "I propose three +cheers for our ship." + +They were given, and with each cheer the hats circled their heads. This +was a new code of procedure to Angel. He couldn't understand it. Without +waiting for explanations, he shot down the mast, and landed on shore. It +was the most comical proceeding they had ever witnessed on his part, and +when he looked at the group, and then at the ship, he said as plainly as +though he had uttered it: "What does all this mean?" + +When the laughter was over, George proposed three cheers for Angel. The +hats came off and the cheers were given. Then the same smile which he +had so well learned illuminated his projecting face, and he swung his +long arm around as he had seen it done, and another step had been taken +in his education. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE GRUESOME FINDS IN THE CAVE + + +Another week had thus passed by--seven days of unceasing toil. The +Professor again brought up the subject of the cave. The subject did not +need any argument. It fell on willing ears. + +"How shall we take the boat around?" was the matter which interested +George. + +"Sail it around, of course," was Harry's view. + +Both looked at the Professor. "If we sail it there, which will be an +easy matter, how can we haul it up the sides of the cliffs? From my +present recollection the mouth of the cave is fully thirty feet or more +from the water line. The air pocket is not over eight or ten feet. At +any rate, it is much lower." + +"Then why not haul it around on the wagon, and lower it down the walls?" + +"That seems the most feasible plan." + +They now knew what preparations were needed for the exploration. Two +lamps had been taken before, and one was lost in the cave. Since that +several more had been made, so that three were provided, together with a +supply of matches. + +When the wagon was ready the Professor brought out several boards, and +deposited them in the wagon. The boys looked at the boards inquiringly, +as the Professor turned back from the wagon. "Oh, yes, the boards; we +want something to write on so that we can chart the cave. We must not be +caught as we were the last time." + +"But how can we possibly chart the cave when we have only one boat?" And +George laughed at the idea of making a plan of the interior by standing +at one point. + +"You measured the height of the falls without going to the top, if you +will remember." + +He had forgotten that. But the boat was at last secured in the wagon, +and proceeded to the cliffs. It was fortunate that the team could be +taken to a point directly over the mouth of the cave, and in a little +while the ropes were attached to it and slowly lowered, Harry taking the +precaution to follow it down and to dislodge it from the steps which +appeared in its path. + +The team was then securely hitched, and taking all their implements, +such as lamps and boards, together with two of the guns and an ample +supply of ammunition, descended to the entrance. The boat was at the +mouth, and it was suggested that a preliminary survey of the interior +should first be made, in order to ascertain how far the boat would have +to be carried before reaching the water. + +The lamps were lighted, and the boys led the way. After passing the +point, about two hundred feet from the mouth, and at almost the +identical spot where the water was found at the first exploration, the +water glistened before them. Returning toward the opening a loud beating +sound was heard, which at first startled them. It was evidently at the +mouth of the cave. It sounded like the beating of a stick against some +hard substance. + +The nearer they came to daylight, the more distinct were the sounds. As +heretofore explained, near the entrance the cave made a turn to the +right at an angle, so that when at a distance of fifty feet from the +opening it was impossible to see daylight, except what little was +diffracted from the angle at the turn. + +This angle was reached, and the beating, rather irregular, was plain +enough to cause some alarm. The boat was beyond the open mouth and at +one side, so that it could not be seen by anyone within the recessed +walls. + +All stood still, while the beatings continued. Occasionally there would +be a cessation, to be repeated again. Whatever it was it was not far +away. The Professor whispered: "Get the guns ready; we must take some +chances." + +Cautiously the company moved forward; the end of the boat first appeared +in sight, and as George peered beyond the projecting point of the ledge, +he threw up his hands and burst out in laughter. Angel was in the boat, +imitating Harry in the building operation. The sudden appearance did not +startle him in the least, nor did he stop beating his lullaby, after he +noticed the broad smiles that greeted him. + +With an eye to every advantage, Harry had attached to the sides of the +boat, amidships, two short standards, about three feet high, on top of +which two of the lamps were mounted, so they would be out of the way, +and thus give them freedom to handle the oars and the weapons, as well +as afford them a better light, than if carried by hand. The Professor +was much pleased with this arrangement. + +The boat was not particularly heavy, but it was a task to drag it over +the uneven floor and along the tortuous path which had to be taken by +their burden, but when the water was reached they were repaid for the +labor by the ease with which they could explore the interior. + +Before starting the journey the Professor, as usual, uttered a few words +of advice: "One of us must sit in the bow, one at the stern, and the +other amidships. The one at the stern must propel the boat, as we cannot +row through many of the places, and as the water is not deep, that will +not be a difficult task. The ones at the bow and amidships should have +the guns, and if there is no objection, I will take my place on the +middle seat, where I can best take the observations on the way. The +other places you should decide between yourselves." + +"I am willing to take the bow, if Harry agrees." Harry sanctioned the +arrangement, and when the lamps were securely fastened, Harry pushed the +boat forward through the cavern. It did not take long to reach the +slight turn which led to the large chamber, which was over one hundred +feet long. + +On the way to the chamber Harry had an opportunity to measure the depths +of the water, and at intervals the Professor would call out for the +depths, as he was making notes of the descent formed by the floor to the +chamber. The oars gave a pretty fair idea, showing that the floor was +only about five feet lower at the chamber than where the boat was +launched. + +Reaching the chamber Harry was directed to steer it to the right and +skirt the wall going to the left, so that every part of it could be +examined. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 13 THE TREASURE CAVE_] + +"I have another reason for this careful examination," remarked the +Professor, as he was intently engaged in making notes on the board +tablets. "It may be likely that the chamber has more than one outlet and +if so, we must explore it also. Of course, I am most interested in the +outlet to the south." + +A circuit was made until they reached the outlet to the south, which +Harry had discovered when the light on the ledge disappeared. The water +throughout the cavern within the chamber was not over eight feet deep, +and at the outlet to the south he could not touch bottom with the +twelve-foot pole they carried. This outlet was contracted, and, judging +from the width of the boat, could not be more than eight feet across, +but it gradually widened, and the waters became shallower as they +advanced. + +George, who was in the bow, held up his hand as a warning. "Stop!" was +all he said. All peered forward. The lights threw their beams forwardly +through a broadening channel, beyond which appeared to be white forms +ranged along the opposite wall. + +"What depth have you, Harry?" asked the Professor, without seeming at +all concerned. + +"About five feet." + +"Move straight ahead, until I tell you to stop." + +The pole was thrust down and the boat moved forwardly fully fifty feet +before a halt was called. + +"I think we are now in the middle of this chamber. Before exploring it +let us make a thorough examination of its characteristics." + +"Look at those wonderful icicles hanging from the roof!" George gazed on +them with wonder and admiration. Harry, on the other hand, with the +utilitarian idea in his mind, inquired: "Why couldn't all that chalk be +utilized for making plaster?" + +"That product is used in the arts, but it costs too much to transport it +from the places where it is found in its natural state, as science has +found a much cheaper way of producing it from limestone." + +"Are all these rocks limestone?" + +"Beyond question. Only a few of the caves so far found are in any other +formation than limestone." + +"What kind of cave are those?" + +"Where they have been produced by volcanic action. There the walls are +of volcanic rock." + +"Why is it that these underground channels are formed in this way?" + +"They are formed by the erosive action of the water wearing out the +softer portions of the rock beneath a harder roof or wall. This action +is brought about by carbonic acid acting on the rock and producing what +is called carbonate of lime, and the stalactites and stalagmites found +in all these caverns are of that material." + +"What is the difference between the two names you have just mentioned?" + +"Stalactite means trickling or dropping, and as applied to these +formations it means conical or cylindrical accretions of the carbonate. +Stalagmite is the term used to designate the calcareous formations found +on the floors of caverns, which are usually the droppings from the +roof." + +"Where are most of the caves found?" + +"They occur most frequently along rocky shores of open seas, as in this +case. Some of them are celebrated for their great extent, others for +their gorgeous interiors, like this chamber. Some show the most +beautiful draperies, or veils; in some cases portions of the ceiling +have representations of magnificent inverted candelabra, and what appear +to be carvings in the purest white." + +"In what parts of the world are most of them found?" + +"It does not seem that any portion of the world has a monopoly. The most +celebrated are the grotto of Antiparas, in Greece; the Adelsberg caverns +in Carniola, and the Mammoth in Kentucky. The latter is the largest in +the world, the windings of which extend forty miles and through which is +a subterranean river. In the river are eyeless fish, and fish with eyes, +but sightless. Others are the Luray, in Virginia; the Wyandotte, in +Indiana; Weir's, in Virginia; the Big Saltpeter, in Missouri, and +Ball's, in New York. Of seashore caverns, the most famous and remarkable +is Fingal's, on the coast of Scotland. Extensive caves are also found in +the Azores, Canary Islands, in Iceland, in various portions of England, +France and Belgium. Many of them are of immense value to the +paleontologist." + +"In what way are they of any use?" + +"They have been of the greatest service, because in the early days of +man, and before he knew enough to build his own habitation, he made the +cave his home. You have heard of the 'cave man,' have you not? During +the old stone period in England and other European countries, these +caverns were the only abodes of man, and in them have been found layers +from twenty to thirty feet thick, of successive accretions of bone, +stalagmites and various articles of human manufacture." + +This information added interest to the examination of the walls, and the +eagerness of the boys to discover something new and startling was at its +keenest edge. Before they had made a half circuit George announced that +he could see a large opening, which turned to the right, and thus formed +a bend to the general direction that the cavern had made. + +A digression is necessary, in order to be able to understand all the +elements in this remarkable voyage. The mouth of the cave was northeast +of the Cataract home, and distant about a half mile, in a straight line. +The opening for the first six hundred feet, which had been charted by +them on the previous occasion, ran directly south, but from that point +it turned toward the southwest, and this now, in a measure, explained +the eagerness of the Professor to explore it, as he believed the cavern +led to a point near their home. + +"There is no water in the opening," was the further information from +George, as they approached the contracted end of the chamber. + +"Before we land let us see the other side of the chamber," was the +Professor's suggestion. + +The boat was veered around to the left, and before they had proceeded +fifty feet it was apparent that a similar opening led out to the south, +and a dry floor was visible, like in the other outlet. The boat was +landed, and drawn up, two of the lamps taken out and the guns examined. +The opening led into a second chamber, which looked like a canopied +grotto of marble. Where they stood the chamber had the appearance of a +huge letter A, the side walls of which ran together in the distance, but +these walls were broken up by the most enchanting series of columns, and +delicate entablatures, and the outlines of the figures were like +blanched frescoes. It was such a weird and startling sight that the boys +could not repress their amazement. + +After they had fully entered the chamber Harry's quick eye caught a +peculiar formation to the right, on a raised sort of platform, behind +which seemed to be a recess. He had noticed it because it contrasted so +strangely with the uniformly white glare of all the surrounding +surfaces. He quickly made his way across, and as he reached it, stepped +back in alarm. + +"Come here, quickly; are those skulls and skeletons?" + +The Professor did not need a second invitation. Scattered about on the +elevation were found four skulls, and the bones comprising the remains +of four human beings. The skulls were first arranged side by side, and +the Professor intently examined them. + +"These are skulls of the Caucasian race, beyond a doubt. All are, +apparently, well formed and normal. But what is this?" + +In the side of one skull was a perforation, with the bone fractured on +all sides of the orifice. + +"Do you think it is a bullet wound?" + +"It has that appearance. As there seems to be no corresponding hole in +any other portion of the skull, we may be able to find the missile +inside, if death was caused by that means." + +Harry had noticed a rattling sound when the skull was put in place, and +mentioned this. After some hesitation the course of the fractured +opening was traced through, and embedded near the top and on the +opposite side, was a large lead ball, or what had been, undoubtedly, +spherically shaped before it entered and passed through the bones. + +"This is evidence to me that these remains have been here a long time." + +"Why; because it is in the form of a ball, and not a bullet?" + +"Yes; and there is also another reason why these people came here and +met their fate many, many years ago." + +"What is that?" + +"In this calcareous formation the preservative qualities of the +carbonates would prevent rapid decomposition. These skulls are turning +to the same material that we see all about us. See how brittle the bones +are. Our bones are of lime formation, being largely composed of the +carbonate, the same as the stalactites." + +The other substances now lying about were noticed. The excitement +engendered at the sight of the bones was enough temporarily to blind +them to the numerous things found scattered about. Here was a dirk, the +edges entirely worn away, and whitened. There were the metal ribs of +what seemed to be a case, or a receptacle of some kind. Lying at one +side was an ancient type of firearm, long, heavy, and with an immense +bore. Another and another were found--a regular arsenal, with the +scattered remnants of peculiar little copper receptacles with whitish +powder in them. + +Harry, who was about to remove the powder, was stopped by the Professor. +"We must retain everything as we find it, as nearly as possible. We do +not yet know what the little vessels contain." + +Not an article of clothing thus far had been found. A little higher up +on the platform, two more skeletons were seen, both of which had +fractured skulls, one of them showing two cavities which could not have +been accidental, as both showed the same kind of fracture, and inclined +across the skull in the same direction on the left side. + +Alongside these skeletons were more of the long, wicked-looking firearms +which had been found previously near the other bodies. There was every +evidence to show that a terrible fight had terminated the existence of +the band. More long knives, with curiously wrought handles, were lying +behind the last skeletons, and on a more careful examination, a knife of +an entirely different pattern was found within the ribbed cavity of one +of them. + +Still farther back, new articles appeared. Articles of furniture, many +of them coated with the fallen carbonates; and here were the first +articles of clothing, some of which were so decomposed as to crumble at +the touch. Others were still firm. Some of the articles, like a mantle, +had threads intact running in one direction, and the other cross thread +all converted into dust, which disappeared when the garment was held up. + +On some of the garments were metal trimmings. "They look like silver," +said George, excitedly; "and what is this? It seems to be silver," as he +brushed a bracelet-like piece of ornamentation with the sleeve of his +coat. As they advanced new articles came in sight; a bench; a veritable +chair, or couch, the covering of which was there merely to give it form, +but the substance had gone. Only the wood remained and that largely +decayed. + +And now on every side, at the rear and along the walls of the recess, +were evidences of human habitation. Cutlasses, knives, and at one side, +what appeared to be the kitchen, were numerous pots and kettles of +various sizes and descriptions, nearly all of them of copper. + +"How could they possibly cook in here without being smothered to death?" +asked Harry. + +"The cavern seems to be large enough to take care of all the smoke," was +the Professor's reply. + +"Well, I don't understand why they should have taken the trouble to come +in such a long distance, when they would be just as safe nearer the +mouth?" + +"Before we leave this place we may be able to answer your two questions +in a way that will surprise, if not startle, you," was the Professor's +answer. + +This vague reply did not detract any from the interest which the boys +took in the search. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THE TREASURES OF THE CAVE + + +While Harry was in the act of drawing back one of the couches, an object +behind it seemed to fall apart with a jingling sound. + +"What was that?" exclaimed George. + +"I think we have found something here that will make us do some +thinking," answered Harry, as he bent down to take up some of the +detached pieces which came from what now appeared to be a large chest. +He picked up one of the round pieces. "Gold, gold; look at it!" + +"I suspected something of the kind when I saw the skeletons. Carefully, +boys; let us remove this piece of furniture. Undoubtedly, we are in +pirates' lair, and here is the booty." + +[Illustration: _"We have probably found a pirate's lair, and here is the +booty"_] + +The boys were too much overcome for words. They looked at the gold, and +then at each other. George arose and walked back and forth. Harry, with +the coin in his hand, brushed it and held it close to the light. + +"With this we can buy anything we want," George finally uttered. + +"Whom will you buy it from?" was Harry reply. The Professor only smiled. +Of what use was money to them? George had forgotten that. + +"Here is another one." + +"Another what?" + +"A chest, something like yours." The lid, with its mocking lock, opened +easily, and there, coated with the universal carbonate, were a mass of +coins, articles of ornament, rings, bracelets, and pieces the names or +uses of which were entirely unknown to them. + +"Now that we have them, what shall be done with the treasures?" + +The boys did not answer for some time. Here was wealth; more, probably, +than either had ever dreamed of; but it was of no earthly use to them. +They must, of course, preserve it. They had discovered it, and under all +the laws were entitled to possession. + +"Well, have we gotten together all the gold and silver and precious +stones? Just imagine us as buccaneers! Owners of an island we haven't +conquered, and possessors of a fortune without working for it!" and the +Professor laughed at the thought of it. The boys, too, laughed, but when +they looked over at the ghastly skeletons, the joy was suddenly checked. + +The Professor saw the reason. "Isn't this a sermon? You have become +acquainted with it early in life; some learn it very late, and others +never get the lesson. Riches; death! Possessors of every material thing +that earth can give, and the grave beyond it! The unfortunates there had +all this, but their skeletons have stood guard over it for a century or +more." + +The Professor still smiled, but the boys were very grave. It was, +indeed, an impressive lesson. + +"Why are you so quiet? Are you mourning for them?" Then, without waiting +for more gloomy feelings, he continued: "How high above the mouth of the +cave do you think we are?" + +This sudden change in the tone of the Professor was almost startling to +them. How indifferent! It appeared almost like desecration. + +"I have no idea," was Harry's faltering reply. He looked around to +assure himself that it was not all a dream. The sudden acquisition of +what appeared to be an immense store of wealth, the ghastly relics +below, seemed to stun him. + +"Have you a reason for wanting to know how high up we are?" asked George +when he had partially recovered. + +"You wanted to know a little while ago how the smoke in the cavern might +affect them. Haven't you noticed a perceptible movement in the +atmosphere since we entered the chamber?" + +The boys started and stared at him. Could it be that the cave had an +outlet in the hills? + +"Was that the reason you suggested we should make a circuit around the +chamber after we entered it?" + +"Yes; and I know where the outlet is." + +"And does that explain why the pirates made their home at this end?" + +"Undoubtedly; and what will be still more interesting information is, +that the opening is within sight of the cataract." + +Could anything be more exciting than this information? + +"I now see the reason why you always wanted to come back to the cave. +Did you suspect this when we first entered the cave?" + +"No; but I had an idea we should find this after we made our second +trip." + +"What did you see?" + +"Nothing but what Harry brought to me." + +"What was that?" both exclaimed, eagerly. + +"The slab of carbonate which Harry brought me for the marking tablet, +and on which we made the chart of the cave." + +"What did you find on it?" + +"If you will recall, I brought it with me. It is now in the boat." Harry +dashed down to the boat and brought it back, turning it over and over on +the way. + +The slab referred to was about two inches thick, a foot long, and +probably ten inches wide, a little irregular in formation. + +"When we returned home that evening, after the trip referred to, I took +the slab and transferred the chart we had made to a board. In doing so, +I noticed that the lime had been chipped away from one side, but that +did not cause me to make any investigation at the time. + +"Some days afterwards I again took it up, and could see plainly through +the carbonate what appeared to be the shadows of some characters, and it +at once occurred to me that, owing to the sunlight and the comparatively +dry atmosphere in which it had been kept after its removal, that the +lime would turn or change its color, but the lime on this background did +not change in the same degree where the characters had been placed, and +when we get into the sunlight you will be able to see just what I saw." + +Looking at the slab, there was nothing to indicate any characters +imprinted in it. + +"Where is the opening, Professor?" + +"Come here; directly below where we found the first skeleton; keep the +light back in the recess; there; now look to the left and see that small +streak of light about ten feet from the floor." + +George could restrain himself no longer, but rushed forward. As he +crossed a slightly elevated obstruction, his foot caught on a spur and +he pitched forward. Harry, who was following, saw him fall. George, +slightly stunned, had raised himself partly as Harry came up. When Harry +saw him he was arising from a nest of bones which showed the remains of +two more pirates, the two skulls lying close together, directly behind +the little ridge over which George had fallen. + +"Here are some more of them," cried Harry, as the Professor came up. +"What a fight they must have had!" + +The outlet at this point was fully eight feet wide, and without the +lights it was still too dark to distinguish anything. George's light had +been extinguished in the fall, but Harry's lamp was still available, and +all were eager now to find the outlet. Harry now led the way, and within +seventy-five feet, at a pronounced angle in the throat of the cave, he +recognized the first real glimmer of sunlight. + +"See the steps here!" was his cry. And beyond, as plainly formed as +though cut a year ago, instead of a century, were steps leading up to a +contracted opening, partly hidden by shrubbery. + +When Harry emerged from the opening, the first sight that met his gaze, +after he had fully recovered the use of his eyes, was their home, not a +thousand feet away. George brushed his way out, and he stood there, not +knowing whether to run or to shout or to cry. Every emotion appealed to +the boys for mastery. All previous experiences during the past year +paled into insignificance in comparison with the hour just spent in the +pirates' lair. + +The opening from which they left the cavern was on the side of a hill, +not particularly steep, formed by projecting strata of limestone, in the +clefts of which vegetation grew, and at a distance the rocks could be +seen only at intervals on account of the shrubbery. No one could +possibly suspect an opening into the walls anywhere along the hillside. +The outlet was not more than twenty feet from the rather level ground, +which sloped off toward the west and in the direction of Cataract River. + +They sat there silently for a time, but evidently the Professor was not +disposed to allow too much time for reflections which he knew must be +gloomy to the boys' impressionable minds. + +"What are you thinking about, boys? Have you had enough excitement for +one day?" + +George was the first to reply: "I have been thinking about what we ought +to do with the gold." + +"Why the gold? I have been thinking of the boat." + +"Do you think we ought to leave the gold there? Isn't that of more +importance than the boat?" + +"I do not think so, George; we can use the boat to good advantage, but +where can you utilize the gold?" + +"But why would it not be a good idea to get it out and take it over to +the Cataract?" + +"I should advise against that very strongly." + +"What are your reasons?" + +"Suppose we should be attacked at the Cataract and find the home +untenable; this place would be a safe retreat, and we should, in any +event, have our treasure here in safety. It has been secure for the last +century or so. I think it will keep for a few months more." + +"It had never occurred to me that we could use this place for such a +purpose. That is a capital idea. And did you have this in mind all +along, Professor?" + +"Yes." + +After a time, when the subjects had been fully discussed, it was decided +to try to bring the boat out by the new entrance, and after making all +the measurements, ample room was found for this. They returned and +carried and dragged it to the opening, and after some labor it was +finally pushed through the opening, and when the ropes were attached it +was lowered down the hillside, and dragged to a position where it could +be taken by the team. + +"You should go for the team now, and I will continue the explorations +until you return," and so saying, the Professor went up the hill and +entered the cave, leaving one of the lights at the opening. + +The boys went back to the mouth of the cave and found the team, as well +as Red Angel, who had remained there, and within a half hour were back +again to the land entrance. The light was still where the Professor had +placed it, and the boys at once entered the passageway, and went down +the steps leading to the pirates' chamber. + +All the bones of the skeletons had been removed from the passageway, +where George had fallen, but the other skeletons were in the same place +originally seen when they discovered the remains. + +The Professor was not in sight, nor did they see any glimmer of his +light. + +It was he, undoubtedly, who had removed the bones from the passageway, +but they did not stop to notice where they were deposited. When they +first came in both were busy discussing the situation, in careless +tones, without any pretense at suppressing their voices, but now that +the Professor was not in sight, and no evidence that he was anywhere +near, the scene about them began to be most weird and uncanny. They +spoke in undertones, and when Harry suggested that they might call the +Professor, and thus let him know of their return, it was some time +before George would consent. + +It became evident, as he did not appear, that something must be done, +and Harry shouted loudly, and his voice reechoed through the cavern and +came back to them from every quarter. In a few moments they were +overjoyed to see the glimmer of a light directly to the east, which was +in the opposite portion of the chamber, where, as his light moved +forward, plainly showed another recess, or, probably, an opening similar +to the one through which they had entered from the west side of the +hill. + +"Have you been waiting long?" was his inquiry. + +"No; we came in less than ten minutes ago. Have you found anything new?" + +"Nothing new, but many additional things; but we must take another day +for this." + +This was said so significantly that they looked at each other, debating +in their minds whether or not the question should be pursued any +further. + +"Haven't you had enough for one day?" and he said this with such a +jovial mien that it restored their composure and satisfied them that +another day would bring the answer that they craved. + +As they passed out George turned to the Professor and asked: + +"Why did you remove the remains in the passageway?" + +"Because I thought it might be well to examine them at our leisure, and +therefore enable us, if possible, to learn something of their history. I +have put them near the steps close to the entrance." + +As they passed out he requested Harry to bring up the boards from the +boat, as well as some ropes and part of the canvas, which was usually +carried with them to be used as a means for signaling. The bones were +arranged on the boards, and kept separate from each other; after which +the canvas was severed and tied around the two human frames, to keep +them in place, and deposited in the boat, after it had been loaded in +the wagon. + +It was now past two o'clock, and none of them felt any hunger until they +neared home. The trip had occupied over four hours, and hungry as they +were, the reaction, after the stirring events of the day, was so marked +that it was difficult to rouse them sufficiently to prepare the meal. + +Somehow, the work at the factory, the building of the boat, and the care +of the stock did not interest them the following day. They went around +like people in dreams. Their thoughts were centered in the cavern on the +hill, and many, many times during the day their eyes involuntarily +turned that way. Was it unnatural that such should be the case? When, if +ever, in the history of human kind had such treasure been bestowed where +the gift had been so lightly considered that they did not even stop long +enough to count its value? It seemed such an unnatural thing to do, and +yet the only feeling was one of curiosity. + +During the entire day the boys rarely spoke to the Professor about the +events of the previous day. He was busy in the laboratory with the two +skeletons, and remained secluded. + +"What do you think the Professor found in the cave while we were getting +the team?" + +"I have had a curiosity to know, as well as yourself. Shall we ask him?" + +"I do not think it would be well to do so. You know he is always willing +and anxious to be of service to us and to answer every question; it +looks like an imposition to insist on what he evidently wishes to +avoid." + +"That is the feeling I have had. I love him because he has been so +unselfish, and during the time we have been associated, I do not +remember ever having heard him utter an unkind word." + +"I have often thought I wish we knew of some way to make him understand +how we appreciate him and his noble ways. You remember the birthday +party we had for him? That touched him, as it did us, and it was the +only time I ever saw him confused or in tears." + +"I wish we knew his history. Did you ever hear him say a word about his +friends or relatives? What affects me most is, that when any subject +comes up, he always considers it from the standpoint of service to us. +He never considers himself." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +REMOVING THE VESSELS FROM THE CAVERNS + + +The boat was finally completed, and the boys were very anxious to have a +sail in it to know how it would act. The utmost care had been taken to +have it well caulked, and it was again put into the water, after all the +leaky spots had been closed up. + +For the purpose of the test it was decided to put aboard a load of +stone, of a weight equal to what their contemplated load would be, and +this they estimated, not counting their combined weight, at six hundred +pounds. This would be ample for all purposes. + +The day selected was bright, with a fair wind. By agreement Harry was +selected as the skipper, as he knew every part of the boat. It devolved +on him to take command for the day, but he would not consent to be the +permanent captain, as he thought that a duty which devolved on the +others as well. + +Angel was invited, you may be sure, and he enjoyed the idea of a sail +when he recollected, as was no doubt the case, his former trip. There +was evidence of the remembrance in the animal, when they saw him at the +boat, on more than one occasion, swinging back and forth on the rigging. + +The Professor was in his element in the boat. It was a glorious journey +for him, and the boys knew it was appreciated on his part. The wind was +blowing from the west, so the sails were tacked and an easy sail made +for the mouth of the Cataract. + +Outside the sea was rolling, but not disagreeably so; but a much +stronger breeze sprang up toward midday, and before two o'clock it was +very brisk. The cliffs were rounded, and as the wind had not changed +quarters, the sails were set for a southern course. This brought them +around the bay and toward the headland to the east of the mouth of South +River. + +That region had always possessed a fascination for George and an +attraction for the Professor as well. George, particularly, was anxious +to penetrate the river, and sail up to the falls, but Harry's more +practical views prevailed. "If we want to explore the river we can do it +any day with a wagon, or on foot; but while we have the ship out, why +not take a sail down the coast toward the mountains?" + +The Professor concurred in this as the most liable to give them the best +results, as they were out for the purpose of making tests of the craft +on the open sea. + +After sailing for an hour along the coast to the south, the shore line +turned to a southwesterly direction, and the mountain range was now +clearly perceptible, extending southwest, and along which it appeared +that the coast followed. The wind changed and came from the mountains, +and made progress slow. There was also a decided change in the +temperature, and by four o'clock it was impossible to follow the coast +except by constant tacking. + +The boat was turned to the north, and with the strong wind, which had +now perceptibly increased, began to make good time. As evening +approached, the wind increased, until it blew with considerable +violence, every minute being more boisterous, and the Professor +suggested that the jib be taken down, which was done; but the increasing +gale, and the terrible strain on the mast and sail, made the boys look +inquiringly at the Professor, for a word of warning. + +He sat there grimly during the raging storm, and with the halliards +gradually let down the mainsail when the tempest had reached such a +point that it appeared to sweep everything from the boat. + +Where was Angel during all this uproar? Forward in the housed portion of +the boat, curled up in a corner, and apparently unconscious, the little +creature did not seem at all perturbed. + +"Don't you think he is seasick?" + +"It is not likely. Seasickness is akin, you know, to that dizzy feeling +some people have when at a height. The natural instincts of the animal +prevent him from having any feeling of discomfort at a height. The trees +are their homes, and for that reason they can swing from branch to +branch and sway back and forth in the loftiest trees without an +uncomfortable feeling." + +The heavy blow continued until they had reached the cliffs, when it +abated somewhat, and the boys anxiously inquired whether it would be +safe to make the entrance to the river during the gale. + +"We are out for the purpose of testing the boat. To make an attempt to +round the cliff and steer it into the mouth of the river in this wind +will be the best test of its maneuvering ability." + +As stated, the wind was now blowing from the southwest, and they were +northeast of the mouth of the stream they wished to enter. They stood +out to sea in order to make a starboard tack, and it was a gratification +to see the magnificent manner in which the vessel responded, and before +six o'clock they found themselves sailing up the river, and safely +landed at the boathouse. + +An examination showed that the crossbeam supporting the mainmast was +split from end to end, and only the roof structure held it in place. +Thus the trip had a warning lesson for them, and Harry was not slow to +take advantage of it and install a larger crosspiece. + +George had entirely forgotten the incident of the calcareous slab which +had on it the tracings of the cave, and which had been the means of +giving the Professor the first hint that they were in a pirate's cave. + +The first thing in the morning he went over to the laboratory, and +called attention to the slab. "Here it is," said the Professor. "You +will note that the light shows some characters which can readily be made +out, and at the corner here, where a portion has been chipped away, it +has the appearance of something else besides calcium." + +"Why, it looks like wood." + +"That is what it is. I should not have noticed the wood if the peculiar +lettering had not shown up through the coating." + +"What are the letters, and do you know what they stand for?" + +"We had better not pass judgment on that until we have removed all the +calcium." + +At this moment Harry came in to view the slab. It was the slab he had +carelessly picked up in the cave, and therefore it had a great +fascination for him. The calcium was carefully chipped off, and it was +found to be a piece of oak board, with a smooth cut-off end, parallel +sides, nine inches wide, nearly two inches thick, and about eleven +inches long, the opposite end having the appearance of being broken. The +only letters which could be made out were "HI," and a portion of another +letter which could not be determined. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 14. THE SLAB FOUND IN THE CAVE_] + +"What do you think the letters were intended to indicate?" + +"They might be the name of a ship, or some sign. I do not think it was +part of a ship. I tried to find something in the cave, on the day I went +in while you went after the team, which would afford some clue, but so +far nothing confirms me in any view which I may have." + +"Isn't it curious that these letters should show through only after the +slab was exposed to the light?" + +"Why is that any more curious than photography is?" + +"Because in photography something is put on the glass or the sheet that +the negatives are made of, and it turns and makes a mark under certain +conditions." + +"Well, here is something put on this slab that turns also. Photography +is a wonderful thing. Dr. Draper, the first great photographer, and who +was also a scientist, says that every wall, or other object, which you +stand before, has your photograph imprinted on it. The only question is +to find some chemical which will develop the picture." + +"What is meant by developing the picture?" + +"You remember some time ago we talked about reagents, and the properties +of certain chemicals to act on others, and in doing so, to make a +change. Sometimes the change is a complete one, and makes a new product; +in other cases the result is a complete change of color. Now, in +photography, if a certain chemical is placed on a glass or a film, and +the film is exposed, the light and dark portions of the object show on +the film. The sunlight, or the actinic rays in the sunlight, affect the +chemical material so that when the fixing chemical is applied it +prevents a change in the condition of the chemical." + +"What do you mean by the actinic ray?" + +"All light is vibration; the greatest motions which are perceptible to +the eye, being known as violet. Now there are still more rapid +vibrations than are put forth to make the violet rays, which are called +the actinic rays, and are the ones which affect the chemicals so +acutely." + +"Is it then possible to photograph with a light that is not perceptible +to the eye?" + +"You have heard of the x-rays, no doubt; they are the actinic or ultra +violet, which are above the visible light. These light vibrations are of +such a character that they penetrate many substances. A curious effect +of this was shown some time ago when a photograph was taken of the side +of a vessel which had several coats of paint over the old name, and the +photograph showed not only the new name, but also the old one beneath." + +The time had now arrived when they must make preparations for the +proposed voyage of discovery around the island. It was a momentous time +for them. The boys could not help but look with longing eyes to the +cave. Before they went it was felt something more should be learned +about its mysteries. + +The Professor was not at all backward in encouraging this feeling. + +"Wouldn't it be a good thing to take such things out of the cave as we +can make use of here, and during our trip?" said Harry. + +"What things do you think we could utilize?" + +"Probably the guns; and then they have some cooking utensils." + +"And why," suggested George, laughingly, "couldn't we take some of the +money along?" + +"That would be a comfortable feeling to have plenty of money in our +pockets. Very well, we'll take this afternoon for the trip." + +An early start was made, the lamps carefully trimmed and the guns, +together with the bolos, collected. It was a short walk to the opening, +and Angel, although not invited, accompanied the party. + +Together they descended, and soon reached the scene of the conflict at +the large recess to the left of the entrance. The Professor, after +reviewing the scene, suggested that the bones should be carefully +gathered together and deposited at a place where they could be buried. + +[Illustration: _Portugese Coin, 1700. Spanish Pistole Peruvian Dollar._] + +[Illustration: _Fig. 15. Old Coins found in Cave._] + +"We do not want them here as evidences of the strife." + +After all had been gathered and carried to the spot selected, the first +task was to gather the treasure found in the chests. And here a sight +met their eyes which staggered them. One of the chests which Harry first +found contained not only an immense quantity of gold coin, of Spanish +and other mintages, but curious other pieces, all ancient, as shown by +the inscriptions, and long yellow bars, the last of which attracted +George's attention. + +"What are these bars?" + +"They are gold bullion, made by melting up various articles, and +probably the coin itself, so as to make it convenient for +transportation." + +"My! how heavy they are! and look at the number!" + +When all had been assorted the Professor suggested that as they had +plenty of copper utensils, the latter might be used as receptacles for +the gold. The other chest contained but little coin, but here the +interest was not less pronounced than in the other chest, because the +vessels found were not only of beautiful, but many of curious, design. +Some were of silver, as well, and the boys knew that those would be +serviceable for their table, and at their suggestion all such were laid +aside to be removed to the Cataract. + +The kitchen utensils afforded a more varied collection than had been +anticipated. Six of the larger copper vessels were required to hold the +money, jewelry and other articles taken from the two decayed chests, and +there were still remaining at least a dozen more smaller jars and pots, +some with handles, which would be exceedingly useful in their kitchen. + +All these were carefully put aside, and the smaller silver articles +deposited in them. And now the guns! Seven skeletons were found, two of +which had been removed to the Cataract by the Professor. After all the +guns had been collected, twelve were counted. + +"I suppose each fellow had two of them," was Harry's conclusion. + +"If you will go over into the chamber to the east you will find a +sufficient number to assure you that they were not lacking firearms." + +The boys now understood. He had told them on the second day's +exploration that he did not find anything new, but only something more. +Why not go and see it now. But they were restrained. A dozen guns were +certainly enough. These were also set aside, and it was then agreed to +place the vessels containing the treasure in a secluded nook, in the +extreme corner of the large recess. Samples of the clothing, some of the +knives or daggers, as well as the little trinkets, found near each of +the bodies, were deposited in the receptacles that had been selected for +removal. + +All this accumulation of material was more than they had bargained for +when they left the Cataract, so that the failure to bring the team was +keenly felt. However, it was the work of an hour, only, to get the team, +and it was a pretty fair load which went from the pirates' haunts to the +home on the river. + +George's curiosity could not keep him from taking some of the coins +which he exhibited when they returned, and which they would have ample +leisure to examine. + +Harry's thoughts were turned to the firearms. They were certainly of an +antiquated pattern. The first thing was their length. Two of them were +unusually long, fully six and a half feet. + +"I wonder why it was they made their guns so long?" he inquired. + +"The reason was, probably, that the quality of powder was so bad that +the bullet would get out before all the powder was consumed. All the +ancient pistols were very inefficient, because of the short barrel. Even +down to the time of the American Revolution the guns on board of war +vessels were not capable of throwing shot very far, and the most +effective ones were those with long barrels." + +"In what respect is the powder of to-day more powerful than in olden +times?" + +"Particularly in the fact that formulas have been devised which make a +higher expansion, or give a greater volume of gas. The other feature of +value is, that chemical means have been discovered whereby the moment a +sufficient amount of heat has developed in the powder it instantly +burns--not a slow fusing, like the old powders--but the combustion is +instantaneous. These two factors working together have greatly improved +even the black powders." + +After their return the interest in the articles was so great, and the +inventory took so much time, that the disappearance of Angel had been +entirely forgotten. All remembered him going along, and no one had seen +him enter the cave. None of them believed he could be induced to go in, +hence no particular notice was taken of his movements. + +An hour after the return, Harry saw Angel coming over the field at the +east of the Cataract, dragging something after him laboriously. All +stood and watched him as he neared home. He had a stick, apparently, but +it seemed to be unusually heavy. + +George ran out to assist him, and when he came up he gravely handed to +article to George. It was the barrel of a gun, with part of the +flintlock still attached, but it was rusted almost beyond recognition, +the bore completely filled with dirt, accumulation and rust. + +"Where do you suppose the little rascal found this?" + +The Professor examined it. "Outside of the cave, undoubtedly. The +curious part about it is, that this weapon is of an entirely different +and more modern pattern than those we have samples of." + +Harry took the gun and ran in to where the others were deposited, and +true enough, it was not only shorter, but it had a smaller bore, and +what is more, the outside of the barrel was octagonal, whereas the +barrels of those inside of the cave were all round. + +As the Professor predicted, the guns which they recovered were too much +rusted to be of any service, and furthermore, they were made of iron, +very much softer than the steel of which their own guns were +constructed, and it is questionable whether they would be able to +withstand a charge of the comparatively high power powder which had been +made for the modern guns. + +As curiosities the weapons were good things to have; otherwise they were +of no value. This was not so with the vessels, which could be and were +utilized in the kitchen and in that capacity were of the highest use. +The table was supplied with articles of the purest silver, and it had a +royal look. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +MAKING ELECTRICITY + + +In order that you may get some sort of idea concerning the condition of +our little colony, at this time, it would be well to give a brief review +of the situation. When they landed on the island the year before, with +nothing but the clothing they wore, the prospect of being delivered was +not a flattering one, as day after day passed by. + +Here were two boys, unused to the privations of life, with youth and +vigor, cut off from all the pleasures of manhood, surrounded by dangers, +and day after day having mysteries thrust upon them which only increased +their fears. These things necessarily must have produced an impression +much deeper than would be the case with hardened men. + +In the effort to discover, produce and build the various tools, weapons, +and articles of clothing, to hunt food, and in the endeavor to learn +about the condition of the island, and guard themselves against foes +which might be all about them, imposed immense responsibilities. + +In their struggles were personified the contests of the human race from +the beginning of the world, in the effort to conquer nature, and to make +it contribute to their necessities. + +The Professor knew how such a condition would tend to make active minds +either productive of good, or to fly out in the opposite direction and +cultivate the low and sordid instincts. Occupation, work, the +utilization of the mind, and above all, to direct their energies into +useful channels, had been the Professor's one absorbing aim. + +The boys had responded, as all boys will, not for the love of gain or +for power or glory. Our boys had none of these. Other boys do not need +them any more than those on Wonder Island. What they do need is a true +stimulus for work; and when that evening they were gathered together in +the cozy little living room at the Cataract, the Professor who for two +days had been particularly reticent and retired, said: + +"Can you imagine the condition of the pirates who gathered all that +hoard in the cave? What do you think their aim was in life?" + +"It seems to me," was Harry's reply, "that the only thing they were +after was wealth." + +"If what we see in the cave is any indication, the principal thing they +lived for was to kill somebody," was George's conclusion. + +The answers made him smile. "You have, I presume, answered the question +in the two sentences. But there is something that you haven't mentioned, +which is at the bottom of it all." + +"Yes; wanting to kill to get the money." + +"That only states your previous answers in a more concrete way. There is +one word which describes it accurately: Selfishness. When a man inquires +into the secrets of nature; when he tries to turn the knowledge gained +into account, either for money or glory; when he consistently devotes +his days to labor, and his nights to thoughts to find out how he may do +something better, or quicker, or cheaper, it might all be denominated +selfishness, and so it is, in a way. It is a selfishness, however, that +does no injury to a fellow-man. That kind of selfishness is the great +quality which has produced the wonderful things that we see all about +us, and which distinguishes the man from the brute creation." + +"But I have read of a great many men who made millions and millions and +who never did any of the things you have just referred to," answered +Harry. + +"Then do you think they are any better than the pirates were?" + +Notwithstanding the exciting times, food was a necessity, and it had to +be found and prepared. It could not be bought. All the gold in the cave +would not purchase a single meal. More barley had to be ground and the +stock of honey was almost exhausted. Their duties in the shop, +consequent on the haste exhibited to get the boat and weapons ready, +contributed to the low state of supplies. + +George announced that there was less than two pounds of the honey left, +and proposed that a trip be taken to the flats, where the Professor had +found the sugar cane. All joined in the journey to the cane field, and +Angel was invited to join, which invitation was accepted by him +gleefully. + +The bolos were taken for the purpose of cutting the cane, and on the way +George's inevitable question point was in evidence. "What did people use +for sweetening purposes before cane was discovered?" + +"Honey was the principal source of the world's sweets. But cane is not +the only kind of vegetable from which the principle has been extracted. +There are many kinds of reeds which furnish a sweetish substance. Sugar +cane was first made known in eastern Europe by the conquest of Alexander +the Great. Nearchus, one of his admirals, in sailing down the Indus, +found the reed, and it was, previous to that time, known throughout the +greater part of India. He described it as a kind of honey growing in +canes and reeds. From this you may infer that honey was the principal +source of sweets in his time." + +"What are the other principal plants or substances that sugar is made +from?" + +"Mainly from beet, tubers of various kinds, such as the common dahlias, +and numerous vegetables, from milk, fruit, gum arabic, as well as fish." + +"I have heard it said that sugar contains all that is necessary to +sustain life. Is that true?" + +"That is a mistaken idea. It will sustain life for quite a time and with +the addition of nitrogenous matter has great fattening properties, but +without that it is not valuable as food." + +"What do you mean by nitrogenous matter?" + +"Meat, fish, eggs, milk, beans, peas, and the like, all contain a large +amount of nitrogen." + +"I remember my arm being burned on one occasion, and mother made a syrup +out of sugar and put it on. In what way was the sugar beneficial?" + +"In the first place, sugar is one of the most powerful antiseptics +known. It acts, therefore, as an aid to healing, since it protects the +wound from foreign substances and from poisonous and harmful germs. In +the next place, it is a great preservative for either fruit or flesh." + +The cane was cut close to the root, and the top and leaves trimmed off. +Within several hours a full load was thus procured. The boys enjoyed the +pith, and George playfully gave some to Angel. His surprise knew no +bounds. When he knew what the cane was good for, he simply gorged on it. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 16. Cane Crusher._] + +Harry at once set to work on turning up two rollers from hickory, the +rollers being eight inches in diameter, and eighteen inches long, and +each being provided with a spindle four inches in diameter. One end of +each of the spindles was longer than the other, so pulleys could be +attached, the object being to provide a means whereby they might be +turned by suitable belts from the water wheel. In addition, the top +roller was made so it would yield, and had levers resting on the +spindles, and provided with weights, so the rollers would press out the +juice, whatever the quantity that might be placed between the rollers. + +It was really a simple little machine to put up, but it required a day +for both of them. Vessels were now provided for the juice, and when they +were filled, the Professor suggested that a little lime should be put +into the juice, after it had been strained through the ramie cloth. + +"What is the object of putting in lime?" + +"To precipitate the impurities." + +The action of the lime was plainly visible, and after it had been +allowed to settle, the clarified portion was drawn off, and the process +of boiling down was proceeded with. As fast as one of the vessels was +boiled down, more of the cane was crushed, the juice being dipped from +one vessel to the second one, until the entire load was crushed and the +juice boiled down to a thick consistency. + +Here was molasses, at any rate a good substitute for honey, and it was +so homelike to get the real article. That night they had molasses candy. +It felt like old times. It was a real candy pulling, and no one enjoyed +it more than Angel. From the moment he had the first taste of the pulp +of the cane, he was the most interested one of the party. But the fun +came the next morning, when George brought out, for his benefit, some of +the taffy which had been set out to harden. The chuckle which he +emitted, when he tried to pry off a piece of the sweet morsel, was too +amusing for words. + +When the entire amount of juice had been boiled down and it had readied +the point where it had the appearance of granulating, the fire was +withdrawn, and the whole mass stirred until it was cooled, and the +result was a fine sample of beautiful brown sugar which weighed +forty-three pounds. + +Nevertheless food was an important item in their preparations, the +necessities for doing everything in their power to insure the success of +the maritime enterprise. One of the most valuable adjuncts for sailing +is a compass. No attempt had been made to produce the implement, and +when the needs of the expedition were being discussed, Harry was curious +to know the reason why the compass always pointed north and south. + +The Professor was very much interested in all electrical phenomena and +replied: "The earth is a huge magnet, and any body which is magnetized +has a north and a south pole. The needle which is also a magnetized body +has, in like manner, a north and a south pole." + +"But in what manner does that make the needle point in one way only?" + +"Electricity is a very curious thing. While the current unquestionably +moves from one end to the other of a conductor, it also exhibits itself +in the form of rings around the wire. This may not be understood in the +absence of a sketch. For that purpose I make a drawing (Fig. 17) which +shows a conductor (A), through which a current is passing, and this +current is represented by the spiral line (B) which goes around the +conductor." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 17. A MAGNET_] + +"Well, is magnetism the same as electricity?" + +"Both exhibit the same manifestations. Magnetism is nothing more than a +body charged with electricity. The electricity, which appears to travel +around the conductor (A), extends out for some distance from its body, +and produces what is called a magnetic field. This is the case whether +the magnet is a permanent one, like the earth, or whether the conductor +is charged by a dynamo." + +"What is the difference between the north and the south pole?" + +"There is really no difference. The terms north or south and positive or +negative are mere relative designations, and are distinguished simply by +the movement or direction of the travel of the current. You will +remember when we made the battery, it was shown that the current, +outside of the battery, moved from the positive to the negative pole. +That was merely stating that it moved from the north to the south pole +outside of the earth, and from the south to the north pole inside of the +earth. The current is, therefore, from one magnetic pole to the other." + +"What I cannot understand is why the magnetic poles should be at the +north pole and at the south pole." + +"The magnetic poles are not at the poles of the rotation of the earth, +but hundreds of miles away, to one side of the poles on which the earth +rotates; but they are near enough to the real poles, for all purposes, +so that the needle points to what we call the north pole of the earth. +Any magnetized body must have these two opposite poles. If it is a body, +like a bar of iron, one end is called north and the other south. Look at +this other sketch (Fig. 18) and you will see how the currents flow in +the two magnets. In this case the large body (E) represents the earth +and the small body (M) the magnet. Now notice that the current going +around the large body moves to the right, or to the north pole, whereas +the current in the small magnet (M) flows in the opposite direction." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 18. MAGNETIC INDUCTION_] + +"And does the current flowing around the bars, as you have shown, make +the small magnet turn around so that it is always parallel with the +large magnet, and make the north pole of one magnet at the same end with +the south pole of the other magnet?" + +"Yes; to make it still clearer, I make two more drawings (Figs. 19 and +19a), in which two sets of magnets are shown. In the first of these +pairs of magnets (Fig. 19), the two north poles approach each other, and +the two south poles are opposite each other. The currents, if you will +notice, at the north poles move toward each other, and at the south +poles move away from each other. They are, therefore, acting against +each other, and the result will be that the magnets will move away from +each other. If, now, one of the magnets is turned so the poles of one +magnet approach the opposite poles of the other magnet, as shown in the +second view (Fig. 19a), they will attract each other, because the +current is permitted to flow through the two magnets in the same +direction without one conflicting with the other." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 19. Fig. 19a. THE TWO MAGNETS_] + +"Is that the reason it is stated that likes repel and unlikes attract?" + +"Yes." + +In order to take advantage of this knowledge, knowing that the earth is +a great permanent magnet, it was necessary to make a small magnet, and +so suspend it that it would turn freely, and the magnetic north and +south could then be determined. + +To do this the battery which had been previously made was brought into +play. George took a hand in the work, and while they were preparing the +metal for the little bar, said: "You spoke about a permanent magnet. +What other kinds of magnets are there?" + +"Magnets are permanent or temporary. A permanent magnet is one in which +the electricity resides, or remains, as it does in the earth. A +temporary magnet is one which has magnetism imparted to it only while a +current of electricity is passing around it." + +"How is the current made to pass around it?" + +"By wrapping an insulated wire around it, and sending a current through +the wire. When that is done the same thing is done to the bar as the bar +of the permanent magnet exhibits. As soon, however, as the current +through the wire ceases, the bar is again demagnetized. That is, it +ceases to be a magnet." + +"We have the small bars ready, Professor. What is the next step?" + +"It must be hardened so as to make it a flinty steel. The harder the +better, so that it will preserve the magnetism imparted to it." + +"Is that the better way to make the temporary magnet?" + +"No; in that case the bar should be of the softest iron. Remember, +therefore, that for a permanent magnet, use the hardest steel, and for a +temporary one, the softest iron." + +"Then as we want to make a permanent magnet, must we harden both of the +bars?" + +"No; for our uses, one must be left soft, because on that we shall want +to wind some insulated wire to make a temporary magnet." + +The small amount of wire which was on hand was then coated with a thin +layer of the ramie fiber, which was carefully wrapped around, so that +the different layers of wire could not touch each other. When this was +completed, a spool was constructed, which fitted over the little bar or +rod, because they were rounded off, and one end of the soft iron rod +extended out beyond the spool. + +The opposite ends of the winding were then brought out and attached to +the terminal wires of the battery. A test showed that the magnet thus +made would readily pick up pieces of iron or steel. The Professor then +took the hardened steel rod, through which a small hole had been bored, +midway between its ends, and laying it down on the table, the projecting +end of the temporary magnet which projected from the spool was put into +contact with the hard steel rod, and slowly drawn along to the end. The +soft bar magnet was then raised up and again repeated, as shown in the +drawing (Fig. 20), where the dotted line (A) represents the movement of +the end of the temporary magnet. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 20. MAKING A PERMANENT MAGNET_] + +This was repeated over and over a great many times, and finally the hard +steel bar was found to have a charge of magnetism, and for the purpose +of providing a means for holding the magnetism, a C-shaped piece of iron +was put on the bar, as shown in the detached figure. + +"Is that the reason," asked Harry, "why a small piece of metal is always +put across the ends of a horseshoe magnet when it is not in use?" + +"Yes." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +STARTING ON THE VOYAGE TO THE WEST + + +"If I remember correctly, you stated some time ago, Professor, that the +barometer indicated the pressure of the atmosphere, and in that way it +was useful in letting us know what the weather would be. Before we sail, +would it not be well to make one of them? If we had possession of one of +the articles, we might not have been caught in the storm the first time +we took out No. 3." + +"That is a good suggestion. I intended to propose that, because with the +barometer and the compass we shall be equipped with two of the most +useful instruments needed." + +"I cannot comprehend how the air pressure has anything to do with the +weather. Is the air pressure really greater at one time than at +another?" + +"Heated air ascends, does it not?" + +"Yes; I can understand that." + +"As it ascends it is, therefore, lighter at that point than normally. On +the other hand, moist air is heavier than dry air. These two conditions +would be indicated by the barometric column, would they not?" + +"I presume they would; but when the air is moisture laden we don't need +a barometer to tell it is going to rain. We know it and feel it. What I +particularly wanted to know was how the barometer by its actions would +indicate it ahead for any length of time." + +"The barometer does not indicate with any degree of accuracy on land; +but on sea it has a much better application. The instrument shows the +present pressure of the atmosphere, and its variations correspond to +atmospherical changes which have already taken place, the effects of +which may follow their cause at a greater or less interval." + +"Then how could it be ascertained from the instrument when there would +be a storm or rain?" + +"After a continuance of dry weather, if the barometer begins to fall +slowly and steadily, rain will certainly ensue; but if the fine weather +has been of long duration, and the mercury may fall for two or three +days before any perceptible change takes place; the more time elapses +before the rain comes, the longer the wet weather is likely to last." + +"Then what indicates dry weather?" + +"If, after a great deal of wet weather, with the barometer below its +mean height, the mercury begins to rise steadily and slowly, fine +weather will come, though two or three wet days may first elapse; and +the fine weather will be more permanent in proportion to the length of +time that passes before the perceptible change takes place." + +"Is this the case at all times of the year?" + +"The seasons affect the barometer, it is true. A sudden fall of the +barometer in the autumn or in the spring indicates wind; in the summer +or in hot weather it prognosticates a thunderstorm; in winter, after +frost, a sudden fall of the mercury shows a change of wind or a thaw +with rain; but in a continued frost a rise of mercury indicates +approaching snow." + +"It seems, then, that a man must be pretty well versed in the weather to +be able to read the signs." + +"That is a correct observation. The instrument in the hands of one who +has had experience with its use is absolutely necessary; it is not a +very satisfying device for those who do not take the time or trouble to +read all the signs, and note all the indications." + +As detailed in a preceding chapter, the hardened steel rod for the +compass was brought out for the purpose of securing it in a little case, +so that it might be utilized to give them the true north. + +It was a difficult task to find a means of suspending it, for the reason +that they had no tools which would make fine and carefully pivoted +balances, but eventually this was done, and they were gratified to see +the little rod or bar swing around and point north and south. + +The work of arranging suitable closets for the various provisions and +providing a miniature kitchen was the next thing in order. This occupied +several days. Instead of taking the bedding in their house, it was +decided that new mattresses should be made up from the barley, of which +there was quite a quantity on hand. + +One of the receptacles taken from the cave was a copper jar, which held +five gallons of water. A top was made for this which could be sealed up, +to hold a reserve supply of water. In addition two other vessels were +also provided for the regular supply, and also fitted with covers, so +that they had about ten gallons, an amount which was considered +sufficient. + +The matter of fuel was a more difficult one to solve, unless they +intended to prepare most of the food before starting; but George +insisted that the small stove should be put aboard, and about fifty +pounds of the coal stowed away. + +"How long do you think we should provision for?" was George's inquiry, +as they were carrying the various things aboard. + +Harry had no ideas on the subject, but the Professor ventured the +opinion that at least two weeks' supply should be arranged for. + +This conclusion rather startled the boys, who had not expected more than +a few days' trip, and when they questioned him about his reasons for +making the statement, he said: "Did you ever hear of the old lady who +attended a special meeting of prayer for rain? She came with an +umbrella, and the people laughed and chided her. The minister reproved +them, saying: 'She, at least, has faith, which you have not.' We are +going for two purposes: one is to learn something about the island we +are on, and the other to rescue our companions if they can be found. We +couldn't rescue them and let them starve." + +Those words impressed them as nothing theretofore had, that the +Professor believed they were really going to find their former +shipmates, and that they would have stirring times before them. + +Nothing so stimulates the actions of men, or boys, as the prospect of +adventure. Their trip had a double meaning, and it is not venturing too +much to say that their feelings were most tense during the entire period +in which they were engaged at the task of fitting out the little ship. + +At last the day was set for the departure. The cattle could take care of +themselves. A tablet was prepared to be put up on their dwelling, +stating who were the owners of the habitation, their present +destination, and briefly relating the knowledge they possessed of the +inhabitants of the island, a statement of the direction they had taken, +and the kind of boat to which they trusted their destiny, and when they +expected to return. + +A copy of this was then carried to the pole on Observation Hill, and +nailed to the mast, to replace the small tablet which had hitherto +filled that place. They were to launch the boat for the start on the +morrow. + +That night a storm blew up from the west, as most of the winds had +previously blown from that quarter during the past month. The storm was +severe during the entire night, and abated somewhat in the forenoon, but +it again increased in fury before noon and continued with more or less +vigor all that day and during the night. + +"I am afraid this storm will prevent us from starting for several days, +on account of its widespread character. The sea for hundreds of miles +has been subject to this monsoon, and we would have a very rough time +until the sea quiets down." + +The delay was a bitter thing for the boys. Expectation had run high. +Anticipation doesn't mildly or easily brook waiting. They did not know +what to do, or how to pass the time in the interim. It was such a new +and trying condition for them. + +The Professor noticed how they chafed under the restraint, but +apparently took no heed of it. However, he encouraged them in every +effort they made to divert themselves and to occupy their minds during +the waiting period. + +During one of these spells which come on all more or less during such +trying hours, George could not hold in any longer, but broke out +impatiently: "What is the use of waiting any longer? The storm may keep +up for a week." + +"Then do you think we had better venture a start under these +conditions?" + +George thought a while. He appreciated the risk. Harry, too, was anxious +and nervous, and expressed a willingness to take the risk. + +"Let me put another side to the question," said the Professor. "We are +perfectly safe here. You take no risks by remaining. You have in the +cave treasure that will make you millionaires. You cannot afford to take +any risks. If we knew something of the conditions on the island, and had +a certain knowledge that our comrades were in danger, the considerations +I have named should not deter us from starting. But with all these +things in the dark, and with the monsoons likely to break out again at +any time, the question is whether we can afford to risk the safety of +the enterprise because of impatience at delay." + +"Yes," answered Harry. "I have thought of these things, and I feel that +the Professor's advice should be followed." + +The boys were particularly surprised that he should refer to the money +in the cave as a reason why they should consider their actions in the +matter. It was so unlike him to refer to any sordid considerations as a +reason for not performing a great duty. + +"I would also remind you that one of the greatest boons ever given to +the great investigators of the world came through delays. Time is a +wonderful reasoner. It is also a great modifier of events. Darwin was +prevented for twenty years in promulgating his great thesis; some of the +most marvelous inventions took years to bring out and develop into such +a state as to make them acceptable to the world. Delays, patiently +borne, make strong men. The impetuous think they represent wasted +opportunities. Davy Crockett enunciated one of the greatest principles +of human action when he said, 'Be sure you are right, then go ahead.' It +was only another way of advising against recklessness or impatience in +any enterprise." + +Thus three days passed, and not without misgivings, the signal was given +for the start. Angel accompanied them, and with a new flag which the +days of leisure had given them an opportunity to prepare, the little +craft sailed down the waters of Cataract, in a shining sun, bound for a +haven which might mean rest, or to a shore which might offer no welcome +to them. The wind was coming mildly from the north, and when they had +cleared the shore line and were beyond the influence of the swells, +their course was directed to the west. Several miles beyond was a point +which projected out to sea; they could see this plainly from Observation +Hill, and during the last long trip inland they reached the sea beyond +this cape. + +The shore line beyond was absolutely unknown to them, but it extended to +the west as far as they could see, and when night set in the faint mist +prevented them from judging how much farther it ran in that direction. + +Without proper instruments at sea, distance is always a difficult matter +to judge, and the boys were constantly venturing guesses as to the +distance traveled. The start was made shortly after nine o'clock, and it +was now past six in the evening. + +"How far do you think we have gone during the day?" was George's +question. + +The Professor made a mental calculation before replying. "If we have +traveled at the same speed during the entire course that we made during +the first three miles to the cape, we have gone about thirty miles." + +"Do you know it is three miles to the cape?" + +"Yes, it is approximately that distance. I measured it by triangulation +some time ago, using our house and Observation Hill as the base line." + +The boys had neglected to take this precaution. + +"What was your object in doing that?" + +"So that we might have some means to observe the speed our boat could +make. If we knew the speed of the wind, we might be able to calculate +our distance." + +"But the wind has been coming from the north and we are sailing due +west. Would not the difference in the speed of the wind make a +difference in the speed of the boat?" + +"It was for that reason I stated if our rate of travel was the same we +would have made that distance. The wind has been variable at different +points along the coast, so that our average may have been four miles per +hour." + +"At what speed has the wind been during the day; I mean the average +speed?" + +"Less than eight miles an hour?" + +"If the wind had been coming from the east we could have made much +better time, and we might then have been near the mouth of the West +River," was Harry's conclusion. + +"Why do you think we should have made better time?" asked the Professor. + +"Because we should then have been going with the wind." + +"You are entirely wrong in your assumption. Sailing ships travel faster +when tacking than when sailing with the wind." + +The boys looked at the Professor in astonishment. + +"It does not seem possible," replied George, "that any movement of the +wind pushing sidewise could be more effective than a pressure straight +ahead. Can you explain the reason for the statement?" + +"When the wind blows straight against a sail, certain eddies are +produced which cause a convolute stream around its edges. These currents +are counter to the forward movement of the vessel. Assuming that this +normal pressure of the wind is 1,000 pounds, it is estimated that fully +half is lost in effectiveness. On the other hand, if the ship is moving +forward at right angles to the direction of the wind, and the sail is +set at forty-five degrees, that is what is called a tack; while it has +only about six-sevenths the surface that it had when going with the +wind, the sail is constantly going into new wind and, therefore, the +pressure is a constant one and most efficiently applied to the surface." + +"Do you mean by this that if I hold up a sail so that the wind blows +flat against it, the pressure will not be as great as if I held it at an +angle?" + +[Illustration: _Fig. 21. Fig. 22. ILLUSTRATING WIND PRESSURE_] + +"No; I had reference to a moving object. I can better explain the +phenomenon by illustrating the two conditions: In the drawing (Fig. 21), +let A represent a sail with 100 square feet of surface. The darts (1) +represent the wind blowing dead against it. This is called the normal +position. You will see the darts representing the direction of the +movement of the wind. Now look at the next sketch (Fig. 22). Here the +sail (B) is put at an angle of forty-five degrees from the direction of +the wind. The sail is still the same size vertically, but it is somewhat +smaller horizontally across the line (C), this diminution in size being +about one-seventh of the entire area. The darts (D) in both cases +represent the movement of the boat, and the darts (2) in the last sketch +show the wind striking the sail at an angle." + +"In the first sketch the darts (1) strike the sail normally, as you say, +in what way do the darts (2) in the next figure strike the sail?" + +"At an angle of incidence. If you will notice the behavior of the wind +in the first view it will be seen that the wind curves around the edges +of the sail, and strikes against the back of it, and thus produces the +retarding effect I referred to. On the other hand, by examining the +second sketch, the darts (2) plainly show their course across the sail +diverted from their straight source, and behind the bulging sail the air +does not press against the sail, but tries to continue in a straight +line. As a result a partial vacuum is formed along the region designated +by E, and this produces a most effective pull, since the sail constantly +tries to move forward and fill this vacuum. Is this made clear to you?" + +"I can plainly see now what the action of the air is, but does the air +push just as hard against each square foot when it is at an angle as +when it is blowing against it straight?" + +"That is a good observation, and one that might ordinarily be +overlooked. No, it does not, but the difference can be readily +calculated." + +"Then supposing the sail to be 10 feet square, and the wind is blowing +against it straight, as in the first sketch, at the rate of twenty miles +an hour; what pressure would there be against the entire sail?" + +"At that speed of wind the pressure on each square foot of surface is 2 +pounds, and this multiplied by 100 equals 200 pounds." + +"When it is at forty-five degrees, what is the pressure on each square +foot?" + +"This is determined in the following manner: Square the speed of the +wind, which means multiplying 20 by 20, and this produces the square, +400. In mathematics, as in many of the sciences, a constant is employed. +A constant is a figure which never varies. In this case the constant is +designated by the decimal .005. That means 5/1000th, or reduced to its +lowest denomination, 1/200th. If, now, we divide 400 by 1/200, the +result will be 2 pounds. This figure thus represents the pressure of air +on each square foot of surface, which, multiplied by the sail area, 100 +square feet, makes 200 pounds." + +"If that is the push when it is normal, what will it be at 45 degrees?" + +"Each angle of incidence has its own figure, or coefficient, or for your +better understanding, value, and the value at 45 degrees is .666. So +that by multiplying 200 by this value, we get a total pressure of 133.2 +pounds." + +"These figures are used a great deal in flying machines; are they not?" + +"Yes; and that is a subject which we might pursue, but there are some +things right ahead that may for the present interest us more." + +Through the haze which had now settled down, a faint outline of land was +made out in the distance. The course was altered to the northeast, and +after a quarter-hour sail, land was again espied ahead, so that to avoid +the shore the course was taken due north. This was evidence that the +land projected northwardly, and the Professor suggested that the effort +should be made to chart as accurately as possible the shore line. This +could be done mentally. + +"I had forgotten to take any note," said Harry. "What is the proper +thing to observe in making these calculations?" + +"Two things must always be uppermost in the mind of the explorer on the +sea: First the time, and second the speed. Time can always be accurately +determined, but the question of speed can come by experience only. A +good sailor can very accurately determine speed by an examination of the +passing water, where the sea is comparatively calm. I have known where +the distances have been thus estimated within a hundred feet in each +mile in a ten-mile course, and where the speeds were varied along the +route. Then, a good observer must have the gift of direction. If he has +sailed one hour at a certain speed in a given direction his mental chart +may be of the greatest service to him. In our case it would be +invaluable. It is a quality well worth our effort to acquire." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A TERRIBLE VOYAGE AND THE SHIPWRECK + + +The shadows of night were now upon them. How vividly it recalled to +their minds the horrors of the five days and nights during which they +were tossed about in the little lifeboat a year before. Then they were +helpless, and now strong. At that time everything was dark and gloomy, +without a ray of hope. Contrast the situation at this time. + +What a gratification it must have been to look back during the past +twelve months and mentally calculate what they had accomplished. They +had delved in many of the hidden mysteries of nature and learned the +secrets. Such knowledge had been put to use. They had discovered many +things that gave them pleasure, but in doing so found others that +startled and grieved them. Things inexplainable and impossible to fathom +had crossed their paths on almost every side. + +But they were now doing the work of men. The Professor knew how they had +developed, and grown brave and strong. He knew it better than the boys +could realize themselves. What a source of pleasure it must have been to +the kindly faced, gray-haired Professor, as he looked at his charges in +admiration and love. Could anything be more inspiring than the +contemplation of the work he had done? + +And now the inevitable charting board was brought out, and the plan +adopted which would enable them to trace the coast line. It was +explained that all sailing was by the points of the compass, and for +this purpose the compass was made to correspond with the regulation +instrument. This is shown in Fig. 23. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 23. MARINER'S COMPASS_] + +The four cardinal points are north, south, east and west. Exactly midway +between each of the four points are the divisions designated northeast, +southeast, southwest and northwest. Then, again, intermediate, the last +divisions and the cardinal points are other markings which show that the +angles are nearer one of the cardinal points than the other, so that a +course may be marked off, by the compass, which, if followed for a +certain time, and the speed of that period determined, can be traced and +thus marked out on paper so that the outline of the coast can thereby be +laid out. + +[Illustration: _The Northern Shore OF WONDER ISLAND. Chart showing Voyage +in "No. 3." Fig. 24._] + +The Professor had the charting board before him. "I have marked our +starting point, which is designated as A. It will be remembered that we +marked a course due west, passing the headland three miles from Cataract +River. This is line 1. When we saw the land ahead of us last night, we +changed our course by the compass to northwest, thus making a new line +of travel, which you see is designated as 2. B was the point where the +turn was made." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 25. THE CHARTING BOARD_] + +"But in what manner did you know how to transfer it to the board?" + +"The board has two lines crossing each other at right angles to +correspond with the two lines on the compass. The compass was put on the +middle of the board, and the upper board turned so that the needle was +on a line with the N----S line." + +The boys now noticed for the first time that there were two boards, one +above the other, and that the lower one was a little larger, and was +attached to the boat. "Why do you have the lower board attached to the +boat and larger than the upper one?" + +"The lower board has on it a section of the compass, and the upper end a +pointer, as you notice, and the line T represents the boat's direction, +so that when the compass was placed on the upper board, the latter was +turned so that it corresponded with the points of the compass. The +little pointer then accurately pointed to northwest, on the lower board, +and by this means the changing of the upper board, so as to keep it due +east and west at all times, will enable us to keep on our course." + +It was a long and weary night. One of them slept while the others were +on duty. The boys knew the time on shipboard, where the day begins at +midnight, and is divided into watches of four hours each, thus making +three watches for the night and three for the day. A bell is struck +every half hour, so that each watch is noted by the eight strokes of the +bell. What is called the dog-watches occur between 4 and 8 P.M., this +period being divided in the first dog-watch between 4 and 6, and the +second dog-watch between 6 and 8. + +"Why should such peculiar times be taken, or the periods be divided up +in that way?" + +"For the very reason that we discussed the arranging of our time of +watch last night; namely, so that one person would not have the same +watch every night. It was agreed by us that one should have three hours' +uninterrupted sleep, while the others were on duty, so that each would +in turn get three hours' work. Our arrangements are somewhat different +from shipboard time, on account of our number, but the principle is the +same." + +During the night the wind changed to the north, so that progress was +slow and required considerable tacking, and when the Professor came on +duty he found the course still to the north, and on questioning Harry, +found that the wind had been rather regular during his watch. Within a +half hour of the time he took charge the western shore faded away, and +the course was directed to NWW, in which direction they continued until +well along in the forenoon. Then, as the land receded again, another +tack was made, WbS, which means West by South. + +The winds, however, were perverse during the second day. After a calm +the wind veered to the west, and when in the afternoon the course was +changed to SSW they had to sail close to the wind, and made slow +progress. + +Let us see what they found on the day's journey along the northern point +which they rounded the second day of the journey. Cliffs, like their +own, were distinctly visible in the evening and during the morning of +the second day, but when morning broke on the third day they saw a +beautiful shore line, and beyond the mountain range which was seen by +them on their land trip to West River. It was now certain that the mouth +of that river had been passed during the night and all regretted this. + +During the whole of the third day they were forced to sail in the teeth +of the wind, which necessitated frequent tacking. Not a sign of human +habitation was seen on this day, but during the night, when the boys +were on duty, they declared that they had seen lights to the south. The +interest was most intense. Were they really rounding the island? + +The course for the opening morning of the fourth day was SWbW, and early +in the day they were not more than a mile from the shore, and then the +shore gradually receded, but the course was not changed. The wind began +to blow with greater force, and came from the southwest. As night +approached it increased, but they continued tacking, hoping that they +might reach the western extremity, and thus be able to run to the east +before the wind. + +Before eight o'clock lights were distinctly visible. They had reached +the vicinity of human habitations. The boys were too excited to think of +the watches which had thus far been observed. Aside from that, the wind +had now reached such a violent stage that it was impossible to make any +headway against it. + +A consultation was had. "We must either turn to the north or go to +shore. I fear this sudden change in the direction of the wind," was the +Professor's opinion of the situation. It would not be wise to risk the +shore. All knew that and sadly they turned the craft to the north. It +was well that they did so. Every moment, it seemed, some new impetus +would be given the wind. It howled on every side of them; the waves +drifted across the little ship, until everything was dripping with +moisture, and the only dry spot was within the little housed enclosure +which had been well protected on the open rear side, thanks to the +watchful suggestions of the Professor. + +To add to their discomfort of mind, the land was not in sight. There was +nothing to steer by except the compass and the chart which had been laid +out. They were now going north over the course that had been traversed +for the past two days--the west coast of the island. + +It was a long, long night. No one slept, because fear and anxiety was +ever with them. They remembered now with vividness the days spent on the +ocean when they were wrecked. It was a terrible succession of hours, +with the wind and the lightning and the rain one continuous orgy. The +Professor sat at the tiller. The sails had been taken down long before. +The impact of the driving storm against the housed structure was +sufficient to drive it forward, so that the vessel could be guided. + +It seemed that every blow against the boat would wrench it to atoms, but +if any part had given way it was not apparent. Harry, who sat nearest +the housed structure, suddenly sprang up, and pointing down, cried out: +"It is leaking; look how it boils!" It was forethought on the part of +the Professor to put in a supply of the oakum used for caulking +purposes. Harry sprang for it, and George grasped the bailing pan. After +a struggle a sufficient amount was driven into interstices to keep out +at least a portion of the seepage. This knowledge was most oppressive. +When a boat of this kind once springs a leak, due to a severe wrench of +the shell itself, it is a difficult matter to remedy it, without +structurally strengthening it. + +Morning was now appearing, and still no land appeared in sight. More +leaks appeared, and the boys were now constantly bailing and repairing. +The Professor had held the tiller for more than six hours, but he did +not appear to be exhausted. At every attempt of the boys to relieve him, +he only said that they had more important work in bailing and caulking. + +He finally changed the course due east, and it was more by luck than +exact calculation that they made out the northern end of the island +which was passed the first night out. In one night they had traveled a +distance coming back that required two days and nights to traverse in +the other direction. As it was they were headed for the cliffs at the +point of land, and it must be avoided. + +Harry saw the danger, and went back to consult the Professor. He had the +tiller firmly in his grasp, and his body bent over it to keep it steady; +but when Harry reached him, and touched him, there was no response. +Almost frantic, he cried to George: "Come here, quickly; something is +the matter!" + +George was there in an instant, and caught up the Professor, while Harry +grasped the tiller, as it was released, and turned it to starboard. The +little boat responded, but Harry knew that if turned too far, the wind +might catch it on the beam and crush it to atoms. + +The Professor had fainted, and when George finally revived him, he +looked about, and seeing Harry at the tiller, told him that he must turn +to the left to avoid the cliffs, and when he was advised of what had +bean done, he grasped Harry's hand, and commended him for the knowledge +and foresight which had been exhibited in that trying moment. + +The cliffs were ahead and to the right. The crucial time must come +within the next half hour. The point must not only be cleared, but they +must pass it at a distance beyond the influence of the powerful swells +and waves, which are always present at points situated like this. The +storm was from the west, and the promontory pointed to the north. Under +the circumstances, the sea at the end of the land was a raging +maelstrom, and the counter influence of the raging waves, beyond the +point, offered as great a danger as at its extremity. + +And now the leaks appeared at every side. Despair almost overtook Harry, +and he moved from one point to the next with the oakum and the caulking +tool. The Professor had insisted on again taking the helm. He had been +refreshed by the few moments' relaxation. Slowly he moved over to the +tiller. Would he ever make it? The boys stopped their work, fascinated +with the nerve-racking intensity of it. They knew the point had been +passed. The Professor smiled, and held up his hand as a signal, and the +boys rushed to him and actually cried, as he put his arms about them. + +It must not be imagined that they were out of their peril now. Nearly a +foot of water was in the bottom. The storm was, in a measure, blanketed +by the cliffs, and there was now no alternative but to reach the shore. +It was fortunate that they were on the lee side of the land, but even +there the waves rolled up on the shore, and the Professor knew that any +landing which might be made would be hazardous in the extreme. + +The vessel was approaching a shelving beach. Fortunately, from what +could be distinguished of its character, it was not a broken or rocky +shore. + +"Boys, can you put up the mainsail?" The Professor's voice had a +wonderful ring to it, for one so nearly exhausted. Without waiting to +question they sprang to the halliards and drew it up, while the boat in +the meantime was turned to port to ease the operation. + +The boys looked on in wonder as the tiller was turned and, when the boat +had gained headway, was pointed to the shore. It fairly darted through +the surf and the billows which marked the shore line, but before the +boat touched the beach, the Professor motioned them to come back. "Now +hold fast, when we strike." + +In another instant they seemed to be lifted by a giant wave, and as it +receded the boat, impelled forwardly by the sail, struck the sand of the +beach the moment after the tiller had been brought hard to port. The +result was that the boat was now spun around with its stern toward the +oncoming wind, but the impact was so great that the entire left side of +the little ship was crushed like an egg shell. + +"Release the boom, quickly!" + +When that had been done the wrecked vessel was still, and the Professor +was lifted out of the boat, but he stood there grasping the side, too +stiff to move, but with that same smile on his countenance which had +told the boys on so many occasions before, how gratified he was at their +safety. + +Poor Angel was actually a wreck. He had remained within the housed +enclosure ever since the storm began. When the rocking and tossing of +the boat ceased, and he heard nothing but the beating wind, he could not +understand what had happened. + +All had forgotten the little animal. George was the first to go to his +rescue, and found him crouching in the extreme end of the enclosure. +After some coaxing he moved toward George, and when he was led out and +saw about him on one side the raging waves and on the other side the +land, his chatter turned to a chuckle, and he leaped to the land, +shambled up the bank, and catching the limb of the nearest tree, was +soon in its top, as happy as though ocean storms were unknown. + +Meals had been forgotten since the day before. The boat was so high up +on the beach that they had no fears for the waves. Hunger asserted +itself now, and the moment the stove was brought out, Angel was down in +a moment, came over to George, and looked up inquiringly into his face. +It was such a comical situation, coming so close upon the heels of their +great catastrophe, that he could not help laughing. He knew what that +look meant, and Angel had more than the usual share of sugar. That with +the nuts, of which there was always an abundant supply, was a feast for +the little fellow. + +After the meal a careful examination was made of the boat. The entire +left side, from the bow to a third of the way back from the midship +bulge, was broken to atoms. The inside of the boat was filled with sand +which had been driven in when the impact took place. To repair it would +be impossible without suitable lumber, to say nothing of tools. They sat +down, not with a feeling of despair, so that they might the better form +a judgment as to the wisest course to pursue. + +"What interests me most," said George, "is to know where we are. Do you +think we are anywhere near West River?" + +The Professor sat there musing, but did not answer. Harry ventured the +opinion that they must be far east of the mouth of that river. + +Finally the Professor gave his views: "It is simply impossible for us to +speculate on the course of the river, because we were unfortunate enough +to pass it by in the night. It seems to me more probable, however, that +it finds its way to the sea to the east of the point we came around." + +"What reason have you for thinking so?" + +"Simply because the mountains were not, apparently, far inland, and it +seems to me that the promontory is merely an extension of the mountains +or the high ridge we saw." + +"I would certainly feel more comfortable," continued George "if I knew +we were anywhere near the river." + +But some decision must be made, and that without delay. If they were +near West River the distance home was fully seventy-five miles. +Preparations must be made for the trip on foot. The boat was, probably, +in as safe a condition as it could be higher up, nevertheless it was +concluded to take no chances, and all the provisions were removed, and +by means of levers and blocks, it was carried inland fully thirty feet +farther. A good supply of provisions was then taken, the guns and +ammunition removed, and put in separate piles, and arranged in +convenient packages for easy transportation. + +The residue was carefully stored within the housed enclosure, and +carefully covered over. What grieved them most was the bedding, which +must be left, but the Professor insisted that all the articles of ramie, +which would afford some covering, should be taken along. They would now +be compelled to sleep in the open air, with nothing else to cover them. + +With a last look at their ship, they moved toward the east with heavy +hearts. + +Harry stopped before they had gone far. "It occurs to me that we ought +to put some inscription on the boat. If any of our friends should +discover the boat it might guide them to us." + +"That is a capital idea," answered the Professor; and they returned to +put up the proper notice. + +It was past noon, but they hoped to cover at least ten miles before +evening should set in, but the way was rough and broken. "I think," +mused the Professor, as they halted on the journey, "we made a mistake +in not following the seashore. The only reason that prompted me to take +this course was the appearance of the shore to the east of our landing +place. It looked so uninviting that I felt sure we should find traveling +inland more comfortable." + +During the first five miles of the journey the ascent was gradual, but +not steep, at any place, but now the land gradually showed a change in +character, growing smoother and more open, and they knew the grade had +changed and was taking them down to a lower level. + +Before evening came, emerging from a light wood, great was the delight +at seeing a beautiful river before them. It was a broad stream, and they +divined that it must be the West River, which, they had so longed to +reach. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE RETURN TRIP. THE ORANG-OUTAN + + +Here they were on the banks of a broad stream, tired and hungry. The +experiences which they had gone through made the task of seeking +suitable shelter an easy one. An entire month of preparation had been +wasted. Aside from the lights which were seen on the fourth day on the +western shore, they had no more knowledge than when they started. It +seemed to be very discouraging. + +But they were going home. This was the most comforting thought and it +made up for a great deal of the disappointments. There was real grief at +the loss of the boat. True, it could be recovered, but all this meant +time and hard work. It should be said, however, that at no time had +either of the boys ever found fault with the tasks that were allotted to +them. + +In this fact the Professor found much comfort. It was a strong factor, +as he knew, in the lives of the boys. It required the highest sort of +courage to bear misfortune without complaining. + +The camp for the night was soon made, and after a hearty meal all +retired for the night. Early in the morning the boys were at work, as +soon as the morning meal was finished, constructing a raft of sufficient +size to carry them across, and when the timbers had been securely lashed +and all their luggage placed aboard, the poles and primitive paddles +gave them a trying half hour to make the trip. + +The stream was rather wide at this point, and it was believed to be near +the sea, and the suggestion was made to follow the stream down for an +hour, to ascertain whether the ocean would appear in view, and if not, +to take up the trail for the east. + +In less than a half hour the sea was in sight. The course was then +directed east, but after traveling the entire forenoon through the most +difficult paths, it was decided to change the course to the south. + +"If you recall, we took a more southerly course when we left the West +River on our overland trip, and found much better traveling." + +The Professor's words recalled the incident, and the result was a change +to the southeast. This was now the sixth day after leaving home in the +No. 3. During the day at least twenty miles was made. Shortly before +night, George, who was in the lead, stopped, and then moved forward, +gazing at the ground intently. + +Harry saw the movement and was at his side in an instant. "What is it?" +It was not necessary to continue his inquiry. Directly ahead was a +slightly cleared space, with a blackened space in the center, where a +fire undoubtedly had been made, and a few bones were still scattered +about as mute evidences of occupation. + +The Professor looked at it a moment, and then smiled. "Don't you +remember our own camp fire?" This was the case. While they could not +remember the particular spot, they knew the old trail had been crossed, +and it was a comfortable, homelike feeling to come across the spot. + +"Let us camp here again," said Harry, as he threw down his pack. On this +occasion they did not have the wagon and the yaks, but they had an ample +supply of food and there was no difficulty in making a fire. + +Their first adventure came about noon of the seventh day. Plenty of +evidences of animals had been found, but they were not eager to hunt. +The trail for home had far more fascination than all the animals on the +island. It was the custom to stop at intervals for rest. During one of +these stops the cracking of bushes was heard, as though produced by a +cautious tread. The boys were alert at once and, with their guns in +hand, moved in the direction of the noises. + +Not two hundred feet away was an immense bear, of the same species they +had shot near that place nine months before. The boys separated, as they +approached, under the guiding direction of the Professor, and when +within seventy-five feet, Harry asked whether or not he should shoot. + +Bruin was slowly moving away, not directly ahead, but as though crossing +Harry's path. When the word was given, Harry took deliberate aim. George +reserved his shot, as advised. The moment the shot struck, the animal +turned, thus exposing a fair mark for George, who now fired. With a howl +at the second shot, the bear turned toward George, who immediately ran +to the right, and on the call of the Professor, circled to the right. + +This brought the animal within range of the Professor's gun, and he +fired. It did not in the least check his pursuit of George, and the +Professor now became alarmed at his safety. Call after call was made to +advise him to turn to the right. + +Harry followed as fast as he could run, and while keeping the animal in +sight, could not approach closely enough to get another shot. While +running, it occurred to him that he had not reloaded, and it would be +impossible to reload while running. + +The Professor realized the situation, and immediately reloaded, and +calling after Harry, told him that he had a charged weapon. Harry heard, +but he was so excited and fearful for George that he could not decide +whether to stop or go on. He could see the bear, but George was not in +sight. + +The Professor followed as rapidly as he could. Harry saw the bear +lumberingly cross a large fallen tree and pass on to the right, and +thinking George had taken that course, did not wait to go up to the +tree. Before the Professor reached Harry, who was now running at right +angles to the course of the Professor, George emerged from his place of +concealment behind the tree and laughed at the sport, which might have +had serious results but for the dead tree. + +You may be sure no further effort was made to follow up the bear, and +they took up the search for their luggage, which had been left behind. +During all this hubbub, Angel had been left with the luggage, and he now +appeared along the trees, swinging from branch to branch, uttering the +most fearful shrieks and chattering, as he was in the habit of doing +when alarmed or excited. + +"Something is after Angel; quick!" called out George, as Angel made his +way over to him. Harry grasped the loaded gun from the Professor and +started toward the direction from which the orang had come, but he +stopped suddenly after going several hundred feet. + +"The bear has our things." The Professor and George came up, and there, +with his powerful claws and massive jaws, was Bruin, devouring their +best morsels and playing havoc with the packages that were piled +together. + +The boys looked at the Professor, and he playfully answered the look by +saying, "We really don't want any bear meat to-day, do we?" George +thought it was a good joke on the hunters, but Harry was angered. "Let +us finish him. See him break that gun?" + +The Professor was busy reloading Harry's gun, which he had exchanged +with him, and handed it to George. They approached, but not close enough +to venture a shot, when the animal deliberately turned away and darted +into the bush. + +What was left of their luggage worth taking could easily be carried by +either of them. Practically all of the food was gone or ruined, and the +bear was recompensed for the little inconvenience by the two pounds or +more of sugar which was taken. + +"Well, boys, everything has its compensations. We have nothing to carry, +and traveling will be easy for the rest of the trip. Let us take a good +laugh over the experience." + +Harry was too much annoyed, first at the failure to hit the brute and +then at the mean trick in eating up and destroying their things while +they were trying to follow him. The Professor suggested that it would be +fun to visit Bruin's house that night when he came home and told his +family what a neat trick he had played on some hunters, and Harry +laughed, but it was an awfully forced effort. + +When evening came they estimated that the distance still to be traveled +could not exceed thirty-five miles, and they were seeking a good spot +for the camp. The Professor was the first to make his appearance with a +small yellow pear, which he held up. + +"What have you found now?" George inquired, as he came running forward +with a branch in his hand. + +"Pears!" exclaimed Harry, as he took it from the Professor's hand. + +"Not exactly a pear; but a fine fruit which we can use to good +advantage. It is the guava." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 26. Guava._] + +"What a beautiful white flower! I did not know that the guava had such a +delightful odor. In what way is it prepared and used?" + +"You will see, by tasting it that the pulp is very aromatic and sweet. +Its principal use is for jellies and preserves, and the rind stewed with +milk makes an excellent marmalade." + +"Have you found many of them?" + +"There are several trees over there, and it seems to me that it is a +good place to put up for the night, and we can gather a quantity of +them." + +Several trees were in sight, about 18 feet high, beautiful branching +specimens, and beneath one of them the camp was made for the night. + +While they were seated the Professor noticed the branch which George had +brought. It was a stem about two feet long, with a lot of leaves on each +side, and at the juncture of the leaves with the stem were rows of what +appeared to be nuts. These were in the form of clusters. + +He picked it up. "I thought I had made a good find in the guava, but +this is still better." + +"The nuts around the stem are what attracted me, and my curiosity was +aroused." + +"You took this from the coffee tree." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 27. Coffee._] + +"Is it the real coffee?" + +"It is the genuine article. I have searched for it from time to time. +Let us go over and see the tree. We must cultivate its acquaintance." + +They responded with alacrity. They were now going to have coffee. The +tree was fully twenty feet high, and the branches extended out +horizontally from all sides. + +"Earlier in the season these nuts, as George called them, looked like +cherries." + +"But where is the coffee?" + +"Inside the berry. Each berry contains two seeds. You know how the +coffee berry looks. Let us open one of them. See, it is smaller than the +ordinary berries, as you know them, but the kind we know are cultivated, +which makes them larger, and fuller in appearance. These will make fine +coffee, however, and I think we shall have to divide our load with the +guavas." + +"Where did coffee originally come from? Is it found in many places +throughout the world?" + +"The plant is supposed to be a native of Arabia in Asia, and of +Abyssinia, in Africa. From Arabia it was carried to most of the tropical +countries, but many varieties have been found in the western hemisphere. +Even in Canada certain kinds of coffee plants are known. It is not, +therefore, a wholly tropical plant. The Abyssinian coffee has been known +from the earliest times." + +"What is regarded as the best kind of coffee?" + +"The best coffee of commerce is the Mocha, and next comes Java, and the +principal coffee center of the world is Brazil." + +On the morning of the eighth day they were awake early, and the boys +began work on the berries. Angel took a hand in the proceedings, and as +soon as he discovered what the boys were after he volunteered to harvest +them. At this time the berries had somewhat hardened, and when Angel +knew what was wanted, his long dextrous fingers were able to strip off +more of the fruit in one stroke than the four hands of the boys. Harry +was on the lower limb, and as fast as he had stripped a supply, would +drop them into the outstretched cloth which the Professor and George +held. + +Angel eyed this proceeding, for a time, and then imitated Harry. How did +he ever learn the art of picking coffee berries? The orang lives +principally on nuts and berries, and the instinct to gather these was a +natural one. + +In an incredible short space of time fully a bushel had been taken off. +It was the original idea of the boys to cut off the limbs, but they had +seen none of the trees before this, and the Professor advised them to +pick the fruit itself. Without Angel's expert help it would have been a +long job. + +With a load of guavas and another of coffee, the five guns, and a few of +the other relics of their ill-fated expedition, was sufficient for the +two days' journey still before them. That afternoon, while resting by +the side of a little stream that flowed to the north, the antics of +Angel attracted attention. He was usually so quiet that no notice was +taken of him. + +He had two peculiar ways of making himself understood. One was a +gurgling sound, which indicated pleasure and contentment; and the other +a chatter, or half a shriek, when intensely excited or alarmed. But now +he did neither of these things. The sounds emitted could not well he +described. + +The sounds were made while springing from branch to branch. When he had +attracted George's attention he ran forward, usually along the branches, +but close to the ground. George followed. Whenever he attempted to go +back to his comrades, Angel would come back, and in his most beseeching +way endeavor to induce George to follow. His actions were well +understood in this respect, because it will be remembered that he +directed the attention to the missing team, and afterwards rediscovered +the trail after it had been lost. + +"Follow him, George, and we will bring the packages," was Harry's +suggestion. + +It was not necessary for them to go far. Beyond, in some large trees, +were three immense orang-outans, intently gazing on the newcomer. George +ran back, crying out: "See the orang-outans in the trees! Isn't this the +place we captured Angel?" + +Harry threw down the load and was by the side of George without a +moment's delay. "Where is Angel? I am afraid this is the last of the +little fellow." And Harry showed his grief. They saw Angel on his way to +the trees, and without waiting for an invitation, was up among the +branches, visiting his friends, and, probably, his parents. + +All stood there awaiting the results breathlessly. Not a word was +spoken. Without hesitation he swung himself to the last limb, on which +the patriarch perched. Not a hand was lifted against him, but they +looked too astonished to speak, even if they could. + +Angel went from one to the other. He petted them, as George had often +petted him. He knew what a caress meant, but his kin did not. It was too +much for George. "Come down, Angel; good boy; come down." And he said it +pathetically, too. + +Not a hand was held out to him, nor did he get any sort of welcome, and +yet he had expected so much, from what he tried to tell George, while on +the way to his old home. It was too much for him. He heard that familiar +voice, and the call that was always a welcome one, and he slowly +descended the tree, not with that springy motion which characterized his +ascent, but hesitatingly and in measured swings. + +He went up to George and leaned against him, and then they knew that +Angel intended to go home with them again. But they could not help +watching the effect of Angel's actions on the animals in the trees. +Ordinarily, they will quickly spring away from any intruders, as they do +not generally consider the trees high enough to give protection. Their +remarkable agility enables them to travel faster by the tree line than +man can follow on foot. + +But now that Angel was again with the boys, all sense of fear seemed to +leave the three creatures in the trees. They looked down at the +proceedings, and as the boys passed by they sat in their specially +prepared seats, as though they knew the care which had been bestowed on +their offspring. + +This little incident affected all more than it is possible to tell. The +animal was really a marvelous character. True, George had spent hours +and days in his education. He knew many of the words, and could execute +missions, and did many things to aid George in the work at home, and it +would have been a trial and a sorrow to miss him. + +The next day would see them home again, and they could hardly restrain +themselves at the thought of it. What if some one should have visited +them while absent? Why might not the savages have found their abode? +These were questions ever uppermost in the minds of all. + +Before noon they reached the Cataract River to the west of the forest. +This seemed like an old friend. And what was more: before they had gone +many miles, the Professor pointed to a clearing, and remarked: "Do you +remember this place?" + +The boys looked about, as they moved forward. "I do not recollect the +place," was George's answer, but Harry now recalled the fight of the +bears, and the honey tree, and without saying a word he ran to the tree, +which was still lying there, and said one word, "Honey." + +George now remembered, and Angel began to gurgle. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE STRANGE VISITOR + + +In the afternoon of the ninth day, emerging from the forests, the first +sight that met their eyes was the flag floating from the top of +Observation Hill. Never before had the flag looked so glorious, and they +could not repress a shout and a cheer. The distance home was at least +four miles, but tired as they were, no one felt like stopping for a +rest. + +Everything at the home seemed quiet and peaceful. The cattle were there, +lazily scattered about, apparently not knowing or caring whether their +masters were absent. The boys were moving along jauntily, happy as +larks, singing snatches of songs, and amusing the Professor with sallies +of wit and humor. + +Angel was just as happy and was enjoying the prospects of coming home. +Long before the home was neared he started off on a race, with George at +his heels. Burdened as he was, it was impossible to keep up with the +animal, so that the latter was at the house long before George came +near. He was surprised to see Angel bounding toward him with his +peculiar chattering that betokened excitement, and he stopped and +hesitated what to do. + +Depositing his load on the ground, he ran back, and signaled to the +others. Angel came up and tried to tell them in his peculiar way of some +danger ahead. Two hundred feet south of the house was a thick growth of +underbrush, and to that the party made its way. + +Arriving there, a consultation was had, on the course of procedure. +Nothing was, apparently, disturbed. No sign of human presence was +manifest. The door which opened to the main room, facing the west, was +closed, as well as the room of the workshop. + +"If anyone is about the premises he must be beyond the house, as it is +evident some signs would show in the house or shop. Prepare your guns +and let us go forward." + +The house was cautiously approached, and reached, and Harry quietly +gained the door, and the secret bolt opened. The door was slowly opened +and he peered in. It was unoccupied, and all rushed in. A small +trap-door on the northern side was now opened, which gave a view toward +the shop and cattle-yard. + +What they saw there startled them beyond measure, for seated on a log, +outside of the cattle-shed, was a man, with a straggling, unkempt beard, +vacantly gazing into space. + +"How shall we attract his attention?" asked Harry, breathlessly. + +"Let us rush out the front door. He is, apparently, alone." + +At the signal, with their guns ready, they filed out, and moved toward +him. He raised his eyes, and at first was a little startled, but again +relaxed, and seemed to take no particular notice of their approach. The +Professor walked toward him, and held out his hand. The stranger made no +motion or protest, either of fear or recognition, and as the Professor's +hand touched him, his hand was involuntarily extended. + +[Illustration: _"The professor walked toward him and held out his +hand"_] + +Not a word was uttered by him. The Professor turned to the boys. "He is +demented, or has lost all knowledge of his condition or surroundings. +Poor fellow!" + +The Professor addressed him. He looked startled at the sound of a human +voice, and as the voices continued, began to look inquiringly at one and +then at the other. He was a man fully fifty years of age, strong, well +built, but somewhat emaciated. His eyes had no luster, the beard was +long and shaggy, and aside from the torn and almost unrecognizable +trousers, the only article of clothing was an equally dilapidated shirt. + +George grasped Harry, excitedly. "Where did he get that shirt? That is +the one we used as our first signal flag, and which we lost five months +ago." Such was indeed the case. The only thing in its torn and tattered +condition, which enabled him to recognize it were the initials of +George, which he had noticed. + +Thus was one of the mysteries explained. Despite every attempt at +conversation, not a word escaped his lips. The Professor took him by the +arm, and led him to the house. He entered and looked around not +particularly interested, but more in curiosity than otherwise. + +"What do you suppose he has been living on, and where has he been +staying?" + +At the suggestion of the Professor, some food was brought, and placed +before him. He gazed at it. A knife and fork were on the table. He +reached for them slowly, and when he had grasped both began to eat +ravenously. He finished without looking up, and when the last morsel was +eaten stared about, and a faint smile appeared, which was the first +facial change that had crossed his features since they met him. + +He was conducted to a reclining chair, and such articles of clothing as +they could find were brought out and laid before him. He gazed on them, +and slowly picked up one after the other. His feet were bare, and +appeared to have been scratched and torn, but they were hardened by +contact with the earth. An old pair of shoes, the ones discarded by the +Professor, when they turned out the first lot of shoes, was set before +him. + +He picked them up and mechanically put them on. "Now let us leave him +alone for a while." They went out, closing the door, and Harry stole +around to the small port which he had opened, and watched the stranger. + +His demeanor did not change after they left; he simply glanced about the +room. When his eyes fell on the table, he arose and cautiously +approached, and suddenly seized the table knife, with just a slight +change of countenance. This he attempted to secrete beneath his ragged +shirt. + +"Do you think he is dangerous?" + +"His malady is a peculiar one, and arises from various causes. I do not +think we need fear him." + +"But see how he took that knife." + +"That was simply an instinct; that of self-protection. Any other +implement would have been as acceptable as a knife. Possibly, the sight +of the knife, temporarily, may have brought back some glimmering +remembrance of his sane moments." + +"Do you think he is insane?" + +"No; it does not appear to be of such a character. He seems to exhibit +loss of memory. Imbecility, idiocy, and lunacy exhibit marked +tendencies, and have been made the careful study of many eminent men, +and it is even now one of the disorders least understood by the medical +fraternity." + +"What is a lunatic?" + +"Blackstone, the great English authority on law, defines it as 'one that +hath had understanding, but by grief, disease, or other accident hath +lost the use of his reason.' This eminent authority also stated that +lunatics may have frequent lucid intervals, and might enjoy the use of +their senses during certain periods of the moon. It is from that source +we are indebted to the still prevailing idea of the moon's influence on +the human mind. That view was exploded long ago, and shown to have no +foundation." + +"What is the difference between a lunatic and an insane person?" + +"The original term was lunatic, in accordance with Blackstone's +definition; but in medical science the terms insanity and mental +alienation have taken its place." + +"Doesn't he act peculiarly? He does not seem to know we are present. +What I cannot understand is, how he knows enough to get anything to +eat." + +"That is a peculiar thing in nature. Here is a man who has, outwardly, +the appearance of an intelligent being, incapable of talking, or +uttering intelligible sounds, with memory so submerged that he doesn't, +likely, recognize his own kind, and yet has been able to find food for +at least five months, to our knowledge. It shows that, irrespective of +mind, nature has implanted some kind of an instinct of preservation in +living beings. The subject is one that has been discussed from many +standpoints, and it can never be exhausted." + +The boys now went over the entire premises, carefully examining every +part. Evidences were plenty to show that the man had slept in the shed +adjoining the stable, and the shells of nuts as well as barley heads +were found around the place he had slept. + +There was everything to indicate that his trials and sufferings on the +island had deranged him. Probably his was a case like many instances +known, where consciousness of self--the absolute loss of memory, had +caused disappearances, and many instances have been recorded where +intelligence finally asserted itself and brought back former +recollections. + +The instinct to clothe himself was shown when they returned. The +Professor went up to him kindly and spoke. The words were repeated in +German and French, but not one word did he utter, nor did he give the +least visible sign of recognition. + +During the afternoon he wandered around from place to place. The boys +were too much fascinated to turn their attention to anything. George +started out for a trip to Observation Hill, accompanied, as usual, by +Angel. The strange man was passed on the way. Without a sign he +followed. George was a little frightened, but soon recovered, as he +walked along unconcernedly. + +They crawled up the steep ascent, instead of going around the gentler +ascent, and when the pole was reached, the stranger for the first time +took any interest in anything he saw. He looked up at the flag, and then +out over the sea, and as he did so, he put up his hand to shade his eyes +from the glare of the sun. This was the only human thing which was +noticed about him. + +When George left, he followed, walking erect, and he could not help +admiring his strong, although drawn, features, and the admirable build +of his frame. He would be an antagonist to fear as an enemy. + +On the return, George stated the occurrence, and the Professor said that +the man was no doubt used to the sea, as his walk betrayed that, and the +incident of shading his eyes is a common one to all seafaring men. + +But now came up the great question of the future course to be followed. +What should be done? The determination to again attempt further +explorations was fixed in the minds of all; but how should it be +conducted? Should they again brave the dangers of the sea, or make the +next trip by land? + +The only means available by sea would be the partially damaged boat, +which was seventy-five miles away, and plans were considered either to +bring it to the Cataract by boat, or to repair it where it lay; either +course had its disadvantages. + +One day the stranger wandered over to the workshop where Harry was +engaged. He had never been inquisitive, as nothing seemed to interest or +appeal to him. When he saw the machinery, the lathe, and, finally, the +electric battery, he stood still and gazed. Slowly he made his way to +the battery which had the terminal wires lying loose. He picked them up, +and brought the ends together, and the spark seemed to fascinate him. +The experiment was repeated several times, but the wires were soon +dropped, and he resumed his usual demeanor. + +Harry ran over to the laboratory, and informed the Professor, who came +at once, and arrived just as he was dropping the wires. + +"The best thing for him is something to do. In this way, the association +with tools, if he has any knowledge of them, may awaken some +recollections of his past. I have watched him for the past three days +and I am sure he is not deranged, in the sense of being demented. Let us +try what employment will do." + +Harry was engaged in dressing a board with a plane when the man came in. +The Professor led him to the bench and placed a plane in his hand, and +by making a motion with his hand and pushing the man's hand along with +the plane, he took notice of the motion and mechanically drew the plane +back and forth. + +He not only planed the board, but he followed up the roughened parts and +finished the job in a workmanlike manner. The saw was placed in his +hands, and he handled this with a facility that surprised both of them. +He did not look like a mechanic, but on the other hand had every +appearance of a literary man, but he was, unquestionably, used to tools. + +After considering the all-important question of the exploring +expedition, which subject was an ever present one, it was agreed that +the wisest course would be a trip by land. They now knew the location of +the inhabitants of the island, and with proper equipment, they ought to +be able properly to defend themselves. Another element which might prove +of value to them was the new acquisition in the man who had come so +unaccountably to their home. + +One of the first things necessary was to give him some name by which he +could be known, and which he would in time recognize. This was debated +over and over, without coming to any conclusion. Eventually, in the +absence of anything better, it was decided to call him simply John. + +When Harry went to the shop where he was at work, he addressed him as +John; and at the uttering of the word started, as though he had been +alarmed. Harry noticed it, and repeated the name several times, with the +same result, and he hastened to inform the Professor of this experience. +The Professor went down without delay, and it was evident from the +actions of the man that he recalled something familiar in the name, as +in every instance he would put his hands to his head and give an +inquiring look. + +"It is my impression that John is his name, as he would be more likely +to remember that than anything else connected with his life. Let us keep +him occupied, and his work may also be the means of bringing back +familiar things." + +The boys, in company with John, set about preparing a good bed for the +newcomer, and he took a part in it most heartily, and seemed to +understand when the Professor pointed to him and the bed that it was +intended for him. + +The interest was more intense when he was taken to the boathouse, which +Harry had opened, and when he saw the boats, his eyes opened wide and +grew brighter, but they suddenly lost their color and he relapsed into +his former state. + +It was truly pitiful to watch him, and when in the evening they sat +together and conversed, they felt that at times he must have gotten some +glimpses of his individuality. + +In the morning when George went out to the cattle pens to milk, he +mechanically grasped a pail and followed, and the milking operation +seemed to be a familiar one to him. Thus, he was a mystery, for the +reason that he seemed to be at home in every direction where it called +for any special activity. This was made the more mystifying when, during +the next day, he wandered over to the laboratory, and his eyes caught +sight of the skulls and the skeletons which were on exhibition. + +He walked over to the skulls, and picking up one poised it on his hand, +slowly turning it around, as though trying to discover what it meant. +The one selected had one side partially crushed, and this attracted his +attention. He placed the fingers of the other hand in the shattered +part, and seemed to realize that some agency must have caused it. The +whole deportment while examining it was that of one who was called upon +to make an examination of it for the purpose of determining the cause of +the injury. + +When he laid it down, he looked at the Professor, who quietly took up +the skull and pointed to the fracture, endeavoring by his conversation +to strike a word or keynote by which some recollection would be started; +but he was mute and soon again became listless. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +AN EXCITING TRIP TO THE FALLS + + +The food supply was now the first thing to consider, as all necessaries +in the way of vegetables, as well as meats, had been exhausted when they +started on the last trip, and a new lot had to be laid in. The matter of +butter was always a hard problem to take care of, and George referred to +this difficulty, and before they sailed away the Professor told him +that, on their return, the first thing to do would be the construction +of a machine which would simplify the production of the butter. + +"As we are going to use more butter, I think it would be a good thing to +start in on our cream separator," said George, who, while he was not an +adept, like Harry, to devise the things required, was always ready to +suggest things that could be made to advantage. + +"I know that Harry will be very glad to set to work on that, so we might +as well commence," answered the Professor. + +"What is the principle of the separator that causes the cream to break +away from the milk?" + +"Centrifugal motion is employed to bring it about." + +"But how does that motion affect it?" + +"When you put a ball on an elastic and swing it about your head in a +circle, the elastic stretches in proportion to the speed at which you +swing it. You have probably seen it done. It is stretched in proportion +to its weight, also. These two things, therefore, are properties of +centrifugal motion. Cream is the fatty portion of the milk. It is +contained in little globules, and when the milk is allowed to stand, the +milk surrounding the globules, being heavier than the cream, forces its +way to the bottom, and the cream by that means goes to the top. The +inventor has taken advantage of this fact by making a machine which will +take the milk and impart to it a very high centrifugal motion, and in +doing so the milk particles, on account of their greater weight, force +their way outwardly and the cream inwardly. The machine is also so +arranged that the cream and milk are drawn from it at separate points, +and this operation is a continuous one." + +Harry quickly understood the machine from the drawing made for his +guidance, and in Figure 28 a sketch is made, showing how it was +constructed. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 28. Cream Separator._] + +A frame was made which had a base (A) and two standards or uprights (B, +B), and between these uprights were a pair of horizontal bars (C, C). +These bars served as supports for a vertical tube (D), the tube being +journaled in the center of the cross bars, so that it extended above and +below the bars, and had a small pulley (E) between them. + +Below the lower cross bar the vertical tube has two radiating tubes (F, +F), closed at their outer ends, but communicating with the bore (G) of +the tube (D) by means of two orifices (H, H). The bore (G) extends down +to a point a little below the orifices (H, H), and a small tube (I) runs +through the tube D, within the tubes F, F, the ends of the tube being +open. A duct (J) centrally through the tubular piece (D) communicates +with the bore of the tube I. One each side of the tube D is a little +tube (K), which communicates with the inner end of each tube (F). A +receptacle (L) is attached to the tube D below each tube (K), to catch +the cream. + +The operation of the machine is as follows: When milk is poured into the +top of the tube D, and the latter is set to rotate at a high speed, it +passes down and out through the ducts (H, H), into the horizontal tubes +(F, F), with the result that the cream is prevented by the heavier milk +from reaching the outer open ends of the tube I. As a result, only the +milk passes inwardly through the inner tube, and is discharged +downwardly through the duct (J), whereas the cream passes out through +the small tubes (K). + +The quest for a supply of vegetables was now a part of the daily +occupation of some in the colony, as the garden had not yet advanced to +that stage where anything could be gotten from it. One morning John was +missing, and there was a great deal of speculation as to his +disappearance. + +Before noon he reappeared, carrying in his arms as large a quantity of +vegetables as he could carry. Harry was the first to see and welcome +him. He recognized beets and was delighted to find that John understood +what they were after. When the Professor was informed, he gave a hearty +welcome, and John seemed to recognize that his efforts were appreciated. + +"Ah! I see you have some onions," he said, as he beamed on him. + +"Onions!" + +"Yes; the wild onion, the progenitor of all the onions. One variety of +this is a species called chives, used as a salad, and is known +throughout Europe under that name." + +"But this beet is very small; is it also wild?" + +"There are four varieties of the beet. This is the most common of them +all, and grows in a wild state in many parts of the world. The +Mangelwurzel is a larger beet, and coarser, and is much used for cattle +feed. If you want to give your cows a treat, this would be the food to +give them. Then there is a kind called the chard, also a good variety. +If possible, we should try and get John to show us where he found them. +Undoubtedly it was along the sandy part of the island." + +The first real surprise manifested by John was when the yaks were +hitched up and he was invited to join them on a trip. His eyes seemed to +show some glimmer of intelligence when he slowly crawled up into the +wagon. Their course was directed toward the forest to the west, and the +trip there, which occupied nearly two hours, was a constant source of +pleasure to all. + +On the way the animals were stopped at intervals to allow the Professor +and George to collect specimens of plants and to seek for ores. And here +occurred the first real symptoms of returning consciousness on the part +of John. As the Professor was moving toward a hill, with a small pick, +he was seen to pick up one of the little hammers and follow. + +Without seeming to notice either of the party, he undertook to explore +on his own account, moving here and there along the hillside and +occasionally stopping to examine and chip off samples, which he +carefully laid down, but when this was done, entirely forgot to collect +them. The act of procuring the samples seemed to be the absorbing +element. He thus went on, never returning to the places where they were +deposited. + +"That action on his part shows a remarkable phase of his malady. Notice +how carefully he puts them down and how uniformly he forgets that he has +done so. The mind, in his condition, is so disordered that it cannot +reason with any degree of sequence. He recalls only one thing at a time; +but if I am not mistaken, he is a man of culture, and his every act +shows that he was a man of broad intellect. I hope we shall be able to +restore him to his normal condition." + +The guns had been taken along, as usual, in order to do some hunting, +and while the Professor and John were engaged in prospecting, the boys +were after game, in which they were more than ordinarily successful, the +bag for the first hour being a half dozen pheasants and several +squirrels. + +When the Professor returned to the wagon with several loads of samples +which the two had gathered, George insisted on penetrating the forest +still farther, their direction being toward the falls in South River. +Before long they came across the trail which had been taken by the yaks +when they made their flight some three months before. They were now not +to exceed two miles from the falls. + +Angel, who was with them, now began one of his peculiar chattering +exhibitions which betokened alarm, and the yaks exhibited a restless +disposition. Harry moved forward to ascertain the cause, and before he +had gone two hundred feet, saw the cause of the disturbance. It was one +of the largest bears which they had so far seen, standing alongside of a +large fallen tree and vigorously working his immense paws. + +He ran back to the party and gave the information, and the Professor +seized a gun, but John instinctively, as it were, grasped one of the +spears and darted forward in the direction Harry had taken. The bear +paid no attention to the party, and when the Professor came up, he said: +"How fortunate it is that we shall be under obligations to the bears for +our second treat of honey. I do not think we ought to attack him after +rendering us this service." + +John was restrained from going forward, and he cast a peculiar glance +toward the Professor. "If there is honey there," replied George, +eagerly, "let us drive him away, at any rate." + +But Bruin would not be driven away. He sprang down from the log, +growling and pacing back and forth. Occasionally he would leap back on +the log. It was plain, that he was after the honey and regarded it as +his special property. + +"Well, George, suppose you give him a shot as a reminder that we need +some of that honey?" + +He needed no urging, and taking a rest alongside a sapling, fired a shot +with one of the long guns. The shot was answered by a terrific growl, +which ended in a prolonged roar. Without waiting for another summons, he +made a line for George, who ran back. This was more than John could +stand, who now ran directly to the bear with his sole weapon, the spear. + +Neither of them could restrain him, but all sprang after him. It was a +challenge the bear sought, and John did not in the least check himself +until within ten feet of the animal, when, with a light spring to one +side, he directed the spear against the side of the bear as he passed in +his rush. While the spear entered the animal, it did not reach a vital +spot. + +Harry was about to fire, but the Professor held up a hand. "Have a care, +unless you are able to control yourself well. You are likely to hit +John." The bear turned, but John made no motion to avoid him, and again +the bear charged. This time John did not jump aside to exceed two feet, +and again plunged the spear forward, and as the bear's lumbering body +moved forward fully ten feet or more before he could bring himself to a +halt, they saw that the spear had broken off, and the terrific growl of +the animal showed how badly he had been wounded. + +John made no effort to escape, although he plainly saw the broken end of +the weapon, and the Professor, surprising as it may seem, did not +encourage a shot. The effect of the last stab was apparent, however, as +Bruin did not turn after the last attack, but, with an expiring growl, +sank down. + +He was a magnificent specimen. The Professor went up to John and held +out his hand in recognition of his wonderful feat, and he seemed to +realize the nature of the commendation bestowed on him. + +The work of skinning the animal was participated in by all. John seemed +to enjoy it, and by his actions showed that he was at home in this sort +of work. You may be sure that his actions throughout the day were such +as to give him a warm place in their hearts, and they recognized what a +valuable ally had come to them. + +The excitement made them forget the honey tree. They were recalled to +that by Angel. He had made his way there after the battle ended, and was +now in the seventh heaven of delight, and when George arrived to take +possession, Angel was covered with a mass of the delicious sweet and +fairly gorging himself. + +As no provision had been made for carrying the honey home, the boys +remembered the first attempt at conveying it, and after the skin had +been removed, it was taken to the hive, and it was a pleasure to all to +remove the comb and every part of the coveted treasure. A luncheon was +prepared, and for the first time in two months the use of their sugar +was dispensed with. + +"As we are so near the falls, why not go there, and possibly the sight +of it may recall something to John?" + +George and Harry looked at the Professor for an inkling of his reason +for the remark, but he appeared not to notice them. + +As the distance was not great, the course was directed along the very +trail that the runaway yaks had taken from the river some months before. +The moment the river was reached, John sprang from the wagon and made +his way to the shore and stood there gazing, and as his eyes turned to +the right and he saw the falls, he slowly turned to the Professor, as +though he was about to say something, but there the quest of his eyes +ended, and all recollection seemed to leave him. + +George could not restrain himself any longer. "Why did you make the +remark that it would be well to bring John here to see whether or not he +would be able to remember anything?" + +"I was anxious to see if he would recognize the stream, and possibly +recall the boat." + +"What boat?" + +"The boat we left here." + +"And do you think John took the boat?" + +"It is my opinion he took the boat, and then forgot it. During that +lapse it was washed down to the sea by the flood." + +"But how do you account for the oars and the rope which we found in it?" + +"He must have put them there." + +"Where do you suppose he got the oars and the rope?" + +"That is the peculiar part of the problem. The rope, if you will +remember, looked as though it was made by savages. At any rate, it was +not a regulation rope; but the oars were undoubtedly taken from the +_Investigator's_ lifeboat." + +This was interesting news to the boys. It did seem probable, after all, +that John had something to do with the lifeboat as well as their own +boat. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +THE STORY OF THE CAVE + + +An hour or more was spent on the shore of the river, passing along its +banks and investigating the proximity of the falls, but if there was a +glimmer of intelligence, John did not exhibit it. All realized this one +thing: that if his memory could be brought to its normal condition, he +would be able, undoubtedly, to reveal some of the mysteries they longed +to unravel. For all they knew, he might have been one of the crew of the +_Investigator_, but this, after all reflections, was out of the +question, because life on shipboard is rather intimate, and boys, above +all others, are most likely to remember faces. + +Neither had the slightest knowledge of ever having seen him, and it was +now felt that they must await the time when he would again regain his +consciousness by the orderly course of nature. + +While on the way home, George, who was seated by the Professor, mused +over the occurrences of the day. "It has always been a wonder to me to +know why it is that humanity must always be surrounded by a mystery of +some sort. It seems there is always something just beyond him, and he +must struggle and work to find it out. Why is it?" + +"You have asked the great question of the ages. It is an eternal +question. Why should man know everything? That would be omnipotence. If +you stop to consider, it will occur to you that the moment man knows +everything he ceases to be a man. All energy, all effort, and every +instinct in life fades away. The association of man with man would +cease. Take the simple act of one lady calling on another. Do you think +it is merely to look at her friend, or is it done to make some inquiry? +Every action in life has in it some desire to acquire something, to get +that which man did not possess before. The quest for the things of this +life become and are the great pleasures which man enjoys. It is not +their possession. Men pursue pleasure. That is a seeking after something +just as much as hunting for wealth." + +Returning to their home, the samples which the Professor and John had +gathered were carefully taken to the laboratory, and several of the +large copper receptacles cleaned for the honey. This was the part which +Angel enjoyed more than anything else. And here it may be remarked that, +when John was installed, Angel was a little shy with the stranger, but +gradually became accustomed to his presence. Somehow John could not +fully understand the creature, and often would be seen following his +motions; but within a week Angel would permit himself to be caressed +without objection, and he seemed to know that no harm could come from +the kindly faced man. + +Notwithstanding the mystery of their new friend, there could be but one +course to follow. They lived on the island and were a part of it. The +longing to know what the other side of the island contained was an +ever-constant inquiry. Something must be done to forward their efforts +in that direction. + +During the four weeks at home a good supply of provisions had been +gathered, and now the plans were made for an overland journey. The +wrecked boat was still near the mouth of West River. It would be a +week's trip to bring it home, and this was not considered advisable, +particularly as the monsoons were still blowing, with greater or less +violence and frequency. + +It may well be imagined that the boys had not forgotten the cave. It was +their constant talk by day and their dreams at night. It had a +fascination which was constantly drawing them in that direction, but, +singularly, they never entered it. But one day George suggested that +they make a search on their own account. Harry quickly assented, and +taking up the two lamps, together with their weapons, were soon at the +entrance. + +They cautiously went down the stone steps and directed their way to the +recess where the treasure was deposited. The skeletons had been buried +on a previous visit, so they did not have that grim recollection to +ponder over. + +What interested them most was the chamber to the east which had been +examined by the Professor, and to that they made their way. During the +first two hundred feet the direction was to the east, or nearly so, and +then the walls suddenly turned to the right, and here a sight met their +eyes which bewildered them. + +The chamber was a gorgeous one, not so large as the one in which the +pirates had their booty, but the calcareous hangings on the walls were +far superior and possessed greater decorative effect. From a point near +the center of the cavern, they turned and examined all sides, and to the +south was what appeared to be an outlet, and this was approached. + +They moved nearer with a silent tread, as though fearing the ghosts of +the past century would rise to receive them. They saw a recess, cut like +a room in the side of the walls, symmetrical in form, and fitted with +all the comforts and luxuries that humanity could wish, but it was +crumbled, and crumbling, and everything fell at the touch. + +Here, scattered about, were the remains of a table, and among its +crumbled ruins were gold and silver vessels. There was a mass of debris, +among which could be recognized articles of human manufacture and use, +but all covered with the everlasting carbonate of lime, which gave it +the color of death and the shroud of a sepulcher. + +Not a word was spoken. They moved from place to place and touched the +objects. What appeared to have some resemblance of a rigid form fell +away, just as they had seen it in the other portion of the cave. What +surprised them most was the entire absence of any firearms, although +they remembered that the Professor had said the other portions of the +cave would show that the pirates had plenty of guns. + +This incited them to further search. Could it be possible that the +Professor had not seen this part of the cave? Their own tracks could be +made out in the soft stalagmites on the floor, and retracing their steps +to the center of the chamber, they searched back and forth to determine +whether or not he had visited this portion. + +Nothing was found to satisfy them on this point, but, passing on beyond +the first recess entered, they were amazed to find a second grottoed +recess, similar to the first, but much longer, and here, with merely a +wall separating them from the other recess, was an orgy of bones and +weapons. + +It was such an unlooked-for sight that they almost staggered at the +scene. At one side was a row of chests, fully six feet long, all white +and crumbling, and these were filled with the long Spanish guns of which +they had several specimens. + +Here everything was in confusion. The final act in the drama enacted +here, whether before or after the battle in the other chamber, bore +evidences of annihilation. Here were skeletons, locked in their dying +embraces, still grasping cutlasses with which they closed the act. But +what interested them more than anything else were four skeletons, +reclining on a raised portion, with chains on wrists and ankles, which +looked like a mockery in their surroundings. + +The captives had taken no part in the struggles. Were they being +defended? and who were the captors? The boys had no time to consider +these things. Other matters attracted them. The nook close by was a +veritable arsenal. It contained chests which, undoubtedly, were filled +with gold. The sights, their surroundings, the evidences of untold +treasure everywhere were enough to unnerve them for the time, and +George, with a voice almost hoarse, suggested that it would be well to +return. It was some time before they could make their way back to the +entrance, and when it was reached, they sat down, not knowing what to +say or what interpretation to put on the last discovery. + +Nothing was said to the Professor about the visit to the cave. It must +be confessed that they felt a little sheepish about this, as such a +thing as deceiving the Professor was farthest from their thoughts, but +there was no concerted agreement to keep him in the dark. Either would +have scorned to enter into such an agreement. + +The boys were more than surprised that evening when the Professor +brought out some of the treasures he had brought from the cave and +exhibited them. Among them was a crude implement of stone, which had the +appearance of a cutting instrument. Another was a small stone vessel, +unmistakably showing human manufacture. + +The sight of these did not, at first, interest the boys, but when the +Professor stated that the cave was undoubtedly of very ancient origin, +George could not resist the inevitable question, "How can that be +determined?" + +"In the study of paleontology an effort has been made to classify the +different periods of man's life on the planet, so that we have the stone +age, which is the earliest, the bronze age, and the age of iron." + +"How far back in the history of the world has evidence been found of the +existence of man?" + +"In the chalk cliffs of England, and also in like formations in Germany, +skulls have been found which indicate an existence back to a period +fully 500,000 years ago." + +"What reason is there to assume that if they were found in those chalk +deposits, that they must have been that far back?" + +"Because it was fully that long ago in the period of the world formation +when the chalk beds were made, and this seems to be conclusive evidence +of great antiquity." + +"Is it not singular that more evidence of that condition is not found +than the recovery of a few bones?" + +"Not when it is considered that the earth is constantly undergoing +change, first in one place and then in another. Have you ever heard of +the great continent, which was supposed to be lost in mid-Atlantic, +called Atlantis? Plato refers to it, and attributes the first knowledge +of it as coming from Solon, who visited Egypt and there learned from the +wise men that a great country, to the west of the Pillars of Hercules, +which Gibraltar was called in ancient times, had disappeared thousands +of years before; and they further informed the great Grecian lawgiver +that the earth had been peopled and repeopled many times before in ages +past." + +"Why was it necessary to repeople the earth? Were they all destroyed?" + +"They pointed out that at certain stages of the world's history great +floods came and destroyed all the people inhabiting the low places, and +at other times the terrific volcanic eruptions destroyed those who lived +in the hills, and at other times entire continents, like Atlantis, +disappeared, so that the earth had to be repeopled and the arts and +sciences learned over anew." + +It is wonderful to relate how the life on the island affected the health +of all. They lived outdoors and had plenty of sunshine and vigorous +exercise. In the laboratory, the Professor made it a constant habit to +do all his work in the sunlight, to which he exposed himself at all +times. The boys often spoke of this, and one day, while talking on the +subject, he remarked: + +"It is surprising how little the majority of people value sunlight. It +is not the visible sunlight that performs the wonders in giving strength +to man. If you recall, we spoke about the actinic rays which cause the +chemical changes on the photographic plate. It is those unseen rays +which produce the aurora borealis, exert a curative effect upon leprosy +and tuberculosis, fill the atmosphere on the sunny side of a street with +oxygen and nitrogen, and do many other marvelous things." + +"In what manner does the invisible light produce these results?" + +"In its sparkling radiations microbes die, decay ceases, the iron in the +blood becomes chemically strong; ozone is manufactured from the dirt and +dust, which are also destroyed; the perspiration becomes active and +carries off waste from the muscles and cleanses the skin; dead tissues +are purified and the muscles invigorated; and all life is made to +thrive." + +"Does the sunlight have the same effect on all the animal creations?" + +"This is true of all animate life, except minute organisms, or what are +called bacteria." + +"If that is the case, why do worms and the like hide themselves in the +earth?" + +"In that case it is the instinct of self-preservation. The most of them +are eyeless, so that sunlight exposes them to birds and other enemies. +Professor Mast demonstrated that they are very favorably influenced by +exposure to sunlight. Dr. Dolly has shown, by a series of very brilliant +experiments, that the butterfly will live three times longer in sunlight +than in the shadow; and Professor Yerkes has also proven that the +jellyfish, while inactive in the dark, becomes very strenuous in +sunlight." + +"If that is the case, why wouldn't it be a good thing to have all houses +made of glass?" + +"That is really what has been proposed. The Government of the United +States has set a good example in this respect by devoting over one-half +of the space of the new post-office building in Washington to an +arrangement which permits the interior to be flooded with sunlight." + +In the really strenuous times which our colonists had passed through the +pleasures of fishing had been forgotten, and as that was an article of +food which all relished, and of which they had been deprived for some +time, Harry insisted that at least a portion of the following day should +be spent in that way. + +John saw the preparations which were going on and entered into the +spirit of it in his usual listless way, but it must be said that there +was now more eagerness in his actions than had been theretofore noticed. + +All saw the change that was perceptibly coming over him, and the +particular thing that George noticed was the character of the eye. "I +wish you would explain, Professor, why it is that the eyes of people so +affected are dull, and that when they recover the eye becomes bright?" + +"That change in the character of the eye is expressed by everyone under +certain conditions. How much brighter the eye is when you are affected +by laughter. That is due to the duct which lubricates the eyeball. +Anything pleasant causes an undue amount of discharge, so that the +eyeball glistens, and we call it looking bright. The same principle +holds good in the case of one who is dull or listless, or, as in our +friend's case, has nothing to stimulate the flow of the secretions. The +moment he is affected, this is shown on the eyeball sooner than by any +other part of his body." + +It will be remembered that in a former volume it was stated how Harry +had prepared a number of very creditable fishhooks, and these were now +attached to the ramie fiber cord and suitable poles were easily obtained +for the day's outing. + +Aside from John, it was a merry party that left the Cataract that +morning, and Angel was among them. Several good fishing spots were +known, but the Professor suggested that a change be made and that the +trial for the day should be in the river below the Cataract, in the hope +that larger and gamer fish might be found. In all former trials only the +tame fish were caught. + +Less than a quarter of a mile below the Cataract, and close to the mouth +of the river, was a small cove, with deep water, bounded by a sandy +shore. Here the party stopped and cast their lines. The Professor, +however, used a fly and fished with it at the surface of the water. As +on the previous occasion, he was the first to land a magnificent +specimen, which was so large that he had difficulty in landing it. + +"What is that beauty?" + +"It is a salmon; or it might be more correct to call it a salmon-trout. +Trout belong to the salmon family, and they are all game." + +"Well, he certainly made a fight for it." + +"Does the salmon live in salt as well as in fresh water?" + +"They have a habit of remaining off the coast in salt water during the +winter months in northern latitudes, and then entering the rivers when +the spawning season begins, ascending the rivers slowly, despite every +obstacle that may be put in their way. When they reach a favorite spot, +the eggs are laid and are hatched out in countless numbers." + +"Has it been discovered why they do this?" + +"In order to escape their enemies, who seek the eggs. Even with the care +which they take in breeding, millions are destroyed, and it has been +estimated that if all the eggs laid were hatched out the number would be +so great as to prevent navigation along the shores of the coasts where +they thrive. In the rivers of Oregon and Washington the shoals of salmon +are frequently so great in the rivers as to make it impossible for a +boat to be navigated through them." + +Harry was awarded with the second catch, which was fully fifteen inches +in length. It had a nearly cylindrical body, covered with exceptionally +large scales, and its head above convex. The striking thing about it was +the color, the back being of a bottle-green, light on the sides, and +silvery white underneath. + +The Professor was on hand at once. "You have captured a fine specimen of +the mullet, not considered, generally, as a game fish. It is a +particularly fine table fish." + +George came in for his share of luck, as well as John, who seemed to +enjoy the sport immensely. His eyes showed that. It was a pleasure to +all at this opportunity to bring something into the life of the poor +unfortunate so that he might be brought back to light again. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +MUSIC AND ANIMALS + + +During the evening George suggested that as the trip was to be overland +it might be wise to can some of the fish, or to use some of the +receptacles found in the cave for this purpose. + +"We might do that," said the Professor, "or they might be salted down, +and that would not necessitate the receptacles, if we dried them." + +The salted fish did not appeal to either of the boys, and it was +accordingly agreed to put up several packages for food. + +"Will it be much trouble to preserve them by putting them in cans?" + +"If proper precautions are taken they can be preserved. The difficulty +is that the air is not excluded, and the mischief is caused by the gases +which form, in that case, and when the pressure becomes too great the +receptacle bursts." + +"Why are the fish, or other substances, so canned heated and put into +the cans while in that state?" + +"When a can is filled with the material in a heated state it has been +expanded to its highest point, and after the package is sealed properly, +no air can enter it, so that it is prevented from changing its condition +by any chemical action. Our difficulty will be to get a proper metal for +the cans." + +"What is the best to use?" + +"Tin, for the reason that tin is not affected by any of the acids which +are formed by fish or by fruit, which may be put in them." + +It has been stated that the boys were both musically inclined, and +George had taken several courses of lessons on the violin before he +joined the training ship. If there was anything more than another that +was missed, particularly in the evenings, it was the lack of musical +instruments, to which all had been accustomed. As a result, the boys had +for some time worked on a violin, which was now nearing completion, and +they hoped it could be finished before the start was made. + +The Professor discovered the partly constructed violin, and at once +showed his appreciation of their enterprise. "Now that you have the +body, what are you going to do for strings?" and he laughed at the +bewildered look. They had forgotten the one essential thing. + +Without a word, he left them, and when he returned, held in his hand a +dozen or more hard, bony-like and dried-up reeds. "Possibly these will +do for your purpose." + +"What are they?" + +"These are the intestines of the wildcat we shot about ten months ago." + +"Well, aren't they as good as the intestines of the common cat?" + +"Undoubtedly; but violin strings are not produced from that source." + +"Aren't they known as catgut?" + +"That is true; but it is a mistake. The strings of commerce are made +principally from the intestines of sheep, and, singularly, have been +always designated as 'catgut.' Other articles from the same source are +hatters' bowstrings, clockmakers' cords, and thongs for whips and laces +for boots." + +"What are the best kinds of strings for musical instruments?" + +"Those obtained from Milan, Italy, are considered the best, on account +of their transparency and exceeding strength. Most frequently each +string is made up of two or three separate strands, twisted together +with the utmost care. But there is another use of the greatest value, +and that is as a thread for sewing up wounds in internal surgery, +because, being of animal matter, the thread will, in course of time, be +absorbed into the system, and thus remove itself, without requiring a +second operation to remove it from the wound." + +"How is it prepared to make it suitable for our purpose!" + +"The ones here I thoroughly cleaned at the time, as I knew they would +come in handy for particular purposes, but I had no idea of this kind in +view at the time. We must soak them and remove the inner and outer +lining. Potash, in solution, is best for the purpose. We must then draw +them through small holes, to give them uniformity, and keep them in a +receptacle which is filled with sulphur fumes. That is for the purpose +of fumigating them. They are then ready for the instrument. I think the +different sizes will give you a variety." + +The directions were carried out, and during the following week the +violin was prepared for its initial test. The Professor was pleased with +the knowledge that the instrument was ready. It was plain that he +expected important results from that source with John. It is well known +that music possesses a wonderful power in the treatment of demented +people, and he was very anxious to try it in the case of one who had +lost all memory. + +On the evening appointed the violin was brought in, and the boys had +arranged a program. Harry had a fine baritone voice, while George could +take a high note and sustain it as well as most sopranos. When all the +preliminaries had been arranged, the instrument was produced, and after +a little preliminary tuning, George played "America." + +At the first strains of the violin, Angel, who was in the loft, came +down. He didn't stop to notice anyone but George. This was something so +unheard of that he appeared to be hypnotized, as he shuffled over to +George, and looked up at the instrument. He appeared to be entranced, +and when the music stopped he laid his hand on George's knee, and looked +up appealingly. There was not a single motion in his features which +showed appreciation or pleasure or excitement; but aside from that every +action of his body indicated exhilaration and undue animation. + +The boys had eyes for the animal only; but the Professor watched John to +the exclusion of everything else. When the first strains vibrated he +glanced around, and saw the musician. From that moment until George +dropped the violin his eyes never ceased the stare. As the music +continued he appeared to be enraptured, if such a thing could be said of +a mute expression. + +The Professor drew closer to him, and intently watched his eyes, and +before the first verse had ended the situation was so intense that the +Professor's hand involuntarily beat time, and it was evident that the +tremulous motion, which John now and then exhibited, was the inward +struggle for light. + +Without turning from John, when the music ceased, he cried out to +George, in a suppressed tone: "Keep on; keep on!" This brought the boys +to the knowledge of the other drama which was being enacted. "Slower, +George, slower," was the request of the Professor; and while "America" +requires the jubilant strain of action and liberty, he obeyed the +injunction. + +"Keep it up; can you play 'Home, Sweet Home'?" George could, and did, +and as the familiar strains floated through the air, John moved forward, +his head drooped down, both hands grasped the chair and he listened with +an intentness that was painful to witness. + +When George stopped at the whispered suggestion, John raised his eyes +and looked around. The look was a different one than they had ever +noticed before. When he glanced at the Professor, Harry said: "Did you +notice the difference in his eyes?" + +He rubbed his hands over his eyes, and stroked his head, and they +thought a glimmer of a smile crossed his features. When they were about +to retire that night, the Professor could not help but express his +gratification at the results achieved through the aid of the violin. + +"I could not help thinking how nearly allied Angel and John were in the +manner of acting during the course of the music. I have no doubt but in +course of time the animal will, just like John, show the facial +expressions which characterize either pleasure or pain." + +"But I have seen Angel actually laugh." + +This was true; it had been noticed on several occasions. But so far John +had not laughed, and he had not changed his facial expression in such a +manner as to make it noticeable, and the evening's entertainment had +done more to affect him than anything which had occurred, and it was +their earnest hope that this might be a means to his delivery. + +Harry was the only one to notice a field mouse which had appeared soon +after George began to play, and the little animal was joined by others, +but the subsequent events of the evening attracted his attention, so +that no notice was taken of them until they were about to retire, when +they scampered away and Harry then related how they had acted. + +"That is an interesting thing. Some time ago the keeper of the Central +Park Zoölogical Gardens, in New York, employed a violinist to play for +the animals, and the results were very interesting. The first animals +approached were a lioness and five cubs. The tune played was 'America.' +She listened with mute and dignified appreciation, and her five little +cubs ranged up alongside in a row, and in the same attitude, all with a +wondering expression, and sometimes would act just as you often have +seen dogs do, turn their heads aside obliquely, as though the sound +could be better understood. The old lion in the adjoining cage also +stopped his restless movement, and peered at the player attentively. The +next animal was a tigress. When the playing commenced she first looked +startled. Her mate entered the cage and escorted her out into the yard +while he took up his position and listened, and refused to allow her to +return. The hippopotamus, on the other hand, got mad, and sought the +water for seclusion. The elephant appeared to be the most +discriminating, for while he deliberately turned his back when a +plaintive tune was played, was so delighted when a rattling dancing jig +was executed, he actually danced about in ecstacies of joy. The wolves, +foxes and hyenas could not be made to appreciate any of the tunes, but +the monkeys enjoyed all the tunes, if being sad when doleful tunes are +played give happiness, and they partook of the exhilaration when lively +sounds came from the instrument." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 29. THE LION AND CUBS_] + +The warm summer days were now at hand, and all realized that this was +the proper time to carry out the long-delayed project of fully exploring +the western shore of their little continent. This had been deferred +before John came, in order that more complete preparations could be +made, and to await settled weather, and now that he was here further +delay had been urged in the hope that memory would be restored and thus +give them an addition that could be depended on. One puzzling feature of +his malady was that he understood, in a measure, what was told him, but +it was noticed that whatever was spoken had to be accompanied by some +manual action. If told to get a pail of water, he would remain inactive +until a pail was taken up or pointed out. So in yoking up the yaks, +merely pointing at the yokes would be sufficient to start the lagging +memory. He quickly learned to manipulate the guns, and spent hours in +practicing by shooting at the target. + +Singular as it may seem, he showed some intelligence at the good shots, +but all these flashes were momentary only, and it was further noticed +that he would remember an act performed the day before and repeat it in +precisely the same way. It was like an imitative process, and the +Professor suggested that he was now in the condition of a child, +learning all things anew, to which was added some glimpses of things he +had learned before. + +A new wagon was necessary, as the one which had been used for the past +eight months was clumsy and badly worn. All took a part in this +important work, and it was here that the workmanlike qualities of John +showed themselves. He was a treasure in this respect. The lathe was a +pleasure to him, and so with bench work, and within ten days a new and +larger wagon was turned out. + +"I only wish," said Harry, "that we could paint it up, and thus make a +real finished article out of it." + +"Your idea is a good one, but in order to make a lead paint will take +too long a time to provide a carbonate which will answer the purpose." + +"Why does it take so long?" + +"We have plenty of lead, but to get the base for the paint it will be +necessary to cast a lot of thin gratings, and use earthen pots, partly +filled with vinegar. A layer of the lead gratings must then be put down +and the earthen pot stood on them and partly filled with acetic acid, or +vinegar. A board should cover each pot and spent tannin bark placed +around them. This must be built up in the form of a stack. Fermentation +soon sets in, and the result will be the formation of carbonic acid, and +in five or six weeks the metallic lead converted into what is called the +carbonate which may be washed and ground up with oil, and sold as the +white lead of commerce." + +"Instead of that what should we use?" + +"We have plenty of flax, as you know. From that we can make linseed oil, +and with a proper coloring matter, which is not necessary, however, we +can provide a paint that will be very serviceable." + +"Then why not use the madder dye which we made for dyeing the flag?" + +"Just the thing. In addition we must have a dryer of some kind. I +suggest that we distil some of the rosin, or the sap from the pitch pine +trees, for that purpose." + +"What kind of product shall we obtain from that?" + +"Turpentine." + +Thus day after day passed in preparation, each hour, almost, suggesting +some new addition to their stock, which would contribute to protection, +comfort, or necessity. Among other things suggested, in order to relieve +them as much as possible from carrying such a large burden in the way of +provisions, was the making of synthetic foods. + +George had this in mind for some days before he broached the subject to +the Professor. "I understood you to say that if we had synthetic foods +we could carry several weeks' rations about our persons, and the load +would not be a heavy or perceptible one at that? If such is the case, +why can't we prepare some of the food in that way as a matter of +precaution? What is the meaning of the word 'synthetic,' and how is such +food made?" + +"The word is the direct opposite of 'analyses.' In analyzing, the +elements composing any substance are separated from each other. In +synthesis the different elements are put together to form the substance. +Thus, take water as an illustration: Its component parts are two parts +of hydrogen and one of oxygen. Knowing this to be the case, the chemist +takes that many parts of oxygen and hydrogen, and by uniting them water +is formed which is just as much a true water as though it fell from the +heavens or was taken from a well or spring." + +We should not go far out of the way in stating that the Professor was +putting in some time in this direction, while the other work was going +on, and this was confirmed later on when he requested Harry to furnish a +number of small tubes like those used for the powder, and it was noticed +that a quantity of bamboo was taken to the laboratory and cut up into +short sections. + +The guns and ammunition were now ready, a supply of food had been +prepared, and George insisted on baking a quantity of barley bread, +which was carefully wrapped up, so that it would not be dried out or be +liable to get wet. The wagon was admirably adapted for the purpose. The +wheels were not extraordinarily large, but they had wide treads, and the +body was high at the sides so as to serve as a fortress in case of +trouble. An extra yoke was taken, a supply of sugar and also of honey +put in the vessels which the cave supplied, and only a small store of +vegetables, as they depended on finding these en route. + +The start was agreed upon for the following morning. Observation Hill +was visited, and a new inscription affixed to the pole, so that any +passing ship might know their plight, and be able to direct its course +to the west. The value of the chart made by the Professor was now +appreciated, as that was also tacked up in its proper place. + +Jack and Jill were the yaks selected for the journey, as they were tried +and true, and had now grown to be strong and well domesticated. Freedom +was given to the cattle, and all the buildings closed up. This was done +to secure the interiors from intrusion on the part of animals. An +inscription was also placed on the door of the house. + +Promptly at nine o'clock the company, consisting of the Professor, +Harry, George, John and Angel, started on the journey across Wonder +Island. This was their sixth trip, only one of them by sea. + +Would this be any more successful than the preceding ones? + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THE TRIP THROUGH THE DENSE FOREST + + +On the march up Cataract River, and out toward the forest, the same +order was observed as on the previous trips. One must lead the way, and +act as scout, while the others were to remain with the team. They did +not anticipate much difficulty during the first two or three days from +savages, but it was always well to have some one in the lead so as to +point out the most desirable paths, as it must be remembered they had to +make their own trails through a wilderness. Much of it had been +traveled, it is true, but there was nothing approaching such a thing as +a road, or even a path, by which they could be guided. + +It was amusing to watch Angel, as he glided along from one tree to the +next, where the forests were in their paths. At other times he would be +in the wagon, or shamble along, and sometimes leap on the backs of the +yaks and ride there. The patient animals were so used to him that no +attention was paid to his antics, even though he occasionally sat on the +yoke between the animals. + +John was an interested observer of all the preparations, and was one of +the first to take his place alongside of the wagon. When the Professor +urged him to take a seat he looked up inquiringly, but did not comply. +The Professor did not urge him, but after several hours of walking, he +was again asked to mount, and he did so, thereby seeming to understand +what was required of him. + +When they camped at noon for the first meal, they were still on the +banks of the Cataract, but here it took a decided turn to the west; and +now the course for the afternoon must be to the southwest so the South +River could be reached above the falls. + +That river was reached early in the afternoon, and they recognized the +trail formerly made on the first journey along its banks. The first +encampment for the night was probably twenty miles from home, but the +next morning, after they had struck into an entirely new section of the +island, the journey grew more burdensome, as the land on both sides of +the stream became rough, and in many places the small streams crossed +offered such steep sides that frequent detours had to be made to enable +the team to get across. + +During the second day they did not, on account of this, cover more than +ten miles, and near the close of the day a second falls was reached, +showing that they were going up to a much higher altitude. Above the +falls the river turned abruptly to the south, and within five miles of +it the river forked, one branch going south and the other southwest. + +They were on the branch going west, and that course was followed, but +still the country was rough, and now became thickly wooded, which added +to the discomfort of traveling with a team. Magnificent trees grew on +every side, and in most places sprang up clear to the water's edge. + +"You have here a good illustration," remarked the Professor, "as to the +source of the debris which is found on the shores of the island. The +streams carry down the logs, trees and leaves, which, after being washed +out to sea, are finally left along the beaches." + +Our voyagers had passed many nights in the forests before, but this was +the first time they had come across such impenetrable jungles. The large +trees were actually so close together at many places that the wagon had +to be backed and worked around for long distances to enable them to make +any forward movements. + +Before noon of the third day it became so discouraging that they stopped +to consider the situation. Possibly a route away from the river would be +much better, and that course was decided on, so that the direction +agreed on was west, with a slight trend to the north. + +The reason why the course along the river would be the most direct was +judged from the fact that the lights, which they saw from their boat, +made the location of the savages fully fifty miles or over from the +northernmost cape where they had been cast ashore a few weeks before. + +The travel must, therefore, be to the southwest, and not to the west, +but at the rate they were going, with every hour more difficult, it was +hoped that the new course would in the end be quicker. All of that day +the struggle was a strenuous one, and when night came all were +exhausted, and were ready to retire as soon as the meal was over. + +They were in the midst of the thickest forest, and up to this time all +had retired, as they did on this occasion. The yaks were enclosed in a +railing made of small trees, so as to protect them, and the two +mattresses within the covered body made comfortable beds for all. + +Strange sounds occasionally disturbed them, but caused no particular +alarm, until Angel began to grow restless, about two in the morning. +George tried to quiet him, but he persisted in giving the alarm. +Suddenly a howl and a shriek awoke the occupants of the wagon and as +each arose he instinctively grasped a weapon. The sounds came from two +animals, one of which was close by; the other at a greater distance. + +"The one near us seems to be a wildcat, or an animal which utters a +characteristic shriek of that kind, but I am not sure as to the identity +of the other animal," remarked the Professor, as he listened intently to +the hideous howls and shrieks. + +It was pitch dark, so that it was impossible to recognize anything in +the wagon, and of course the dense forests only added to the gloom, +although the sky could be faintly seen directly above them through the +scraggly leaves. The Professor searched for one of the lanterns, when he +heard the yaks becoming uneasy, and running back and forth in the little +enclosure. + +John was awake, and his eyes seemed to have a sort of glimmer as the +light flared up. The rear end of the wagon led directly into the pen +where the animals were, and no sooner had the light rays illuminated the +enclosure than a heavy object sprang from an adjoining tree and landed +on one of the yaks. + +The latter was thrown across the pen with the impact of the force, and +the Professor, who had the lamp, could not level his gun, but without a +moment's hesitation John's gun was at his shoulder, and he fired before +either of the boys could recover themselves in the excitement. + +The firing of the gun seemed to raise pandemonium. The sudden appearance +of the light, as the animal made the leap, disconcerted him, and the +shot following immediately, caused him to utter a terrific growl. John +grasped the Professor's gun and shot the second time, and the shot was +at blank range. The animal gave a slight spring forward, and fell across +a tree trunk which was at one side of the enclosure, and on which they +had arranged the cooking utensils the night before. + +This was exciting enough for one night's adventure, but as John and the +boys were about to descend a crash in the trees to the right caused them +to halt. The Professor held out his light, but the thick wood and the +dense underbrush prevented any examination more than thirty or forty +feet beyond. + +The eagerness of the boys to return to the wagon caused the Professor to +loose his grip on the lamp, and before he could recover the hold, it +fell to the ground and was extinguished. The yaks appeared to be in a +frenzy now, and the howling beyond increased in intensity. After a +search the lamp was relit, and the two others also brought out and +lighted, and the appearance of the light caused a hurried retreat of the +howling beasts. + +"It is a puma," were the Professor's first words, "the most enormous +specimen I ever saw." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 30. PUMA_] + +"Well, these woods must be full of them, by the way they howled." + +The yaks were calmed down after some effort, and it was found that the +shoulder of Jack had been lacerated by the claws of the puma, but beyond +that no damage was done. Both of John's shots had taken effect, and it +delighted the Professor to point to the wound and then indicate, as best +he could, how they owed him a debt for his skill. + +The carcass was dragged out of the enclosure to keep the yaks quiet, and +when this was done they seemed relieved. + +"I would like to know what the other animal was?" + +"It is my opinion that it was a companion to this one. They, like all +animals, have a means for communicating their ideas to each other. Some +English scientists have found that the hen utters twenty-three distinct +notes, and that they convey different meanings. One single note, +differing from another, may convey the meaning of an entire sentence +uttered by man. The particular purring of a cat in one way means one +thing, and when emitted in a slightly altered tone indicates something +entirely different. Then, again, most animal sounds are accompanied by +some distinctive movement, as, for instance, the striking squeal of a +hen, accompanied by the crouching attitude, together indicate the +appearance of a hawk as plainly as though it uttered the warning in +words. It is obvious, therefore, that all the sounds made by animals, +such as cackling, clucking, crooning, purring, crowing, growling, and +roaring, as well as modifications of these sounds, impart some meaning +which can be distinguished by their kind, and are frequently recognized +by others." + +This explanation appealed to George. "I know the moment Angel is +pleased, or when he is excited, and now that I think of it, I am sure +that he has several ways of expressing his meaning, and I am going to +try and see whether I can tell the difference hereafter when he tries to +talk." + +There was little sleep that night, except on the part of John, who was +soon asleep. When morning broke they had an opportunity to examine the +dead animal. It had a uniform gray color, fading into a white in the +under part of its body, and with a very long, supple tail. + +"The animal is sometimes called the panther, or 'painter,' as it is +familiarly known; and it is regarded by some authorities as the cougar. +It inhabits the whole of America. Its home is among the branches of +trees, and is a dangerous antagonist when wounded or cornered." + +This incident made them desirous of quitting the forest by the nearest +route, but this was difficult to determine, as there were no elevated +hills in sight. In the forenoon of the third day, other animals were +sighted, and George, who was in the lead during the first part of the +trip, did not have the courage to go ahead very far, and soon after the +start was made, John came up and accompanied him, an act entirely +voluntary on his part, which increased the astonishment of them all. + +It is impossible to account for these remarkable actions of the human +mind while in such a state. Did he realize the danger to his friends? +Who can answer the riddle? + +But they must go on. The forest must be conquered. How far they had to +go was a mystery to them. One thing was certain: they were going toward +West River, but they were still less than half way. It would have been +the part of prudence to have taken the route to the north, through a +country which they had twice traversed, and which afforded far better +traveling, but it could not be helped now. + +The fourth day did not improve their condition in the least. The dense +wood was on every side. The inclination of the ground was so slight as +to give no indication whether they had reached the summit of the +tableland, or were still ascending to a higher level. + +In estimating the distance traveled in the four days it could not be +possible that they were over fifty miles from the Cataract. To add to +their perplexities, Jack began to walk with a perceptible limp. The +wound in the shoulder was inflamed, and a rest was necessary. + +In this emergency a council was called, and the Professor suggested that +some of the party should conduct an exploring expedition on foot to the +west, going not to exceed five miles, and then return. But as it was too +near night to make the attempt at once, it was agreed that an early +start should be made in the morning. + +The question now arose, who should go. Neither made a suggestion until +Harry ventured this opinion: "I am perfectly willing to take John with +me. I am sure he can be trusted. It will be imposing too much of a +burden on you," said he, looking at the Professor, "and I am active and +strong enough to stand the trip." + +This suggestion was acted on, and early in the morning Harry took a +quantity of ammunition, and the Professor gave John a similar supply and +a couple of the guns, one of which was strapped to his back, similar to +the manner in which Harry was equipped. The attention of John was then +directed to the forest in the west, and as Harry moved away he followed +with a comprehensive glance that gave all of them the greatest relief. +Prior to their departure, the yak's wound was examined, and John saw +this as well, so that from all indications they would have no reason to +have fears on his account. + +As usual, their bolos were taken along, and at intervals the trees were +blazed on both sides, this action being performed by John with a +regularity and precision that astonished Harry. + +Traveling under those conditions was not conducive to speed, but they +were now trying to find what lay beyond them, and to learn, if possible, +how much farther the dense growth existed beyond them. They went on for +three hours or more, and still no change, and they stopped to rest. + +Imagine yourself surrounded by these conditions. A companion who could +not talk, and who was, in all probability, demented, the eternal +silence, except as it would be occasionally startled into life by some +living thing; unable to even indicate his thoughts, or to consult with +him, as to direction, or to talk about the probabilities beyond them, +and you will feel that it took a brave heart to continue the journey. +But Harry possessed determination. He made up his mind to go on, until +he could find some news to take back, and so the quest continued for two +hours more. + +But Harry had forgotten that they started without food, and that it +would take them as long to get back as they had already journeyed, and +it was now fully noon. + +It seemed as though a hundred feet away it appeared clearer, but this +delusion had been repeated so often that he tired of it, and when, after +a rest, another start was made, he mentally made up his mind that if he +could not find a clearing within the next half hour they must return. + +The clearing beyond did not deceive him this time. He clearly saw an +elevation beyond, and he almost shouted, but he did not stop and laugh +in his joy at the sight. John saw it and instinctively knew its meaning. +Then, motioning to him, he pointed back in the direction of the wagon, +and started to retrace his steps. + +It was past noon, and Harry was hungry. John turned and followed and, +glancing at the sun, drew a small package from his coat, and handed +Harry several slices of barley bread. It affected him so much that he +could scarcely contain himself, and he could not help putting his arm +about him and indicate that his forethought and kind act was +appreciated, and John looked at Harry inquiringly, and proceeded to eat +his luncheon. + +Judging the time which had elapsed since the start in the morning, it +would take them fully five hours to retrace their steps, as the glazed +trees showed them the way readily, and they could, therefore, make the +trip in less than six hours consumed up to this time, so that they would +be back before six in the evening, but they had found the outlet, and +determination had won. + +The passage back through the forest was made with a happy heart, and +after they had gone two hours, John suddenly stopped, and grasped Harry +by the arm as he peered forward. Harry heard something before them. +Crackling leaves, and finally voices, were distinguished. They thought +the team must be miles away. John moved forward fully fifty feet, and +Harry followed. Soon the wagon top came in sight, and Harry bounded +along the blazed trail, with a cry, of relief. + +Jack's lacerated shoulder was not as bad as had been anticipated, and +toward noon the lameness was not so perceptible, so that, in order to +save time, it was concluded to follow the blazed path, which could be +made out easily, thus bringing them together fully three hours earlier +than Harry had anticipated. + +Harry explained what had been seen to the west, and that three or four +hours more of hard travel would bring them to an open country which, in +all probability, led to the West River. + +All was eagerness now, and they pressed forward, hoping to be able to +reach the open country before night set in. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +SEEING THE FIRST SAVAGES + + +George's patience in teaching Angel was most commendable. Hours were +devoted to this work. Even before leaving home the animal would +recognize certain sounds, and performed many acts at the word of +command. Such words as "come," "go," "take this," and others usually +employed, were fully comprehended, and the names of Harry and the +Professor were understood. + +Frequent tests were made by George and the Professor, acting in concert, +as this phase of the education greatly interested the latter, to +ascertain whether the orang performed the services from an understanding +of the meaning of the words, or whether it proceeded merely from the +constant repetitions of the words and acts conjointly. + +The value of this proceeding will be made apparent to the reader as we +proceed in this history; but when they were educating Angel the idea of +utilizing his future services, in a critical time, did not occur to +them. + +They camped for the night at the end of the trail; and now they hoped +that the morrow would open the route over a more comfortable path than +the last three days had offered them. Before going an hour on the way, a +campfire was found, which evidently had been used not many days before. + +There had not been any rains in their section of the country for ten +days previous to this, and it was obvious that no rain had fallen on the +ashes of this fire. From this it must be inferred that whoever made the +fire must have been there recently. + +The utmost vigilance would be necessary, in view of this discovery. The +wagon moved forward slowly. Every part of the country within the limits +of the trail was under scrutiny, and every sound and moving object fully +investigated before proceeding. This made travel necessarily slow. The +underbrush was very thick, and but few trees remained, and those were +scattered, mostly in clumps or in detached groups. + +Harry looked at the tall trees longingly many times, and the Professor +divined his meaning. "I have a notion to try prospecting from one of +these trees. We can, no doubt, see more from them than we can learn in a +day's travel. But trees of that kind are pretty hard to climb." + +"It might be done with a climbing ring," answered the Professor. + +"What is that?" + +"The cocoanut hunters and others put a hoop around a tree, and then get +inside of the hoop, with the back against the hoop, so that the feet can +get a purchase against the tree, and in that way the trees are scaled +with the greatest agility." + +"Well, if the savages can do it, I can." + +"It might be well to make the trial, as even thirty or forty feet would +give a fair view of the country. Before making the hoop we should select +a tree most suitable for observation." + +An oak tree with a bare trunk up to the first large limb was finally +selected. The diameter was fully two feet at the base. + +"With a tree of this size the hoop should be about three and a half feet +in diameter." + +"What material shall we make it out of?" + +"If we can find a small hickory sapling it will be the most serviceable, +because its natural strength and stiffness will permit us to use a small +and light pole." + +A search was made, and after a time several were cut and brought to the +tree. The thick end of the sapling was cut or pared off along one side +so it would bend in the direction of the slice, and this was put about +the tree and the ends brought together and lapped. Thongs were then used +to splice the lapped ends, and small nails driven in at intervals to +assure security. + +The use of hoops of this kind requires practice, and the natives use +their bare feet against the tree, which prevents slipping. Harry, +however, had shoes; not a very good thing to use against the bark, and +after numerous trials both boys found the task a trying one. Their bare +feet were too tender to use against the rough bark, and as a last resort +one of the old pair of shoes was brought out, and studded with nails. + +The climber gets inside the hoop, with the latter around the tree, and +resting against the small of the back, or a little higher up. The feet +are then braced against the tree, and the hoop grasped by both hands. In +climbing the body is suddenly moved toward the tree, and this motion +temporarily releases the outward pressure against the hoop, and at the +same moment the hoop is moved upwardly about a foot. One or both feet +then make an upward step, and this process is repeated. + +More than an hour was occupied in learning to manipulate the hoop, so as +to progress upwardly, and at the end of that time Harry made a slow and +careful ascent to the first limb, a distance of thirty feet, stopping at +intervals, as he made his way up, to view the ever-increasing landscape, +and to take the needed rest. + +"Do you see anything, Harry?" was George's eager questioning, as he +moved upwardly. + +"Nothing yet," was the invariable reply. When the first limb was reached +he seated himself, and had an opportunity to view the surroundings from +a far better vantage point. + +"Can you see the river?" was the Professor's inquiry. + +"It is too hazy to make out anything there. It is clearer to the south." + +"What can you see to the southwest?" + +Harry scanned the country in that direction for some time before +replying. "All I can see there are trees, trees, just like the forest we +have been going through; but directly west of us we would have +comparatively easy traveling. The forest seems to extend southwest, and +we have been traveling through it at an angle. If I could get higher I +might have a better view." + +He ascended fifteen feet higher, but even at that point the forest hid +the view to the southwest. + +"From your examination I judge our only hope is to reach the river and +travel down its banks?" + +"Yes; because we don't want any more of the forest with the team." + +"Before we go, let us take off the hoop; I want to use it again." And +Harry unwrapped the thongs and disengaged it from the tree. + +After luncheon the marching was resumed, this time due west to the +river. The trip during the day told on Jack, and a halt, was called +before they had gone five miles. Harry and John took their guns and +started south on a tour of investigation, making their way toward a +slight elevation which he had noticed from the observation point. + +It was really a hill, covered with trees, and gave the appearance, from +the tree top, as being a continuation of the forest range. This was good +news to carry back. While passing through the tallest of the trees, +Harry, who was ahead, felt himself suddenly grasped, and he uttered a +scream. + +John rushed forward just as Harry saw the repulsive form of a huge snake +which had wound itself around him. Harry was absolutely helpless in the +folds of the serpent. John's quick eye took in the situation at once, +and by the time he reached Harry the bolo was in his hand and poised. +With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last +coil, and the portion suspended from the tree fell alongside of the +combatants, and John's hands reached out to assist Harry. + +[Illustration: _"With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed +above the last coil"_] + +Harry was frightened so that he could hardly utter a word, and after +some exertion he disentangled himself and gazed on the immense serpent. +When he had recovered partially he was too much excited to proceed, and +they returned to the camp with a story of the attack and the noble +rescue on the part of John. + +George's excitement was at fever heat. "We must get his skin." Harry was +willing, because a trophy of that kind was worth preserving. The team +was taken along, as it was fully a half mile from the camp. When the +Professor saw the serpent he congratulated Harry on his escape, who, but +for the fortunate presence of John, would have been killed. + +It measured twenty-two feet in length and its greatest diameter was +eight inches. + +"What is this--the boa constrictor?" + +"It belongs to the same family, but is known as the anaconda." + +"What is the difference between the boa constrictor and the python?" + +"The boas are the species found in the western hemisphere, whereas the +pythons inhabit the eastern countries. The anaconda is a native of +Brazil and some of the other South American countries. They are +non-poisonous, and depend for securing prey on their wonderful swiftness +and in the tremendous power which they exert when the victims are in +their grasp." + +As usual, George had been prospecting also, and when the skin had been +removed and the excitement died away, he exhibited a peculiar fruit. It +was the shape and size of a pear, but had a peculiar kidney-shaped +pendant at its large end. + +The Professor smiled when he saw it. "You have the fruit of the +Anacardium, or cashew tree. That is, it is a combined fruit and nut." + +"Is this little projecting part a nut?" + +"Yes; and this evening we can try some of them; but they must be +roasted. The fruit can be eaten as it is, but it is like the persimmon; +it must be fully ripe, or it will be too astringent. It is a fine +medicine, and the sap of the tree produces a product like gum arabic, +and is known in commerce as acajou." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 31. Acajou._] + +The elevation which Harry was anxious to gain was before them, less than +a mile, and as it was not more than four in the afternoon, the team was +driven forward and the slight ascent begun. In a half hour the summit +was reached. It was not at a great elevation, but the incline was a +gradual one, and it was hoped that from the elevated portion a better +glimpse could be obtained than the tree afforded. + +It was too late when they reached the camping place to attempt any +observations that night, but in the morning an investigation was made to +find a tree of sufficient size to afford a good view. When it was +finally found the hoop was again brought out and Harry slowly made his +way upwardly, and those below waited in suspense for news. + +He made a deliberate survey, and called down: "I can see the West River, +and directly to the southwest are white objects, but so far away that I +cannot tell what they are. They may be tents or huts, or something of +that kind. I couldn't say positively." + +"Do the objects appear to be at or near the river?" asked the Professor. + +"It is difficult to say whether the river goes in that direction. I can +see glimpses of the stream only here and there." + +"Do you see any mountains to the south?" + +"None whatever. Everything merges into a haze beyond the white objects I +referred to." + +"It is probable," said the Professor, "we have located them, as I find, +from an examination of the sailing chart, that the village is located at +about that point. I think our course should now be directed to the +river, as traveling will be better near its shores, and we would, I +think, be more likely to meet some of the inhabitants along the shore +than in the dense interior." + +The low mountain range beyond the West River was plainly visible from +the elevation. The Professor noted how its lower end sloped down, and he +knew their location beyond question, and explained that they were now +practically due east of the point where they were compelled, on the +tempestuous night, to turn back to the north. + +It was a long, weary night for them, because expectation ran high. They +were anxious, and yet dreaded the meeting, but they had sought it and +could not go back now. No fires were kindled that night, although George +had counted on some of the roast nuts. It would not be safe to hazard a +light. + +The utmost vigilance was now to be the watchword. There must be no +firing of guns or wandering from the camp on the part of either. At the +time the wagon was constructed the Professor had an eye to its use as a +means of defense, which was explained to the boys, and this offered a +great sense of security to them. + +The sides had been made high with this end in view, and not for the +purpose of hauling big loads. If attacked in the open, it would serve as +a fort, and would enable them to move around from one side, or end, to +the other without being exposed. In anticipation all the guns were +examined and the ammunition placed within reach and conveniently +arranged for any emergency. + +The provisions were also arranged to prepare for a siege if necessary. +During that evening the Professor for the first time explained in detail +how the natives would be approached. + +"I think it is well, now that we are about to come in contact with the +people here, to be prepared to meet them in the proper way, so as to +insure safety to ourselves. It is likely that we shall have to treat +with the natives, and thus come to some understanding, before we entrust +ourselves to their mercy. Above all things, we want to impress on them +the feeling that we are not antagonistic and have no hostile intentions. +We are unfortunate in not knowing the character of the dwellers on the +island. They may have had frequent contact with the outside world. That +may, or it may not, mitigate our lot. So we cannot count on that factor +too much. If they are low down in the scale of humanity, we may find a +still harder problem. In any event, however, this must be made plain. +The wagon is our fort. From that we can defy them, unless they have +firearms. + +"From this time on let us keep together----" + +Something unusual stirred beyond. The crackling of twigs was plainly +recognized, and the mumbling sound of voices could be made out. They +were human voices, but their intonations, as they came nearer, were +sufficient to show that the language was not that of civilized people. +They were more in the nature of successive grunts, not much more +definable than the noises of animals. + +They were wrought up to the highest tension, and the only fear was that +either Angel or the yaks would make some noise which might attract the +passers-by. To their great relief the sounds died away. This visit would +have been welcomed during the daytime, but at night they could not +afford to take any risks. + +This incident showed they were now in an enemy's country. The river was +fully ten miles to the west of them. How far the encampment or village +of the inhabitants was to the south they could only imperfectly +estimate, but it was certainly twenty miles or more. + +What they longed for at this stage more than anything else was the open +country. The proximity of the river would likely be the better place for +them, so early the next morning the team was gotten ready, and before +starting, the Professor made a survey of the surroundings in the +direction that their visitors had gone. + +At several places were indications of tracks, and these were followed, +the team coming along behind. Everything was covered with leaves where +the trees abounded, and in the more open areas the grass was so well +advanced that it was difficult to distinguish tracks in the earth, but +the broken-down grass plainly showed their trail, leading to the south. + +Aside from that, nothing could be gathered to give any indications until +they had proceeded over a mile, when a small rivulet, the first they had +noticed since leaving West River, crossed their route. The Professor +actually bounded forward at the sight and examined the footprints. The +marks of bare feet were visible where they crossed, and they were of +abnormal size. + +After a careful examination, the Professor said: "There must have been +at least a half dozen of them, judging by the different prints. See, +this one has a deformed foot, or the big toe is missing; and this one +must be a large man, judging from the deep impression made." Beyond the +vicinity of the stream all footprints were again lost. + +"As we are now likely to have an open country until we reach the river, +we can make more extended observations from the top of the wagon, and +one should be there constantly to notice any signs on either side." + +They were within five miles of the river, and George, who occupied the +post of lookout on the top bow of the wagon, called out excitedly: "I +can see them; there must be a dozen or more." The wagon stopped, and the +Professor and Harry hurriedly scrambled to the top. John saw the +movement and seemed to understand, for he also crawled up and looked +across the rolling landscape to the southwest. + +In the distance were unmistakable movements of beings moving to and fro. +They were distant at least two miles, and there was no evidence, from +the character of their movements, that anything unusual had occurred, +and it might therefore be inferred that the wagon had not yet been +discovered. + +At last they had come up to the people who occupied such a large share +of their speculations during the past year, and in "THE TRIBESMEN" are +set forth the meeting of the savages and the hostile manner in which they +were received, together with some of the things which really show why the +land they lived in might justly be called "Wonder Island." + +THE END + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +GLOSSARY OF WORDS USED IN TEXT + + + Alloy. A combination of two or more metals. + + Actinic. Photographic rays. Those vibrations above the + vibrations which produce violet. + + Acutely. To the point. Being keen. + + Allied. Attached to; bound to; an arrangement with. + + Alienation. To cause to turn away; to make indifferent. + + Amplitude. Scope; reach; breadth; fullness. + + Antiquated. Adapted to the uses or customs of olden times. + + Animation. Possessing animal life; sparkling; lively. + + Antagonistic. Against; opposed. + + Agility. Quick; sprightly. + + Assumption. Taking it for granted. + + Bacteria. A microscopic microbe, very minute, widely + distributed in all matter. + + Betokened. To give promise or evidence of; presage; indicate. + + Bestowed. To confer as a gift; to give freely as a gift. + + Buccaneer. A pirate or freebooter. + + Bullion. Gold or silver in mass, usually in convenient bar. + + Calcareous. Impregnated with lime, or largely composed of it. + + Cardinal. Of prime or special importance. + + Caulking. The process of filling the seams of vessels. + + Cavities. Holes; depressed portions. + + Carbonate. To impregnate or charge with carbonic acid. + + Calcium. Lime. + + Canopied. A covering. Usually a conical top. + + Centrifugal. Directed or tending away from the center. + + Characterize. To delineate or set forth in a particular way. + + Consistently. Standing together or in agreement. + + Convolute. Rolled one part on another or inward from one side. + + Coefficient. A number or letter put before an algebraic + expression, to show that one is to be divided by the + other. + + Constant. That which is permanent or invariable. + + Convex. Bulging outwardly; raised. + + Conducive. Helping; tending toward. + + Contingency. The awaiting of an event; in the event of. + + Compounding. Made up of two or more substances. + + Contracted. Made smaller; reduced in size. + + Combustion. Being consumed. Disintegration. + + Contemplated. To consider thoughtfully; to look at attentively. + + Caucasian. Of, pertaining to, or characteristic of the white + race of mankind. + + Consistency. Harmonious; not contradictory. + + Clarified. Made clear; not turbid or cloudy. + + Crucial. Decisive as between views or theories. Testing. + + Cylindrical. A barrel-shaped body. + + Decoration. To adorn with something ornamental. + + Debris. Accumulation of material. + + Defect. Something short; not perfect. + + Density. Closeness of parts. + + Delver. One who searches into things. + + Demeanor. Appearance; manner; action. + + Domesticated. To bring under the control of man. + + Delusion. The state of being deceived or led astray. + + Dilapidated. Torn up; fallen into decay; gone to ruin. + + Discrimination. Ability to select; to judge; to be able to pick out. + + Deranged. A disordered mind. + + Deportment. Manner of acting. + + Dextrous. Skilful; quick; adroit. + + Designations. A distinctive mark or appellation. + + Depressed. Lowered; made unhappy or unspirited. + + Determination. Insistence; firmness; fixed purpose. + + Decomposition. The act or process of separating anything. + + Dimensions. The measurements; sizes. + + Dilemma. A perplexing case to decide. + + Duplicated. Made in a similar manner. + + Duct. An opening, hole, or conveyor. + + Ductility. Capable of being drawn out. + + Effective. Fit for a destined purpose; a striking impression. + + Emergency. An unexpected happening calling for immediate + action. + + Emaciated. Greatly reduced in flesh. + + Entranced. To put into a state of ecstacy. + + Ensue. That which follows; to go after. + + Enraptured. Overpowered with emotion. + + Entablature. The uppermost member held in place by columns. + + Episode. A particular occurrence. + + Essential. The particular thing; the important element. + + Estuary. The portion at the mouth of a river where it + discharges into another body of water. + + Exhilaration. Lively, pleasing or enlivening sensation. + + Extracted. To take from. Taken out of. + + Facial. Pertaining to the face. + + Facility. Doing with ease. + + Fascination. A resistible influence. A pleasing impulse. + + Fathom. To find out; depth; penetration. + + Fermentation. A chemical condition where germs are developed and + grow in a substance and change the elements + comprising it. + + Feasible. Easy to accomplish; that which is practical. + + Fiber. A structure composed of filaments, like a vegetable + stalk. + + Formation. The manner in which articles or substances are built + up. + + Fracture. A break or crack. + + Fraternity. A body of persons held together by some common tie. + + Fusing. To melt by heat. + + Fumigating. To treat by means of gases. + + Fulcrum. The support against which a lever rests. + + Granulating. To form into small grains or particles. + + Grotto. A small cavern or cavern-like apartment. + + Gruesome. Suggesting gloomy or frightful thoughts. + + Gunwale. The upper portion of the hull of a ship or boat. + + Horizontal. At right angles to a line directed to the center of + the earth. + + Hypnotized. A treatment which acts directly on the mind or + nervous system. + + Impervious. Permitting no passage through or into. + + Immoderately. More than the usual; more than the ordinary. + + Instructively. Along educational lines; learning things. + + Intonation. The modulation of the voice. + + Inactive. Not vigorous. + + Intestines. That part of the digestive tube below the stomach. + + Intimation. A hint. + + Intruder. To enter or appear when not wanted. + + Inscription. A writing; an announcement. + + Inevitable. Anything which is bound to happen. A result. + + Insulated. Shielded from something. + + Interim. In the meantime. Within certain periods. + + Incidence. Happening at the same time. A circumstance. + + Interpret. To make plain. To bring to an understanding. + + Ingenuity. To devise; to bring forward out of the ordinary. + + Inordinately. More than the ordinary course or manner. + + Indicate. To show, or to point out. + + Intensity. With full vigor; strong; vivacious. + + Inverted. Upside down. Turned about. + + Insistent. To continue urging; determination. + + Involuntary. Without intent; in spite of all precaution. + + Inefficient. Not careful or prudent; without full capacity. + + Jubilant. Joyous. + + Laboriously. Consistently carrying out work without regard to the + amount of labor required. + + Lacerated. To injure or to tear the flesh. + + Lee. The side or direction opposite to that from which + the wind comes. + + Malady. Sickness. Particular kind of illness. + + Manipulate. The manner of handling. To artfully influence the + result. + + Manifestation. Made known; acknowledged; understood. + + Maneuvered. To make methodical change of position. + + Maritime. Pertaining to the sea, or to naval affairs. + + Mercury. A silver-white metallic metal in a liquid state. + + Minimizing. The smallest state. In the least difficult position. + + Misgiving. A feeling of doubt or apprehension. + + Miniature. Small; a little copy. + + Momentum. The power of overcoming resistance possessed by a + body. + + Mobility. The capacity to change or alter. + + Monopoly. Possessed of complete power. Full sway. + + Nitrogenous. Partaking of the qualities of nitrogen. + + Normal. A perpendicular; according to an established law or + principle. + + Obliquely. A deviation from the direct line. + + Octagonal. Eight-sided. + + Orbit. The course in which a planet travels. + + Orifice. A hole; an opening. + + Orgy. Wild or wanton revelry. + + Ozone. An allotropic condition of oxygen. A substance made + from oxygen. + + Pandemonium. A fiendish or riotous uproar. + + Paleontologist. A student in the origin of life on the globe. + + Patriarch. The elder; the one in a tribe on whom authority + vests. + + Pathetically. In a vein of sadness; arousing tender emotions. + + Parallel. On a line with; side by side the same distance. + + Paralyzed. Loss of power to control the muscles or other parts + of the body. + + Penetrate. To go into. + + Perforation. To make an opening or hole. + + Periodical. At regular intervals. + + Peaty. Having the characteristics of peat. + + Personified. To transform from a thought or speech into a person. + + Perturbed. To be disturbed in mind. + + Perceptible. Noticeable; seen. + + Phenomena. Something directly observable; anything visible. + + Primitive. The first way of doing things; the original plan or + method. + + Prospecting. Investigating; trying to discover new elements or + substances. + + Profusion. Many; an abundance. + + Port. A haven. The left side of a vessel. + + Proportionally. Relative magnitude, number or degree. + + Predominating. Overshadowing; possessing power. + + Properties. The elementary substances of any material. + + Propagate. To bring to a better condition or state. Making an + improved breed or type of animals or plants. + + Prognosticate. To foretell. + + Promulgate. To announce; to give out. + + Privation. Hardship. To be kept from the necessaries of life. + + Promontory. A high point of land extending out into the sea. + + Progenitor. An ancestor in the direct line. + + Proximity. Close to; in the neighborhood of. + + Radiating. To emit or send out rays. + + Relaxation. A change from the ordinary routine. + + Retarding. Holding back; making the object go slower. + + Reticent. Habitually keeping quiet or in reserve. + + Regulation. In accordance with some law or order established. + + Refraction. That property in light which causes a bend as the + ray passes from one substance through another. + + Reverse. In the opposite direction. + + Rifling. Spiral grooves in the bore of a gun. + + Rotation. Turning; moving around a common center. + + Seepage. Leaking; passing through. + + Sequence. That which follows as the result of a certain thing. + + Secluded. Kept hidden; not exposed. + + Spherical. Round like a globe. + + Spiral. Having the twist of a corkscrew. + + Spawning. The period when fish lay their eggs. + + Stringers. The longitudinal pieces which form the main frame + of a structure. + + Standard. A post. Also the flag or ensign of a country. + + Strata. Parts of layers of earth, rock, or other material. + + Strenuous. Vigorous; insistent. + + Suppressing. Trying to keep out of sight; hidden. + + Substitute. In place of. + + Sulphide. A compound of sulphur with another element. + + Subsided. To stop; to proceed no further. + + Symptoms. Indications; showing effects of certain illness or + treatment. + + Synthesis. The putting of different things together. + + Theorist. One who speculates; one who tries to arrange facts + to harmonize. + + Timbre. The peculiarity of a sound whereby it is + distinguished from another. + + Tortuous. Moving in a winding or irregular way. + + Tourmaline. One of the gems, found in various colors. + + Traverse. Across; traveling; to go over. + + Triangulation. The method of surveying whereby two known points + are used to find a third, by means of the angles + made. + + Utilitarian. One who tries to take advantage of any knowledge and + make use of it. + + Untenable. Without good ground. + + Vacuum. A space entirely devoid of matter. + + Veered. Turned aside or in a different direction. + + Veritable. Truthful; well known to be correct. + + Vibration. Any movement which is more or less irregular and + continuous. + + Vividly. Distinctly seen; brightly appearing. + + Wrench. To twist violently. To injure by a forcible turn or + movement. + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +Other books from + +THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY +147 Fourth Avenue +New York + + + + +THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + +By ROGER T. FINLAY + + +A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable +experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the +South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the +exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools +and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them +but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The +books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to +know. + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Castaways + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + Exploring the Island + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Mysteries of the Caverns + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Tribesmen + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Capture and Pursuit + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Conquest of the Savages + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + Adventures on Strange Islands + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + Treasures of the Islands + + + + +THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS + +BY J. S. ZERBE + + +CARPENTRY FOR BOYS + +A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all +subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of +tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles +involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the +rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty +illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a +complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most +comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys. + + +ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS + +The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental +principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the +work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been +developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using +technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It +has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred +original drawings. + + +PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS + +This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical +shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of +shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work, +and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every +subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a +glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature +that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully +illustrated. + + + + +THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS + +By ELBERT FISHER + + +This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who +make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet +with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their +adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter +relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries +through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of +boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The +books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each +chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the +author, and four striking halftones. + +1. From New York to the Golden Gate, takes in many of the principal +points between New York and California, and contains a highly +entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a +little useful information. + +2. From San Francisco to Japan, relates the experiences of the two boys +at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii, +Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and +a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text. + +3. From Tokio to Bombay. This book covers their interesting experiences +in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong and +finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field +seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great +Hyderabad region of South India. + +4. From India to the War Zone, describes their trip toward the Persian +Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site +of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan +through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where +they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa, +and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully +described. + + + + +The Ethel Morton Books + +By MABELL S. C. SMITH + +This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls. +Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our +young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their +accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know. + +In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the +entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of +swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted +as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are +illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text. + + Ethel Morton at Chautauqua + + Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship + + Ethel Morton's Holidays + + Ethel Morton at Rose House + + Ethel Morton's Enterprise + + Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge + + + + +THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUTS + +A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS + +By Capt. Alan Douglas, Scout-master + + + I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol + + Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid + opportunities to use their recently acquired knowledge in a + practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, + astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp life. A clean, + wholesome story every boy should read. + + II. Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good + + This tale presents many stirring situations in which the boys are + called upon to exercise ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled + with healthful excitement. + +III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot + + Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to + the credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow + fast, one after the other. + + IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge from Fairfield + + They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description + of the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome + thereof, form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball + stories of recent years. + + V. Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop + + After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest + undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the + good-natured rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many + interesting and amusing situations. + + VI. Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day + + Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face + of apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and + surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories + Captain Douglas has written. + +VII. Under Canvas; or, The Hunt for the Cartaret Ghost + + It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys + by the exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long + puzzled older heads. + +VIII. Storm-bound; or, a Vacation Among the Snow Drifts + + The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training + comes to the rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all + concerned. + + + + +Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge Boy Scout Series, +all illustrated:-- + + Wild Animals of the United States--Tracking + + Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States + + Reptiles of the United States + + Fishes of the United States + + Insects of the United States and Birds of the United States. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: THE +MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS*** + + +******* This file should be named 20614-8.txt or 20614-8.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/20614-8.zip b/20614-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..013f6ec --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-8.zip diff --git a/20614-h.zip b/20614-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5b4f3b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h.zip diff --git a/20614-h/20614-h.htm b/20614-h/20614-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cce0105 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/20614-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7967 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the Caverns, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */ + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */ + .sidenote {width: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em; margin-left: 1em; + float: right; clear: right; margin-top: 1em; + font-size: smaller; background: #eeeeee; border: dashed 1px;} + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;} + + .poem {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;} + .poem br {display: none;} + .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;} + .poem span.i0 {display: block; margin-left: 0em;} + .poem span.i2 {display: block; margin-left: 2em;} + .poem span.i4 {display: block; margin-left: 4em;} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 80%;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the +Caverns, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the Caverns</p> +<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p> +<p>Release Date: February 17, 2007 [eBook #20614]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo, Mary Meehan,<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net/c/)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h1>The Wonder Island Boys</h1> + +<h2>THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS</h2> + +<h3>ROGER T. FINLAY</h3> + +<h4>ILLUSTRATED</h4> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h4>THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY<br /> +<span class="smcap">New York</span><br /> +<span class="smcap">Copyright, 1914</span></h4> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus1" id="illus1"></a> +<img src="images/illus1.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>"The professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George"</i></h3> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + +<!-- Autogenerated TOC. Modify or delete as required. --> +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I. <span class="smcap">Mysterious Disappearance of the Team</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The runaway team. Circumstances leading up to the present +condition. The singular occurrences. Examining the tree. The search +for the yaks. Red Angel as a scout. On the tracks. Losing the +trail. Red Angel's discovery. The wrecked wagon. The lost weapons +and ammunition. Breaking in new steers. The planting program. +Different plants and soils. Prospecting for ores and vegetation. +Discussing hunting trip. How people of different countries select +soils. Wild fruit and vegetables. Lessons from the actions of their +animals. Propagation of fruit and vegetables. Chemical changes +produced by different soils. The wild potato.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II. <span class="smcap">Working on the New Boat</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Determine to bring in the newly discovered lifeboat. Trip to South +River. Finding the broken yoke of their team. Recovering the +lifeboat. Uses for the bolo. Decision to row the boat around the +point. Making more guns. Preparing new tools. Alloys and their +uses. Hardness of metal. Bronze. Ancient guns. Manganese. Making +stocks for the guns. Commencing the hull of the new boat. Size of +the vessel. About shape or form of hulls. Momentum. Resistance. Red +Angel's attempt to whistle. Amusing performance. Teaching Red Angel +accomplishments. Vibration, the universal force.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III. <span class="smcap">The Hidden Message</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The new yoke for the yaks. Some of the mysteries. Discussion +concerning future discoveries. Rainbows. Musical pitch and colors. +Reflection and refraction. Riding the yaks. Completing some of the +guns. The trip after the wrecked wagon. Finding their runaway team. +Accounting for their disappearance. Prospecting. Sugar cane +discovered. Sorghum. The Tamarisk. Rigging up the lifeboat with +sails. Discovery of a hidden message in the lifeboat. Examining the +place where it was found. Determining the time when the message was +written. Rushing preparation of guns and ammunition. Galena. Lead. +Getting rid of the sulphur. Making bullets.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV. <span class="smcap">The Terrible Monsoons</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Completing the guns. Description of the new ones. Polishing grit. +Emery. Corundum. Laying the keel of the big boat. Terrible winds. +The monsoons. Trade winds. Length of summers north and south of the +Equator. Disappearance of the flag from Observation Hill. George +and Angel's hunt for the flag. Disappointment. Angel finding the +flag. Angel's laugh. Facial expression in animals. Brass. The form +of bullets. Why pointed at one end and hollow in the other. Rifling +guns. Spiral movement. Molds for castings. The Professor's desire +to fully explore the cave. Weaving the sails for the new boat. +Angel's work on the loom.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V. <span class="smcap">The Voyage for the Benefit of Angel, and the Discovery</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Completing the hull of the new boat. Making manilla rope. Decide to +take Angel along. Enticing him aboard. His consternation. Rounding +the cliffs. Discovering their first boat among debris. Taking it +along as a trailer. Sailing up Cataract River. Evidence that their +boat had been used by some one. Proof of its use by the natives. +One of the signs of civilization. Leverage. Fulcrum. Mechanical +powers. Delay of voyage owing to weather. Tourmaline. Harry's +invention. The bamboo tubes. Testing how fast the guns could be +loaded and fired. Cartridges. The marine works. The boats. Three +cheers for the new ship.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI. <span class="smcap">The Gruesome Finds in the Cave</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The cave. Taking the boat to explore the interior. The air pocket. +A board for charting the cave. The boat on the wagon. Entering the +cave. The lights. Returning for the boat. The peculiar noise at the +cave entrance. Methods for searching the cave. The domed chamber. +Making a circuit within it. The outlet. The second chamber. The +chalk icicles. Limestone. Volcanic action. Carbonic acid, and what +it produced. The caves of the world. What is learned in searching +caves. Their archaeological knowledge. A peculiar formation in the +large chamber. A platform within a recess. Skulls and skeletons. +Ancient weapons. Evidences of a terrible conflict. Musket balls. +Dirks and unknown forms of weapons. Singular copper receptacles. +Curiously wrought knives. Articles of furniture. Decayed clothing. +Kitchen utensils. Why the cave takes care of the smoke.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII. <span class="smcap">The Treasures of the Cave</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The couch in the recess. Chests of gold. A pirates' lair. The +ancient coins. Peculiar articles of ornament. The lid with mocking +lock. Rings; bracelets. The buccaneers. The sermon. Ghastly relics. +A perceptible movement in the atmosphere. Startling supposition. A +possible outlet in the side of the hill. The slab of carbonate. The +writing on it. An accident and the finding of other skeletons. The +light shining into the cave. Discovery of the outlet. View of the +cataract from the opening in the hillside. The boat in the cave. +Taking it out by the hillside opening. The Professor's search. +Return of the boys with the team. Re-enter the cave. The Professor +lost. Hunting in the unknown passages. Return of the Professor. +Taking two of the skeletons to the laboratory.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII. <span class="smcap">Removing the Vessels from the Caverns</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Completion of the boat. Making a trial voyage. Rounding the cliffs. +Trip to the south. The forests and the mountains. On the south +coast. A raging storm. Seasickness and dizziness at great heights. +The calcareous slab from the cave. The letters on it. Photography. +Reagents. Photographic light. X-rays. Taking the copper vessels +from the cave. Gathering up the bones. Evidences of the strife. +Spanish inscriptions. Gold bullion. Silver ornaments and vessels. +Decayed chests. The coins. Peculiar guns. Non-effective powder. +Disappearance of Angel. Return of Angel with a rusted modern gun. +Iron or steel guns. Powder as a factor in making weapons.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX. <span class="smcap">Making Electricity</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Their present condition. What they had accomplished. Working for +love. Contemplating the hoard in the cave. Selfishness at the +bottom of the pirates' lives. Gathering sugar cane. Honey, and its +uses in ancient times. Beets and various tubers. Fattening +properties. Nitrogenous matter. The load of cane. Making a sugar +mill. Lime in sugar-cane juice. Clarifying sugar. A candy pulling. +Granulating sugar. The earth as a magnet. Electricity. Positive and +negative. Magnetic poles. Likes and unlikes. Making a magnet. +Retaining magnetism in a bar.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X. <span class="smcap">Starting on the Voyage to the West</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>A barometer. Air pressure. A compass. The atmosphere. Dry weather. +Observing weather conditions. Providing compartments in the boat +for provisions. Bedding. Water supply. Faith. Preparing a tablet +for the Cataract. A terrific storm. A delayed departure. How delays +have often proved valuable to investigators. Starting the voyage to +the west. Striking a course. Observations on speed. Going with the +wind. Tacking. Angles of incidence. The action of air on a surface. +Determining the pressure of air by its velocity. Flying machines. +Time and speed in a vessel. Qualities necessary in a sailor.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI. <span class="smcap">A Terrible Voyage and the Shipwreck</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The shadows of night. Recalling memories of their shipwreck. The +charting board. Cardinal points of the compass. How direction +traveled is laid out on the chart. Measurement by angles. A weary +night. The watches. The wind changing. The second day. Cliffs +beyond. Sailing against the wind. Rounding the northern point. The +fourth day. The increasing gale. Night. The lights to the south. +The gale turning to a storm. Driven back. A night without sleep. An +appalling monsoon. Springing a leak. The Professor exhausted. +Danger ahead. The cliffs. A maelstrom in sight. Averting the +danger. Recovery of the Professor. Steering for shore. Striking the +beach. The vessel shattered. Stranded miles from home. Taking up +the march. Putting an inscription on the boat. Nearing home.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII. <span class="smcap">The Return Trip. The Orang-outans</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The blackened fire space. Discovery of their own camp in the +forest. An adventure in the woods. A huge bear. George's shot. +Charging the Professor, and his shot. Attacking George. Safety +behind a fallen tree. Search for the luggage. The cries of Angel. +The bear finding their packages. The bear making use of their +things. What they had left. The yellow pear. Guava. The coffee +tree. Cherries. Gathering coffee berries. How Angel made himself +understood. His excitement. The discovery of a number of +orang-outans. Red Angel visits them. He is not welcomed. Return of +the animal. The clearing in the woods. Recalling the fight of the +bears over the honey.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII. <span class="smcap">The Strange Visitor</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The flag on Observation Hill. Approaching Cataract. The alarm by +Red Angel. The house intact. Discovery of a man at the stable. His +peculiar actions. Lost memory. Aphasia. Unable to speak. +Recognizing the signal flag on the strange man. Provided with +clothing. A peculiar malady. The instinct of self-preservation. +Going with George to Observation Hill. The actions of a sailor. The +stranger visits the workshop. Expert with the use of tools. +Projecting an exploring trip by land. Naming the stranger John. +Startled at sound of the name. Mechanically performing work. +Examining the skulls.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV. <span class="smcap">An Exciting Trip to the Falls</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The food supply. Butter. Cream. Centrifugal motion. Difference in +specific gravity between cream and milk. Making a cream separator. +Vegetables. Onions. Chives. The stranger as a prospector. Procuring +samples. Peculiarities of his malady. An exciting encounter with a +bear. John's skill as a hunter. Another honey tree. Killed with a +spear. The bear pelt. Visiting the falls. Action to indicate that +John recognizes the falls.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV. <span class="smcap">The Story of the Cave</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Mystery about John. Humanity's search. The desire to know and +acquire. Gathering supplies for an extended trip by land. The boys +visit the cave. Determine to search the chamber visited by the +Professor. Gorgeous calcareous hangings. The ghosts of past +centuries. Gold and silver vessels. Skeletons. A recess. A row of +chests. Spanish guns. The chained skeletons in the recess. An +arsenal. The struggle. Locked in the embrace of death. Ancient +origin of the cave. Paleontology. Stone and bronze ages. Atlantis, +the great continent in the Atlantic, which disappeared. Story of +the Egyptian priests. The actinic rays. Purifying action of +sunlight. Bacteria. Glass houses. The eye. How it expresses +character. Laughter. How it brightens the eye. Fishhooks. A fishing +party. The salmon.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI. <span class="smcap">Music and Animals</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Preserving fish. Why heat is used. The use of tin for cans. Music. +The violin made by the boys. Violin strings; what they are made of. +How they are prepared and treated. The concert. How the music +affected Red Angel. John enraptured. How it touched him. The change +in his eyes. The field mouse. How different animals are moved by +music. The lion. Hippopotamus. Tigers. Monkeys. Momentary flashes +of intelligence in John. Building a new wagon. Finding and making +paint. Lead. Fermentation. Flax. Driers. Turpentine. Synthetic +food. Analysis. Tubes for powder. Completing the guns. Stocking the +wagon with provisions. Starting on the trip. Jack and Jill. The +sixth trip.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII. <span class="smcap">The Trip Through the Dense Forest</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The trip along Cataract River. The great forest. How Angel +traveled. Reaching South River. Discovering a second falls. Where +the debris on a seashore comes from. The jungle. Leaving the river. +The two animals in the night. The camp aroused. A fight in the +dark. The puma. The frightened team. The injured yak. Animal +language. The panther. Trying to avoid the forest. Growing denser. +John and Harry scouting through the forest. Blazing a trail. The +hidden luncheon. End of the forest. Returning to the wagon. The +noise in their path. The wagon following the trail. The injured yak +improving.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII. <span class="smcap">Seeing the First Savages</span></a><br /></p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Teaching Angel. Finding a campfire. Determine from the conditions +that it was recently made. Prospecting from the tops of trees. A +climbing ring. How made and used. The climbing operation. Harry +sees another forest to the south. Clear in the west. The wounded +yak calls a halt. Resuming the journey. Harry in the grasp of a +giant anaconda. John severs its body with a bolo. Boa constrictor. +The python. The Cashew tree. Gum arabic. Seeing the West River. +Discovering signs of habitations to the south. Course to be +followed in meeting the natives. Hearing voices in the night. +Crackling of twigs. A party of savages. The next morning. Examining +the tracks made by the midnight party. Following the trail thus +made. The open country. The first view of the inhabitants.</p></div> + +<p><a href="#GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS_USED_IN_TEXT">GLOSSARY OF WORDS USED IN TEXT</a><br /></p> +<p><a href="#Other_books_from_THE_NEW_YORK_BOOK_COMPANY">Other books from THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</a><br /></p> +<!-- End Autogenerated TOC. --> + +<p></p> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h2> + + +<p><a href="#illus1">"The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George"</a></p> + +<p><a href="#illus2">"'We have probably found a pirate's lair, and here is the booty'"</a></p> + +<p><a href="#illus3">"The Professor walked toward him and held out his hand"</a></p> + +<p><a href="#illus4">"With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last +coil"</a></p> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>List of Figures</h2> + +<p><a href="#fig1">1. The Broken Yoke</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig2-3">2. Top View of Boat</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig2-3">3. Side View of Boat</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig4">4. Cross Section of Boat</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig5-6">5. Force of Momentum</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig5-6">6. Red Angel</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig7">7. The Color Spectrum</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig8">8. Reflection Angle</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig9">9. The Hidden Message</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig10">10. The First Gun</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig11">11. The Bullet</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig12">12. The Sea-going Boat</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig13">13. The Cave</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig14">14. The Slab Found in the Cave</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig15">15. Old Coins Found in Cave</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig16">16. Cane Crusher</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig17">17. A Magnet</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig18">18. Magnetic Induction</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig19-19a">19. The Two Magnets</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig20">20. Making a Permanent Magnet</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig21-22">21. Illustrating Wind Pressure, 1</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig21-22">22. Illustrating Wind Pressure, 2</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig23">23. Mariner's Compass</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig24">24. Chart of the Voyage</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig25">25. The Charting Board</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig26">26. Guava</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig27">27. Coffee</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig28">28. Cream Separator</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig29">29. The Lion and Cubs</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig30">30. The Puma</a></p> + +<p><a href="#fig31">31. The Acajou</a></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS</h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF THE TEAM</h3> + + +<p>The boys looked at the Professor in amazement. They were too much +excited and concerned at the new situation to be able to interpret what +the sudden disappearance of their team meant.</p> + +<p>The Professor turned to the boys: "Are you sure the yaks were tied +before we left them?"</p> + +<p>"I was particularly careful," answered Harry, "to tie both of them."</p> + +<p>"I am pretty sure that both were securely fastened, and they were in +that condition when I came back the last time," was George's reply.</p> + +<p>To understand the peculiar situation above referred to, it will be +necessary to go back and briefly relate some of the remarkable events +which had taken place in the lives of the three people concerned in this +history.</p> + +<p>George Mayfield and Harry Crandall, together with a Professor, were +mates on a ship training school, which sailed from New York one year +before. A terrific explosion at sea cast them adrift in mid-Pacific +Ocean, and after five days of suffering they were cast ashore on an +apparently uncharted island, without any food, and entirely devoid of +any tools, implements or weapons.</p> + +<p>Exercising the knowledge of the Professor, and the ingenuity of the +boys, they gradually dug from mother earth and from the rocks and trees +the articles necessary to sustain life, and eventually they found +different ores from which various implements and weapons were made. They +constructed numerous machines, crude, at first, and gradually developed +them. They succeeded in capturing yaks, a bovine species of animals, +some of which were trained like oxen; wagons were built; a shop +constructed; a water wheel installed; a primitive sawmill put up; a +primary battery made; articles of clothing woven; felt made; and +numerous things of this character originated from material which nature +had furnished in its crude state.</p> + +<p>While doing all this the desire to explore the island was a +predominating one. Four trips into the interior had been made in order +to ascertain whether or not it contained any human beings. During those +trips numerous evidences were found to show that savages were there, and +some indications that civilized people had visited the island.</p> + +<p>The peculiar happenings which excited their interest were the mysterious +things that occurred at various times, among which the following may be +briefly enumerated: The disappearance of a boat, which they built, and +which was left at the place where the team was lost; the subsequent +finding of the boat among debris on the seashore, having oars and rope +in it which were strange to them; the removal of the flagpole and flag +which had been erected up on a high point near the ocean, called +Observation Hill, and the fire in the forest.</p> + +<p>To the foregoing may be added the discovery of a prospecting hole, which +had been dug, evidently, by some one in the hope of finding mineral; a +yak with a brand on it; wreckage of a boat, which, undoubtedly, belonged +to their ill-fated ship; a gruesome skeleton on the seashore; and +finally one of the lifeboats of the schoolship and a companion to their +own, found on the shore of the stream where they now were.</p> + +<p>All these things were sufficient not only to cause alarm, but the +greatest consternation on the part of the boys. It must be said, +however, that the trials of the boys, under the calm, calculating +deportment of the Professor, had done much to make them self-reliant. +George, the elder, was of an exceedingly inquisitive turn of mind; he +was a theorist, and tried to find out the reason for everything. On the +other hand, Harry was practical in all his efforts; he could take the +knowledge obtained and profit by it, as the previous volumes show. It +was fortunate, therefore, as the Professor put it, that theory and +practice were personified in the two boys, who, although companionable, +were the exact opposites as types.</p> + +<p>The Professor never showed a preference, in any manner, for either. Like +the true philosopher he saw the value of the two distinct qualities, the +one useless without the other.</p> + +<p>When they had fully recovered from their astonishment, George was the +first to speak. "They may have broken the fastenings."</p> + +<p>The Professor, who had been intently examining the tree to which they +were hitched, said: "I can find no evidence of any undue wrench which +might show that they had gotten away by their own exertions. Let us see +whether we can follow the trail."</p> + +<p>The ground was covered with leaves, so that no earth was visible, and +the only sort of trail left in a forest, under those conditions, is the +slightly depressed tracks which the wheels make. They examined this, +noting also the overturned leaves, which are usually left in the wake of +cattle.</p> + +<p>The latter means seemed to be the only available way in which any trace +could be made out, and this they followed. It led directly to the west, +and toward the section they were desirous of exploring at the time the +present trip was inaugurated.</p> + +<p>"How fast do you suppose the team is traveling?"</p> + +<p>"Certainly not faster than we are now going. They cannot be hurried very +well, as you know, and we should be able to overtake them within an hour +or two."</p> + +<p>"But what shall we do if we find them in charge of somebody?"</p> + +<p>That suggestion brought up at once a very serious question. They had +made six pistols, very crude, it is true, but which served admirably as +weapons of defense; but the hazardous part of the present situation was +that only the Professor had one of the pistols, the others having been +left with the team. The only thing which added some comfort was the +knowledge that as the pistols required a special hook to enable them to +cock the firing plug, and as the Professor had this hook, those who took +the team might not be able to use the weapons against them.</p> + +<p>At this place it might be well to refer to Red Angel. Nearly nine months +before, on one of their trips, a baby orang-outan had been captured, and +the boys educated him, as best they could, and he really developed many +reasonable instincts. It was Red Angel who left the wagon and followed +them down the river, and who by his peculiar actions attracted attention +to their missing team.</p> + +<p>"We owe something to Angel for his cuteness in coming for us," said +Harry.</p> + +<p>The orang progressed rapidly, swinging, as he did, from tree to tree on +the route, and when no trees were in sight, would shamble along in a +peculiar way, as it is difficult for them to walk erect. Their feet are +not adapted to promote a graceful gait.</p> + +<p>"The track seems to be lost," said the Professor. "I cannot make it out, +either from the leaves or the depression. However, it appears best to +follow this course."</p> + +<p>Without stopping they proceeded in the same general direction. Red +Angel, who up to this time had followed the route taken by the party, +now turned to the right, and when George called, refused to return. As +George walked toward him, he kept advancing to the right, and could not +be induced to come back.</p> + +<p>"Probably we should follow him," was the Professor's conclusion.</p> + +<p>It was evident from Angel's antics that the change in the course +delighted him.</p> + +<p>George, who was ahead, soon stopped, and shouted back, gleefully. "Here +are the tracks! Good fellow, come here!"</p> + +<p>Angel understood this. He had actually sensed the direction taken by the +missing team, for here were the tracks. The only thing that grieved +George was the absence of the honey pot. Angel's weakness was honey, and +that was now with the team.</p> + +<p>Suddenly Angel, who was now in one of the large trees which grew all +along the course, began an excitable chatter, and vigorously jumped from +one limb to the next, and George, who knew his antics pretty well by +this time, stopped and prepared himself for some new and unexpected +development in this remarkable journey. Angel, on the other hand, +started off through the trees with wonderful agility, and it was all the +boys could do to follow.</p> + +<p>There, ahead of them, was the wagon perched against a tree, one of the +front wheels and an axle broken, and the tongue wrenched off; but the +yaks had disappeared. It is singular that the team had gone thus far +without meeting an obstruction. As it was, one wheel had locked with a +tree, and the yaks, by their tremendous power, had broken the parts +mentioned and gone on.</p> + +<p>Before the wagon was reached, however, numbers of articles were found +scattered along the trail, which were gathered up.</p> + +<p>The finding of the wagon was an intense relief. Their minds had been +perturbed with this occurrence, as never before, and they had met +numerous thrilling episodes before.</p> + +<p>"Something must have frightened the yaks, and they were going at a much +greater speed than at a walk when they collided with the tree," observed +the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Why do you think so?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"In the first place, the fact that our articles were scattered along the +path before they reached the tree; and, secondly, the wagon pole and the +wheel were strong enough to hold the yaks against the tree if they had +been moving along at their usual gait."</p> + +<p>"Well, I am thankful that we have the wagon, even though the yaks are +gone," said George, as he crawled into it. He peered out and continued +in a surprised tone: "Where do you suppose the pistols are? Did you +leave yours in the box, Harry?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; on the right side. Yours were there at the time. I saw all of +them."</p> + +<p>"They are not here now, and it is likely they have been lost with some +of the other things." Harry was up in an instant.</p> + +<p>"Where is the ammunition?"</p> + +<p>"It was all in the bottom of the box."</p> + +<p>It did not seem at all likely that the pistols or the ammunition could +fall out of the box. It is true other things had fallen along the way, +but this seemed to be such an unlikely occurrence that they could +scarcely credit it.</p> + +<p>The provisions were safe, and you may be sure that Angel was not only +petted, but he received a good share of the delicious sweet.</p> + +<p>It was now nearing night, and they were fully ten miles from home. Ten +miles is not a long tramp, but to travelers like ours, already weary +with their trudging and with the excitements of the day, it was +concluded to camp in the wagon for the night, and then proceed home +early in the morning. To take the wagon would be an impossibility.</p> + +<p>They really learned to love the patient yaks. For fully five months they +had been daily companions, and were now so well trained that some +discouragement was felt at being compelled again to break in others. +They had an ample supply of good material in the herd to pick from, but +it took time and patience to develop such a team as had been lost.</p> + +<p>During the entire night one of the trio kept watch, not so much from a +feeling of fear as in the hope the yaks would return during the night; +but they were doomed to disappointment. Morning came, but the yaks did +not, and after gathering together the most useful belongings, and +putting them into convenient bundles for carrying purposes, set out for +home.</p> + +<p>The first question taken up by the boys after their return was the +selection of a pair of young steers for the new team; and the work of +making a new pair of yokes was carried forward with energy. They were in +the midst of the planting season which had been interrupted when the +last journey was undertaken.</p> + +<p>Hitherto it had been the custom to devote at least one day each week to +hunting, on which occasions they also made trips to such points in the +island as had not been previously visited; and it was also a part of +their duty to examine the woods and the fields to find new specimens of +plants, fruits and flowers; and among the hills and ravines were many +kinds of ore, some of which they had been fortunate enough to find on +their entry to the island.</p> + +<p>The metals thus found were utilized, because they had set up a workshop +alongside the sawmill, and in it had a crude lathe adapted to work in +wood or iron. It will thus be seen that each tour was for prospecting +purposes, to supply their needs, as well as to learn what the island +contained.</p> + +<p>Each evening it was the habit to have a general discussion concerning +the events of the day, or with reference to matters of moment about the +work to be done on the morrow.</p> + +<p>George was much interested in the planting program. "What kinds of +vegetable would it be most advisable to plant in the space we have +prepared?"</p> + +<p>"One of the important points to consider in the planting of all crops is +whether the soil is adapted for it. When the United States were first +settled it was a surprising thing that many of the original settlers +would go miles inland, exposed to every sort of danger, to find land, +when there was plenty nearer the seashore or close to civilization. +There was a reason for that which we are only now beginning fully to +understand. Plants have a habit of growing in soil adapted for their +needs, and it would be an interesting study in going over our island to +consider the habits of plants in this respect."</p> + +<p>"Is that the reason why different countries have such different kinds of +plants?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; plants select their soil, and owing to these habits, every variety +of soil, in every climate, supports its own vegetable tribes. Of the +five thousand flowering plants of central Europe, only three hundred +grow on peaty soils, and those are mainly rushes and sedges. In the +native forests of northern Europe and America, the unlettered explorer +hails with joy the broad-leaved trees glittering in the sun among the +pines, as a symptom of good land, which he knows how to cultivate. The +rudest peasant in Europe knows that wheat and beans seek clay soils; the +northern German knows that rye alone and the potato are best adapted for +the blowing sands of that country; the Chinese peasant, that the warm +sloping banks of light land are fitted for the tea plant, and stiff, +wet, impervious flooded clays for his rice. Even the slaves in the +Southern States were aware that open alluvial lands were best suited to +cotton; and the degraded slaves of Pernambuco know that the cocoa grows +only on the sandy soils of the coast, just the same as in west Africa +the oil palms flourish on the moist sea sand that skirts the shore, and +the mangroves where muddy shallows are daily deserted by the retiring +tide."</p> + +<p>"Some time ago you stated in one of our talks that soil was the +necessary thing to select in order to propagate, or make good fruit and +grain out of the poor or wild kind. Were all our vegetables and grains +originally wild?"</p> + +<p>"Originally nothing in the way of fruit, flower, grain or garden +vegetables was anything but wild and unproductive, or bitter, tasteless +or unprofitable. Chemical changes are made in the plant by the soil in +which it grows, because it is from the soil that it gets its food. The +large and juicy carrot found at home is nothing but the woody spindle of +the wild carrot, and I have found several species of it here. Cabbages, +cauliflowers, Brussels sprouts and a host of other like vegetables were, +in their natural state, poor, woody, bitter stems, and had useless +roots. As I have already stated, the wild potato, which we are now +cultivating, has, in its original state, a bitter root, as you have +discovered."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT</h3> + + +<p>Early the following morning Harry sprang out of bed and hurriedly +shouted: "What did we do with the lifeboat in South River? Do you +remember whether we secured it when Angel came up and let us know about +the team?"</p> + +<p>The Professor and George were up in an instant. George was the first to +answer. "I left it the moment Angel came up."</p> + +<p>"I cannot remember," said the Professor, slowly, "but it seems to me, +now that I think of it, we left it on the banks, and it wouldn't do to +leave it there. You must go for it at once, and bring it down to the +bay, even though you cannot bring it around the cliffs."</p> + +<p>A hurried breakfast was prepared and the boys started off at an eager +pace for the river. They went directly southwest, aiming to strike the +river near the falls, and after passing over familiar ground, came +within several miles of it, when, in going down one of the sloping +descents, saw, in the distance, what appeared to be portion of the yoke +which the yaks carried.</p> + +<p>They hurried forward, and great was the delight at finding it was really +one of those they had made and used for months. It was a gratification +to know that the animals were east of the falls, and, probably, sooner +or later, would turn up at their home. Only one of the yokes was found, +but there was evidence that both of the yaks were freed, since the part +of the other yoke was still attached to the part found.</p> + +<p>The boys were glad of this, as they had such a friendly feeling for the +animals that they could not but feel that to be yoked together in the +forest would be a cruelty to them.</p> + +<p>"The Professor will be glad to know this," said George. "Look at this +part of the yoke, where it has been broken. I have no doubt that this is +where they struck the tree where the wagon caught."</p> + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig1" id="fig1"></a> +<img src="images/fig1.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 1. <span class="smcap">The Broken Yoke</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>"Let us take it with us, by all means," said Harry. An examination of +the yoke plainly showed where it had come in contact with bark with +considerable force. "What do you suppose caused them to be so frightened +as to run away?"</p> + +<p>They quickened their steps, and soon reached the river. There, on the +shore, was the lifeboat, as they had left it, and it was the work of +minutes only to set it adrift, and after depositing the yoke in the +bottom, the first task was to supply themselves with a pair of oars.</p> + +<p>The first article turned out in the way of tools was a bolo, a heavy +cleaver-like blade, used by many primitive tribes. This article was +duplicated by them, and always carried on all their expeditions. With +this several small trees were cut down, and a pair of oars fashioned for +each, and within an hour they were on their way down the stream, and in +two hours more had rounded the point of projecting land east of the +river mouth.</p> + +<p>"Don't let us take any more chances of losing this boat. I am in favor +of taking it around, and am willing to risk the tide, whatever it may +be."</p> + +<p>Harry's suggestion met with favor on the part of George, and when the +point was rounded and they were out in the ocean, the tide, although +coming in, had no terrors for them, but they boldly plied the oars, and +before four o'clock had rounded the cliff point, and steered the craft +into the mouth of Cataract River.</p> + +<p>The Cataract was a much smaller stream than South River, and it was on +the northern side of the island; whereas South River was on the +southerly side of the island. Less than a quarter of a mile from the +open sea was a cataract, at which their home was located, and the +cataract was utilized as the means for producing water power.</p> + +<p>Their appearance below the Cataract was hailed with delight by the +Professor, and you may be sure that when the boat was finally landed and +hauled up on the beach, all of them joined in the congratulations, which +was their due.</p> + +<p>"Just to think of it. If we had the boat we made, our lifeboat and all +the parts of the wreck of the other boat, we would have a pretty +respectable navy," was Harry's observation, when they landed. As it was, +they now had the wrecked after part of their own lifeboat, and here was +the other lying alongside. They knew the history of one of them. Would +they soon know why the other should have been found in the interior of +the island under such peculiar circumstances?</p> + +<p>"And where did you get the yoke?" asked the Professor, as his eye caught +sight of it.</p> + +<p>"Two miles this side of the falls."</p> + +<p>They little knew at this time what an important bearing the finding of +this boat would have on their future course, nor could they know how +this little incident would be of the greatest value to some of their +companions on the ill-fated ship.</p> + +<p>They now had possession of a boat which, while it was practically +unsinkable, was not of such size as to meet their demands for the +intended explorations. They felt that to attempt to circumnavigate the +island and take all the chances which a meeting with natives might +involve, would necessitate a much larger vessel. To add to the +difficulty, all the pistols but one had been lost in the last trip, and +to attempt to make explorations without proper weapons would be +foolhardy. If they knew one thing, with any degree of certainty, it was +that the island contained savages of some description, and provision +must be made for every contingency.</p> + +<p>Harry took upon himself the task of turning out more of the weapons, and +with the experience of the past four months in this line of work, +concluded he would attempt a better job than simply making pistols. It +was his ambition to make a firearm that would enable them to bag the +largest game, and also, at the same time, carry the bullets a greater +distance than the short eight-inch barrels could.</p> + +<p>To do this it was necessary to provide longer bits, and as the design of +the new guns contemplated a barrel at least eighteen inches long, the +bits had to be longer, in proportion, and the making of these consumed +nearly as much time as the actual drilling out of the barrels.</p> + +<p>George and the Professor put in a great deal of time with the new team. +Their knowledge of training, in view of the former experience with these +animals, was such that within a week they could drive the yaks without +much difficulty, although the new team was not by any manner of means as +efficient as the lost one.</p> + +<p>When the question of the kind of material for the guns came up, Harry +was much concerned, as in making the barrels that length would +necessarily greatly increase the weight.</p> + +<p>"I think it would be better to make an alloy for your purposes," said +the Professor, as they were discussing the matter.</p> + +<p>"What is an alloy?"</p> + +<p>"It is the combination of two or more metals."</p> + +<p>"In what way does the alloy make it better than the hardest steel?"</p> + +<p>"It is not hardness you want, but toughness. Metals have several +properties, which are utilized for various purposes in the arts. +Surprising as it may seem, wood has greater resisting power than +diamond, and yet the precious stone is the hardest of all substances."</p> + +<p>"But if we unite two metals are we not then making a new metal?"</p> + +<p>"Not necessarily so. In the case of brass it is true. This is made by +uniting two parts of copper and one of zinc. Both copper and zinc in +themselves are very soft, and copper cannot well be polished in its pure +state. Brass, however, is not only much harder, but is susceptible of a +very fine polish."</p> + +<p>"Are the alloys of all metals harder than the metals of which they are +made?"</p> + +<p>"This seems to be a universal law in the compounding of metals. Very few +metals are used alone in the various arts and manufactures. For every +purpose some combination has been found which makes the product better. +Even coins are so alloyed. Silver and gold in the form of money would be +entirely too soft, unless alloyed with some hardening metal. Some +substances, like arsenic, antimony and bismuth, are too brittle to be +used alone. The only metals which can be used alone are aluminum, zinc, +iron, tin, copper, lead, mercury, silver, gold and platinum."</p> + +<p>"What is bronze, of which all the ancient guns were made?"</p> + +<p>"That is a combination of copper and tin. This product was known fully +seven hundred years before the Christian era, and was used in the making +of guns until superseded by the various steel alloys of our day."</p> + +<p>"In what proportions are copper and tin united to make bronze?"</p> + +<p>"The proportions vary greatly. Ancient Celtic bronze had 12 parts tin +and 88 of copper; Egyptian, 22 tin, 78 copper; Chinese, 20 tin, 80 +copper; Roman, 15 tin, 85 copper; and in many specimens lead and zinc +were also used. Tin has a capacity to harden almost any metal."</p> + +<p>"What is the best metal to harden steel?"</p> + +<p>"Manganese, of which you will remember we have some samples; it is the +most serviceable, as we have neither nickel nor chromium."</p> + +<p>"What amount of that metal should we use to get the best results?"</p> + +<p>"About 14 per cent. of manganese has been found the best for such +purposes as would be required in gun barrels. There is a curious thing +which has been discovered in uniting manganese with steel. It becomes +fairly tough if 1 per cent. is used with the steel; if the quantity +added is between 1-1/4 and 3-1/2 the strength and ductility decrease; +but above that, up to 5 per cent., the steel becomes brittle; above +6-1/2 per cent. it again returns to ductility and toughness and its +maximum strength is found at 14 per cent."</p> + +<p>During the evenings all took a hand at cutting out the stocks for the +guns, and the plans upon which they were constructed will be fully +explained and illustrated in the order of the work done.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile it must not be supposed that work on the new boat had ceased. +Harry's plan, when fully worked out, provided for one twenty feet long +and six and a half feet wide amidships.</p> + +<p>The drawing (Fig. 2) shows the construction of the hull. As they had no +means for doing any fancy bending of the boards, the bottom was made +flat, and the sides sloping. The bottom and the sides were made in the +following manner: Two stringers (A, A) were first constructed, which +were made up of thin pieces nailed together, so they could be bent in +the proper shape for the bottom boards, which were laid crosswise and +nailed to these stringers.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig2-3" id="fig2-3"></a> +<img src="images/fig2-3.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig 2-3. <span class="smcap">Working on the new boat</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + + +<p>For the upper edges of the sides, called the gunwale (B, B), similar +stringers were provided, but they extended farther fore and aft, and +amidships were fully six and a half feet apart, whereas the lower +stringers amidships were four and a half feet apart. This arrangement, +therefore, provided for sloping sides, and the side pieces ran up and +down on the inner course. It will be understood that the sides and +bottom thus formed were to be overlaid with thin boards running fore and +aft, as in Fig. 2, as they had no means for matching the boards and thus +putting them together tightly.</p> + +<p>The sides were two and a half feet high. Six and a half feet from the +forward end was a cross beam (C), into which the mast was to be stepped. +At the stern the bottom was sloping upwardly at an angle and brackets +(D) were extended back and joined at their rear ends, to which the lower +end of the rudder post was attached.</p> + +<p>Amidships a keel (E) was formed, projecting down from the bottom, this +keel being, at its widest part, two feet, and tapering down to merge +with the bottom, fore and aft. The cross section (Fig. 4) shows how well +he had formed the vessel, proportionally.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig4" id="fig4"></a> +<img src="images/fig4.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 4. Cross Section.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>In addition to the cross seats, similar arrangements for comfort were +made along the sides, and beneath the side seats were spaces in which +their supplies were to be placed. The space forward of the mast was +entirely closed over with a roof which sloped in both directions, and +here provision was made for two berths. This would also afford them +protection and serve as a means to keep out the water and insure at +least one dry spot for their comfort.</p> + +<p>As usual, George had some inquiries to make about the boat. "It has +always been a matter of wonder why all boats are made with the big +bulging part nearest the forward end?"</p> + +<p>The Professor's eyes twinkled. "Probably there are a great many others +who have had such thoughts. There is really no reason for it. It is not +known how the custom originated, except that in sailing vessels the +claim is that the ship can be maneuvered more easily by such +construction."</p> + +<p>"In what way does it make it easier to handle?"</p> + +<p>"When a ship is driven forward by the wind, all the force exerted on the +sails is transferred to the forward part of the ship, hence if made +narrow at its forward end it would be driven down into the water, and +the hull would, therefore, be submerged more at the forward than at the +rear end. Furthermore, by having a tapering rear end, the rudder has a +better opportunity of veering the ship around and you can see that the +bulging part, being located forward of the middle portion of the ship, +acts as a sort of pivot."</p> + +<p>"But it seems to me that none of the reasons given will apply to a +steamship, and still all the ships I have seen are made in the same way +as the sailing vessels."</p> + +<p>"That is exactly what I inferred in my answer to your first question. +The truth is, that in experiments which have been made, it is shown that +to have the widest part of a steamer near the stern, gives lines to a +hull which has less resistance than if made in the conventional way."</p> + +<p>"I thought probably the reason for making them so was just the same as +in the case of an arrow, where the heaviest part is at the forward end."</p> + +<p>"In that case an entirely different principle is involved. A body falls, +or is projected through the air, with its heaviest end foremost, because +of the greater momentum in that portion."</p> + +<p>"It is the force of a body in motion. When a body is projected through +the air it meets with the resistance of the atmosphere, and this also +serves to turn the heavy side around to the forward end, because the +force of momentum in the heavy end is much less affected by the +resistance of the air than the lighter end." (See Fig. 5.)</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig5-6" id="fig5-6"></a> +<img src="images/fig5-6.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 5.</i></h3> + +<h3><i>Fig. 6. Red Angel.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>Red Angel had now been with them more than six months, and he was +probably a year old. When first captured he was a scrawny infant, dull +and stupid, like all of his class. He had wonderful powers in the way of +imitating habits and customs. The boys were very good vocalists, and +while at work Harry would sing, but George whistled. It was an amusing +sight to watch Red Angel when the boys engaged in the frequent concerts +at night.</p> + +<p>But of all the screamingly funny exhibitions, the attempt of Angel to +imitate whistling was the most ludicrous. The orang's lips project too +much to a point, and the jaws are so narrowed that the lips will not +pucker. Whenever the boys commenced their concert Angel would be on +hand, and enjoyed every moment of the time, and the boys had many a +concert purely for his benefit.</p> + +<p>At the end of each concert the whistling would begin. This invariably +brought Angel to the front, and his exhibitions would be given with the +utmost gravity and earnestness. The invariable result would be such +uproarious fits of laughter on the part of all that he would take part +in the jollification, little suspecting that the laughter was at his +expense.</p> + +<p>The only sound which he could emit during these performances sounded +like a high-pitched stick rattling along a pale fence; but he was +inordinately proud of it. It had always been on one key, heretofore, and +without variation; but this evening Angel startled himself, as he did +the others, by actually sounding two additional notes. He repeated this +over and over.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if we could make him talk?" asked George, after the laughter +had subsided.</p> + +<p>"There is no reason why some tones cannot be imitated. As the orang +possesses wonderful powers of imitation and has, in captivity, developed +many traits, I see no reason why simple words, or sounds, cannot be +taught."</p> + +<p>"I know there are words which he does understand. Time and again I have +told him things, which he seems to understand. Now see if he understands +this: 'Angel, do you want some honey?'"</p> + +<p>His attempts at whistling ceased, and in a moment more was in the +kitchen. Harry, who by this time had recovered from his mirth, thought +it would be a good idea to attempt to teach him.</p> + +<p>"If canary birds and dogs can understand language, I do not see why +Angel shouldn't."</p> + +<p>"Unquestionably, any animal, by patience, will learn the meaning of +sounds. Constant repetition of certain notes causes birds to repeat +them. I have known dogs to perform almost anything they were told to do, +although they are not able to utter a single sound of the words emitted +in giving the command."</p> + +<p>"Well, what is it that causes sound?"</p> + +<p>"The most wonderful thing in nature is, that she manifests herself in +only one way, namely, by a movement, or a motion of some kind. Vibration +is the term used to designate this. Sound, light, heat, taste, smell, +and everything which becomes sensible to us is produced by vibration. +The movements of the heavenly bodies, swinging back and forth around the +sun, like huge pendulums, the movement of the sap in trees, up and down, +the beating of the heart, the winking eyelids are all motions which show +energy, development, life."</p> + +<p>"But what is it that makes us understand one sound from the others?"</p> + +<p>"Simply the difference in the kind of vibration. There are three things +which characterize sounds; namely, pitch, intensity and character. Pitch +depends on the rapidity of the vibrations; intensity on the extent or +the amplitude of the vibrations; and character on the substance or +instrument producing them. To illustrate: When you sing a very high note +the vibrations may be five thousand vibrations a second, or there may be +only two thousand during that time. That represents the pitch. In +singing that note you may sing it so loud that, like a pendulum, it will +swing way over to one side, or it may move only a short distance. That +represents intensity. If either you or George had sung that note I +should have been able to detect it, whatever its pitch or intensity, +because your voices are as unlike as different musical instruments, and +that is character, or timbre, as the French call it."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>THE HIDDEN MESSAGE</h3> + + +<p>While the work of getting out the planking for the boat was going on, +and the plowing had now been resumed, since the new yoke of oxen were +fitted to do the work, the boys were not forgetful of the usual weekly +outing. They had several quite important things right at home which +needed looking into, if they wanted to solve some of the things on the +island. First, the cave, which they had twice attempted to explore; the +search for their lost boat, which had the strange rope and oars; and the +mystery of the flag and pole.</p> + +<p>These things weighed heavily on their minds, because these happenings +were close at hand. But what made the greatest impression on the minds +of all was the finding of the <i>Investigator's</i> lifeboat. It seemed +almost like a call to them from the interior. The impatience of the boys +was almost beyond restraint, at times.</p> + +<p>"It does seem to me that we should not delay an hour in making some +effort to explore the direction the boat came from," was George's view +of the situation as they canvassed the subject.</p> + +<p>"That is my idea, also, and I am not in favor of giving much more time +to hunting or other forms of recreation until we know how that boat came +to South River."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I can appreciate how anxious you are," said the Professor, after +the boys had given their views. "What we are doing, however, is +essential from every point of view. We must prepare provisions, so that +we shall be able to know where we can get them in case of need. On the +other hand, weapons are necessary, which take time to construct. If, +however, it is thought advisable, we might make a trip of explorations +along the South River, beyond the falls, the time to be limited to a +week; but I have my doubts of the wisdom of such a course."</p> + +<p>This suggestion appealed strongly to the boys, who were always keen for +anything which savored of adventure, and it was some time before the +boys could reconcile themselves to the saner and more business-like +course of completing the boat and making the trip by water.</p> + +<p>The weather was beautiful, and vegetation was springing up in abundant +profusion everywhere. Magnificent showers fell at intervals, and the +rainbows, more beautiful than any they had ever heretofore seen, spanned +the heavens after the showers.</p> + +<p>This had been noticed during the previous year, but now, after nine +months of their life, with the wonderful insight which their needs had +instilled into them, made them very observant of every phenomenon.</p> + +<p>"I have often wondered," observed George, as he gazed at the beautiful +broad band which formed a crescent across the heavens, "why there are +never any rainbows in the middle of the day. They are never seen except +in the morning or in the evening, and usually only in the evening."</p> + +<p>"In order to understand that it will be necessary to explain what a +rainbow is. As I stated previously, light is merely vibration. Now +colors are formed by the different lengths of the vibrations, just the +same as the different musical notes are made by the different vibratory +lengths. To understand this more fully, I make a sketch (Fig. 7), which +shows just what I mean. You will see that red is the lowest musical +pitch, which we will call C, and to the right is a long, wavy line. D, +the next pitch higher, might resemble orange, with the wavy line a +little shorter, and so on, until we reach the highest note in the scale, +where the wave lengths are very short. You have probably noticed that a +drop of water in the sunshine glistens, and, if closely observed, may +have seen that it was colored, particularly blue or green. As the rays +of the sun strike the globe of water, they produce different wave +lengths, and in that way make it appear to you as being possessed of +colors. Now, a rainbow is nothing more nor less than sunlight passing +through the drops of water which are suspended in the air and causing a +refraction of the light. At noon the sun shines down from overhead, and +we are not in the proper position to see this refracted light; but in +the morning or in the evening the sun shines against the earth at an +angle. At those times we are able to see the effect of refraction by the +colors produced.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig7" id="fig7"></a> +<img src="images/fig7.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 7. <span class="smcap">The Color Spectrum</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig8" id="fig8"></a> +<img src="images/fig8.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 8. <span class="smcap">Reflection Angle</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"When you throw a ball against a wall at an angle, it bounds away at the +same angle. That is reflection, and is just exactly what light does when +a ray strikes a mirror. If, on the other hand, the glass had no mercury +on it to reflect the light, the ray would not go straight through, but +would bend, just as you have seen a stick in a glass of water appearing +as though it was bent below the water line. That is refraction."</p> + +<p>Two weeks of very vigorous work had now been put in since the yaks had +disappeared, and the wagon was still at the edge of the forest. George +was anxious to recover it, with the new team, and with Harry started out +early in the morning to make up as much as possible lost time, as every +hour was considered valuable in their enterprises.</p> + +<p>The yaks could be ridden as well as horses, but the greater part of the +way were driven. One of the guns which had been completed was taken +along, as well as the only pistol which the Professor had saved. In less +than three hours the forest was reached and they were soon within sight +of the wagon.</p> + +<p>"What have we there?" cried Harry, as they neared the spot.</p> + +<p>"Our yaks! And where do you suppose they have been?"</p> + +<p>Close by the wagon were the yaks, as though patiently waiting for the +boys. They made no resistance, nor show of fright, when the boys +approached. One of them, Jack, still had the strap tied to the horns, +and it was the halter which had been attached to the tree at South +River.</p> + +<p>A hasty examination was made, but if either of the boys came to any +conclusion concerning it, nothing was said. Without wasting time, the +team brought with them was yoked up and the broken wheel replaced by a +new one. The repairs to the wagon tongue did not take long, and they +were ready for the return.</p> + +<p>"What shall we do with Jack and Jill?" Those were the names bestowed on +the first team. "Let us see if they will follow us."</p> + +<p>They had gone fully one hundred feet before the yaks made any sign, and +then slowly followed, thus assuring them that no care or attention would +be required in that direction. Both boys were intensely delighted at the +recovery of their favorites and could not get home fast enough to give +the Professor the good news.</p> + +<p>Nearing home, the Professor, who was on the watch, came out to meet +them, waving his hat at the sight of Jack and Jill. When the latter came +up he went over and affectionately petted the creatures, who seemed to +realize the welcome.</p> + +<p>"I hope they are as glad as we are; I can understand why they got away; +look at the end of this thong." It plainly showed the teeth of some +animal which had gnawed the leather of which it was made.</p> + +<p>"So you have been out prospecting, too?" was Harry's query, as he saw +the queer-looking reeds on the table in the laboratory that evening. +"What do you call that?"</p> + +<p>"Our honey has been getting low, and I took the occasion to-day to bring +in some samples of sugar."</p> + +<p>"Is that sugar cane?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; the true sugar cane."</p> + +<p>"Is that different from sorghum?"</p> + +<p>"This is the species which grows in the southern part of the United +States. The kind you know and which is cultivated in the Northern +States, is the Chinese Sorgo, or, as we call it, sorghum. It is equal in +quality and in quantity to the southern species and is readily treated +to produce molasses or sugar."</p> + +<p>"What is that peculiar flower, if it is a flower? I never saw a flower +like that; it seems to be hard."</p> + +<p>"I was surprised to find this. It is called the Tamarisk. This long, +oval-shaped part is made by an insect which inhabits the plant, and is +eaten by the inhabitants in the plains east of the Mediterranean Sea. It +is there called Mount Sinai Manna, and is supposed to be the Manna which +the Jews found when they were in the Wilderness after the Exodus."</p> + +<p>"I think we have properly named this place Wonder Island."</p> + +<p>In the volume preceding this, when they first considered the building of +a new boat, it was decided to graft an extension to the after part of +their wrecked lifeboat; but when the second one was found, and +calculations were made as to its usefulness, it was discovered that such +a course would not be wise; hence the larger vessel was found to be the +only solution.</p> + +<p>The newly discovered boat was, however, a valuable addition, as it +afforded a means by which short trips could be made, and Harry quietly +set to work making a sail and rigging up a mast, so that the +long-cherished desire to make these trips could be undertaken before +they were ready to launch the real vessel. It was hauled up on shore and +caulked and new parts added to make it adaptable for the purpose.</p> + +<p>While engaged at this work he removed the cross seat which still +remained, and in doing so was surprised to find a piece of cardboard +which had been hidden, apparently, at the end of the board. Eagerly +picking it up, he saw writing on it, with the following words: "We +cannot hold out much longer. Wright and Walters were captured yesterday. +<span class="smcap">Will</span>."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig9" id="fig9"></a> +<img src="images/fig9.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 9. <span class="smcap">The Hidden Message</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>Harry could hardly contain himself, as he rushed up to the laboratory, +crying out: "George, come here, quickly! I have found something!" +Without waiting to see whether George heard, he rushed into the +Professor's den with the paper in his outstretched hand. "Look at this; +don't you remember Will Sayers? I am sure it is Will."</p> + +<p>George heard his excited voice, and appeared without any delay.</p> + +<p>"What is it now?"</p> + +<p>The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George. +"Did you know either of the boys mentioned in this?"</p> + +<p>Neither had any recollection of Wright or Walters, but they inferred +that the writer must be Will Sayers, one of the companions. The +Professor had no recollection of the boy, nor could he remember the +other names.</p> + +<p>"Let us examine every part of the boat," was the Professor's first +suggestion. "We may find something more to give some clue."</p> + +<p>The boys rushed down to the beach where the boat was moored, the +Professor following.</p> + +<p>"Show us the exact location of this strip."</p> + +<p>"I had just taken off this cross seat, and as I did so this piece fell +from the end."</p> + +<p>"Let us put it back again and see how it fits into that place."</p> + +<p>When it was replaced they noticed that a crack was left at each end of +the seat, not exceeding an eighth of an inch.</p> + +<p>"It is very plain that the piece you found was at this end, and if it +was folded as this crease indicates, it could have been concealed there +and thus escaped our observation." After some minutes' examination, he +continued: "This piece must have been there for some time."</p> + +<p>"Why do you think so?"</p> + +<p>"You will notice that the end of the board has the marks of the folded +paper, showing it must have been in its place of concealment for some +time. Furthermore, the paper itself indicates that it has been there for +some time, by the discoloration on its outer side."</p> + +<p>"How long do you think it may have been there?"</p> + +<p>"It is impossible to say; but certainly for several months."</p> + +<p>"Doesn't it seem reasonable," Harry inquired, "to think it was some one +from the <i>Investigator</i>? Otherwise, how is it that they had possession +of the boat?"</p> + +<p>"That is the problem we shall now have to find out."</p> + +<p>Thus, in another direction, was found an evidence that savages were on +the island and that others had been wrecked and found a refuge there. +How much of a refuge it was to them they had no means of knowing. They +were thankful their own lives had been preserved and had been permitted +to accomplish so much during their enforced stay.</p> + +<p>"We are now vigorous and strong and have been blessed with energy as +well as health. It is our first duty to take up the task of finding our +comrades, whatever the cost may be. If that is your view, we should +proceed with that determination, but let us prepare for it in the best +manner possible. How long will it take to finish the six guns you are +now at?" said the Professor, looking at Harry.</p> + +<p>"I will try to have them ready within another week," was his reply.</p> + +<p>"In the meantime, George and I will prepare a new lot of powder; and for +your further information, I will state that I have been busy during the +past week in making preparations to extract some lead for bullets."</p> + +<p>This announcement was hailed with joy. Heretofore they had to depend on +the iron slugs which had been turned out, and they were not at all +satisfactory, because they lacked the proper weight.</p> + +<p>"Which is the lead?" asked George, who was examining the samples.</p> + +<p>"It is this bluish-gray sample of galena, which, as you see, looks like +lead itself, and is often mistaken for it; but it is far from being lead +of the kind we can work."</p> + +<p>"Why not?"</p> + +<p>"Because it is in what is called a sulphide form. Do you remember what a +sulphide is?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; it is where it is in combination with something."</p> + +<p>"That is a fairly good definition. More or less sulphur is found in all +metals, but when found in large quantities the ore is called a +sulphide."</p> + +<p>"How can we get rid of the sulphur?"</p> + +<p>"We can cook it and drive it off like steam. Lead melts at a low +temperature, comparatively, about 600 degrees Fahrenheit, so that with +our furnaces it will be a very easy matter to get a pure lead."</p> + +<p>During the rest of the day all were in the laboratory, superintending +the preparation for the work, and at the Professor's suggestion the boys +took the team in the morning and brought in over a hundred pounds of +galena to be treated.</p> + +<p>Before noon they had forty pounds of a very fine quality lead, and the +work of making molds for the bullets was begun. The Professor, however, +suggested that the boys should devote their time to the construction of +the boat and guns, and it was difficult to decide what was the proper +thing to do first.</p> + +<p>The Professor saw the dilemma and had a very earnest conference on the +subject.</p> + +<p>"You must not, by any means, be carried away with undue eagerness and a +desire for haste. The first essential of good business is to do +everything in order. It is better to plan carefully every step in +advance, so that you will know just when your energies will be required +for the next step. An eminent engineer, on one occasion, in answer to a +question as to why he was always prepared for an emergency, laid down +this rule: Whenever you have a problem to solve, work it out in more +ways than one. If one fails, you can apply the other immediately. +This can be done without a moment's delay. Therein lies the +answer—preparedness."</p> + +<p>The boys readily saw the force of the lesson. From that time on it was +not necessary to direct the order of events. Each saw to it that the +part allotted to him was carried out in a determined spirit.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS</h3> + + +<p>Of the two most urgent articles, namely, weapons or the boat, it was +decided that the guns should be completed first. The feeling that the +time would come when a visit from the savages might be expected at their +home, contributed to this decision.</p> + +<p>Six barrels, each eighteen inches long, and with a bore three-eighths of +an inch in diameter, had been turned out, and several of the stocks had +been made at odd times during the evenings. As Harry had sufficient +steel left for four barrels more, two days were devoted to boring them +out, in the hope that they would ultimately be able to finish them up. +They would then have a battery of ten guns, and the necessity of having +a number arose from the fact that they were muzzle-loaders, and could +not be reloaded rapidly.</p> + +<p>A sketch of the gun with the firing mechanism is furnished, in which it +will be seen that the firing plug travels in a bore formed through the +stock; in a line with the barrel. This plug had an upwardly extending +finger, so it could be drawn back against the resistance of the spring. +Below the plug was a trigger, with a hook-shaped forward end, in such a +position that when the plug was drawn back the hook would catch and hold +the plug until the lower right-angled projection of the trigger was +pulled back. This would release the plug, and the spring would then be +driven forward and explode the cap.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig10" id="fig10"></a> +<img src="images/fig10.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 10. <span class="smcap">The First Gun</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>"It would be well," said the Professor, "to polish the inside of the +bored barrels, and thus make a much better weapon."</p> + +<p>"How can we do this?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"There are several ways, but the better plan would be to take a good +polishing material, in the form of a fine sand or grit, and mix it with +oil. This can then be put on a wiper which will snugly fit the bore, and +the barrel may then be put in the lathe and rotated at a high rate of +speed with the wiper in the bore, and during the rotation the wiper is +drawn in and out. This operation should be continued for an hour at +least, frequently withdrawing it to add more of the polishing grit."</p> + +<p>"What is the best grit to use?"</p> + +<p>"If we can find a sample of the adamantine spar, in sufficient +quantities, it would be the best substance."</p> + +<p>"What kind of material is that?"</p> + +<p>"It is a substance known as corundum."</p> + +<p>"Is that the same as emery?"</p> + +<p>"What is known as emery is the more or less impure product from the same +source. I think I have stated heretofore that both of these products +come from the precious gems; the blue variety is known under the name of +sapphire; the red as ruby; the yellow as oriental topaz, and the violet +as oriental amethyst."</p> + +<p>During that and the following day the Professor spent some time in +prospecting for the gems, but if he succeeded in finding any samples he +did not make the discovery known.</p> + +<p>A few days after this Harry announced that he was ready to lay the keel +of the new boat. All the material had been prepared, and was at the +beach. Prior to this the island had been visited by a heavy storm. They +had been frequent within the past month, but this was not considered +unusual.</p> + +<p>The Professor insisted that a temporary shed should be erected to cover +the material, as moisture would make it very undesirable for the vessel, +and a day was occupied in putting up the structure.</p> + +<p>An entire week thus passed, every hour of which was devoted with the +utmost diligence to the various enterprises. The keel was laid and the +work of putting on the bottom boards was progressing rapidly. One night, +a few days after the laying of the keel, a brisk wind sprang up, which +continued during the night, increasing in fury, and in the morning +evidences were seen on all sides of the effect of the tempest.</p> + +<p>"It seems very singular," was George's observation, "that we should have +such terrible winds here."</p> + +<p>The Professor had evidently expected the storms. "Do you remember the +experience we had less than a year ago? We had five days of this on the +ocean."</p> + +<p>"I had forgotten that. Do they occur every year?"</p> + +<p>"You may have heard of the monsoons, a periodical wind in the Indian +Ocean, which is a northeast wind, and they blow with greater or less +force from November to March."</p> + +<p>"What causes them to blow with such regularity during those periods?"</p> + +<p>"Ah! that is one of the things which it has been difficult to determine. +They appear to be modifications of the trade winds. While, as stated, +the northeast winds blow during the periods mentioned, they have the +southwest monsoons, which blow from April to October. As these violent +winds are the most tempestuous during the period when the sun crosses +the equator, it has been argued that it is due to the action of the sun +being in such a position that its rays strike the earth in the center of +its rotation, thus heating up the air and causing it to rise rapidly +along the middle belt."</p> + +<p>"Is that what we understand by the equinoctial storms?"</p> + +<p>"The equinoctial storms come in March and September, when the days and +nights are of equal length."</p> + +<p>"I was told by a teacher that the summers are longer north of the +equator than south of it; is that true?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; the summer north of the equator is about seven and a half days +longer."</p> + +<p>"What is the cause of that?"</p> + +<p>"The earth is at its greatest distance from the sun during the summer +months, and the angular motion of the earth in its orbit is slower. The +result is, that the interval from the March to the September equinoxes +is greater than from September to March."</p> + +<p>Harry made his way through the violent wind and rain to the boat shed. +He came back with a sorry-looking countenance. "I am afraid everything +is soaked beyond recovery." He was almost on the verge of tears.</p> + +<p>Before noon the rain abated somewhat, but the winds still blew strongly, +and when they ventured out to take stock of their surroundings, George +was the first to notice the disappearance of the flag on Observation +Hill. Rushing in to the Professor, he cried: "Our flag is gone."</p> + +<p>Harry was at the boathouse, and when George went down to inform him of +the new calamity, he was almost heart-broken. The Professor, however, +was not in the least perturbed. He laughingly chided them and soon +restored the boys to their usual gay and happy demeanor.</p> + +<p>"Such little incidents as we have met with this morning only give us +variety. We need something of this kind to add zest to life. Just +imagine what life would be if everything turned out just as you wanted +it or willed it? You would commit suicide within a week."</p> + +<p>The boys smiled, but at the same time their eyelids did double duty in +the blinking line for a little while.</p> + +<p>George straightened himself out and looked up the hill. "Well, I am +going for that flag whether it blows or not," and he started for the +hill. Angel, who was in the loft, swung down and made his way out of the +door, and before George had gone fifty feet, was at his heels. "And you +are going, too? Good boy!" and George actually hugged Angel. He +understood.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the hill he made an examination, and found that the +halliards had been broken and the wind carried away the flag, halliards +and all. As the wind came from the sea, the flag must be inland +somewhere. Search was made in every direction, but to no purpose. Every +rock and lodging place was examined, but it had disappeared. Angel was +an interested searcher. He really seemed to divine George's mission. At +every bush, or rock, or other possible landing place, he would be the +first, and peer around, and look up and down, just as he had seen George +do.</p> + +<p>The quest kept up for over an hour, and, sadly disappointed, he returned +with the news of his failure. The Professor took the loss lightly. "I +presume it is intended that we should work out our own rescue. After +all, I think that is the proper thing to do. If we depend on others we +are sure to meet with disappointment and failure. Cheer up, boys; flag +or no flag, let us do our duty."</p> + +<p>"I don't mind the loss of the flag so much because it prevents us from +having a signal, but I hate to think that we lost so much good time in +making and putting it up."</p> + +<p>The flag alluded to was sixteen feet long, laboriously made out of ramie +fiber, which was woven, and then dyed, and it was a hard task to haul +the pole, which was over fifty feet long, from the forest ten miles +away, to say nothing of the labor required to raise it.</p> + +<p>As soon as the thoroughly drenched material at the boathouse could be +brought out and dried in the sun, which now came out bright and warm, +the work proceeded with renewed vigor. Late that evening the Professor +appeared at the rear of the laboratory, and called loudly to the boys.</p> + +<p>When they appeared at the laboratory he was laughing immoderately, and +Angel stood on one of the tables with a simian grin.</p> + +<p>"What is the matter? Has Angel been experimenting again?"</p> + +<p>Before the Professor could answer, George caught sight of the flag.</p> + +<p>"What! The flag! Where did you get it?"</p> + +<p>"Ask Angel."</p> + +<p>The boys laughed, and George actually hugged the animal, in his delight. +Did Angel know what he had done? Ask those delvers into the mysterious +realms of thought, what prompted him to search for and restore the flag? +Is that any more remarkable than the recorded tricks of dogs and many +other animals?</p> + +<p>You know just how boys can laugh when they are really happy. Angel +imitated that laugh, and he had not been taught to do it, either. It +came without teaching.</p> + +<p>When the Professor had wiped away some of the tears which had come from +the excess of laughter at the imitating efforts of the animal, he said:</p> + +<p>"Did it ever occur to you why Angel has always had a solemn look? The +facial expression seldom, if ever, changes, and they rarely ever exhibit +mirth. You may imagine the condition of those animals, living in the +forests, with enemies all about them, and the struggle for existence an +everlasting one. They have never known amusing incidents as we +understand them. Naturally, the muscles of mobility in the face, which +express pleasure, never have been exercised, and those indicating fear +and anger unduly developed. Here is Angel, in a new atmosphere, where he +sees delight depicted on the countenance, and, gifted as he is, with +wonderful powers of imitation, has learned to actually laugh, and to +enjoy the scene."</p> + +<p>"Well, Professor, as we have one of the guns polished up and completed, +wouldn't it be well to make the bullets?"</p> + +<p>"For that purpose I suggest that we make the molds out of a metal or +alloy which has a higher fusing point than lead."</p> + +<p>"What is best for the purpose?"</p> + +<p>"We might make an alloy of copper and zinc."</p> + +<p>"Oh! You mean brass?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; that is readily cast and easily worked."</p> + +<p>"But what shape shall we make the bullets?"</p> + +<p>"They should be made long, with a pointed forward end."</p> + +<p>"Why is a long bullet better than a round or globe-shaped ball?"</p> + +<p>"There are several very important reasons. First, momentum is a prime +element in a missile. A long one contains double the metal of a +spherical one. Second, it can be made so that it will expand when the +explosion of the powder takes place."</p> + +<p>"In what way does it expand?"</p> + +<p>"You have noticed that the rear end of the bullet has a cavity. When the +explosion takes place the thin shell at the rear end of the bullet +expands, so that it tightly hugs the bore of the gun."</p> + +<p>"What is the object of having it do that?"</p> + +<p>"To give the ball the benefit of the charge of powder exploded. If it +does not fit tightly in the bore, more or less of the powder will pass +the ball, and thus the ball loses part of its force."</p> + +<p>"What is the object of rifling the gun?"</p> + +<p>"The object is to impart to the bullet a spiral motion, as it moves +through the air. Metals have not the same density on all sides and this +is particularly true of molded balls. As a result, when projected from +the gun, the heaviest side has a tendency to divert the ball and make it +more or less erratic in its motion, and, therefore, inaccurate. The +spiral motion has the effect of minimizing this difficulty. The cavity +formed at the rear of the projectile was devised particularly to cause +the thin lip of the bullet to be driven into the grooves formed in the +gun barrel, and by that means the boring motion was transmitted to the +bullet."</p> + +<p>"But as we have no means of rifling our guns, there will be no necessity +of putting the cavity in the rear end of our bullets."</p> + +<p>"We must have the cavity there, by all means."</p> + +<p>"What for?"</p> + +<p>"Simply because we do not want the bullet to turn around and travel end +over end after it leaves the gun."</p> + +<p>"How does the cavity prevent this?"</p> + +<p>"You have probably forgotten that a body travels through the air with +its heaviest end foremost. When a cavity is made it is lighter at that +end. Without the cavity, if the forward end is pointed, it will, on +leaving the gun, turn around and go through the air with the blunt end +foremost."</p> + +<p>The molds were made, as directed, of a hard brass composition, and when +they were ready to cast them the Professor cautioned against making any +castings with the molds in any position except upright, so that any +inequality in the density of the metal would not form itself on the side +of the cast article.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig11" id="fig11"></a> +<img src="images/fig11.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 11. <span class="smcap">The Bullet</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>Quite a time had now elapsed since the last exploration of the cave +beyond Observation Hill. The Professor had spoken about it on several +occasions. For some reason he was intensely interested in doing that. In +fact, he appeared to be more concerned about that than any other of the +unknown things about the island.</p> + +<p>The boys could not understand this peculiarity. He had never been +questioned on the subject directly, but it was evident he had a reason +for this predominating wish to continue the exploration.</p> + +<p>George was just as much interested, but, as the sequel will show, for an +entirely different reason. Ever restless, and always willing to +undertake anything which promised to delve into hidden things, he +approached the Professor one day with the suggestion about the cave.</p> + +<p>"I think we ought to take one day off and go to the cave."</p> + +<p>The Professor was interested at once. "It will not do to attempt it +now."</p> + +<p>"And why not?"</p> + +<p>"I am afraid we could not get in very far, unless we had a boat."</p> + +<p>"Then why not use our lifeboat?"</p> + +<p>This suggestion met with instant favor.</p> + +<p>"True, I had forgotten about that."</p> + +<p>It did not take George long to reach Harry with the news that the cave +was to be explored by means of the boat. After considering the matter +for some time it was decided to put off the trip for several days at +least, principally because the late heavy rains had, in all probability, +so filled the cave that they might be stopped in their progress before +going very far.</p> + +<p>It should be stated that when they entered the cave the first time, +water was found about two hundred feet from its mouth and that barred +their further progress. On the second trip the water had receded, so +they could go in six hundred feet before coming to the water's edge. The +late rains may have filled the cavities, thus making progress still more +difficult.</p> + +<p>Harry was carrying forward the boat construction, and by the occasional +aid of George was bringing the hull to a completed state. While this was +being done, George was at work with the loom, slowly weaving out the +fabric for the sails. As the mast had been stepped back over six feet +from the prow, it was concluded to make a mainsail and a jib, a small +triangular sail which is attached to the forwardly projecting jib-boom. +The two sails would afford greater speed than a single sail, and that +was one consideration. The other was, that with two sails the mast would +not need to be so long, and the dimension of the mainsail could be +reduced, and still get the same efficiency.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig12" id="fig12"></a> +<img src="images/fig12.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 12. <span class="smcap">The Sea-going Boat</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + + +<p>The weaving of a large sail in one piece was impossible, as the loom +could turn out goods only thirty inches wide, and as it could be +operated by hand power solely, it will be seen that the sails required +not only time, but an immense amount of patience. It is no wonder that +George was anxious to take a day off at the cave, or anywhere else that +afforded a change.</p> + +<p>While at work Angel was his constant companion. It is remarkable what a +degree of friendship and companionship grew up between the two. In the +course of time the weaving process became so familiar to Angel that +whenever George would throw the bobbin, containing the weft, through the +opening of the woof threads, the animal stood ready to pull the heddles +forward, so as to force the last weft thread up against the one +previously threaded across.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>THE VOYAGE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ANGEL, AND THE DISCOVERY</h3> + + +<p>Within the next week the boat hull was practically completed, and now +needed caulking. For this purpose the hemp, which had been found, as +previously stated, was broken up, and as much of the woody portions +removed as could be taken out, so as to make it available for filling in +the crevices between the planking.</p> + +<p>The mast was stepped in, and a sufficient quantity of manilla rope +twisted for the sails, and also a supply put aboard for other needs. The +sails were not yet completed, but they would doubtless be ready by the +time the other parts were.</p> + +<p>In one of their evening conferences George expressed his concern about +the future of Angel.</p> + +<p>"For my part I do not want to leave him behind."</p> + +<p>"Then why not take him with us?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>Harry had some doubts on this point, but George was too insistent to +brook any thought of leaving him behind.</p> + +<p>"I make this suggestion, George: Before the time of sailing it would be +advisable for you to make several trips with Angel in the small boat, +and see how he behaves. In some respects he would be an acquisition to +us."</p> + +<p>The boys had not forgotten how the animal, during their various trips, +had been of material assistance, nor the times when nutting how Angel +understood what they were after, and would climb trees and shower them +down, and then gravely help to load them into the wagon; and they +remembered the recovery of the flag. Such service was appreciated.</p> + +<p>As it was, Angel was invited to take a sail. The lifeboat recovered in +South River had been named No. 2, as they insisted on calling their own +wrecked vessel No. 1.</p> + +<p>No. 2 was launched. A small sail, had been rigged up, and two good oars +provided for it. Angel was completely at the command of George, and when +he was called and taken down to the landing in front of the boathouse, +he went without any hesitancy. But to induce him to enter the boat was +another matter.</p> + +<p>Suspecting there would be some difficulty, George pulled a small jar of +honey from his pocket, and silently began to eat it. Angel's eyes +blinked. It was such an unheard of thing for George to do this without +extending an invitation to join. He shambled over, but George walked to +the boat and sat down in it, not appearing to notice the eager look on +the animal's face.</p> + +<p>Without further urging he stepped aboard, and George put his arm around +him, as Harry, with oar in hand, pushed the boat from the shore. Angel +was startled, and tried to get away, but soothing words soon quieted +him, and before they reached the mouth of the Cataract he was leaning +over the gunwale and playing with the water in the most approved +boy-like fashion.</p> + +<p>When, however, they had passed the comparatively calm waters in the +estuary, and were rounding the cliffs, poor Angel forgot his sport, and +sat as one paralyzed, gazing at the sight of the waves beating against +the shore line. George went up to him, and spoke encouragingly, and it +was fully a half hour before he was restored to his usual calm. Then, +apparently, he noticed for the first time the peculiar rocking motion of +the vessel. Every time it swayed to the right or to the left he would +give that peculiar chuckle which always indicated delight.</p> + +<p>They went around the point to the east, and passed down the coast in a +southerly direction, going as far as the cape north and east of the +mouth of South River.</p> + +<p>"Steer for the shore, George; steer for the shore; what is that to the +right?" said Harry, pointing to the beach.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a boat, sure enough."</p> + +<p>As the wind was coming directly from the shore they had to depend on the +oars to bring the vessel around, and as they came in could distinctly +make out the side of a boat lying among debris, in an inclined position, +against a rather steep beach.</p> + +<p>"It is our boat, Harry." The moment their vessel came alongside, Angel +jumped off and leaped over to the boat on the shore. Evidently he also +had recognized it.</p> + +<p>"Well, isn't this a find?"</p> + +<p>"How long do you suppose this has been here? I am glad we gave Angel an +outing."</p> + +<p>"Shall we take it with us?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; if we have to carry it overland," was Harry's reply.</p> + +<p>"Let us float it."</p> + +<p>It was not much of a task to do this, and with a short rope it was +hitched to the stern of No. 2. Angel remained in the recovered boat, and +when No. 2 was pushed from the shore, and the sail set, its movement did +not seem to perturb him in the least, but when the oscillations again +began to be perceptible, he commenced to gurgle, and George knew they +had a good sailor to take with them.</p> + +<p>The sail took a little over three hours, and as they passed up the +Cataract River, and approached their home, the boys set up a welcoming +shriek, in imitation of incoming steamers, which so delighted Angel that +he scampered in a delirium of joy from one end of the craft to the +other. It is doubtful whether he had ever in his short life had such a +glorious time, and that he remembered it his subsequent history +furnishes the best evidence.</p> + +<p>The Professor was just as much delighted as the boys at the sight of +their first marine production, which had gotten away from them and +stranded them on the cliffs three months before. "I am sorry now that +you named the other boats, because this is really No. 1."</p> + +<p>"Never mind; this is good enough to be No. 3. Just look at our navy!"</p> + +<p>"Where did you find it?"</p> + +<p>"Near the point, south of the bay."</p> + +<p>"Then it must have been washed there during the late storms, because I +do not think it is possible that it could have gone there at the time it +escaped you, as the wind was blowing directly to the west at that time."</p> + +<p>The boys now remembered the circumstance, and as they recalled the +condition of the driftwood around it when they found it on the beach, it +was plain that the storm had been their friend in this case.</p> + +<p>"Have you been using oars on the boat?" was the Professor's inquiry, as +he bent over the side and examined the notches which were made for the +oars.</p> + +<p>"No; why do you ask?"</p> + +<p>"This boat has been used by some one, and not very long ago, at that. +Notice how the forward sides of these notches are worn. It also seems +that civilized people have been using the boat."</p> + +<p>The information was so startling that neither of the boys could answer +for a moment. Did they have another mystery to contend with?</p> + +<p>But George was alert on the questioning end of any proposition. "Do you +really think white people have had the boat? I do not see anything that +would make you think so."</p> + +<p>"If they were savages they wouldn't use the oarlocks or notches, as they +row free-hand, almost without exception; but get a white man in a boat, +and the first thing he looks for is a place to put his oars in. This +incident in itself shows one of the distinguishing features between the +civilized and the uncivilized people."</p> + +<p>"In what way is one civilized and the other not?"</p> + +<p>"I did not say one was civilized and the other uncivilized. The most +wonderful thing in the advancement of the human race from a state of +savagery to civilization, was the discovery and utilization of a +fulcrum. Whenever man, in an advanced state, undertakes to do anything, +he uses a fulcrum of some kind."</p> + +<p>"In what way is it so useful?"</p> + +<p>"Primarily, in the form of a wedge, a pulley, a wheel and axle, an +inclined plane, a screw or a lever. All these forms do the same thing as +the simple lever; and what sort of mechanism could be made without some +of these elements? The row-lock is simply the fulcrum for the oar, is it +not? When Archimedes discovered the principles of the lever, he was so +excited that he declared he could move the earth if he could find a +fulcrum."</p> + +<p>A careful examination of the notched gunwale showed conclusively that it +had been used to a considerable extent. George sat and pondered over +this. "I am sure we never used the boat enough with the oars to wear it +in this way. Had you examined this when you said that the boat had not +been long at the point where we found it?"</p> + +<p>"No," answered the Professor; "I simply remembered that on the day you +lost it the wind was blowing to the west, and as you found it to the +east of the cliffs, I inferred it must have been carried around since +that time."</p> + +<p>"It is evident then that the people who used this boat live to the west +of us?"</p> + +<p>"That is my only conclusion."</p> + +<p>"Then you think the fire in the forest, and the light which we saw that +night beyond the West River, were made by those people?"</p> + +<p>"I am sure the fire we saw was made by savages, but I am not so certain +about the lights having been made by them."</p> + +<p>Harry looked at the Professor, and then at George, and slowly shook his +head. "Wasn't it lucky we didn't meet them when we made our trip to the +river?"</p> + +<p>That evening the inevitable subject of their forthcoming voyage was +again discussed, and to the surprise of the boys, the Professor urged +delay. His reasons were expressed as follows:</p> + +<p>"While we have had some very severe storms of the kind which may be +expected, we are not sure that the weather is yet fully settled. That is +the only reason I urge delay. If, on the other hand, we should decide to +take an overland journey, we could set out at once."</p> + +<p>Harry was opposed to taking another trip by land. "We have really found +out more by the water route than going by land. For that reason it would +be well for us to make at least one adventure by sea."</p> + +<p>These arguments prevailed in the minds of all, and while it would take +some time before all preparations could be made, all were happy at the +thought that when they did undertake the journey something definite +would be learned to clear up a few of the mysteries of Wonder Island.</p> + +<p>The Professor did find some samples of tourmaline, in a finely divided +state, and this gem was used to polish the gun barrels, so that all the +weapons were finally put into condition where they could be used. During +an hour each day all took a part in practicing in a range specially +prepared near the workshop. Distances were laid off accurately, and the +regulation targets set up. In this manner they became accustomed to +loading and firing with facility and a considerable degree of accuracy.</p> + +<p>If anyone, not knowing the situation, had dropped in on this scene, he +would have considered himself in the midst of a great naval and military +camp. At the workshop were the guns, arranged in order; boxes provided +for the bullets; small turned out wooden cups for powder, each cup +carrying twenty little tubes of bamboo, each with a measured charge of +powder, and longer bamboo tubes with percussion caps in them.</p> + +<p>It was Harry's brilliant idea to separate each charge of powder and put +it into a special tube. This tube had one end closed, and the other +provided with a stopper, so that in loading the stopper could be drawn +out and held by the teeth while the powder was poured into the gun. The +caps were put into a bamboo tube which was just large enough to take the +caps, which were dropped in, one after the other, and it can be seen +that it would be an easy matter to turn the tube upside down, and thus +bring out one cap at a time. This also facilitated the reloading of the +gun.</p> + +<p>During the practice with the gun one serious defect was found; and that +was to remove the cap after each shot. Sometimes the body of the cap +would not split, and as a result, a knife or some pointed instrument +would have to be employed to dislodge it so as to make room for the new +cap.</p> + +<p>Harry found a way to remedy this. An opening was made through the stock +at one side, and a sliding piece, like a collar, put over the nipple +which holds the cap. A finger attached to this collar enabled the +marksman to draw back the collar, and this would bring with it the cap, +which would then fall out of the side opening.</p> + +<p>All these little details may seem to be useless care, but rapidity in +loading and firing, with muzzle-loaders, in an engagement might be their +salvation.</p> + +<p>A test was made of the improved firearm, to determine how fast the gun +could be loaded and fired. The test made by Harry showed that it took +two seconds, after a shot, to bring down the piece, and draw back the +collar to release the cap; three seconds to grasp one of the powder +tubes, remove the stopper and bring it to the muzzle of the gun; two +seconds to pour in the powder; two seconds to drop the tube in its +receptacle and grasp the bullet; two seconds to ram it home, and three +seconds to put on the cap and cock the gun for firing. That was nearly a +quarter of a minute.</p> + +<p>He was very much dissatisfied with this exhibition of speed—or rather +of slowness, so after considering the matter for some time, hit upon the +plan of reducing the rear end of the bullet, so he could wrap a paper +tube on that and tie it. Then he purposed filling the tube with powder, +and closing the rear end by folding over the end of the tube. In this +way he would entirely overcome the need of the little bamboo tubes for +holding the powder.</p> + +<p>But no paper was available, nor could he think of anything which could +be used as a substitute. In despair he repaired to the Professor.</p> + +<p>"What is the difficulty now?" said the Professor, with a smile.</p> + +<p>"No difficulty, particularly, but I wish we could have paper, or +something like it. I want to make cartridges."</p> + +<p>"I thought you had all that arranged for?"</p> + +<p>"So I did, but it takes me a quarter of a minute to load, and I must do +better than that."</p> + +<p>He mused a while. "We could make paper, and I think we have the +facilities at hand for doing it; but it will take quite a time to +arrange for it. Aside from that I do not, at this moment, know of +anything which will be a fair substitute."</p> + +<p>He was chagrined at this failure. But, after all, four shots a minute +were not so bad. The perfection of the guns must await their return.</p> + +<p>Now, let us go down to the marine works, on the shore below the +Cataract. Here were the three vessels lined up side by side, and also +the after part of the lifeboat. The shed, which was the boathouse, had +nearly all their tools, and besides the bench, was a forge and the +primitive blower which the Professor and George had made and set up. +Wood, parts of planks, thin boards, of all sorts and description, were +scattered about. It looked business-like, and Harry was intensely proud +of it.</p> + +<p>The sail was completed, and taken down to be bent on the cable. The jib +had already been installed in place, and when the sails were hoisted and +they walked out from the shore and glanced back to get a full view, the +entire Naval Bureau congratulated itself on the magnificent appearance +of the fleet, and particularly of the new creation in maritime +architecture.</p> + +<p>It is not out of place to say that the Professor and George both +showered the highest compliments on Harry, for he deserved it. But the +officials of the establishment were not the only ones to admire the fine +sight. Angel came, and he took it in. It was the finest climbing he had +enjoyed in many a day. The Professor took off his hat. "I propose three +cheers for our ship."</p> + +<p>They were given, and with each cheer the hats circled their heads. This +was a new code of procedure to Angel. He couldn't understand it. Without +waiting for explanations, he shot down the mast, and landed on shore. It +was the most comical proceeding they had ever witnessed on his part, and +when he looked at the group, and then at the ship, he said as plainly as +though he had uttered it: "What does all this mean?"</p> + +<p>When the laughter was over, George proposed three cheers for Angel. The +hats came off and the cheers were given. Then the same smile which he +had so well learned illuminated his projecting face, and he swung his +long arm around as he had seen it done, and another step had been taken +in his education.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>THE GRUESOME FINDS IN THE CAVE</h3> + + +<p>Another week had thus passed by—seven days of unceasing toil. The +Professor again brought up the subject of the cave. The subject did not +need any argument. It fell on willing ears.</p> + +<p>"How shall we take the boat around?" was the matter which interested +George.</p> + +<p>"Sail it around, of course," was Harry's view.</p> + +<p>Both looked at the Professor. "If we sail it there, which will be an +easy matter, how can we haul it up the sides of the cliffs? From my +present recollection the mouth of the cave is fully thirty feet or more +from the water line. The air pocket is not over eight or ten feet. At +any rate, it is much lower."</p> + +<p>"Then why not haul it around on the wagon, and lower it down the walls?"</p> + +<p>"That seems the most feasible plan."</p> + +<p>They now knew what preparations were needed for the exploration. Two +lamps had been taken before, and one was lost in the cave. Since that +several more had been made, so that three were provided, together with a +supply of matches.</p> + +<p>When the wagon was ready the Professor brought out several boards, and +deposited them in the wagon. The boys looked at the boards inquiringly, +as the Professor turned back from the wagon. "Oh, yes, the boards; we +want something to write on so that we can chart the cave. We must not be +caught as we were the last time."</p> + +<p>"But how can we possibly chart the cave when we have only one boat?" And +George laughed at the idea of making a plan of the interior by standing +at one point.</p> + +<p>"You measured the height of the falls without going to the top, if you +will remember."</p> + +<p>He had forgotten that. But the boat was at last secured in the wagon, +and proceeded to the cliffs. It was fortunate that the team could be +taken to a point directly over the mouth of the cave, and in a little +while the ropes were attached to it and slowly lowered, Harry taking the +precaution to follow it down and to dislodge it from the steps which +appeared in its path.</p> + +<p>The team was then securely hitched, and taking all their implements, +such as lamps and boards, together with two of the guns and an ample +supply of ammunition, descended to the entrance. The boat was at the +mouth, and it was suggested that a preliminary survey of the interior +should first be made, in order to ascertain how far the boat would have +to be carried before reaching the water.</p> + +<p>The lamps were lighted, and the boys led the way. After passing the +point, about two hundred feet from the mouth, and at almost the +identical spot where the water was found at the first exploration, the +water glistened before them. Returning toward the opening a loud beating +sound was heard, which at first startled them. It was evidently at the +mouth of the cave. It sounded like the beating of a stick against some +hard substance.</p> + +<p>The nearer they came to daylight, the more distinct were the sounds. As +heretofore explained, near the entrance the cave made a turn to the +right at an angle, so that when at a distance of fifty feet from the +opening it was impossible to see daylight, except what little was +diffracted from the angle at the turn.</p> + +<p>This angle was reached, and the beating, rather irregular, was plain +enough to cause some alarm. The boat was beyond the open mouth and at +one side, so that it could not be seen by anyone within the recessed +walls.</p> + +<p>All stood still, while the beatings continued. Occasionally there would +be a cessation, to be repeated again. Whatever it was it was not far +away. The Professor whispered: "Get the guns ready; we must take some +chances."</p> + +<p>Cautiously the company moved forward; the end of the boat first appeared +in sight, and as George peered beyond the projecting point of the ledge, +he threw up his hands and burst out in laughter. Angel was in the boat, +imitating Harry in the building operation. The sudden appearance did not +startle him in the least, nor did he stop beating his lullaby, after he +noticed the broad smiles that greeted him.</p> + +<p>With an eye to every advantage, Harry had attached to the sides of the +boat, amidships, two short standards, about three feet high, on top of +which two of the lamps were mounted, so they would be out of the way, +and thus give them freedom to handle the oars and the weapons, as well +as afford them a better light, than if carried by hand. The Professor +was much pleased with this arrangement.</p> + +<p>The boat was not particularly heavy, but it was a task to drag it over +the uneven floor and along the tortuous path which had to be taken by +their burden, but when the water was reached they were repaid for the +labor by the ease with which they could explore the interior.</p> + +<p>Before starting the journey the Professor, as usual, uttered a few words +of advice: "One of us must sit in the bow, one at the stern, and the +other amidships. The one at the stern must propel the boat, as we cannot +row through many of the places, and as the water is not deep, that will +not be a difficult task. The ones at the bow and amidships should have +the guns, and if there is no objection, I will take my place on the +middle seat, where I can best take the observations on the way. The +other places you should decide between yourselves."</p> + +<p>"I am willing to take the bow, if Harry agrees." Harry sanctioned the +arrangement, and when the lamps were securely fastened, Harry pushed the +boat forward through the cavern. It did not take long to reach the +slight turn which led to the large chamber, which was over one hundred +feet long.</p> + +<p>On the way to the chamber Harry had an opportunity to measure the depths +of the water, and at intervals the Professor would call out for the +depths, as he was making notes of the descent formed by the floor to the +chamber. The oars gave a pretty fair idea, showing that the floor was +only about five feet lower at the chamber than where the boat was +launched.</p> + +<p>Reaching the chamber Harry was directed to steer it to the right and +skirt the wall going to the left, so that every part of it could be +examined.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig13" id="fig13"></a> +<img src="images/fig13.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 13 <span class="smcap">The Treasure Cave</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"I have another reason for this careful examination," remarked the +Professor, as he was intently engaged in making notes on the board +tablets. "It may be likely that the chamber has more than one outlet and +if so, we must explore it also. Of course, I am most interested in the +outlet to the south."</p> + +<p>A circuit was made until they reached the outlet to the south, which +Harry had discovered when the light on the ledge disappeared. The water +throughout the cavern within the chamber was not over eight feet deep, +and at the outlet to the south he could not touch bottom with the +twelve-foot pole they carried. This outlet was contracted, and, judging +from the width of the boat, could not be more than eight feet across, +but it gradually widened, and the waters became shallower as they +advanced.</p> + +<p>George, who was in the bow, held up his hand as a warning. "Stop!" was +all he said. All peered forward. The lights threw their beams forwardly +through a broadening channel, beyond which appeared to be white forms +ranged along the opposite wall.</p> + +<p>"What depth have you, Harry?" asked the Professor, without seeming at +all concerned.</p> + +<p>"About five feet."</p> + +<p>"Move straight ahead, until I tell you to stop."</p> + +<p>The pole was thrust down and the boat moved forwardly fully fifty feet +before a halt was called.</p> + +<p>"I think we are now in the middle of this chamber. Before exploring it +let us make a thorough examination of its characteristics."</p> + +<p>"Look at those wonderful icicles hanging from the roof!" George gazed on +them with wonder and admiration. Harry, on the other hand, with the +utilitarian idea in his mind, inquired: "Why couldn't all that chalk be +utilized for making plaster?"</p> + +<p>"That product is used in the arts, but it costs too much to transport it +from the places where it is found in its natural state, as science has +found a much cheaper way of producing it from limestone."</p> + +<p>"Are all these rocks limestone?"</p> + +<p>"Beyond question. Only a few of the caves so far found are in any other +formation than limestone."</p> + +<p>"What kind of cave are those?"</p> + +<p>"Where they have been produced by volcanic action. There the walls are +of volcanic rock."</p> + +<p>"Why is it that these underground channels are formed in this way?"</p> + +<p>"They are formed by the erosive action of the water wearing out the +softer portions of the rock beneath a harder roof or wall. This action +is brought about by carbonic acid acting on the rock and producing what +is called carbonate of lime, and the stalactites and stalagmites found +in all these caverns are of that material."</p> + +<p>"What is the difference between the two names you have just mentioned?"</p> + +<p>"Stalactite means trickling or dropping, and as applied to these +formations it means conical or cylindrical accretions of the carbonate. +Stalagmite is the term used to designate the calcareous formations found +on the floors of caverns, which are usually the droppings from the +roof."</p> + +<p>"Where are most of the caves found?"</p> + +<p>"They occur most frequently along rocky shores of open seas, as in this +case. Some of them are celebrated for their great extent, others for +their gorgeous interiors, like this chamber. Some show the most +beautiful draperies, or veils; in some cases portions of the ceiling +have representations of magnificent inverted candelabra, and what appear +to be carvings in the purest white."</p> + +<p>"In what parts of the world are most of them found?"</p> + +<p>"It does not seem that any portion of the world has a monopoly. The most +celebrated are the grotto of Antiparas, in Greece; the Adelsberg caverns +in Carniola, and the Mammoth in Kentucky. The latter is the largest in +the world, the windings of which extend forty miles and through which is +a subterranean river. In the river are eyeless fish, and fish with eyes, +but sightless. Others are the Luray, in Virginia; the Wyandotte, in +Indiana; Weir's, in Virginia; the Big Saltpeter, in Missouri, and +Ball's, in New York. Of seashore caverns, the most famous and remarkable +is Fingal's, on the coast of Scotland. Extensive caves are also found in +the Azores, Canary Islands, in Iceland, in various portions of England, +France and Belgium. Many of them are of immense value to the +paleontologist."</p> + +<p>"In what way are they of any use?"</p> + +<p>"They have been of the greatest service, because in the early days of +man, and before he knew enough to build his own habitation, he made the +cave his home. You have heard of the 'cave man,' have you not? During +the old stone period in England and other European countries, these +caverns were the only abodes of man, and in them have been found layers +from twenty to thirty feet thick, of successive accretions of bone, +stalagmites and various articles of human manufacture."</p> + +<p>This information added interest to the examination of the walls, and the +eagerness of the boys to discover something new and startling was at its +keenest edge. Before they had made a half circuit George announced that +he could see a large opening, which turned to the right, and thus formed +a bend to the general direction that the cavern had made.</p> + +<p>A digression is necessary, in order to be able to understand all the +elements in this remarkable voyage. The mouth of the cave was northeast +of the Cataract home, and distant about a half mile, in a straight line. +The opening for the first six hundred feet, which had been charted by +them on the previous occasion, ran directly south, but from that point +it turned toward the southwest, and this now, in a measure, explained +the eagerness of the Professor to explore it, as he believed the cavern +led to a point near their home.</p> + +<p>"There is no water in the opening," was the further information from +George, as they approached the contracted end of the chamber.</p> + +<p>"Before we land let us see the other side of the chamber," was the +Professor's suggestion.</p> + +<p>The boat was veered around to the left, and before they had proceeded +fifty feet it was apparent that a similar opening led out to the south, +and a dry floor was visible, like in the other outlet. The boat was +landed, and drawn up, two of the lamps taken out and the guns examined. +The opening led into a second chamber, which looked like a canopied +grotto of marble. Where they stood the chamber had the appearance of a +huge letter A, the side walls of which ran together in the distance, but +these walls were broken up by the most enchanting series of columns, and +delicate entablatures, and the outlines of the figures were like +blanched frescoes. It was such a weird and startling sight that the boys +could not repress their amazement.</p> + +<p>After they had fully entered the chamber Harry's quick eye caught a +peculiar formation to the right, on a raised sort of platform, behind +which seemed to be a recess. He had noticed it because it contrasted so +strangely with the uniformly white glare of all the surrounding +surfaces. He quickly made his way across, and as he reached it, stepped +back in alarm.</p> + +<p>"Come here, quickly; are those skulls and skeletons?"</p> + +<p>The Professor did not need a second invitation. Scattered about on the +elevation were found four skulls, and the bones comprising the remains +of four human beings. The skulls were first arranged side by side, and +the Professor intently examined them.</p> + +<p>"These are skulls of the Caucasian race, beyond a doubt. All are, +apparently, well formed and normal. But what is this?"</p> + +<p>In the side of one skull was a perforation, with the bone fractured on +all sides of the orifice.</p> + +<p>"Do you think it is a bullet wound?"</p> + +<p>"It has that appearance. As there seems to be no corresponding hole in +any other portion of the skull, we may be able to find the missile +inside, if death was caused by that means."</p> + +<p>Harry had noticed a rattling sound when the skull was put in place, and +mentioned this. After some hesitation the course of the fractured +opening was traced through, and embedded near the top and on the +opposite side, was a large lead ball, or what had been, undoubtedly, +spherically shaped before it entered and passed through the bones.</p> + +<p>"This is evidence to me that these remains have been here a long time."</p> + +<p>"Why; because it is in the form of a ball, and not a bullet?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and there is also another reason why these people came here and +met their fate many, many years ago."</p> + +<p>"What is that?"</p> + +<p>"In this calcareous formation the preservative qualities of the +carbonates would prevent rapid decomposition. These skulls are turning +to the same material that we see all about us. See how brittle the bones +are. Our bones are of lime formation, being largely composed of the +carbonate, the same as the stalactites."</p> + +<p>The other substances now lying about were noticed. The excitement +engendered at the sight of the bones was enough temporarily to blind +them to the numerous things found scattered about. Here was a dirk, the +edges entirely worn away, and whitened. There were the metal ribs of +what seemed to be a case, or a receptacle of some kind. Lying at one +side was an ancient type of firearm, long, heavy, and with an immense +bore. Another and another were found—a regular arsenal, with the +scattered remnants of peculiar little copper receptacles with whitish +powder in them.</p> + +<p>Harry, who was about to remove the powder, was stopped by the Professor. +"We must retain everything as we find it, as nearly as possible. We do +not yet know what the little vessels contain."</p> + +<p>Not an article of clothing thus far had been found. A little higher up +on the platform, two more skeletons were seen, both of which had +fractured skulls, one of them showing two cavities which could not have +been accidental, as both showed the same kind of fracture, and inclined +across the skull in the same direction on the left side.</p> + +<p>Alongside these skeletons were more of the long, wicked-looking firearms +which had been found previously near the other bodies. There was every +evidence to show that a terrible fight had terminated the existence of +the band. More long knives, with curiously wrought handles, were lying +behind the last skeletons, and on a more careful examination, a knife of +an entirely different pattern was found within the ribbed cavity of one +of them.</p> + +<p>Still farther back, new articles appeared. Articles of furniture, many +of them coated with the fallen carbonates; and here were the first +articles of clothing, some of which were so decomposed as to crumble at +the touch. Others were still firm. Some of the articles, like a mantle, +had threads intact running in one direction, and the other cross thread +all converted into dust, which disappeared when the garment was held up.</p> + +<p>On some of the garments were metal trimmings. "They look like silver," +said George, excitedly; "and what is this? It seems to be silver," as he +brushed a bracelet-like piece of ornamentation with the sleeve of his +coat. As they advanced new articles came in sight; a bench; a veritable +chair, or couch, the covering of which was there merely to give it form, +but the substance had gone. Only the wood remained and that largely +decayed.</p> + +<p>And now on every side, at the rear and along the walls of the recess, +were evidences of human habitation. Cutlasses, knives, and at one side, +what appeared to be the kitchen, were numerous pots and kettles of +various sizes and descriptions, nearly all of them of copper.</p> + +<p>"How could they possibly cook in here without being smothered to death?" +asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"The cavern seems to be large enough to take care of all the smoke," was +the Professor's reply.</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't understand why they should have taken the trouble to come +in such a long distance, when they would be just as safe nearer the +mouth?"</p> + +<p>"Before we leave this place we may be able to answer your two questions +in a way that will surprise, if not startle, you," was the Professor's +answer.</p> + +<p>This vague reply did not detract any from the interest which the boys +took in the search.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>THE TREASURES OF THE CAVE</h3> + + +<p>While Harry was in the act of drawing back one of the couches, an object +behind it seemed to fall apart with a jingling sound.</p> + +<p>"What was that?" exclaimed George.</p> + +<p>"I think we have found something here that will make us do some +thinking," answered Harry, as he bent down to take up some of the +detached pieces which came from what now appeared to be a large chest. +He picked up one of the round pieces. "Gold, gold; look at it!"</p> + +<p>"I suspected something of the kind when I saw the skeletons. Carefully, +boys; let us remove this piece of furniture. Undoubtedly, we are in +pirates' lair, and here is the booty."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus2" id="illus2"></a> +<img src="images/illus2.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>"We have probably found a pirate's lair, and here is the booty"</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>The boys were too much overcome for words. They looked at the gold, and +then at each other. George arose and walked back and forth. Harry, with +the coin in his hand, brushed it and held it close to the light.</p> + +<p>"With this we can buy anything we want," George finally uttered.</p> + +<p>"Whom will you buy it from?" was Harry reply. The Professor only smiled. +Of what use was money to them? George had forgotten that.</p> + +<p>"Here is another one."</p> + +<p>"Another what?"</p> + +<p>"A chest, something like yours." The lid, with its mocking lock, opened +easily, and there, coated with the universal carbonate, were a mass of +coins, articles of ornament, rings, bracelets, and pieces the names or +uses of which were entirely unknown to them.</p> + +<p>"Now that we have them, what shall be done with the treasures?"</p> + +<p>The boys did not answer for some time. Here was wealth; more, probably, +than either had ever dreamed of; but it was of no earthly use to them. +They must, of course, preserve it. They had discovered it, and under all +the laws were entitled to possession.</p> + +<p>"Well, have we gotten together all the gold and silver and precious +stones? Just imagine us as buccaneers! Owners of an island we haven't +conquered, and possessors of a fortune without working for it!" and the +Professor laughed at the thought of it. The boys, too, laughed, but when +they looked over at the ghastly skeletons, the joy was suddenly checked.</p> + +<p>The Professor saw the reason. "Isn't this a sermon? You have become +acquainted with it early in life; some learn it very late, and others +never get the lesson. Riches; death! Possessors of every material thing +that earth can give, and the grave beyond it! The unfortunates there had +all this, but their skeletons have stood guard over it for a century or +more."</p> + +<p>The Professor still smiled, but the boys were very grave. It was, +indeed, an impressive lesson.</p> + +<p>"Why are you so quiet? Are you mourning for them?" Then, without waiting +for more gloomy feelings, he continued: "How high above the mouth of the +cave do you think we are?"</p> + +<p>This sudden change in the tone of the Professor was almost startling to +them. How indifferent! It appeared almost like desecration.</p> + +<p>"I have no idea," was Harry's faltering reply. He looked around to +assure himself that it was not all a dream. The sudden acquisition of +what appeared to be an immense store of wealth, the ghastly relics +below, seemed to stun him.</p> + +<p>"Have you a reason for wanting to know how high up we are?" asked George +when he had partially recovered.</p> + +<p>"You wanted to know a little while ago how the smoke in the cavern might +affect them. Haven't you noticed a perceptible movement in the +atmosphere since we entered the chamber?"</p> + +<p>The boys started and stared at him. Could it be that the cave had an +outlet in the hills?</p> + +<p>"Was that the reason you suggested we should make a circuit around the +chamber after we entered it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and I know where the outlet is."</p> + +<p>"And does that explain why the pirates made their home at this end?"</p> + +<p>"Undoubtedly; and what will be still more interesting information is, +that the opening is within sight of the cataract."</p> + +<p>Could anything be more exciting than this information?</p> + +<p>"I now see the reason why you always wanted to come back to the cave. +Did you suspect this when we first entered the cave?"</p> + +<p>"No; but I had an idea we should find this after we made our second +trip."</p> + +<p>"What did you see?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing but what Harry brought to me."</p> + +<p>"What was that?" both exclaimed, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"The slab of carbonate which Harry brought me for the marking tablet, +and on which we made the chart of the cave."</p> + +<p>"What did you find on it?"</p> + +<p>"If you will recall, I brought it with me. It is now in the boat." Harry +dashed down to the boat and brought it back, turning it over and over on +the way.</p> + +<p>The slab referred to was about two inches thick, a foot long, and +probably ten inches wide, a little irregular in formation.</p> + +<p>"When we returned home that evening, after the trip referred to, I took +the slab and transferred the chart we had made to a board. In doing so, +I noticed that the lime had been chipped away from one side, but that +did not cause me to make any investigation at the time.</p> + +<p>"Some days afterwards I again took it up, and could see plainly through +the carbonate what appeared to be the shadows of some characters, and it +at once occurred to me that, owing to the sunlight and the comparatively +dry atmosphere in which it had been kept after its removal, that the +lime would turn or change its color, but the lime on this background did +not change in the same degree where the characters had been placed, and +when we get into the sunlight you will be able to see just what I saw."</p> + +<p>Looking at the slab, there was nothing to indicate any characters +imprinted in it.</p> + +<p>"Where is the opening, Professor?"</p> + +<p>"Come here; directly below where we found the first skeleton; keep the +light back in the recess; there; now look to the left and see that small +streak of light about ten feet from the floor."</p> + +<p>George could restrain himself no longer, but rushed forward. As he +crossed a slightly elevated obstruction, his foot caught on a spur and +he pitched forward. Harry, who was following, saw him fall. George, +slightly stunned, had raised himself partly as Harry came up. When Harry +saw him he was arising from a nest of bones which showed the remains of +two more pirates, the two skulls lying close together, directly behind +the little ridge over which George had fallen.</p> + +<p>"Here are some more of them," cried Harry, as the Professor came up. +"What a fight they must have had!"</p> + +<p>The outlet at this point was fully eight feet wide, and without the +lights it was still too dark to distinguish anything. George's light had +been extinguished in the fall, but Harry's lamp was still available, and +all were eager now to find the outlet. Harry now led the way, and within +seventy-five feet, at a pronounced angle in the throat of the cave, he +recognized the first real glimmer of sunlight.</p> + +<p>"See the steps here!" was his cry. And beyond, as plainly formed as +though cut a year ago, instead of a century, were steps leading up to a +contracted opening, partly hidden by shrubbery.</p> + +<p>When Harry emerged from the opening, the first sight that met his gaze, +after he had fully recovered the use of his eyes, was their home, not a +thousand feet away. George brushed his way out, and he stood there, not +knowing whether to run or to shout or to cry. Every emotion appealed to +the boys for mastery. All previous experiences during the past year +paled into insignificance in comparison with the hour just spent in the +pirates' lair.</p> + +<p>The opening from which they left the cavern was on the side of a hill, +not particularly steep, formed by projecting strata of limestone, in the +clefts of which vegetation grew, and at a distance the rocks could be +seen only at intervals on account of the shrubbery. No one could +possibly suspect an opening into the walls anywhere along the hillside. +The outlet was not more than twenty feet from the rather level ground, +which sloped off toward the west and in the direction of Cataract River.</p> + +<p>They sat there silently for a time, but evidently the Professor was not +disposed to allow too much time for reflections which he knew must be +gloomy to the boys' impressionable minds.</p> + +<p>"What are you thinking about, boys? Have you had enough excitement for +one day?"</p> + +<p>George was the first to reply: "I have been thinking about what we ought +to do with the gold."</p> + +<p>"Why the gold? I have been thinking of the boat."</p> + +<p>"Do you think we ought to leave the gold there? Isn't that of more +importance than the boat?"</p> + +<p>"I do not think so, George; we can use the boat to good advantage, but +where can you utilize the gold?"</p> + +<p>"But why would it not be a good idea to get it out and take it over to +the Cataract?"</p> + +<p>"I should advise against that very strongly."</p> + +<p>"What are your reasons?"</p> + +<p>"Suppose we should be attacked at the Cataract and find the home +untenable; this place would be a safe retreat, and we should, in any +event, have our treasure here in safety. It has been secure for the last +century or so. I think it will keep for a few months more."</p> + +<p>"It had never occurred to me that we could use this place for such a +purpose. That is a capital idea. And did you have this in mind all +along, Professor?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>After a time, when the subjects had been fully discussed, it was decided +to try to bring the boat out by the new entrance, and after making all +the measurements, ample room was found for this. They returned and +carried and dragged it to the opening, and after some labor it was +finally pushed through the opening, and when the ropes were attached it +was lowered down the hillside, and dragged to a position where it could +be taken by the team.</p> + +<p>"You should go for the team now, and I will continue the explorations +until you return," and so saying, the Professor went up the hill and +entered the cave, leaving one of the lights at the opening.</p> + +<p>The boys went back to the mouth of the cave and found the team, as well +as Red Angel, who had remained there, and within a half hour were back +again to the land entrance. The light was still where the Professor had +placed it, and the boys at once entered the passageway, and went down +the steps leading to the pirates' chamber.</p> + +<p>All the bones of the skeletons had been removed from the passageway, +where George had fallen, but the other skeletons were in the same place +originally seen when they discovered the remains.</p> + +<p>The Professor was not in sight, nor did they see any glimmer of his +light.</p> + +<p>It was he, undoubtedly, who had removed the bones from the passageway, +but they did not stop to notice where they were deposited. When they +first came in both were busy discussing the situation, in careless +tones, without any pretense at suppressing their voices, but now that +the Professor was not in sight, and no evidence that he was anywhere +near, the scene about them began to be most weird and uncanny. They +spoke in undertones, and when Harry suggested that they might call the +Professor, and thus let him know of their return, it was some time +before George would consent.</p> + +<p>It became evident, as he did not appear, that something must be done, +and Harry shouted loudly, and his voice reechoed through the cavern and +came back to them from every quarter. In a few moments they were +overjoyed to see the glimmer of a light directly to the east, which was +in the opposite portion of the chamber, where, as his light moved +forward, plainly showed another recess, or, probably, an opening similar +to the one through which they had entered from the west side of the +hill.</p> + +<p>"Have you been waiting long?" was his inquiry.</p> + +<p>"No; we came in less than ten minutes ago. Have you found anything new?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing new, but many additional things; but we must take another day +for this."</p> + +<p>This was said so significantly that they looked at each other, debating +in their minds whether or not the question should be pursued any +further.</p> + +<p>"Haven't you had enough for one day?" and he said this with such a +jovial mien that it restored their composure and satisfied them that +another day would bring the answer that they craved.</p> + +<p>As they passed out George turned to the Professor and asked:</p> + +<p>"Why did you remove the remains in the passageway?"</p> + +<p>"Because I thought it might be well to examine them at our leisure, and +therefore enable us, if possible, to learn something of their history. I +have put them near the steps close to the entrance."</p> + +<p>As they passed out he requested Harry to bring up the boards from the +boat, as well as some ropes and part of the canvas, which was usually +carried with them to be used as a means for signaling. The bones were +arranged on the boards, and kept separate from each other; after which +the canvas was severed and tied around the two human frames, to keep +them in place, and deposited in the boat, after it had been loaded in +the wagon.</p> + +<p>It was now past two o'clock, and none of them felt any hunger until they +neared home. The trip had occupied over four hours, and hungry as they +were, the reaction, after the stirring events of the day, was so marked +that it was difficult to rouse them sufficiently to prepare the meal.</p> + +<p>Somehow, the work at the factory, the building of the boat, and the care +of the stock did not interest them the following day. They went around +like people in dreams. Their thoughts were centered in the cavern on the +hill, and many, many times during the day their eyes involuntarily +turned that way. Was it unnatural that such should be the case? When, if +ever, in the history of human kind had such treasure been bestowed where +the gift had been so lightly considered that they did not even stop long +enough to count its value? It seemed such an unnatural thing to do, and +yet the only feeling was one of curiosity.</p> + +<p>During the entire day the boys rarely spoke to the Professor about the +events of the previous day. He was busy in the laboratory with the two +skeletons, and remained secluded.</p> + +<p>"What do you think the Professor found in the cave while we were getting +the team?"</p> + +<p>"I have had a curiosity to know, as well as yourself. Shall we ask him?"</p> + +<p>"I do not think it would be well to do so. You know he is always willing +and anxious to be of service to us and to answer every question; it +looks like an imposition to insist on what he evidently wishes to +avoid."</p> + +<p>"That is the feeling I have had. I love him because he has been so +unselfish, and during the time we have been associated, I do not +remember ever having heard him utter an unkind word."</p> + +<p>"I have often thought I wish we knew of some way to make him understand +how we appreciate him and his noble ways. You remember the birthday +party we had for him? That touched him, as it did us, and it was the +only time I ever saw him confused or in tears."</p> + +<p>"I wish we knew his history. Did you ever hear him say a word about his +friends or relatives? What affects me most is, that when any subject +comes up, he always considers it from the standpoint of service to us. +He never considers himself."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>REMOVING THE VESSELS FROM THE CAVERNS</h3> + + +<p>The boat was finally completed, and the boys were very anxious to have a +sail in it to know how it would act. The utmost care had been taken to +have it well caulked, and it was again put into the water, after all the +leaky spots had been closed up.</p> + +<p>For the purpose of the test it was decided to put aboard a load of +stone, of a weight equal to what their contemplated load would be, and +this they estimated, not counting their combined weight, at six hundred +pounds. This would be ample for all purposes.</p> + +<p>The day selected was bright, with a fair wind. By agreement Harry was +selected as the skipper, as he knew every part of the boat. It devolved +on him to take command for the day, but he would not consent to be the +permanent captain, as he thought that a duty which devolved on the +others as well.</p> + +<p>Angel was invited, you may be sure, and he enjoyed the idea of a sail +when he recollected, as was no doubt the case, his former trip. There +was evidence of the remembrance in the animal, when they saw him at the +boat, on more than one occasion, swinging back and forth on the rigging.</p> + +<p>The Professor was in his element in the boat. It was a glorious journey +for him, and the boys knew it was appreciated on his part. The wind was +blowing from the west, so the sails were tacked and an easy sail made +for the mouth of the Cataract.</p> + +<p>Outside the sea was rolling, but not disagreeably so; but a much +stronger breeze sprang up toward midday, and before two o'clock it was +very brisk. The cliffs were rounded, and as the wind had not changed +quarters, the sails were set for a southern course. This brought them +around the bay and toward the headland to the east of the mouth of South +River.</p> + +<p>That region had always possessed a fascination for George and an +attraction for the Professor as well. George, particularly, was anxious +to penetrate the river, and sail up to the falls, but Harry's more +practical views prevailed. "If we want to explore the river we can do it +any day with a wagon, or on foot; but while we have the ship out, why +not take a sail down the coast toward the mountains?"</p> + +<p>The Professor concurred in this as the most liable to give them the best +results, as they were out for the purpose of making tests of the craft +on the open sea.</p> + +<p>After sailing for an hour along the coast to the south, the shore line +turned to a southwesterly direction, and the mountain range was now +clearly perceptible, extending southwest, and along which it appeared +that the coast followed. The wind changed and came from the mountains, +and made progress slow. There was also a decided change in the +temperature, and by four o'clock it was impossible to follow the coast +except by constant tacking.</p> + +<p>The boat was turned to the north, and with the strong wind, which had +now perceptibly increased, began to make good time. As evening +approached, the wind increased, until it blew with considerable +violence, every minute being more boisterous, and the Professor +suggested that the jib be taken down, which was done; but the increasing +gale, and the terrible strain on the mast and sail, made the boys look +inquiringly at the Professor, for a word of warning.</p> + +<p>He sat there grimly during the raging storm, and with the halliards +gradually let down the mainsail when the tempest had reached such a +point that it appeared to sweep everything from the boat.</p> + +<p>Where was Angel during all this uproar? Forward in the housed portion of +the boat, curled up in a corner, and apparently unconscious, the little +creature did not seem at all perturbed.</p> + +<p>"Don't you think he is seasick?"</p> + +<p>"It is not likely. Seasickness is akin, you know, to that dizzy feeling +some people have when at a height. The natural instincts of the animal +prevent him from having any feeling of discomfort at a height. The trees +are their homes, and for that reason they can swing from branch to +branch and sway back and forth in the loftiest trees without an +uncomfortable feeling."</p> + +<p>The heavy blow continued until they had reached the cliffs, when it +abated somewhat, and the boys anxiously inquired whether it would be +safe to make the entrance to the river during the gale.</p> + +<p>"We are out for the purpose of testing the boat. To make an attempt to +round the cliff and steer it into the mouth of the river in this wind +will be the best test of its maneuvering ability."</p> + +<p>As stated, the wind was now blowing from the southwest, and they were +northeast of the mouth of the stream they wished to enter. They stood +out to sea in order to make a starboard tack, and it was a gratification +to see the magnificent manner in which the vessel responded, and before +six o'clock they found themselves sailing up the river, and safely +landed at the boathouse.</p> + +<p>An examination showed that the crossbeam supporting the mainmast was +split from end to end, and only the roof structure held it in place. +Thus the trip had a warning lesson for them, and Harry was not slow to +take advantage of it and install a larger crosspiece.</p> + +<p>George had entirely forgotten the incident of the calcareous slab which +had on it the tracings of the cave, and which had been the means of +giving the Professor the first hint that they were in a pirate's cave.</p> + +<p>The first thing in the morning he went over to the laboratory, and +called attention to the slab. "Here it is," said the Professor. "You +will note that the light shows some characters which can readily be made +out, and at the corner here, where a portion has been chipped away, it +has the appearance of something else besides calcium."</p> + +<p>"Why, it looks like wood."</p> + +<p>"That is what it is. I should not have noticed the wood if the peculiar +lettering had not shown up through the coating."</p> + +<p>"What are the letters, and do you know what they stand for?"</p> + +<p>"We had better not pass judgment on that until we have removed all the +calcium."</p> + +<p>At this moment Harry came in to view the slab. It was the slab he had +carelessly picked up in the cave, and therefore it had a great +fascination for him. The calcium was carefully chipped off, and it was +found to be a piece of oak board, with a smooth cut-off end, parallel +sides, nine inches wide, nearly two inches thick, and about eleven +inches long, the opposite end having the appearance of being broken. The +only letters which could be made out were "HI," and a portion of another +letter which could not be determined.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig14" id="fig14"></a> +<img src="images/fig14.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 14. <span class="smcap">The Slab Found in the Cave</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"What do you think the letters were intended to indicate?"</p> + +<p>"They might be the name of a ship, or some sign. I do not think it was +part of a ship. I tried to find something in the cave, on the day I went +in while you went after the team, which would afford some clue, but so +far nothing confirms me in any view which I may have."</p> + +<p>"Isn't it curious that these letters should show through only after the +slab was exposed to the light?"</p> + +<p>"Why is that any more curious than photography is?"</p> + +<p>"Because in photography something is put on the glass or the sheet that +the negatives are made of, and it turns and makes a mark under certain +conditions."</p> + +<p>"Well, here is something put on this slab that turns also. Photography +is a wonderful thing. Dr. Draper, the first great photographer, and who +was also a scientist, says that every wall, or other object, which you +stand before, has your photograph imprinted on it. The only question is +to find some chemical which will develop the picture."</p> + +<p>"What is meant by developing the picture?"</p> + +<p>"You remember some time ago we talked about reagents, and the properties +of certain chemicals to act on others, and in doing so, to make a +change. Sometimes the change is a complete one, and makes a new product; +in other cases the result is a complete change of color. Now, in +photography, if a certain chemical is placed on a glass or a film, and +the film is exposed, the light and dark portions of the object show on +the film. The sunlight, or the actinic rays in the sunlight, affect the +chemical material so that when the fixing chemical is applied it +prevents a change in the condition of the chemical."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by the actinic ray?"</p> + +<p>"All light is vibration; the greatest motions which are perceptible to +the eye, being known as violet. Now there are still more rapid +vibrations than are put forth to make the violet rays, which are called +the actinic rays, and are the ones which affect the chemicals so +acutely."</p> + +<p>"Is it then possible to photograph with a light that is not perceptible +to the eye?"</p> + +<p>"You have heard of the x-rays, no doubt; they are the actinic or ultra +violet, which are above the visible light. These light vibrations are of +such a character that they penetrate many substances. A curious effect +of this was shown some time ago when a photograph was taken of the side +of a vessel which had several coats of paint over the old name, and the +photograph showed not only the new name, but also the old one beneath."</p> + +<p>The time had now arrived when they must make preparations for the +proposed voyage of discovery around the island. It was a momentous time +for them. The boys could not help but look with longing eyes to the +cave. Before they went it was felt something more should be learned +about its mysteries.</p> + +<p>The Professor was not at all backward in encouraging this feeling.</p> + +<p>"Wouldn't it be a good thing to take such things out of the cave as we +can make use of here, and during our trip?" said Harry.</p> + +<p>"What things do you think we could utilize?"</p> + +<p>"Probably the guns; and then they have some cooking utensils."</p> + +<p>"And why," suggested George, laughingly, "couldn't we take some of the +money along?"</p> + +<p>"That would be a comfortable feeling to have plenty of money in our +pockets. Very well, we'll take this afternoon for the trip."</p> + +<p>An early start was made, the lamps carefully trimmed and the guns, +together with the bolos, collected. It was a short walk to the opening, +and Angel, although not invited, accompanied the party.</p> + +<p>Together they descended, and soon reached the scene of the conflict at +the large recess to the left of the entrance. The Professor, after +reviewing the scene, suggested that the bones should be carefully +gathered together and deposited at a place where they could be buried.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig15" id="fig15"></a> +<img src="images/fig15.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Portugese Coin 1700, Spanish Pistole, Peruvian Dollar.</i></h3> +<h3><i>Fig. 15. Old Coins found in Cave.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"We do not want them here as evidences of the strife."</p> + +<p>After all had been gathered and carried to the spot selected, the first +task was to gather the treasure found in the chests. And here a sight +met their eyes which staggered them. One of the chests which Harry first +found contained not only an immense quantity of gold coin, of Spanish +and other mintages, but curious other pieces, all ancient, as shown by +the inscriptions, and long yellow bars, the last of which attracted +George's attention.</p> + +<p>"What are these bars?"</p> + +<p>"They are gold bullion, made by melting up various articles, and +probably the coin itself, so as to make it convenient for +transportation."</p> + +<p>"My! how heavy they are! and look at the number!"</p> + +<p>When all had been assorted the Professor suggested that as they had +plenty of copper utensils, the latter might be used as receptacles for +the gold. The other chest contained but little coin, but here the +interest was not less pronounced than in the other chest, because the +vessels found were not only of beautiful, but many of curious, design. +Some were of silver, as well, and the boys knew that those would be +serviceable for their table, and at their suggestion all such were laid +aside to be removed to the Cataract.</p> + +<p>The kitchen utensils afforded a more varied collection than had been +anticipated. Six of the larger copper vessels were required to hold the +money, jewelry and other articles taken from the two decayed chests, and +there were still remaining at least a dozen more smaller jars and pots, +some with handles, which would be exceedingly useful in their kitchen.</p> + +<p>All these were carefully put aside, and the smaller silver articles +deposited in them. And now the guns! Seven skeletons were found, two of +which had been removed to the Cataract by the Professor. After all the +guns had been collected, twelve were counted.</p> + +<p>"I suppose each fellow had two of them," was Harry's conclusion.</p> + +<p>"If you will go over into the chamber to the east you will find a +sufficient number to assure you that they were not lacking firearms."</p> + +<p>The boys now understood. He had told them on the second day's +exploration that he did not find anything new, but only something more. +Why not go and see it now. But they were restrained. A dozen guns were +certainly enough. These were also set aside, and it was then agreed to +place the vessels containing the treasure in a secluded nook, in the +extreme corner of the large recess. Samples of the clothing, some of the +knives or daggers, as well as the little trinkets, found near each of +the bodies, were deposited in the receptacles that had been selected for +removal.</p> + +<p>All this accumulation of material was more than they had bargained for +when they left the Cataract, so that the failure to bring the team was +keenly felt. However, it was the work of an hour, only, to get the team, +and it was a pretty fair load which went from the pirates' haunts to the +home on the river.</p> + +<p>George's curiosity could not keep him from taking some of the coins +which he exhibited when they returned, and which they would have ample +leisure to examine.</p> + +<p>Harry's thoughts were turned to the firearms. They were certainly of an +antiquated pattern. The first thing was their length. Two of them were +unusually long, fully six and a half feet.</p> + +<p>"I wonder why it was they made their guns so long?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"The reason was, probably, that the quality of powder was so bad that +the bullet would get out before all the powder was consumed. All the +ancient pistols were very inefficient, because of the short barrel. Even +down to the time of the American Revolution the guns on board of war +vessels were not capable of throwing shot very far, and the most +effective ones were those with long barrels."</p> + +<p>"In what respect is the powder of to-day more powerful than in olden +times?"</p> + +<p>"Particularly in the fact that formulas have been devised which make a +higher expansion, or give a greater volume of gas. The other feature of +value is, that chemical means have been discovered whereby the moment a +sufficient amount of heat has developed in the powder it instantly +burns—not a slow fusing, like the old powders—but the combustion is +instantaneous. These two factors working together have greatly improved +even the black powders."</p> + +<p>After their return the interest in the articles was so great, and the +inventory took so much time, that the disappearance of Angel had been +entirely forgotten. All remembered him going along, and no one had seen +him enter the cave. None of them believed he could be induced to go in, +hence no particular notice was taken of his movements.</p> + +<p>An hour after the return, Harry saw Angel coming over the field at the +east of the Cataract, dragging something after him laboriously. All +stood and watched him as he neared home. He had a stick, apparently, but +it seemed to be unusually heavy.</p> + +<p>George ran out to assist him, and when he came up he gravely handed to +article to George. It was the barrel of a gun, with part of the +flintlock still attached, but it was rusted almost beyond recognition, +the bore completely filled with dirt, accumulation and rust.</p> + +<p>"Where do you suppose the little rascal found this?"</p> + +<p>The Professor examined it. "Outside of the cave, undoubtedly. The +curious part about it is, that this weapon is of an entirely different +and more modern pattern than those we have samples of."</p> + +<p>Harry took the gun and ran in to where the others were deposited, and +true enough, it was not only shorter, but it had a smaller bore, and +what is more, the outside of the barrel was octagonal, whereas the +barrels of those inside of the cave were all round.</p> + +<p>As the Professor predicted, the guns which they recovered were too much +rusted to be of any service, and furthermore, they were made of iron, +very much softer than the steel of which their own guns were +constructed, and it is questionable whether they would be able to +withstand a charge of the comparatively high power powder which had been +made for the modern guns.</p> + +<p>As curiosities the weapons were good things to have; otherwise they were +of no value. This was not so with the vessels, which could be and were +utilized in the kitchen and in that capacity were of the highest use. +The table was supplied with articles of the purest silver, and it had a +royal look.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>MAKING ELECTRICITY</h3> + + +<p>In order that you may get some sort of idea concerning the condition of +our little colony, at this time, it would be well to give a brief review +of the situation. When they landed on the island the year before, with +nothing but the clothing they wore, the prospect of being delivered was +not a flattering one, as day after day passed by.</p> + +<p>Here were two boys, unused to the privations of life, with youth and +vigor, cut off from all the pleasures of manhood, surrounded by dangers, +and day after day having mysteries thrust upon them which only increased +their fears. These things necessarily must have produced an impression +much deeper than would be the case with hardened men.</p> + +<p>In the effort to discover, produce and build the various tools, weapons, +and articles of clothing, to hunt food, and in the endeavor to learn +about the condition of the island, and guard themselves against foes +which might be all about them, imposed immense responsibilities.</p> + +<p>In their struggles were personified the contests of the human race from +the beginning of the world, in the effort to conquer nature, and to make +it contribute to their necessities.</p> + +<p>The Professor knew how such a condition would tend to make active minds +either productive of good, or to fly out in the opposite direction and +cultivate the low and sordid instincts. Occupation, work, the +utilization of the mind, and above all, to direct their energies into +useful channels, had been the Professor's one absorbing aim.</p> + +<p>The boys had responded, as all boys will, not for the love of gain or +for power or glory. Our boys had none of these. Other boys do not need +them any more than those on Wonder Island. What they do need is a true +stimulus for work; and when that evening they were gathered together in +the cozy little living room at the Cataract, the Professor who for two +days had been particularly reticent and retired, said:</p> + +<p>"Can you imagine the condition of the pirates who gathered all that +hoard in the cave? What do you think their aim was in life?"</p> + +<p>"It seems to me," was Harry's reply, "that the only thing they were +after was wealth."</p> + +<p>"If what we see in the cave is any indication, the principal thing they +lived for was to kill somebody," was George's conclusion.</p> + +<p>The answers made him smile. "You have, I presume, answered the question +in the two sentences. But there is something that you haven't mentioned, +which is at the bottom of it all."</p> + +<p>"Yes; wanting to kill to get the money."</p> + +<p>"That only states your previous answers in a more concrete way. There is +one word which describes it accurately: Selfishness. When a man inquires +into the secrets of nature; when he tries to turn the knowledge gained +into account, either for money or glory; when he consistently devotes +his days to labor, and his nights to thoughts to find out how he may do +something better, or quicker, or cheaper, it might all be denominated +selfishness, and so it is, in a way. It is a selfishness, however, that +does no injury to a fellow-man. That kind of selfishness is the great +quality which has produced the wonderful things that we see all about +us, and which distinguishes the man from the brute creation."</p> + +<p>"But I have read of a great many men who made millions and millions and +who never did any of the things you have just referred to," answered +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Then do you think they are any better than the pirates were?"</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the exciting times, food was a necessity, and it had to +be found and prepared. It could not be bought. All the gold in the cave +would not purchase a single meal. More barley had to be ground and the +stock of honey was almost exhausted. Their duties in the shop, +consequent on the haste exhibited to get the boat and weapons ready, +contributed to the low state of supplies.</p> + +<p>George announced that there was less than two pounds of the honey left, +and proposed that a trip be taken to the flats, where the Professor had +found the sugar cane. All joined in the journey to the cane field, and +Angel was invited to join, which invitation was accepted by him +gleefully.</p> + +<p>The bolos were taken for the purpose of cutting the cane, and on the way +George's inevitable question point was in evidence. "What did people use +for sweetening purposes before cane was discovered?"</p> + +<p>"Honey was the principal source of the world's sweets. But cane is not +the only kind of vegetable from which the principle has been extracted. +There are many kinds of reeds which furnish a sweetish substance. Sugar +cane was first made known in eastern Europe by the conquest of Alexander +the Great. Nearchus, one of his admirals, in sailing down the Indus, +found the reed, and it was, previous to that time, known throughout the +greater part of India. He described it as a kind of honey growing in +canes and reeds. From this you may infer that honey was the principal +source of sweets in his time."</p> + +<p>"What are the other principal plants or substances that sugar is made +from?"</p> + +<p>"Mainly from beet, tubers of various kinds, such as the common dahlias, +and numerous vegetables, from milk, fruit, gum arabic, as well as fish."</p> + +<p>"I have heard it said that sugar contains all that is necessary to +sustain life. Is that true?"</p> + +<p>"That is a mistaken idea. It will sustain life for quite a time and with +the addition of nitrogenous matter has great fattening properties, but +without that it is not valuable as food."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by nitrogenous matter?"</p> + +<p>"Meat, fish, eggs, milk, beans, peas, and the like, all contain a large +amount of nitrogen."</p> + +<p>"I remember my arm being burned on one occasion, and mother made a syrup +out of sugar and put it on. In what way was the sugar beneficial?"</p> + +<p>"In the first place, sugar is one of the most powerful antiseptics +known. It acts, therefore, as an aid to healing, since it protects the +wound from foreign substances and from poisonous and harmful germs. In +the next place, it is a great preservative for either fruit or flesh."</p> + +<p>The cane was cut close to the root, and the top and leaves trimmed off. +Within several hours a full load was thus procured. The boys enjoyed the +pith, and George playfully gave some to Angel. His surprise knew no +bounds. When he knew what the cane was good for, he simply gorged on it.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig16" id="fig16"></a> +<img src="images/fig16.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 16. Cane Crusher.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>Harry at once set to work on turning up two rollers from hickory, the +rollers being eight inches in diameter, and eighteen inches long, and +each being provided with a spindle four inches in diameter. One end of +each of the spindles was longer than the other, so pulleys could be +attached, the object being to provide a means whereby they might be +turned by suitable belts from the water wheel. In addition, the top +roller was made so it would yield, and had levers resting on the +spindles, and provided with weights, so the rollers would press out the +juice, whatever the quantity that might be placed between the rollers.</p> + +<p>It was really a simple little machine to put up, but it required a day +for both of them. Vessels were now provided for the juice, and when they +were filled, the Professor suggested that a little lime should be put +into the juice, after it had been strained through the ramie cloth.</p> + +<p>"What is the object of putting in lime?"</p> + +<p>"To precipitate the impurities."</p> + +<p>The action of the lime was plainly visible, and after it had been +allowed to settle, the clarified portion was drawn off, and the process +of boiling down was proceeded with. As fast as one of the vessels was +boiled down, more of the cane was crushed, the juice being dipped from +one vessel to the second one, until the entire load was crushed and the +juice boiled down to a thick consistency.</p> + +<p>Here was molasses, at any rate a good substitute for honey, and it was +so homelike to get the real article. That night they had molasses candy. +It felt like old times. It was a real candy pulling, and no one enjoyed +it more than Angel. From the moment he had the first taste of the pulp +of the cane, he was the most interested one of the party. But the fun +came the next morning, when George brought out, for his benefit, some of +the taffy which had been set out to harden. The chuckle which he +emitted, when he tried to pry off a piece of the sweet morsel, was too +amusing for words.</p> + +<p>When the entire amount of juice had been boiled down and it had readied +the point where it had the appearance of granulating, the fire was +withdrawn, and the whole mass stirred until it was cooled, and the +result was a fine sample of beautiful brown sugar which weighed +forty-three pounds.</p> + +<p>Nevertheless food was an important item in their preparations, the +necessities for doing everything in their power to insure the success of +the maritime enterprise. One of the most valuable adjuncts for sailing +is a compass. No attempt had been made to produce the implement, and +when the needs of the expedition were being discussed, Harry was curious +to know the reason why the compass always pointed north and south.</p> + +<p>The Professor was very much interested in all electrical phenomena and +replied: "The earth is a huge magnet, and any body which is magnetized +has a north and a south pole. The needle which is also a magnetized body +has, in like manner, a north and a south pole."</p> + +<p>"But in what manner does that make the needle point in one way only?"</p> + +<p>"Electricity is a very curious thing. While the current unquestionably +moves from one end to the other of a conductor, it also exhibits itself +in the form of rings around the wire. This may not be understood in the +absence of a sketch. For that purpose I make a drawing (Fig. 17) which +shows a conductor (A), through which a current is passing, and this +current is represented by the spiral line (B) which goes around the +conductor."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig17" id="fig17"></a> +<img src="images/fig17.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 17. <span class="smcap">A Magnet</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + +<p>"Well, is magnetism the same as electricity?"</p> + +<p>"Both exhibit the same manifestations. Magnetism is nothing more than a +body charged with electricity. The electricity, which appears to travel +around the conductor (A), extends out for some distance from its body, +and produces what is called a magnetic field. This is the case whether +the magnet is a permanent one, like the earth, or whether the conductor +is charged by a dynamo."</p> + +<p>"What is the difference between the north and the south pole?"</p> + +<p>"There is really no difference. The terms north or south and positive or +negative are mere relative designations, and are distinguished simply by +the movement or direction of the travel of the current. You will +remember when we made the battery, it was shown that the current, +outside of the battery, moved from the positive to the negative pole. +That was merely stating that it moved from the north to the south pole +outside of the earth, and from the south to the north pole inside of the +earth. The current is, therefore, from one magnetic pole to the other."</p> + +<p>"What I cannot understand is why the magnetic poles should be at the +north pole and at the south pole."</p> + +<p>"The magnetic poles are not at the poles of the rotation of the earth, +but hundreds of miles away, to one side of the poles on which the earth +rotates; but they are near enough to the real poles, for all purposes, +so that the needle points to what we call the north pole of the earth. +Any magnetized body must have these two opposite poles. If it is a body, +like a bar of iron, one end is called north and the other south. Look at +this other sketch (Fig. 18) and you will see how the currents flow in +the two magnets. In this case the large body (E) represents the earth +and the small body (M) the magnet. Now notice that the current going +around the large body moves to the right, or to the north pole, whereas +the current in the small magnet (M) flows in the opposite direction."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig18" id="fig18"></a> +<img src="images/fig18.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 18. <span class="smcap">Magnetic Induction</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"And does the current flowing around the bars, as you have shown, make +the small magnet turn around so that it is always parallel with the +large magnet, and make the north pole of one magnet at the same end with +the south pole of the other magnet?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; to make it still clearer, I make two more drawings (Figs. 19 and +19a), in which two sets of magnets are shown. In the first of these +pairs of magnets (Fig. 19), the two north poles approach each other, and +the two south poles are opposite each other. The currents, if you will +notice, at the north poles move toward each other, and at the south +poles move away from each other. They are, therefore, acting against +each other, and the result will be that the magnets will move away from +each other. If, now, one of the magnets is turned so the poles of one +magnet approach the opposite poles of the other magnet, as shown in the +second view (Fig. 19a), they will attract each other, because the +current is permitted to flow through the two magnets in the same +direction without one conflicting with the other."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig19-19a" id="fig19-19a"></a> +<img src="images/fig19-19a.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 19. Fig. 19a. <span class="smcap">The Two Magnets</span></i></h3> + + +<p>"Is that the reason it is stated that likes repel and unlikes attract?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>In order to take advantage of this knowledge, knowing that the earth is +a great permanent magnet, it was necessary to make a small magnet, and +so suspend it that it would turn freely, and the magnetic north and +south could then be determined.</p> + +<p>To do this the battery which had been previously made was brought into +play. George took a hand in the work, and while they were preparing the +metal for the little bar, said: "You spoke about a permanent magnet. +What other kinds of magnets are there?"</p> + +<p>"Magnets are permanent or temporary. A permanent magnet is one in which +the electricity resides, or remains, as it does in the earth. A +temporary magnet is one which has magnetism imparted to it only while a +current of electricity is passing around it."</p> + +<p>"How is the current made to pass around it?"</p> + +<p>"By wrapping an insulated wire around it, and sending a current through +the wire. When that is done the same thing is done to the bar as the bar +of the permanent magnet exhibits. As soon, however, as the current +through the wire ceases, the bar is again demagnetized. That is, it +ceases to be a magnet."</p> + +<p>"We have the small bars ready, Professor. What is the next step?"</p> + +<p>"It must be hardened so as to make it a flinty steel. The harder the +better, so that it will preserve the magnetism imparted to it."</p> + +<p>"Is that the better way to make the temporary magnet?"</p> + +<p>"No; in that case the bar should be of the softest iron. Remember, +therefore, that for a permanent magnet, use the hardest steel, and for a +temporary one, the softest iron."</p> + +<p>"Then as we want to make a permanent magnet, must we harden both of the +bars?"</p> + +<p>"No; for our uses, one must be left soft, because on that we shall want +to wind some insulated wire to make a temporary magnet."</p> + +<p>The small amount of wire which was on hand was then coated with a thin +layer of the ramie fiber, which was carefully wrapped around, so that +the different layers of wire could not touch each other. When this was +completed, a spool was constructed, which fitted over the little bar or +rod, because they were rounded off, and one end of the soft iron rod +extended out beyond the spool.</p> + +<p>The opposite ends of the winding were then brought out and attached to +the terminal wires of the battery. A test showed that the magnet thus +made would readily pick up pieces of iron or steel. The Professor then +took the hardened steel rod, through which a small hole had been bored, +midway between its ends, and laying it down on the table, the projecting +end of the temporary magnet which projected from the spool was put into +contact with the hard steel rod, and slowly drawn along to the end. The +soft bar magnet was then raised up and again repeated, as shown in the +drawing (Fig. 20), where the dotted line (A) represents the movement of +the end of the temporary magnet.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig20" id="fig20"></a> +<img src="images/fig20.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 20. <span class="smcap">Making a Permanent Magnet</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + + + +<p>This was repeated over and over a great many times, and finally the hard +steel bar was found to have a charge of magnetism, and for the purpose +of providing a means for holding the magnetism, a C-shaped piece of iron +was put on the bar, as shown in the detached figure.</p> + +<p>"Is that the reason," asked Harry, "why a small piece of metal is always +put across the ends of a horseshoe magnet when it is not in use?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>STARTING ON THE VOYAGE TO THE WEST</h3> + + +<p>"If I remember correctly, you stated some time ago, Professor, that the +barometer indicated the pressure of the atmosphere, and in that way it +was useful in letting us know what the weather would be. Before we sail, +would it not be well to make one of them? If we had possession of one of +the articles, we might not have been caught in the storm the first time +we took out No. 3."</p> + +<p>"That is a good suggestion. I intended to propose that, because with the +barometer and the compass we shall be equipped with two of the most +useful instruments needed."</p> + +<p>"I cannot comprehend how the air pressure has anything to do with the +weather. Is the air pressure really greater at one time than at +another?"</p> + +<p>"Heated air ascends, does it not?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; I can understand that."</p> + +<p>"As it ascends it is, therefore, lighter at that point than normally. On +the other hand, moist air is heavier than dry air. These two conditions +would be indicated by the barometric column, would they not?"</p> + +<p>"I presume they would; but when the air is moisture laden we don't need +a barometer to tell it is going to rain. We know it and feel it. What I +particularly wanted to know was how the barometer by its actions would +indicate it ahead for any length of time."</p> + +<p>"The barometer does not indicate with any degree of accuracy on land; +but on sea it has a much better application. The instrument shows the +present pressure of the atmosphere, and its variations correspond to +atmospherical changes which have already taken place, the effects of +which may follow their cause at a greater or less interval."</p> + +<p>"Then how could it be ascertained from the instrument when there would +be a storm or rain?"</p> + +<p>"After a continuance of dry weather, if the barometer begins to fall +slowly and steadily, rain will certainly ensue; but if the fine weather +has been of long duration, and the mercury may fall for two or three +days before any perceptible change takes place; the more time elapses +before the rain comes, the longer the wet weather is likely to last."</p> + +<p>"Then what indicates dry weather?"</p> + +<p>"If, after a great deal of wet weather, with the barometer below its +mean height, the mercury begins to rise steadily and slowly, fine +weather will come, though two or three wet days may first elapse; and +the fine weather will be more permanent in proportion to the length of +time that passes before the perceptible change takes place."</p> + +<p>"Is this the case at all times of the year?"</p> + +<p>"The seasons affect the barometer, it is true. A sudden fall of the +barometer in the autumn or in the spring indicates wind; in the summer +or in hot weather it prognosticates a thunderstorm; in winter, after +frost, a sudden fall of the mercury shows a change of wind or a thaw +with rain; but in a continued frost a rise of mercury indicates +approaching snow."</p> + +<p>"It seems, then, that a man must be pretty well versed in the weather to +be able to read the signs."</p> + +<p>"That is a correct observation. The instrument in the hands of one who +has had experience with its use is absolutely necessary; it is not a +very satisfying device for those who do not take the time or trouble to +read all the signs, and note all the indications."</p> + +<p>As detailed in a preceding chapter, the hardened steel rod for the +compass was brought out for the purpose of securing it in a little case, +so that it might be utilized to give them the true north.</p> + +<p>It was a difficult task to find a means of suspending it, for the reason +that they had no tools which would make fine and carefully pivoted +balances, but eventually this was done, and they were gratified to see +the little rod or bar swing around and point north and south.</p> + +<p>The work of arranging suitable closets for the various provisions and +providing a miniature kitchen was the next thing in order. This occupied +several days. Instead of taking the bedding in their house, it was +decided that new mattresses should be made up from the barley, of which +there was quite a quantity on hand.</p> + +<p>One of the receptacles taken from the cave was a copper jar, which held +five gallons of water. A top was made for this which could be sealed up, +to hold a reserve supply of water. In addition two other vessels were +also provided for the regular supply, and also fitted with covers, so +that they had about ten gallons, an amount which was considered +sufficient.</p> + +<p>The matter of fuel was a more difficult one to solve, unless they +intended to prepare most of the food before starting; but George +insisted that the small stove should be put aboard, and about fifty +pounds of the coal stowed away.</p> + +<p>"How long do you think we should provision for?" was George's inquiry, +as they were carrying the various things aboard.</p> + +<p>Harry had no ideas on the subject, but the Professor ventured the +opinion that at least two weeks' supply should be arranged for.</p> + +<p>This conclusion rather startled the boys, who had not expected more than +a few days' trip, and when they questioned him about his reasons for +making the statement, he said: "Did you ever hear of the old lady who +attended a special meeting of prayer for rain? She came with an +umbrella, and the people laughed and chided her. The minister reproved +them, saying: 'She, at least, has faith, which you have not.' We are +going for two purposes: one is to learn something about the island we +are on, and the other to rescue our companions if they can be found. We +couldn't rescue them and let them starve."</p> + +<p>Those words impressed them as nothing theretofore had, that the +Professor believed they were really going to find their former +shipmates, and that they would have stirring times before them.</p> + +<p>Nothing so stimulates the actions of men, or boys, as the prospect of +adventure. Their trip had a double meaning, and it is not venturing too +much to say that their feelings were most tense during the entire period +in which they were engaged at the task of fitting out the little ship.</p> + +<p>At last the day was set for the departure. The cattle could take care of +themselves. A tablet was prepared to be put up on their dwelling, +stating who were the owners of the habitation, their present +destination, and briefly relating the knowledge they possessed of the +inhabitants of the island, a statement of the direction they had taken, +and the kind of boat to which they trusted their destiny, and when they +expected to return.</p> + +<p>A copy of this was then carried to the pole on Observation Hill, and +nailed to the mast, to replace the small tablet which had hitherto +filled that place. They were to launch the boat for the start on the +morrow.</p> + +<p>That night a storm blew up from the west, as most of the winds had +previously blown from that quarter during the past month. The storm was +severe during the entire night, and abated somewhat in the forenoon, but +it again increased in fury before noon and continued with more or less +vigor all that day and during the night.</p> + +<p>"I am afraid this storm will prevent us from starting for several days, +on account of its widespread character. The sea for hundreds of miles +has been subject to this monsoon, and we would have a very rough time +until the sea quiets down."</p> + +<p>The delay was a bitter thing for the boys. Expectation had run high. +Anticipation doesn't mildly or easily brook waiting. They did not know +what to do, or how to pass the time in the interim. It was such a new +and trying condition for them.</p> + +<p>The Professor noticed how they chafed under the restraint, but +apparently took no heed of it. However, he encouraged them in every +effort they made to divert themselves and to occupy their minds during +the waiting period.</p> + +<p>During one of these spells which come on all more or less during such +trying hours, George could not hold in any longer, but broke out +impatiently: "What is the use of waiting any longer? The storm may keep +up for a week."</p> + +<p>"Then do you think we had better venture a start under these +conditions?"</p> + +<p>George thought a while. He appreciated the risk. Harry, too, was anxious +and nervous, and expressed a willingness to take the risk.</p> + +<p>"Let me put another side to the question," said the Professor. "We are +perfectly safe here. You take no risks by remaining. You have in the +cave treasure that will make you millionaires. You cannot afford to take +any risks. If we knew something of the conditions on the island, and had +a certain knowledge that our comrades were in danger, the considerations +I have named should not deter us from starting. But with all these +things in the dark, and with the monsoons likely to break out again at +any time, the question is whether we can afford to risk the safety of +the enterprise because of impatience at delay."</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Harry. "I have thought of these things, and I feel that +the Professor's advice should be followed."</p> + +<p>The boys were particularly surprised that he should refer to the money +in the cave as a reason why they should consider their actions in the +matter. It was so unlike him to refer to any sordid considerations as a +reason for not performing a great duty.</p> + +<p>"I would also remind you that one of the greatest boons ever given to +the great investigators of the world came through delays. Time is a +wonderful reasoner. It is also a great modifier of events. Darwin was +prevented for twenty years in promulgating his great thesis; some of the +most marvelous inventions took years to bring out and develop into such +a state as to make them acceptable to the world. Delays, patiently +borne, make strong men. The impetuous think they represent wasted +opportunities. Davy Crockett enunciated one of the greatest principles +of human action when he said, 'Be sure you are right, then go ahead.' It +was only another way of advising against recklessness or impatience in +any enterprise."</p> + +<p>Thus three days passed, and not without misgivings, the signal was given +for the start. Angel accompanied them, and with a new flag which the +days of leisure had given them an opportunity to prepare, the little +craft sailed down the waters of Cataract, in a shining sun, bound for a +haven which might mean rest, or to a shore which might offer no welcome +to them. The wind was coming mildly from the north, and when they had +cleared the shore line and were beyond the influence of the swells, +their course was directed to the west. Several miles beyond was a point +which projected out to sea; they could see this plainly from Observation +Hill, and during the last long trip inland they reached the sea beyond +this cape.</p> + +<p>The shore line beyond was absolutely unknown to them, but it extended to +the west as far as they could see, and when night set in the faint mist +prevented them from judging how much farther it ran in that direction.</p> + +<p>Without proper instruments at sea, distance is always a difficult matter +to judge, and the boys were constantly venturing guesses as to the +distance traveled. The start was made shortly after nine o'clock, and it +was now past six in the evening.</p> + +<p>"How far do you think we have gone during the day?" was George's +question.</p> + +<p>The Professor made a mental calculation before replying. "If we have +traveled at the same speed during the entire course that we made during +the first three miles to the cape, we have gone about thirty miles."</p> + +<p>"Do you know it is three miles to the cape?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is approximately that distance. I measured it by triangulation +some time ago, using our house and Observation Hill as the base line."</p> + +<p>The boys had neglected to take this precaution.</p> + +<p>"What was your object in doing that?"</p> + +<p>"So that we might have some means to observe the speed our boat could +make. If we knew the speed of the wind, we might be able to calculate +our distance."</p> + +<p>"But the wind has been coming from the north and we are sailing due +west. Would not the difference in the speed of the wind make a +difference in the speed of the boat?"</p> + +<p>"It was for that reason I stated if our rate of travel was the same we +would have made that distance. The wind has been variable at different +points along the coast, so that our average may have been four miles per +hour."</p> + +<p>"At what speed has the wind been during the day; I mean the average +speed?"</p> + +<p>"Less than eight miles an hour?"</p> + +<p>"If the wind had been coming from the east we could have made much +better time, and we might then have been near the mouth of the West +River," was Harry's conclusion.</p> + +<p>"Why do you think we should have made better time?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"Because we should then have been going with the wind."</p> + +<p>"You are entirely wrong in your assumption. Sailing ships travel faster +when tacking than when sailing with the wind."</p> + +<p>The boys looked at the Professor in astonishment.</p> + +<p>"It does not seem possible," replied George, "that any movement of the +wind pushing sidewise could be more effective than a pressure straight +ahead. Can you explain the reason for the statement?"</p> + +<p>"When the wind blows straight against a sail, certain eddies are +produced which cause a convolute stream around its edges. These currents +are counter to the forward movement of the vessel. Assuming that this +normal pressure of the wind is 1,000 pounds, it is estimated that fully +half is lost in effectiveness. On the other hand, if the ship is moving +forward at right angles to the direction of the wind, and the sail is +set at forty-five degrees, that is what is called a tack; while it has +only about six-sevenths the surface that it had when going with the +wind, the sail is constantly going into new wind and, therefore, the +pressure is a constant one and most efficiently applied to the surface."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean by this that if I hold up a sail so that the wind blows +flat against it, the pressure will not be as great as if I held it at an +angle?"</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig21-22" id="fig21-22"></a> +<img src="images/fig21-22.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 21. Fig. 22. <span class="smcap">Illustrating Wind Pressure</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"No; I had reference to a moving object. I can better explain the +phenomenon by illustrating the two conditions: In the drawing (Fig. 21), +let A represent a sail with 100 square feet of surface. The darts (1) +represent the wind blowing dead against it. This is called the normal +position. You will see the darts representing the direction of the +movement of the wind. Now look at the next sketch (Fig. 22). Here the +sail (B) is put at an angle of forty-five degrees from the direction of +the wind. The sail is still the same size vertically, but it is somewhat +smaller horizontally across the line (C), this diminution in size being +about one-seventh of the entire area. The darts (D) in both cases +represent the movement of the boat, and the darts (2) in the last sketch +show the wind striking the sail at an angle."</p> + +<p>"In the first sketch the darts (1) strike the sail normally, as you say, +in what way do the darts (2) in the next figure strike the sail?"</p> + +<p>"At an angle of incidence. If you will notice the behavior of the wind +in the first view it will be seen that the wind curves around the edges +of the sail, and strikes against the back of it, and thus produces the +retarding effect I referred to. On the other hand, by examining the +second sketch, the darts (2) plainly show their course across the sail +diverted from their straight source, and behind the bulging sail the air +does not press against the sail, but tries to continue in a straight +line. As a result a partial vacuum is formed along the region designated +by E, and this produces a most effective pull, since the sail constantly +tries to move forward and fill this vacuum. Is this made clear to you?"</p> + +<p>"I can plainly see now what the action of the air is, but does the air +push just as hard against each square foot when it is at an angle as +when it is blowing against it straight?"</p> + +<p>"That is a good observation, and one that might ordinarily be +overlooked. No, it does not, but the difference can be readily +calculated."</p> + +<p>"Then supposing the sail to be 10 feet square, and the wind is blowing +against it straight, as in the first sketch, at the rate of twenty miles +an hour; what pressure would there be against the entire sail?"</p> + +<p>"At that speed of wind the pressure on each square foot of surface is 2 +pounds, and this multiplied by 100 equals 200 pounds."</p> + +<p>"When it is at forty-five degrees, what is the pressure on each square +foot?"</p> + +<p>"This is determined in the following manner: Square the speed of the +wind, which means multiplying 20 by 20, and this produces the square, +400. In mathematics, as in many of the sciences, a constant is employed. +A constant is a figure which never varies. In this case the constant is +designated by the decimal .005. That means 5/1000th, or reduced to its +lowest denomination, 1/200th. If, now, we divide 400 by 1/200, the +result will be 2 pounds. This figure thus represents the pressure of air +on each square foot of surface, which, multiplied by the sail area, 100 +square feet, makes 200 pounds."</p> + +<p>"If that is the push when it is normal, what will it be at 45 degrees?"</p> + +<p>"Each angle of incidence has its own figure, or coefficient, or for your +better understanding, value, and the value at 45 degrees is .666. So +that by multiplying 200 by this value, we get a total pressure of 133.2 +pounds."</p> + +<p>"These figures are used a great deal in flying machines; are they not?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and that is a subject which we might pursue, but there are some +things right ahead that may for the present interest us more."</p> + +<p>Through the haze which had now settled down, a faint outline of land was +made out in the distance. The course was altered to the northeast, and +after a quarter-hour sail, land was again espied ahead, so that to avoid +the shore the course was taken due north. This was evidence that the +land projected northwardly, and the Professor suggested that the effort +should be made to chart as accurately as possible the shore line. This +could be done mentally.</p> + +<p>"I had forgotten to take any note," said Harry. "What is the proper +thing to observe in making these calculations?"</p> + +<p>"Two things must always be uppermost in the mind of the explorer on the +sea: First the time, and second the speed. Time can always be accurately +determined, but the question of speed can come by experience only. A +good sailor can very accurately determine speed by an examination of the +passing water, where the sea is comparatively calm. I have known where +the distances have been thus estimated within a hundred feet in each +mile in a ten-mile course, and where the speeds were varied along the +route. Then, a good observer must have the gift of direction. If he has +sailed one hour at a certain speed in a given direction his mental chart +may be of the greatest service to him. In our case it would be +invaluable. It is a quality well worth our effort to acquire."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>A TERRIBLE VOYAGE AND THE SHIPWRECK</h3> + + +<p>The shadows of night were now upon them. How vividly it recalled to +their minds the horrors of the five days and nights during which they +were tossed about in the little lifeboat a year before. Then they were +helpless, and now strong. At that time everything was dark and gloomy, +without a ray of hope. Contrast the situation at this time.</p> + +<p>What a gratification it must have been to look back during the past +twelve months and mentally calculate what they had accomplished. They +had delved in many of the hidden mysteries of nature and learned the +secrets. Such knowledge had been put to use. They had discovered many +things that gave them pleasure, but in doing so found others that +startled and grieved them. Things inexplainable and impossible to fathom +had crossed their paths on almost every side.</p> + +<p>But they were now doing the work of men. The Professor knew how they had +developed, and grown brave and strong. He knew it better than the boys +could realize themselves. What a source of pleasure it must have been to +the kindly faced, gray-haired Professor, as he looked at his charges in +admiration and love. Could anything be more inspiring than the +contemplation of the work he had done?</p> + +<p>And now the inevitable charting board was brought out, and the plan +adopted which would enable them to trace the coast line. It was +explained that all sailing was by the points of the compass, and for +this purpose the compass was made to correspond with the regulation +instrument. This is shown in Fig. 23.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig23" id="fig23"></a> +<img src="images/fig23.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 23. <span class="smcap">Mariner's Compass</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>The four cardinal points are north, south, east and west. Exactly midway +between each of the four points are the divisions designated northeast, +southeast, southwest and northwest. Then, again, intermediate, the last +divisions and the cardinal points are other markings which show that the +angles are nearer one of the cardinal points than the other, so that a +course may be marked off, by the compass, which, if followed for a +certain time, and the speed of that period determined, can be traced and +thus marked out on paper so that the outline of the coast can thereby be +laid out.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig24" id="fig24"></a> +<img src="images/fig24.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>The Northern Shore OF WONDER ISLAND. Chart showing Voyage in "No. 3." Fig. 24.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>The Professor had the charting board before him. "I have marked our +starting point, which is designated as A. It will be remembered that we +marked a course due west, passing the headland three miles from Cataract +River. This is line 1. When we saw the land ahead of us last night, we +changed our course by the compass to northwest, thus making a new line +of travel, which you see is designated as 2. B was the point where the +turn was made."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig25" id="fig25"></a> +<img src="images/fig25.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 25. <span class="smcap">The Charting Board</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"But in what manner did you know how to transfer it to the board?"</p> + +<p>"The board has two lines crossing each other at right angles to +correspond with the two lines on the compass. The compass was put on the +middle of the board, and the upper board turned so that the needle was +on a line with the N——S line."</p> + +<p>The boys now noticed for the first time that there were two boards, one +above the other, and that the lower one was a little larger, and was +attached to the boat. "Why do you have the lower board attached to the +boat and larger than the upper one?"</p> + +<p>"The lower board has on it a section of the compass, and the upper end a +pointer, as you notice, and the line T represents the boat's direction, +so that when the compass was placed on the upper board, the latter was +turned so that it corresponded with the points of the compass. The +little pointer then accurately pointed to northwest, on the lower board, +and by this means the changing of the upper board, so as to keep it due +east and west at all times, will enable us to keep on our course."</p> + +<p>It was a long and weary night. One of them slept while the others were +on duty. The boys knew the time on shipboard, where the day begins at +midnight, and is divided into watches of four hours each, thus making +three watches for the night and three for the day. A bell is struck +every half hour, so that each watch is noted by the eight strokes of the +bell. What is called the dog-watches occur between 4 and 8 <span class="smcap">p. +m.</span>, this period being divided in the first dog-watch between 4 and +6, and the second dog-watch between 6 and 8.</p> + +<p>"Why should such peculiar times be taken, or the periods be divided up +in that way?"</p> + +<p>"For the very reason that we discussed the arranging of our time of +watch last night; namely, so that one person would not have the same +watch every night. It was agreed by us that one should have three hours' +uninterrupted sleep, while the others were on duty, so that each would +in turn get three hours' work. Our arrangements are somewhat different +from shipboard time, on account of our number, but the principle is the +same."</p> + +<p>During the night the wind changed to the north, so that progress was +slow and required considerable tacking, and when the Professor came on +duty he found the course still to the north, and on questioning Harry, +found that the wind had been rather regular during his watch. Within a +half hour of the time he took charge the western shore faded away, and +the course was directed to NWW, in which direction they continued until +well along in the forenoon. Then, as the land receded again, another +tack was made, WbS, which means West by South.</p> + +<p>The winds, however, were perverse during the second day. After a calm +the wind veered to the west, and when in the afternoon the course was +changed to SSW they had to sail close to the wind, and made slow +progress.</p> + +<p>Let us see what they found on the day's journey along the northern point +which they rounded the second day of the journey. Cliffs, like their +own, were distinctly visible in the evening and during the morning of +the second day, but when morning broke on the third day they saw a +beautiful shore line, and beyond the mountain range which was seen by +them on their land trip to West River. It was now certain that the mouth +of that river had been passed during the night and all regretted this.</p> + +<p>During the whole of the third day they were forced to sail in the teeth +of the wind, which necessitated frequent tacking. Not a sign of human +habitation was seen on this day, but during the night, when the boys +were on duty, they declared that they had seen lights to the south. The +interest was most intense. Were they really rounding the island?</p> + +<p>The course for the opening morning of the fourth day was SWbW, and early +in the day they were not more than a mile from the shore, and then the +shore gradually receded, but the course was not changed. The wind began +to blow with greater force, and came from the southwest. As night +approached it increased, but they continued tacking, hoping that they +might reach the western extremity, and thus be able to run to the east +before the wind.</p> + +<p>Before eight o'clock lights were distinctly visible. They had reached +the vicinity of human habitations. The boys were too excited to think of +the watches which had thus far been observed. Aside from that, the wind +had now reached such a violent stage that it was impossible to make any +headway against it.</p> + +<p>A consultation was had. "We must either turn to the north or go to +shore. I fear this sudden change in the direction of the wind," was the +Professor's opinion of the situation. It would not be wise to risk the +shore. All knew that and sadly they turned the craft to the north. It +was well that they did so. Every moment, it seemed, some new impetus +would be given the wind. It howled on every side of them; the waves +drifted across the little ship, until everything was dripping with +moisture, and the only dry spot was within the little housed enclosure +which had been well protected on the open rear side, thanks to the +watchful suggestions of the Professor.</p> + +<p>To add to their discomfort of mind, the land was not in sight. There was +nothing to steer by except the compass and the chart which had been laid +out. They were now going north over the course that had been traversed +for the past two days—the west coast of the island.</p> + +<p>It was a long, long night. No one slept, because fear and anxiety was +ever with them. They remembered now with vividness the days spent on the +ocean when they were wrecked. It was a terrible succession of hours, +with the wind and the lightning and the rain one continuous orgy. The +Professor sat at the tiller. The sails had been taken down long before. +The impact of the driving storm against the housed structure was +sufficient to drive it forward, so that the vessel could be guided.</p> + +<p>It seemed that every blow against the boat would wrench it to atoms, but +if any part had given way it was not apparent. Harry, who sat nearest +the housed structure, suddenly sprang up, and pointing down, cried out: +"It is leaking; look how it boils!" It was forethought on the part of +the Professor to put in a supply of the oakum used for caulking +purposes. Harry sprang for it, and George grasped the bailing pan. After +a struggle a sufficient amount was driven into interstices to keep out +at least a portion of the seepage. This knowledge was most oppressive. +When a boat of this kind once springs a leak, due to a severe wrench of +the shell itself, it is a difficult matter to remedy it, without +structurally strengthening it.</p> + +<p>Morning was now appearing, and still no land appeared in sight. More +leaks appeared, and the boys were now constantly bailing and repairing. +The Professor had held the tiller for more than six hours, but he did +not appear to be exhausted. At every attempt of the boys to relieve him, +he only said that they had more important work in bailing and caulking.</p> + +<p>He finally changed the course due east, and it was more by luck than +exact calculation that they made out the northern end of the island +which was passed the first night out. In one night they had traveled a +distance coming back that required two days and nights to traverse in +the other direction. As it was they were headed for the cliffs at the +point of land, and it must be avoided.</p> + +<p>Harry saw the danger, and went back to consult the Professor. He had the +tiller firmly in his grasp, and his body bent over it to keep it steady; +but when Harry reached him, and touched him, there was no response. +Almost frantic, he cried to George: "Come here, quickly; something is +the matter!"</p> + +<p>George was there in an instant, and caught up the Professor, while Harry +grasped the tiller, as it was released, and turned it to starboard. The +little boat responded, but Harry knew that if turned too far, the wind +might catch it on the beam and crush it to atoms.</p> + +<p>The Professor had fainted, and when George finally revived him, he +looked about, and seeing Harry at the tiller, told him that he must turn +to the left to avoid the cliffs, and when he was advised of what had +bean done, he grasped Harry's hand, and commended him for the knowledge +and foresight which had been exhibited in that trying moment.</p> + +<p>The cliffs were ahead and to the right. The crucial time must come +within the next half hour. The point must not only be cleared, but they +must pass it at a distance beyond the influence of the powerful swells +and waves, which are always present at points situated like this. The +storm was from the west, and the promontory pointed to the north. Under +the circumstances, the sea at the end of the land was a raging +maelstrom, and the counter influence of the raging waves, beyond the +point, offered as great a danger as at its extremity.</p> + +<p>And now the leaks appeared at every side. Despair almost overtook Harry, +and he moved from one point to the next with the oakum and the caulking +tool. The Professor had insisted on again taking the helm. He had been +refreshed by the few moments' relaxation. Slowly he moved over to the +tiller. Would he ever make it? The boys stopped their work, fascinated +with the nerve-racking intensity of it. They knew the point had been +passed. The Professor smiled, and held up his hand as a signal, and the +boys rushed to him and actually cried, as he put his arms about them.</p> + +<p>It must not be imagined that they were out of their peril now. Nearly a +foot of water was in the bottom. The storm was, in a measure, blanketed +by the cliffs, and there was now no alternative but to reach the shore. +It was fortunate that they were on the lee side of the land, but even +there the waves rolled up on the shore, and the Professor knew that any +landing which might be made would be hazardous in the extreme.</p> + +<p>The vessel was approaching a shelving beach. Fortunately, from what +could be distinguished of its character, it was not a broken or rocky +shore.</p> + +<p>"Boys, can you put up the mainsail?" The Professor's voice had a +wonderful ring to it, for one so nearly exhausted. Without waiting to +question they sprang to the halliards and drew it up, while the boat in +the meantime was turned to port to ease the operation.</p> + +<p>The boys looked on in wonder as the tiller was turned and, when the boat +had gained headway, was pointed to the shore. It fairly darted through +the surf and the billows which marked the shore line, but before the +boat touched the beach, the Professor motioned them to come back. "Now +hold fast, when we strike."</p> + +<p>In another instant they seemed to be lifted by a giant wave, and as it +receded the boat, impelled forwardly by the sail, struck the sand of the +beach the moment after the tiller had been brought hard to port. The +result was that the boat was now spun around with its stern toward the +oncoming wind, but the impact was so great that the entire left side of +the little ship was crushed like an egg shell.</p> + +<p>"Release the boom, quickly!"</p> + +<p>When that had been done the wrecked vessel was still, and the Professor +was lifted out of the boat, but he stood there grasping the side, too +stiff to move, but with that same smile on his countenance which had +told the boys on so many occasions before, how gratified he was at their +safety.</p> + +<p>Poor Angel was actually a wreck. He had remained within the housed +enclosure ever since the storm began. When the rocking and tossing of +the boat ceased, and he heard nothing but the beating wind, he could not +understand what had happened.</p> + +<p>All had forgotten the little animal. George was the first to go to his +rescue, and found him crouching in the extreme end of the enclosure. +After some coaxing he moved toward George, and when he was led out and +saw about him on one side the raging waves and on the other side the +land, his chatter turned to a chuckle, and he leaped to the land, +shambled up the bank, and catching the limb of the nearest tree, was +soon in its top, as happy as though ocean storms were unknown.</p> + +<p>Meals had been forgotten since the day before. The boat was so high up +on the beach that they had no fears for the waves. Hunger asserted +itself now, and the moment the stove was brought out, Angel was down in +a moment, came over to George, and looked up inquiringly into his face. +It was such a comical situation, coming so close upon the heels of their +great catastrophe, that he could not help laughing. He knew what that +look meant, and Angel had more than the usual share of sugar. That with +the nuts, of which there was always an abundant supply, was a feast for +the little fellow.</p> + +<p>After the meal a careful examination was made of the boat. The entire +left side, from the bow to a third of the way back from the midship +bulge, was broken to atoms. The inside of the boat was filled with sand +which had been driven in when the impact took place. To repair it would +be impossible without suitable lumber, to say nothing of tools. They sat +down, not with a feeling of despair, so that they might the better form +a judgment as to the wisest course to pursue.</p> + +<p>"What interests me most," said George, "is to know where we are. Do you +think we are anywhere near West River?"</p> + +<p>The Professor sat there musing, but did not answer. Harry ventured the +opinion that they must be far east of the mouth of that river.</p> + +<p>Finally the Professor gave his views: "It is simply impossible for us to +speculate on the course of the river, because we were unfortunate enough +to pass it by in the night. It seems to me more probable, however, that +it finds its way to the sea to the east of the point we came around."</p> + +<p>"What reason have you for thinking so?"</p> + +<p>"Simply because the mountains were not, apparently, far inland, and it +seems to me that the promontory is merely an extension of the mountains +or the high ridge we saw."</p> + +<p>"I would certainly feel more comfortable," continued George "if I knew +we were anywhere near the river."</p> + +<p>But some decision must be made, and that without delay. If they were +near West River the distance home was fully seventy-five miles. +Preparations must be made for the trip on foot. The boat was, probably, +in as safe a condition as it could be higher up, nevertheless it was +concluded to take no chances, and all the provisions were removed, and +by means of levers and blocks, it was carried inland fully thirty feet +farther. A good supply of provisions was then taken, the guns and +ammunition removed, and put in separate piles, and arranged in +convenient packages for easy transportation.</p> + +<p>The residue was carefully stored within the housed enclosure, and +carefully covered over. What grieved them most was the bedding, which +must be left, but the Professor insisted that all the articles of ramie, +which would afford some covering, should be taken along. They would now +be compelled to sleep in the open air, with nothing else to cover them.</p> + +<p>With a last look at their ship, they moved toward the east with heavy +hearts.</p> + +<p>Harry stopped before they had gone far. "It occurs to me that we ought +to put some inscription on the boat. If any of our friends should +discover the boat it might guide them to us."</p> + +<p>"That is a capital idea," answered the Professor; and they returned to +put up the proper notice.</p> + +<p>It was past noon, but they hoped to cover at least ten miles before +evening should set in, but the way was rough and broken. "I think," +mused the Professor, as they halted on the journey, "we made a mistake +in not following the seashore. The only reason that prompted me to take +this course was the appearance of the shore to the east of our landing +place. It looked so uninviting that I felt sure we should find traveling +inland more comfortable."</p> + +<p>During the first five miles of the journey the ascent was gradual, but +not steep, at any place, but now the land gradually showed a change in +character, growing smoother and more open, and they knew the grade had +changed and was taking them down to a lower level.</p> + +<p>Before evening came, emerging from a light wood, great was the delight +at seeing a beautiful river before them. It was a broad stream, and they +divined that it must be the West River, which, they had so longed to +reach.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>THE RETURN TRIP. THE ORANG-OUTAN</h3> + + +<p>Here they were on the banks of a broad stream, tired and hungry. The +experiences which they had gone through made the task of seeking +suitable shelter an easy one. An entire month of preparation had been +wasted. Aside from the lights which were seen on the fourth day on the +western shore, they had no more knowledge than when they started. It +seemed to be very discouraging.</p> + +<p>But they were going home. This was the most comforting thought and it +made up for a great deal of the disappointments. There was real grief at +the loss of the boat. True, it could be recovered, but all this meant +time and hard work. It should be said, however, that at no time had +either of the boys ever found fault with the tasks that were allotted to +them.</p> + +<p>In this fact the Professor found much comfort. It was a strong factor, +as he knew, in the lives of the boys. It required the highest sort of +courage to bear misfortune without complaining.</p> + +<p>The camp for the night was soon made, and after a hearty meal all +retired for the night. Early in the morning the boys were at work, as +soon as the morning meal was finished, constructing a raft of sufficient +size to carry them across, and when the timbers had been securely lashed +and all their luggage placed aboard, the poles and primitive paddles +gave them a trying half hour to make the trip.</p> + +<p>The stream was rather wide at this point, and it was believed to be near +the sea, and the suggestion was made to follow the stream down for an +hour, to ascertain whether the ocean would appear in view, and if not, +to take up the trail for the east.</p> + +<p>In less than a half hour the sea was in sight. The course was then +directed east, but after traveling the entire forenoon through the most +difficult paths, it was decided to change the course to the south.</p> + +<p>"If you recall, we took a more southerly course when we left the West +River on our overland trip, and found much better traveling."</p> + +<p>The Professor's words recalled the incident, and the result was a change +to the southeast. This was now the sixth day after leaving home in the +No. 3. During the day at least twenty miles was made. Shortly before +night, George, who was in the lead, stopped, and then moved forward, +gazing at the ground intently.</p> + +<p>Harry saw the movement and was at his side in an instant. "What is it?" +It was not necessary to continue his inquiry. Directly ahead was a +slightly cleared space, with a blackened space in the center, where a +fire undoubtedly had been made, and a few bones were still scattered +about as mute evidences of occupation.</p> + +<p>The Professor looked at it a moment, and then smiled. "Don't you +remember our own camp fire?" This was the case. While they could not +remember the particular spot, they knew the old trail had been crossed, +and it was a comfortable, homelike feeling to come across the spot.</p> + +<p>"Let us camp here again," said Harry, as he threw down his pack. On this +occasion they did not have the wagon and the yaks, but they had an ample +supply of food and there was no difficulty in making a fire.</p> + +<p>Their first adventure came about noon of the seventh day. Plenty of +evidences of animals had been found, but they were not eager to hunt. +The trail for home had far more fascination than all the animals on the +island. It was the custom to stop at intervals for rest. During one of +these stops the cracking of bushes was heard, as though produced by a +cautious tread. The boys were alert at once and, with their guns in +hand, moved in the direction of the noises.</p> + +<p>Not two hundred feet away was an immense bear, of the same species they +had shot near that place nine months before. The boys separated, as they +approached, under the guiding direction of the Professor, and when +within seventy-five feet, Harry asked whether or not he should shoot.</p> + +<p>Bruin was slowly moving away, not directly ahead, but as though crossing +Harry's path. When the word was given, Harry took deliberate aim. George +reserved his shot, as advised. The moment the shot struck, the animal +turned, thus exposing a fair mark for George, who now fired. With a howl +at the second shot, the bear turned toward George, who immediately ran +to the right, and on the call of the Professor, circled to the right.</p> + +<p>This brought the animal within range of the Professor's gun, and he +fired. It did not in the least check his pursuit of George, and the +Professor now became alarmed at his safety. Call after call was made to +advise him to turn to the right.</p> + +<p>Harry followed as fast as he could run, and while keeping the animal in +sight, could not approach closely enough to get another shot. While +running, it occurred to him that he had not reloaded, and it would be +impossible to reload while running.</p> + +<p>The Professor realized the situation, and immediately reloaded, and +calling after Harry, told him that he had a charged weapon. Harry heard, +but he was so excited and fearful for George that he could not decide +whether to stop or go on. He could see the bear, but George was not in +sight.</p> + +<p>The Professor followed as rapidly as he could. Harry saw the bear +lumberingly cross a large fallen tree and pass on to the right, and +thinking George had taken that course, did not wait to go up to the +tree. Before the Professor reached Harry, who was now running at right +angles to the course of the Professor, George emerged from his place of +concealment behind the tree and laughed at the sport, which might have +had serious results but for the dead tree.</p> + +<p>You may be sure no further effort was made to follow up the bear, and +they took up the search for their luggage, which had been left behind. +During all this hubbub, Angel had been left with the luggage, and he now +appeared along the trees, swinging from branch to branch, uttering the +most fearful shrieks and chattering, as he was in the habit of doing +when alarmed or excited.</p> + +<p>"Something is after Angel; quick!" called out George, as Angel made his +way over to him. Harry grasped the loaded gun from the Professor and +started toward the direction from which the orang had come, but he +stopped suddenly after going several hundred feet.</p> + +<p>"The bear has our things." The Professor and George came up, and there, +with his powerful claws and massive jaws, was Bruin, devouring their +best morsels and playing havoc with the packages that were piled +together.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at the Professor, and he playfully answered the look by +saying, "We really don't want any bear meat to-day, do we?" George +thought it was a good joke on the hunters, but Harry was angered. "Let +us finish him. See him break that gun?"</p> + +<p>The Professor was busy reloading Harry's gun, which he had exchanged +with him, and handed it to George. They approached, but not close enough +to venture a shot, when the animal deliberately turned away and darted +into the bush.</p> + +<p>What was left of their luggage worth taking could easily be carried by +either of them. Practically all of the food was gone or ruined, and the +bear was recompensed for the little inconvenience by the two pounds or +more of sugar which was taken.</p> + +<p>"Well, boys, everything has its compensations. We have nothing to carry, +and traveling will be easy for the rest of the trip. Let us take a good +laugh over the experience."</p> + +<p>Harry was too much annoyed, first at the failure to hit the brute and +then at the mean trick in eating up and destroying their things while +they were trying to follow him. The Professor suggested that it would be +fun to visit Bruin's house that night when he came home and told his +family what a neat trick he had played on some hunters, and Harry +laughed, but it was an awfully forced effort.</p> + +<p>When evening came they estimated that the distance still to be traveled +could not exceed thirty-five miles, and they were seeking a good spot +for the camp. The Professor was the first to make his appearance with a +small yellow pear, which he held up.</p> + +<p>"What have you found now?" George inquired, as he came running forward +with a branch in his hand.</p> + +<p>"Pears!" exclaimed Harry, as he took it from the Professor's hand.</p> + +<p>"Not exactly a pear; but a fine fruit which we can use to good +advantage. It is the guava."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig26" id="fig26"></a> +<img src="images/fig26.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 26. Guava.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"What a beautiful white flower! I did not know that the guava had such a +delightful odor. In what way is it prepared and used?"</p> + +<p>"You will see, by tasting it that the pulp is very aromatic and sweet. +Its principal use is for jellies and preserves, and the rind stewed with +milk makes an excellent marmalade."</p> + +<p>"Have you found many of them?"</p> + +<p>"There are several trees over there, and it seems to me that it is a +good place to put up for the night, and we can gather a quantity of +them."</p> + +<p>Several trees were in sight, about 18 feet high, beautiful branching +specimens, and beneath one of them the camp was made for the night.</p> + +<p>While they were seated the Professor noticed the branch which George had +brought. It was a stem about two feet long, with a lot of leaves on each +side, and at the juncture of the leaves with the stem were rows of what +appeared to be nuts. These were in the form of clusters.</p> + +<p>He picked it up. "I thought I had made a good find in the guava, but +this is still better."</p> + +<p>"The nuts around the stem are what attracted me, and my curiosity was +aroused."</p> + +<p>"You took this from the coffee tree."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig27" id="fig27"></a> +<img src="images/fig27.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 27. Coffee.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"Is it the real coffee?"</p> + +<p>"It is the genuine article. I have searched for it from time to time. +Let us go over and see the tree. We must cultivate its acquaintance."</p> + +<p>They responded with alacrity. They were now going to have coffee. The +tree was fully twenty feet high, and the branches extended out +horizontally from all sides.</p> + +<p>"Earlier in the season these nuts, as George called them, looked like +cherries."</p> + +<p>"But where is the coffee?"</p> + +<p>"Inside the berry. Each berry contains two seeds. You know how the +coffee berry looks. Let us open one of them. See, it is smaller than the +ordinary berries, as you know them, but the kind we know are cultivated, +which makes them larger, and fuller in appearance. These will make fine +coffee, however, and I think we shall have to divide our load with the +guavas."</p> + +<p>"Where did coffee originally come from? Is it found in many places +throughout the world?"</p> + +<p>"The plant is supposed to be a native of Arabia in Asia, and of +Abyssinia, in Africa. From Arabia it was carried to most of the tropical +countries, but many varieties have been found in the western hemisphere. +Even in Canada certain kinds of coffee plants are known. It is not, +therefore, a wholly tropical plant. The Abyssinian coffee has been known +from the earliest times."</p> + +<p>"What is regarded as the best kind of coffee?"</p> + +<p>"The best coffee of commerce is the Mocha, and next comes Java, and the +principal coffee center of the world is Brazil."</p> + +<p>On the morning of the eighth day they were awake early, and the boys +began work on the berries. Angel took a hand in the proceedings, and as +soon as he discovered what the boys were after he volunteered to harvest +them. At this time the berries had somewhat hardened, and when Angel +knew what was wanted, his long dextrous fingers were able to strip off +more of the fruit in one stroke than the four hands of the boys. Harry +was on the lower limb, and as fast as he had stripped a supply, would +drop them into the outstretched cloth which the Professor and George +held.</p> + +<p>Angel eyed this proceeding, for a time, and then imitated Harry. How did +he ever learn the art of picking coffee berries? The orang lives +principally on nuts and berries, and the instinct to gather these was a +natural one.</p> + +<p>In an incredible short space of time fully a bushel had been taken off. +It was the original idea of the boys to cut off the limbs, but they had +seen none of the trees before this, and the Professor advised them to +pick the fruit itself. Without Angel's expert help it would have been a +long job.</p> + +<p>With a load of guavas and another of coffee, the five guns, and a few of +the other relics of their ill-fated expedition, was sufficient for the +two days' journey still before them. That afternoon, while resting by +the side of a little stream that flowed to the north, the antics of +Angel attracted attention. He was usually so quiet that no notice was +taken of him.</p> + +<p>He had two peculiar ways of making himself understood. One was a +gurgling sound, which indicated pleasure and contentment; and the other +a chatter, or half a shriek, when intensely excited or alarmed. But now +he did neither of these things. The sounds emitted could not well he +described.</p> + +<p>The sounds were made while springing from branch to branch. When he had +attracted George's attention he ran forward, usually along the branches, +but close to the ground. George followed. Whenever he attempted to go +back to his comrades, Angel would come back, and in his most beseeching +way endeavor to induce George to follow. His actions were well +understood in this respect, because it will be remembered that he +directed the attention to the missing team, and afterwards rediscovered +the trail after it had been lost.</p> + +<p>"Follow him, George, and we will bring the packages," was Harry's +suggestion.</p> + +<p>It was not necessary for them to go far. Beyond, in some large trees, +were three immense orang-outans, intently gazing on the newcomer. George +ran back, crying out: "See the orang-outans in the trees! Isn't this the +place we captured Angel?"</p> + +<p>Harry threw down the load and was by the side of George without a +moment's delay. "Where is Angel? I am afraid this is the last of the +little fellow." And Harry showed his grief. They saw Angel on his way to +the trees, and without waiting for an invitation, was up among the +branches, visiting his friends, and, probably, his parents.</p> + +<p>All stood there awaiting the results breathlessly. Not a word was +spoken. Without hesitation he swung himself to the last limb, on which +the patriarch perched. Not a hand was lifted against him, but they +looked too astonished to speak, even if they could.</p> + +<p>Angel went from one to the other. He petted them, as George had often +petted him. He knew what a caress meant, but his kin did not. It was too +much for George. "Come down, Angel; good boy; come down." And he said it +pathetically, too.</p> + +<p>Not a hand was held out to him, nor did he get any sort of welcome, and +yet he had expected so much, from what he tried to tell George, while on +the way to his old home. It was too much for him. He heard that familiar +voice, and the call that was always a welcome one, and he slowly +descended the tree, not with that springy motion which characterized his +ascent, but hesitatingly and in measured swings.</p> + +<p>He went up to George and leaned against him, and then they knew that +Angel intended to go home with them again. But they could not help +watching the effect of Angel's actions on the animals in the trees. +Ordinarily, they will quickly spring away from any intruders, as they do +not generally consider the trees high enough to give protection. Their +remarkable agility enables them to travel faster by the tree line than +man can follow on foot.</p> + +<p>But now that Angel was again with the boys, all sense of fear seemed to +leave the three creatures in the trees. They looked down at the +proceedings, and as the boys passed by they sat in their specially +prepared seats, as though they knew the care which had been bestowed on +their offspring.</p> + +<p>This little incident affected all more than it is possible to tell. The +animal was really a marvelous character. True, George had spent hours +and days in his education. He knew many of the words, and could execute +missions, and did many things to aid George in the work at home, and it +would have been a trial and a sorrow to miss him.</p> + +<p>The next day would see them home again, and they could hardly restrain +themselves at the thought of it. What if some one should have visited +them while absent? Why might not the savages have found their abode? +These were questions ever uppermost in the minds of all.</p> + +<p>Before noon they reached the Cataract River to the west of the forest. +This seemed like an old friend. And what was more: before they had gone +many miles, the Professor pointed to a clearing, and remarked: "Do you +remember this place?"</p> + +<p>The boys looked about, as they moved forward. "I do not recollect the +place," was George's answer, but Harry now recalled the fight of the +bears, and the honey tree, and without saying a word he ran to the tree, +which was still lying there, and said one word, "Honey."</p> + +<p>George now remembered, and Angel began to gurgle.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>THE STRANGE VISITOR</h3> + + +<p>In the afternoon of the ninth day, emerging from the forests, the first +sight that met their eyes was the flag floating from the top of +Observation Hill. Never before had the flag looked so glorious, and they +could not repress a shout and a cheer. The distance home was at least +four miles, but tired as they were, no one felt like stopping for a +rest.</p> + +<p>Everything at the home seemed quiet and peaceful. The cattle were there, +lazily scattered about, apparently not knowing or caring whether their +masters were absent. The boys were moving along jauntily, happy as +larks, singing snatches of songs, and amusing the Professor with sallies +of wit and humor.</p> + +<p>Angel was just as happy and was enjoying the prospects of coming home. +Long before the home was neared he started off on a race, with George at +his heels. Burdened as he was, it was impossible to keep up with the +animal, so that the latter was at the house long before George came +near. He was surprised to see Angel bounding toward him with his +peculiar chattering that betokened excitement, and he stopped and +hesitated what to do.</p> + +<p>Depositing his load on the ground, he ran back, and signaled to the +others. Angel came up and tried to tell them in his peculiar way of some +danger ahead. Two hundred feet south of the house was a thick growth of +underbrush, and to that the party made its way.</p> + +<p>Arriving there, a consultation was had, on the course of procedure. +Nothing was, apparently, disturbed. No sign of human presence was +manifest. The door which opened to the main room, facing the west, was +closed, as well as the room of the workshop.</p> + +<p>"If anyone is about the premises he must be beyond the house, as it is +evident some signs would show in the house or shop. Prepare your guns +and let us go forward."</p> + +<p>The house was cautiously approached, and reached, and Harry quietly +gained the door, and the secret bolt opened. The door was slowly opened +and he peered in. It was unoccupied, and all rushed in. A small +trap-door on the northern side was now opened, which gave a view toward +the shop and cattle-yard.</p> + +<p>What they saw there startled them beyond measure, for seated on a log, +outside of the cattle-shed, was a man, with a straggling, unkempt beard, +vacantly gazing into space.</p> + +<p>"How shall we attract his attention?" asked Harry, breathlessly.</p> + +<p>"Let us rush out the front door. He is, apparently, alone."</p> + +<p>At the signal, with their guns ready, they filed out, and moved toward +him. He raised his eyes, and at first was a little startled, but again +relaxed, and seemed to take no particular notice of their approach. The +Professor walked toward him, and held out his hand. The stranger made no +motion or protest, either of fear or recognition, and as the Professor's +hand touched him, his hand was involuntarily extended.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus3" id="illus3"></a> +<img src="images/illus3.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>"The professor walked toward him and held out his hand"</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>Not a word was uttered by him. The Professor turned to the boys. "He is +demented, or has lost all knowledge of his condition or surroundings. +Poor fellow!"</p> + +<p>The Professor addressed him. He looked startled at the sound of a human +voice, and as the voices continued, began to look inquiringly at one and +then at the other. He was a man fully fifty years of age, strong, well +built, but somewhat emaciated. His eyes had no luster, the beard was +long and shaggy, and aside from the torn and almost unrecognizable +trousers, the only article of clothing was an equally dilapidated shirt.</p> + +<p>George grasped Harry, excitedly. "Where did he get that shirt? That is +the one we used as our first signal flag, and which we lost five months +ago." Such was indeed the case. The only thing in its torn and tattered +condition, which enabled him to recognize it were the initials of +George, which he had noticed.</p> + +<p>Thus was one of the mysteries explained. Despite every attempt at +conversation, not a word escaped his lips. The Professor took him by the +arm, and led him to the house. He entered and looked around not +particularly interested, but more in curiosity than otherwise.</p> + +<p>"What do you suppose he has been living on, and where has he been +staying?"</p> + +<p>At the suggestion of the Professor, some food was brought, and placed +before him. He gazed at it. A knife and fork were on the table. He +reached for them slowly, and when he had grasped both began to eat +ravenously. He finished without looking up, and when the last morsel was +eaten stared about, and a faint smile appeared, which was the first +facial change that had crossed his features since they met him.</p> + +<p>He was conducted to a reclining chair, and such articles of clothing as +they could find were brought out and laid before him. He gazed on them, +and slowly picked up one after the other. His feet were bare, and +appeared to have been scratched and torn, but they were hardened by +contact with the earth. An old pair of shoes, the ones discarded by the +Professor, when they turned out the first lot of shoes, was set before +him.</p> + +<p>He picked them up and mechanically put them on. "Now let us leave him +alone for a while." They went out, closing the door, and Harry stole +around to the small port which he had opened, and watched the stranger.</p> + +<p>His demeanor did not change after they left; he simply glanced about the +room. When his eyes fell on the table, he arose and cautiously +approached, and suddenly seized the table knife, with just a slight +change of countenance. This he attempted to secrete beneath his ragged +shirt.</p> + +<p>"Do you think he is dangerous?"</p> + +<p>"His malady is a peculiar one, and arises from various causes. I do not +think we need fear him."</p> + +<p>"But see how he took that knife."</p> + +<p>"That was simply an instinct; that of self-protection. Any other +implement would have been as acceptable as a knife. Possibly, the sight +of the knife, temporarily, may have brought back some glimmering +remembrance of his sane moments."</p> + +<p>"Do you think he is insane?"</p> + +<p>"No; it does not appear to be of such a character. He seems to exhibit +loss of memory. Imbecility, idiocy, and lunacy exhibit marked +tendencies, and have been made the careful study of many eminent men, +and it is even now one of the disorders least understood by the medical +fraternity."</p> + +<p>"What is a lunatic?"</p> + +<p>"Blackstone, the great English authority on law, defines it as 'one that +hath had understanding, but by grief, disease, or other accident hath +lost the use of his reason.' This eminent authority also stated that +lunatics may have frequent lucid intervals, and might enjoy the use of +their senses during certain periods of the moon. It is from that source +we are indebted to the still prevailing idea of the moon's influence on +the human mind. That view was exploded long ago, and shown to have no +foundation."</p> + +<p>"What is the difference between a lunatic and an insane person?"</p> + +<p>"The original term was lunatic, in accordance with Blackstone's +definition; but in medical science the terms insanity and mental +alienation have taken its place."</p> + +<p>"Doesn't he act peculiarly? He does not seem to know we are present. +What I cannot understand is, how he knows enough to get anything to +eat."</p> + +<p>"That is a peculiar thing in nature. Here is a man who has, outwardly, +the appearance of an intelligent being, incapable of talking, or +uttering intelligible sounds, with memory so submerged that he doesn't, +likely, recognize his own kind, and yet has been able to find food for +at least five months, to our knowledge. It shows that, irrespective of +mind, nature has implanted some kind of an instinct of preservation in +living beings. The subject is one that has been discussed from many +standpoints, and it can never be exhausted."</p> + +<p>The boys now went over the entire premises, carefully examining every +part. Evidences were plenty to show that the man had slept in the shed +adjoining the stable, and the shells of nuts as well as barley heads +were found around the place he had slept.</p> + +<p>There was everything to indicate that his trials and sufferings on the +island had deranged him. Probably his was a case like many instances +known, where consciousness of self—the absolute loss of memory, had +caused disappearances, and many instances have been recorded where +intelligence finally asserted itself and brought back former +recollections.</p> + +<p>The instinct to clothe himself was shown when they returned. The +Professor went up to him kindly and spoke. The words were repeated in +German and French, but not one word did he utter, nor did he give the +least visible sign of recognition.</p> + +<p>During the afternoon he wandered around from place to place. The boys +were too much fascinated to turn their attention to anything. George +started out for a trip to Observation Hill, accompanied, as usual, by +Angel. The strange man was passed on the way. Without a sign he +followed. George was a little frightened, but soon recovered, as he +walked along unconcernedly.</p> + +<p>They crawled up the steep ascent, instead of going around the gentler +ascent, and when the pole was reached, the stranger for the first time +took any interest in anything he saw. He looked up at the flag, and then +out over the sea, and as he did so, he put up his hand to shade his eyes +from the glare of the sun. This was the only human thing which was +noticed about him.</p> + +<p>When George left, he followed, walking erect, and he could not help +admiring his strong, although drawn, features, and the admirable build +of his frame. He would be an antagonist to fear as an enemy.</p> + +<p>On the return, George stated the occurrence, and the Professor said that +the man was no doubt used to the sea, as his walk betrayed that, and the +incident of shading his eyes is a common one to all seafaring men.</p> + +<p>But now came up the great question of the future course to be followed. +What should be done? The determination to again attempt further +explorations was fixed in the minds of all; but how should it be +conducted? Should they again brave the dangers of the sea, or make the +next trip by land?</p> + +<p>The only means available by sea would be the partially damaged boat, +which was seventy-five miles away, and plans were considered either to +bring it to the Cataract by boat, or to repair it where it lay; either +course had its disadvantages.</p> + +<p>One day the stranger wandered over to the workshop where Harry was +engaged. He had never been inquisitive, as nothing seemed to interest or +appeal to him. When he saw the machinery, the lathe, and, finally, the +electric battery, he stood still and gazed. Slowly he made his way to +the battery which had the terminal wires lying loose. He picked them up, +and brought the ends together, and the spark seemed to fascinate him. +The experiment was repeated several times, but the wires were soon +dropped, and he resumed his usual demeanor.</p> + +<p>Harry ran over to the laboratory, and informed the Professor, who came +at once, and arrived just as he was dropping the wires.</p> + +<p>"The best thing for him is something to do. In this way, the association +with tools, if he has any knowledge of them, may awaken some +recollections of his past. I have watched him for the past three days +and I am sure he is not deranged, in the sense of being demented. Let us +try what employment will do."</p> + +<p>Harry was engaged in dressing a board with a plane when the man came in. +The Professor led him to the bench and placed a plane in his hand, and +by making a motion with his hand and pushing the man's hand along with +the plane, he took notice of the motion and mechanically drew the plane +back and forth.</p> + +<p>He not only planed the board, but he followed up the roughened parts and +finished the job in a workmanlike manner. The saw was placed in his +hands, and he handled this with a facility that surprised both of them. +He did not look like a mechanic, but on the other hand had every +appearance of a literary man, but he was, unquestionably, used to tools.</p> + +<p>After considering the all-important question of the exploring +expedition, which subject was an ever present one, it was agreed that +the wisest course would be a trip by land. They now knew the location of +the inhabitants of the island, and with proper equipment, they ought to +be able properly to defend themselves. Another element which might prove +of value to them was the new acquisition in the man who had come so +unaccountably to their home.</p> + +<p>One of the first things necessary was to give him some name by which he +could be known, and which he would in time recognize. This was debated +over and over, without coming to any conclusion. Eventually, in the +absence of anything better, it was decided to call him simply John.</p> + +<p>When Harry went to the shop where he was at work, he addressed him as +John; and at the uttering of the word started, as though he had been +alarmed. Harry noticed it, and repeated the name several times, with the +same result, and he hastened to inform the Professor of this experience. +The Professor went down without delay, and it was evident from the +actions of the man that he recalled something familiar in the name, as +in every instance he would put his hands to his head and give an +inquiring look.</p> + +<p>"It is my impression that John is his name, as he would be more likely +to remember that than anything else connected with his life. Let us keep +him occupied, and his work may also be the means of bringing back +familiar things."</p> + +<p>The boys, in company with John, set about preparing a good bed for the +newcomer, and he took a part in it most heartily, and seemed to +understand when the Professor pointed to him and the bed that it was +intended for him.</p> + +<p>The interest was more intense when he was taken to the boathouse, which +Harry had opened, and when he saw the boats, his eyes opened wide and +grew brighter, but they suddenly lost their color and he relapsed into +his former state.</p> + +<p>It was truly pitiful to watch him, and when in the evening they sat +together and conversed, they felt that at times he must have gotten some +glimpses of his individuality.</p> + +<p>In the morning when George went out to the cattle pens to milk, he +mechanically grasped a pail and followed, and the milking operation +seemed to be a familiar one to him. Thus, he was a mystery, for the +reason that he seemed to be at home in every direction where it called +for any special activity. This was made the more mystifying when, during +the next day, he wandered over to the laboratory, and his eyes caught +sight of the skulls and the skeletons which were on exhibition.</p> + +<p>He walked over to the skulls, and picking up one poised it on his hand, +slowly turning it around, as though trying to discover what it meant. +The one selected had one side partially crushed, and this attracted his +attention. He placed the fingers of the other hand in the shattered +part, and seemed to realize that some agency must have caused it. The +whole deportment while examining it was that of one who was called upon +to make an examination of it for the purpose of determining the cause of +the injury.</p> + +<p>When he laid it down, he looked at the Professor, who quietly took up +the skull and pointed to the fracture, endeavoring by his conversation +to strike a word or keynote by which some recollection would be started; +but he was mute and soon again became listless.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>AN EXCITING TRIP TO THE FALLS</h3> + + +<p>The food supply was now the first thing to consider, as all necessaries +in the way of vegetables, as well as meats, had been exhausted when they +started on the last trip, and a new lot had to be laid in. The matter of +butter was always a hard problem to take care of, and George referred to +this difficulty, and before they sailed away the Professor told him +that, on their return, the first thing to do would be the construction +of a machine which would simplify the production of the butter.</p> + +<p>"As we are going to use more butter, I think it would be a good thing to +start in on our cream separator," said George, who, while he was not an +adept, like Harry, to devise the things required, was always ready to +suggest things that could be made to advantage.</p> + +<p>"I know that Harry will be very glad to set to work on that, so we might +as well commence," answered the Professor.</p> + +<p>"What is the principle of the separator that causes the cream to break +away from the milk?"</p> + +<p>"Centrifugal motion is employed to bring it about."</p> + +<p>"But how does that motion affect it?"</p> + +<p>"When you put a ball on an elastic and swing it about your head in a +circle, the elastic stretches in proportion to the speed at which you +swing it. You have probably seen it done. It is stretched in proportion +to its weight, also. These two things, therefore, are properties of +centrifugal motion. Cream is the fatty portion of the milk. It is +contained in little globules, and when the milk is allowed to stand, the +milk surrounding the globules, being heavier than the cream, forces its +way to the bottom, and the cream by that means goes to the top. The +inventor has taken advantage of this fact by making a machine which will +take the milk and impart to it a very high centrifugal motion, and in +doing so the milk particles, on account of their greater weight, force +their way outwardly and the cream inwardly. The machine is also so +arranged that the cream and milk are drawn from it at separate points, +and this operation is a continuous one."</p> + +<p>Harry quickly understood the machine from the drawing made for his +guidance, and in Figure 28 a sketch is made, showing how it was +constructed.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig28" id="fig28"></a> +<img src="images/fig28.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 28. Cream Separator.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>A frame was made which had a base (A) and two standards or uprights (B, +B), and between these uprights were a pair of horizontal bars (C, C). +These bars served as supports for a vertical tube (D), the tube being +journaled in the center of the cross bars, so that it extended above and +below the bars, and had a small pulley (E) between them.</p> + +<p>Below the lower cross bar the vertical tube has two radiating tubes (F, +F), closed at their outer ends, but communicating with the bore (G) of +the tube (D) by means of two orifices (H, H). The bore (G) extends down +to a point a little below the orifices (H, H), and a small tube (I) runs +through the tube D, within the tubes F, F, the ends of the tube being +open. A duct (J) centrally through the tubular piece (D) communicates +with the bore of the tube I. One each side of the tube D is a little +tube (K), which communicates with the inner end of each tube (F). A +receptacle (L) is attached to the tube D below each tube (K), to catch +the cream.</p> + +<p>The operation of the machine is as follows: When milk is poured into the +top of the tube D, and the latter is set to rotate at a high speed, it +passes down and out through the ducts (H, H), into the horizontal tubes +(F, F), with the result that the cream is prevented by the heavier milk +from reaching the outer open ends of the tube I. As a result, only the +milk passes inwardly through the inner tube, and is discharged +downwardly through the duct (J), whereas the cream passes out through +the small tubes (K).</p> + +<p>The quest for a supply of vegetables was now a part of the daily +occupation of some in the colony, as the garden had not yet advanced to +that stage where anything could be gotten from it. One morning John was +missing, and there was a great deal of speculation as to his +disappearance.</p> + +<p>Before noon he reappeared, carrying in his arms as large a quantity of +vegetables as he could carry. Harry was the first to see and welcome +him. He recognized beets and was delighted to find that John understood +what they were after. When the Professor was informed, he gave a hearty +welcome, and John seemed to recognize that his efforts were appreciated.</p> + +<p>"Ah! I see you have some onions," he said, as he beamed on him.</p> + +<p>"Onions!"</p> + +<p>"Yes; the wild onion, the progenitor of all the onions. One variety of +this is a species called chives, used as a salad, and is known +throughout Europe under that name."</p> + +<p>"But this beet is very small; is it also wild?"</p> + +<p>"There are four varieties of the beet. This is the most common of them +all, and grows in a wild state in many parts of the world. The +Mangelwurzel is a larger beet, and coarser, and is much used for cattle +feed. If you want to give your cows a treat, this would be the food to +give them. Then there is a kind called the chard, also a good variety. +If possible, we should try and get John to show us where he found them. +Undoubtedly it was along the sandy part of the island."</p> + +<p>The first real surprise manifested by John was when the yaks were +hitched up and he was invited to join them on a trip. His eyes seemed to +show some glimmer of intelligence when he slowly crawled up into the +wagon. Their course was directed toward the forest to the west, and the +trip there, which occupied nearly two hours, was a constant source of +pleasure to all.</p> + +<p>On the way the animals were stopped at intervals to allow the Professor +and George to collect specimens of plants and to seek for ores. And here +occurred the first real symptoms of returning consciousness on the part +of John. As the Professor was moving toward a hill, with a small pick, +he was seen to pick up one of the little hammers and follow.</p> + +<p>Without seeming to notice either of the party, he undertook to explore +on his own account, moving here and there along the hillside and +occasionally stopping to examine and chip off samples, which he +carefully laid down, but when this was done, entirely forgot to collect +them. The act of procuring the samples seemed to be the absorbing +element. He thus went on, never returning to the places where they were +deposited.</p> + +<p>"That action on his part shows a remarkable phase of his malady. Notice +how carefully he puts them down and how uniformly he forgets that he has +done so. The mind, in his condition, is so disordered that it cannot +reason with any degree of sequence. He recalls only one thing at a time; +but if I am not mistaken, he is a man of culture, and his every act +shows that he was a man of broad intellect. I hope we shall be able to +restore him to his normal condition."</p> + +<p>The guns had been taken along, as usual, in order to do some hunting, +and while the Professor and John were engaged in prospecting, the boys +were after game, in which they were more than ordinarily successful, the +bag for the first hour being a half dozen pheasants and several +squirrels.</p> + +<p>When the Professor returned to the wagon with several loads of samples +which the two had gathered, George insisted on penetrating the forest +still farther, their direction being toward the falls in South River. +Before long they came across the trail which had been taken by the yaks +when they made their flight some three months before. They were now not +to exceed two miles from the falls.</p> + +<p>Angel, who was with them, now began one of his peculiar chattering +exhibitions which betokened alarm, and the yaks exhibited a restless +disposition. Harry moved forward to ascertain the cause, and before he +had gone two hundred feet, saw the cause of the disturbance. It was one +of the largest bears which they had so far seen, standing alongside of a +large fallen tree and vigorously working his immense paws.</p> + +<p>He ran back to the party and gave the information, and the Professor +seized a gun, but John instinctively, as it were, grasped one of the +spears and darted forward in the direction Harry had taken. The bear +paid no attention to the party, and when the Professor came up, he said: +"How fortunate it is that we shall be under obligations to the bears for +our second treat of honey. I do not think we ought to attack him after +rendering us this service."</p> + +<p>John was restrained from going forward, and he cast a peculiar glance +toward the Professor. "If there is honey there," replied George, +eagerly, "let us drive him away, at any rate."</p> + +<p>But Bruin would not be driven away. He sprang down from the log, +growling and pacing back and forth. Occasionally he would leap back on +the log. It was plain, that he was after the honey and regarded it as +his special property.</p> + +<p>"Well, George, suppose you give him a shot as a reminder that we need +some of that honey?"</p> + +<p>He needed no urging, and taking a rest alongside a sapling, fired a shot +with one of the long guns. The shot was answered by a terrific growl, +which ended in a prolonged roar. Without waiting for another summons, he +made a line for George, who ran back. This was more than John could +stand, who now ran directly to the bear with his sole weapon, the spear.</p> + +<p>Neither of them could restrain him, but all sprang after him. It was a +challenge the bear sought, and John did not in the least check himself +until within ten feet of the animal, when, with a light spring to one +side, he directed the spear against the side of the bear as he passed in +his rush. While the spear entered the animal, it did not reach a vital +spot.</p> + +<p>Harry was about to fire, but the Professor held up a hand. "Have a care, +unless you are able to control yourself well. You are likely to hit +John." The bear turned, but John made no motion to avoid him, and again +the bear charged. This time John did not jump aside to exceed two feet, +and again plunged the spear forward, and as the bear's lumbering body +moved forward fully ten feet or more before he could bring himself to a +halt, they saw that the spear had broken off, and the terrific growl of +the animal showed how badly he had been wounded.</p> + +<p>John made no effort to escape, although he plainly saw the broken end of +the weapon, and the Professor, surprising as it may seem, did not +encourage a shot. The effect of the last stab was apparent, however, as +Bruin did not turn after the last attack, but, with an expiring growl, +sank down.</p> + +<p>He was a magnificent specimen. The Professor went up to John and held +out his hand in recognition of his wonderful feat, and he seemed to +realize the nature of the commendation bestowed on him.</p> + +<p>The work of skinning the animal was participated in by all. John seemed +to enjoy it, and by his actions showed that he was at home in this sort +of work. You may be sure that his actions throughout the day were such +as to give him a warm place in their hearts, and they recognized what a +valuable ally had come to them.</p> + +<p>The excitement made them forget the honey tree. They were recalled to +that by Angel. He had made his way there after the battle ended, and was +now in the seventh heaven of delight, and when George arrived to take +possession, Angel was covered with a mass of the delicious sweet and +fairly gorging himself.</p> + +<p>As no provision had been made for carrying the honey home, the boys +remembered the first attempt at conveying it, and after the skin had +been removed, it was taken to the hive, and it was a pleasure to all to +remove the comb and every part of the coveted treasure. A luncheon was +prepared, and for the first time in two months the use of their sugar +was dispensed with.</p> + +<p>"As we are so near the falls, why not go there, and possibly the sight +of it may recall something to John?"</p> + +<p>George and Harry looked at the Professor for an inkling of his reason +for the remark, but he appeared not to notice them.</p> + +<p>As the distance was not great, the course was directed along the very +trail that the runaway yaks had taken from the river some months before. +The moment the river was reached, John sprang from the wagon and made +his way to the shore and stood there gazing, and as his eyes turned to +the right and he saw the falls, he slowly turned to the Professor, as +though he was about to say something, but there the quest of his eyes +ended, and all recollection seemed to leave him.</p> + +<p>George could not restrain himself any longer. "Why did you make the +remark that it would be well to bring John here to see whether or not he +would be able to remember anything?"</p> + +<p>"I was anxious to see if he would recognize the stream, and possibly +recall the boat."</p> + +<p>"What boat?"</p> + +<p>"The boat we left here."</p> + +<p>"And do you think John took the boat?"</p> + +<p>"It is my opinion he took the boat, and then forgot it. During that +lapse it was washed down to the sea by the flood."</p> + +<p>"But how do you account for the oars and the rope which we found in it?"</p> + +<p>"He must have put them there."</p> + +<p>"Where do you suppose he got the oars and the rope?"</p> + +<p>"That is the peculiar part of the problem. The rope, if you will +remember, looked as though it was made by savages. At any rate, it was +not a regulation rope; but the oars were undoubtedly taken from the +<i>Investigator's</i> lifeboat."</p> + +<p>This was interesting news to the boys. It did seem probable, after all, +that John had something to do with the lifeboat as well as their own +boat.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>THE STORY OF THE CAVE</h3> + + +<p>An hour or more was spent on the shore of the river, passing along its +banks and investigating the proximity of the falls, but if there was a +glimmer of intelligence, John did not exhibit it. All realized this one +thing: that if his memory could be brought to its normal condition, he +would be able, undoubtedly, to reveal some of the mysteries they longed +to unravel. For all they knew, he might have been one of the crew of the +<i>Investigator</i>, but this, after all reflections, was out of the +question, because life on shipboard is rather intimate, and boys, above +all others, are most likely to remember faces.</p> + +<p>Neither had the slightest knowledge of ever having seen him, and it was +now felt that they must await the time when he would again regain his +consciousness by the orderly course of nature.</p> + +<p>While on the way home, George, who was seated by the Professor, mused +over the occurrences of the day. "It has always been a wonder to me to +know why it is that humanity must always be surrounded by a mystery of +some sort. It seems there is always something just beyond him, and he +must struggle and work to find it out. Why is it?"</p> + +<p>"You have asked the great question of the ages. It is an eternal +question. Why should man know everything? That would be omnipotence. If +you stop to consider, it will occur to you that the moment man knows +everything he ceases to be a man. All energy, all effort, and every +instinct in life fades away. The association of man with man would +cease. Take the simple act of one lady calling on another. Do you think +it is merely to look at her friend, or is it done to make some inquiry? +Every action in life has in it some desire to acquire something, to get +that which man did not possess before. The quest for the things of this +life become and are the great pleasures which man enjoys. It is not +their possession. Men pursue pleasure. That is a seeking after something +just as much as hunting for wealth."</p> + +<p>Returning to their home, the samples which the Professor and John had +gathered were carefully taken to the laboratory, and several of the +large copper receptacles cleaned for the honey. This was the part which +Angel enjoyed more than anything else. And here it may be remarked that, +when John was installed, Angel was a little shy with the stranger, but +gradually became accustomed to his presence. Somehow John could not +fully understand the creature, and often would be seen following his +motions; but within a week Angel would permit himself to be caressed +without objection, and he seemed to know that no harm could come from +the kindly faced man.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the mystery of their new friend, there could be but one +course to follow. They lived on the island and were a part of it. The +longing to know what the other side of the island contained was an +ever-constant inquiry. Something must be done to forward their efforts +in that direction.</p> + +<p>During the four weeks at home a good supply of provisions had been +gathered, and now the plans were made for an overland journey. The +wrecked boat was still near the mouth of West River. It would be a +week's trip to bring it home, and this was not considered advisable, +particularly as the monsoons were still blowing, with greater or less +violence and frequency.</p> + +<p>It may well be imagined that the boys had not forgotten the cave. It was +their constant talk by day and their dreams at night. It had a +fascination which was constantly drawing them in that direction, but, +singularly, they never entered it. But one day George suggested that +they make a search on their own account. Harry quickly assented, and +taking up the two lamps, together with their weapons, were soon at the +entrance.</p> + +<p>They cautiously went down the stone steps and directed their way to the +recess where the treasure was deposited. The skeletons had been buried +on a previous visit, so they did not have that grim recollection to +ponder over.</p> + +<p>What interested them most was the chamber to the east which had been +examined by the Professor, and to that they made their way. During the +first two hundred feet the direction was to the east, or nearly so, and +then the walls suddenly turned to the right, and here a sight met their +eyes which bewildered them.</p> + +<p>The chamber was a gorgeous one, not so large as the one in which the +pirates had their booty, but the calcareous hangings on the walls were +far superior and possessed greater decorative effect. From a point near +the center of the cavern, they turned and examined all sides, and to the +south was what appeared to be an outlet, and this was approached.</p> + +<p>They moved nearer with a silent tread, as though fearing the ghosts of +the past century would rise to receive them. They saw a recess, cut like +a room in the side of the walls, symmetrical in form, and fitted with +all the comforts and luxuries that humanity could wish, but it was +crumbled, and crumbling, and everything fell at the touch.</p> + +<p>Here, scattered about, were the remains of a table, and among its +crumbled ruins were gold and silver vessels. There was a mass of debris, +among which could be recognized articles of human manufacture and use, +but all covered with the everlasting carbonate of lime, which gave it +the color of death and the shroud of a sepulcher.</p> + +<p>Not a word was spoken. They moved from place to place and touched the +objects. What appeared to have some resemblance of a rigid form fell +away, just as they had seen it in the other portion of the cave. What +surprised them most was the entire absence of any firearms, although +they remembered that the Professor had said the other portions of the +cave would show that the pirates had plenty of guns.</p> + +<p>This incited them to further search. Could it be possible that the +Professor had not seen this part of the cave? Their own tracks could be +made out in the soft stalagmites on the floor, and retracing their steps +to the center of the chamber, they searched back and forth to determine +whether or not he had visited this portion.</p> + +<p>Nothing was found to satisfy them on this point, but, passing on beyond +the first recess entered, they were amazed to find a second grottoed +recess, similar to the first, but much longer, and here, with merely a +wall separating them from the other recess, was an orgy of bones and +weapons.</p> + +<p>It was such an unlooked-for sight that they almost staggered at the +scene. At one side was a row of chests, fully six feet long, all white +and crumbling, and these were filled with the long Spanish guns of which +they had several specimens.</p> + +<p>Here everything was in confusion. The final act in the drama enacted +here, whether before or after the battle in the other chamber, bore +evidences of annihilation. Here were skeletons, locked in their dying +embraces, still grasping cutlasses with which they closed the act. But +what interested them more than anything else were four skeletons, +reclining on a raised portion, with chains on wrists and ankles, which +looked like a mockery in their surroundings.</p> + +<p>The captives had taken no part in the struggles. Were they being +defended? and who were the captors? The boys had no time to consider +these things. Other matters attracted them. The nook close by was a +veritable arsenal. It contained chests which, undoubtedly, were filled +with gold. The sights, their surroundings, the evidences of untold +treasure everywhere were enough to unnerve them for the time, and +George, with a voice almost hoarse, suggested that it would be well to +return. It was some time before they could make their way back to the +entrance, and when it was reached, they sat down, not knowing what to +say or what interpretation to put on the last discovery.</p> + +<p>Nothing was said to the Professor about the visit to the cave. It must +be confessed that they felt a little sheepish about this, as such a +thing as deceiving the Professor was farthest from their thoughts, but +there was no concerted agreement to keep him in the dark. Either would +have scorned to enter into such an agreement.</p> + +<p>The boys were more than surprised that evening when the Professor +brought out some of the treasures he had brought from the cave and +exhibited them. Among them was a crude implement of stone, which had the +appearance of a cutting instrument. Another was a small stone vessel, +unmistakably showing human manufacture.</p> + +<p>The sight of these did not, at first, interest the boys, but when the +Professor stated that the cave was undoubtedly of very ancient origin, +George could not resist the inevitable question, "How can that be +determined?"</p> + +<p>"In the study of paleontology an effort has been made to classify the +different periods of man's life on the planet, so that we have the stone +age, which is the earliest, the bronze age, and the age of iron."</p> + +<p>"How far back in the history of the world has evidence been found of the +existence of man?"</p> + +<p>"In the chalk cliffs of England, and also in like formations in Germany, +skulls have been found which indicate an existence back to a period +fully 500,000 years ago."</p> + +<p>"What reason is there to assume that if they were found in those chalk +deposits, that they must have been that far back?"</p> + +<p>"Because it was fully that long ago in the period of the world formation +when the chalk beds were made, and this seems to be conclusive evidence +of great antiquity."</p> + +<p>"Is it not singular that more evidence of that condition is not found +than the recovery of a few bones?"</p> + +<p>"Not when it is considered that the earth is constantly undergoing +change, first in one place and then in another. Have you ever heard of +the great continent, which was supposed to be lost in mid-Atlantic, +called Atlantis? Plato refers to it, and attributes the first knowledge +of it as coming from Solon, who visited Egypt and there learned from the +wise men that a great country, to the west of the Pillars of Hercules, +which Gibraltar was called in ancient times, had disappeared thousands +of years before; and they further informed the great Grecian lawgiver +that the earth had been peopled and repeopled many times before in ages +past."</p> + +<p>"Why was it necessary to repeople the earth? Were they all destroyed?"</p> + +<p>"They pointed out that at certain stages of the world's history great +floods came and destroyed all the people inhabiting the low places, and +at other times the terrific volcanic eruptions destroyed those who lived +in the hills, and at other times entire continents, like Atlantis, +disappeared, so that the earth had to be repeopled and the arts and +sciences learned over anew."</p> + +<p>It is wonderful to relate how the life on the island affected the health +of all. They lived outdoors and had plenty of sunshine and vigorous +exercise. In the laboratory, the Professor made it a constant habit to +do all his work in the sunlight, to which he exposed himself at all +times. The boys often spoke of this, and one day, while talking on the +subject, he remarked:</p> + +<p>"It is surprising how little the majority of people value sunlight. It +is not the visible sunlight that performs the wonders in giving strength +to man. If you recall, we spoke about the actinic rays which cause the +chemical changes on the photographic plate. It is those unseen rays +which produce the aurora borealis, exert a curative effect upon leprosy +and tuberculosis, fill the atmosphere on the sunny side of a street with +oxygen and nitrogen, and do many other marvelous things."</p> + +<p>"In what manner does the invisible light produce these results?"</p> + +<p>"In its sparkling radiations microbes die, decay ceases, the iron in the +blood becomes chemically strong; ozone is manufactured from the dirt and +dust, which are also destroyed; the perspiration becomes active and +carries off waste from the muscles and cleanses the skin; dead tissues +are purified and the muscles invigorated; and all life is made to +thrive."</p> + +<p>"Does the sunlight have the same effect on all the animal creations?"</p> + +<p>"This is true of all animate life, except minute organisms, or what are +called bacteria."</p> + +<p>"If that is the case, why do worms and the like hide themselves in the +earth?"</p> + +<p>"In that case it is the instinct of self-preservation. The most of them +are eyeless, so that sunlight exposes them to birds and other enemies. +Professor Mast demonstrated that they are very favorably influenced by +exposure to sunlight. Dr. Dolly has shown, by a series of very brilliant +experiments, that the butterfly will live three times longer in sunlight +than in the shadow; and Professor Yerkes has also proven that the +jellyfish, while inactive in the dark, becomes very strenuous in +sunlight."</p> + +<p>"If that is the case, why wouldn't it be a good thing to have all houses +made of glass?"</p> + +<p>"That is really what has been proposed. The Government of the United +States has set a good example in this respect by devoting over one-half +of the space of the new post-office building in Washington to an +arrangement which permits the interior to be flooded with sunlight."</p> + +<p>In the really strenuous times which our colonists had passed through the +pleasures of fishing had been forgotten, and as that was an article of +food which all relished, and of which they had been deprived for some +time, Harry insisted that at least a portion of the following day should +be spent in that way.</p> + +<p>John saw the preparations which were going on and entered into the +spirit of it in his usual listless way, but it must be said that there +was now more eagerness in his actions than had been theretofore noticed.</p> + +<p>All saw the change that was perceptibly coming over him, and the +particular thing that George noticed was the character of the eye. "I +wish you would explain, Professor, why it is that the eyes of people so +affected are dull, and that when they recover the eye becomes bright?"</p> + +<p>"That change in the character of the eye is expressed by everyone under +certain conditions. How much brighter the eye is when you are affected +by laughter. That is due to the duct which lubricates the eyeball. +Anything pleasant causes an undue amount of discharge, so that the +eyeball glistens, and we call it looking bright. The same principle +holds good in the case of one who is dull or listless, or, as in our +friend's case, has nothing to stimulate the flow of the secretions. The +moment he is affected, this is shown on the eyeball sooner than by any +other part of his body."</p> + +<p>It will be remembered that in a former volume it was stated how Harry +had prepared a number of very creditable fishhooks, and these were now +attached to the ramie fiber cord and suitable poles were easily obtained +for the day's outing.</p> + +<p>Aside from John, it was a merry party that left the Cataract that +morning, and Angel was among them. Several good fishing spots were +known, but the Professor suggested that a change be made and that the +trial for the day should be in the river below the Cataract, in the hope +that larger and gamer fish might be found. In all former trials only the +tame fish were caught.</p> + +<p>Less than a quarter of a mile below the Cataract, and close to the mouth +of the river, was a small cove, with deep water, bounded by a sandy +shore. Here the party stopped and cast their lines. The Professor, +however, used a fly and fished with it at the surface of the water. As +on the previous occasion, he was the first to land a magnificent +specimen, which was so large that he had difficulty in landing it.</p> + +<p>"What is that beauty?"</p> + +<p>"It is a salmon; or it might be more correct to call it a salmon-trout. +Trout belong to the salmon family, and they are all game."</p> + +<p>"Well, he certainly made a fight for it."</p> + +<p>"Does the salmon live in salt as well as in fresh water?"</p> + +<p>"They have a habit of remaining off the coast in salt water during the +winter months in northern latitudes, and then entering the rivers when +the spawning season begins, ascending the rivers slowly, despite every +obstacle that may be put in their way. When they reach a favorite spot, +the eggs are laid and are hatched out in countless numbers."</p> + +<p>"Has it been discovered why they do this?"</p> + +<p>"In order to escape their enemies, who seek the eggs. Even with the care +which they take in breeding, millions are destroyed, and it has been +estimated that if all the eggs laid were hatched out the number would be +so great as to prevent navigation along the shores of the coasts where +they thrive. In the rivers of Oregon and Washington the shoals of salmon +are frequently so great in the rivers as to make it impossible for a +boat to be navigated through them."</p> + +<p>Harry was awarded with the second catch, which was fully fifteen inches +in length. It had a nearly cylindrical body, covered with exceptionally +large scales, and its head above convex. The striking thing about it was +the color, the back being of a bottle-green, light on the sides, and +silvery white underneath.</p> + +<p>The Professor was on hand at once. "You have captured a fine specimen of +the mullet, not considered, generally, as a game fish. It is a +particularly fine table fish."</p> + +<p>George came in for his share of luck, as well as John, who seemed to +enjoy the sport immensely. His eyes showed that. It was a pleasure to +all at this opportunity to bring something into the life of the poor +unfortunate so that he might be brought back to light again.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>MUSIC AND ANIMALS</h3> + + +<p>During the evening George suggested that as the trip was to be overland +it might be wise to can some of the fish, or to use some of the +receptacles found in the cave for this purpose.</p> + +<p>"We might do that," said the Professor, "or they might be salted down, +and that would not necessitate the receptacles, if we dried them."</p> + +<p>The salted fish did not appeal to either of the boys, and it was +accordingly agreed to put up several packages for food.</p> + +<p>"Will it be much trouble to preserve them by putting them in cans?"</p> + +<p>"If proper precautions are taken they can be preserved. The difficulty +is that the air is not excluded, and the mischief is caused by the gases +which form, in that case, and when the pressure becomes too great the +receptacle bursts."</p> + +<p>"Why are the fish, or other substances, so canned heated and put into +the cans while in that state?"</p> + +<p>"When a can is filled with the material in a heated state it has been +expanded to its highest point, and after the package is sealed properly, +no air can enter it, so that it is prevented from changing its condition +by any chemical action. Our difficulty will be to get a proper metal for +the cans."</p> + +<p>"What is the best to use?"</p> + +<p>"Tin, for the reason that tin is not affected by any of the acids which +are formed by fish or by fruit, which may be put in them."</p> + +<p>It has been stated that the boys were both musically inclined, and +George had taken several courses of lessons on the violin before he +joined the training ship. If there was anything more than another that +was missed, particularly in the evenings, it was the lack of musical +instruments, to which all had been accustomed. As a result, the boys had +for some time worked on a violin, which was now nearing completion, and +they hoped it could be finished before the start was made.</p> + +<p>The Professor discovered the partly constructed violin, and at once +showed his appreciation of their enterprise. "Now that you have the +body, what are you going to do for strings?" and he laughed at the +bewildered look. They had forgotten the one essential thing.</p> + +<p>Without a word, he left them, and when he returned, held in his hand a +dozen or more hard, bony-like and dried-up reeds. "Possibly these will +do for your purpose."</p> + +<p>"What are they?"</p> + +<p>"These are the intestines of the wildcat we shot about ten months ago."</p> + +<p>"Well, aren't they as good as the intestines of the common cat?"</p> + +<p>"Undoubtedly; but violin strings are not produced from that source."</p> + +<p>"Aren't they known as catgut?"</p> + +<p>"That is true; but it is a mistake. The strings of commerce are made +principally from the intestines of sheep, and, singularly, have been +always designated as 'catgut.' Other articles from the same source are +hatters' bowstrings, clockmakers' cords, and thongs for whips and laces +for boots."</p> + +<p>"What are the best kinds of strings for musical instruments?"</p> + +<p>"Those obtained from Milan, Italy, are considered the best, on account +of their transparency and exceeding strength. Most frequently each +string is made up of two or three separate strands, twisted together +with the utmost care. But there is another use of the greatest value, +and that is as a thread for sewing up wounds in internal surgery, +because, being of animal matter, the thread will, in course of time, be +absorbed into the system, and thus remove itself, without requiring a +second operation to remove it from the wound."</p> + +<p>"How is it prepared to make it suitable for our purpose!"</p> + +<p>"The ones here I thoroughly cleaned at the time, as I knew they would +come in handy for particular purposes, but I had no idea of this kind in +view at the time. We must soak them and remove the inner and outer +lining. Potash, in solution, is best for the purpose. We must then draw +them through small holes, to give them uniformity, and keep them in a +receptacle which is filled with sulphur fumes. That is for the purpose +of fumigating them. They are then ready for the instrument. I think the +different sizes will give you a variety."</p> + +<p>The directions were carried out, and during the following week the +violin was prepared for its initial test. The Professor was pleased with +the knowledge that the instrument was ready. It was plain that he +expected important results from that source with John. It is well known +that music possesses a wonderful power in the treatment of demented +people, and he was very anxious to try it in the case of one who had +lost all memory.</p> + +<p>On the evening appointed the violin was brought in, and the boys had +arranged a program. Harry had a fine baritone voice, while George could +take a high note and sustain it as well as most sopranos. When all the +preliminaries had been arranged, the instrument was produced, and after +a little preliminary tuning, George played "America."</p> + +<p>At the first strains of the violin, Angel, who was in the loft, came +down. He didn't stop to notice anyone but George. This was something so +unheard of that he appeared to be hypnotized, as he shuffled over to +George, and looked up at the instrument. He appeared to be entranced, +and when the music stopped he laid his hand on George's knee, and looked +up appealingly. There was not a single motion in his features which +showed appreciation or pleasure or excitement; but aside from that every +action of his body indicated exhilaration and undue animation.</p> + +<p>The boys had eyes for the animal only; but the Professor watched John to +the exclusion of everything else. When the first strains vibrated he +glanced around, and saw the musician. From that moment until George +dropped the violin his eyes never ceased the stare. As the music +continued he appeared to be enraptured, if such a thing could be said of +a mute expression.</p> + +<p>The Professor drew closer to him, and intently watched his eyes, and +before the first verse had ended the situation was so intense that the +Professor's hand involuntarily beat time, and it was evident that the +tremulous motion, which John now and then exhibited, was the inward +struggle for light.</p> + +<p>Without turning from John, when the music ceased, he cried out to +George, in a suppressed tone: "Keep on; keep on!" This brought the boys +to the knowledge of the other drama which was being enacted. "Slower, +George, slower," was the request of the Professor; and while "America" +requires the jubilant strain of action and liberty, he obeyed the +injunction.</p> + +<p>"Keep it up; can you play 'Home, Sweet Home'?" George could, and did, +and as the familiar strains floated through the air, John moved forward, +his head drooped down, both hands grasped the chair and he listened with +an intentness that was painful to witness.</p> + +<p>When George stopped at the whispered suggestion, John raised his eyes +and looked around. The look was a different one than they had ever +noticed before. When he glanced at the Professor, Harry said: "Did you +notice the difference in his eyes?"</p> + +<p>He rubbed his hands over his eyes, and stroked his head, and they +thought a glimmer of a smile crossed his features. When they were about +to retire that night, the Professor could not help but express his +gratification at the results achieved through the aid of the violin.</p> + +<p>"I could not help thinking how nearly allied Angel and John were in the +manner of acting during the course of the music. I have no doubt but in +course of time the animal will, just like John, show the facial +expressions which characterize either pleasure or pain."</p> + +<p>"But I have seen Angel actually laugh."</p> + +<p>This was true; it had been noticed on several occasions. But so far John +had not laughed, and he had not changed his facial expression in such a +manner as to make it noticeable, and the evening's entertainment had +done more to affect him than anything which had occurred, and it was +their earnest hope that this might be a means to his delivery.</p> + +<p>Harry was the only one to notice a field mouse which had appeared soon +after George began to play, and the little animal was joined by others, +but the subsequent events of the evening attracted his attention, so +that no notice was taken of them until they were about to retire, when +they scampered away and Harry then related how they had acted.</p> + +<p>"That is an interesting thing. Some time ago the keeper of the Central +Park Zoölogical Gardens, in New York, employed a violinist to play for +the animals, and the results were very interesting. The first animals +approached were a lioness and five cubs. The tune played was 'America.' +She listened with mute and dignified appreciation, and her five little +cubs ranged up alongside in a row, and in the same attitude, all with a +wondering expression, and sometimes would act just as you often have +seen dogs do, turn their heads aside obliquely, as though the sound +could be better understood. The old lion in the adjoining cage also +stopped his restless movement, and peered at the player attentively. The +next animal was a tigress. When the playing commenced she first looked +startled. Her mate entered the cage and escorted her out into the yard +while he took up his position and listened, and refused to allow her to +return. The hippopotamus, on the other hand, got mad, and sought the +water for seclusion. The elephant appeared to be the most +discriminating, for while he deliberately turned his back when a +plaintive tune was played, was so delighted when a rattling dancing jig +was executed, he actually danced about in ecstacies of joy. The wolves, +foxes and hyenas could not be made to appreciate any of the tunes, but +the monkeys enjoyed all the tunes, if being sad when doleful tunes are +played give happiness, and they partook of the exhilaration when lively +sounds came from the instrument."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig29" id="fig29"></a> +<img src="images/fig29.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 29. <span class="smcap">The Lion and Cubs</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>The warm summer days were now at hand, and all realized that this was +the proper time to carry out the long-delayed project of fully exploring +the western shore of their little continent. This had been deferred +before John came, in order that more complete preparations could be +made, and to await settled weather, and now that he was here further +delay had been urged in the hope that memory would be restored and thus +give them an addition that could be depended on. One puzzling feature of +his malady was that he understood, in a measure, what was told him, but +it was noticed that whatever was spoken had to be accompanied by some +manual action. If told to get a pail of water, he would remain inactive +until a pail was taken up or pointed out. So in yoking up the yaks, +merely pointing at the yokes would be sufficient to start the lagging +memory. He quickly learned to manipulate the guns, and spent hours in +practicing by shooting at the target.</p> + +<p>Singular as it may seem, he showed some intelligence at the good shots, +but all these flashes were momentary only, and it was further noticed +that he would remember an act performed the day before and repeat it in +precisely the same way. It was like an imitative process, and the +Professor suggested that he was now in the condition of a child, +learning all things anew, to which was added some glimpses of things he +had learned before.</p> + +<p>A new wagon was necessary, as the one which had been used for the past +eight months was clumsy and badly worn. All took a part in this +important work, and it was here that the workmanlike qualities of John +showed themselves. He was a treasure in this respect. The lathe was a +pleasure to him, and so with bench work, and within ten days a new and +larger wagon was turned out.</p> + +<p>"I only wish," said Harry, "that we could paint it up, and thus make a +real finished article out of it."</p> + +<p>"Your idea is a good one, but in order to make a lead paint will take +too long a time to provide a carbonate which will answer the purpose."</p> + +<p>"Why does it take so long?"</p> + +<p>"We have plenty of lead, but to get the base for the paint it will be +necessary to cast a lot of thin gratings, and use earthen pots, partly +filled with vinegar. A layer of the lead gratings must then be put down +and the earthen pot stood on them and partly filled with acetic acid, or +vinegar. A board should cover each pot and spent tannin bark placed +around them. This must be built up in the form of a stack. Fermentation +soon sets in, and the result will be the formation of carbonic acid, and +in five or six weeks the metallic lead converted into what is called the +carbonate which may be washed and ground up with oil, and sold as the +white lead of commerce."</p> + +<p>"Instead of that what should we use?"</p> + +<p>"We have plenty of flax, as you know. From that we can make linseed oil, +and with a proper coloring matter, which is not necessary, however, we +can provide a paint that will be very serviceable."</p> + +<p>"Then why not use the madder dye which we made for dyeing the flag?"</p> + +<p>"Just the thing. In addition we must have a dryer of some kind. I +suggest that we distil some of the rosin, or the sap from the pitch pine +trees, for that purpose."</p> + +<p>"What kind of product shall we obtain from that?"</p> + +<p>"Turpentine."</p> + +<p>Thus day after day passed in preparation, each hour, almost, suggesting +some new addition to their stock, which would contribute to protection, +comfort, or necessity. Among other things suggested, in order to relieve +them as much as possible from carrying such a large burden in the way of +provisions, was the making of synthetic foods.</p> + +<p>George had this in mind for some days before he broached the subject to +the Professor. "I understood you to say that if we had synthetic foods +we could carry several weeks' rations about our persons, and the load +would not be a heavy or perceptible one at that? If such is the case, +why can't we prepare some of the food in that way as a matter of +precaution? What is the meaning of the word 'synthetic,' and how is such +food made?"</p> + +<p>"The word is the direct opposite of 'analyses.' In analyzing, the +elements composing any substance are separated from each other. In +synthesis the different elements are put together to form the substance. +Thus, take water as an illustration: Its component parts are two parts +of hydrogen and one of oxygen. Knowing this to be the case, the chemist +takes that many parts of oxygen and hydrogen, and by uniting them water +is formed which is just as much a true water as though it fell from the +heavens or was taken from a well or spring."</p> + +<p>We should not go far out of the way in stating that the Professor was +putting in some time in this direction, while the other work was going +on, and this was confirmed later on when he requested Harry to furnish a +number of small tubes like those used for the powder, and it was noticed +that a quantity of bamboo was taken to the laboratory and cut up into +short sections.</p> + +<p>The guns and ammunition were now ready, a supply of food had been +prepared, and George insisted on baking a quantity of barley bread, +which was carefully wrapped up, so that it would not be dried out or be +liable to get wet. The wagon was admirably adapted for the purpose. The +wheels were not extraordinarily large, but they had wide treads, and the +body was high at the sides so as to serve as a fortress in case of +trouble. An extra yoke was taken, a supply of sugar and also of honey +put in the vessels which the cave supplied, and only a small store of +vegetables, as they depended on finding these en route.</p> + +<p>The start was agreed upon for the following morning. Observation Hill +was visited, and a new inscription affixed to the pole, so that any +passing ship might know their plight, and be able to direct its course +to the west. The value of the chart made by the Professor was now +appreciated, as that was also tacked up in its proper place.</p> + +<p>Jack and Jill were the yaks selected for the journey, as they were tried +and true, and had now grown to be strong and well domesticated. Freedom +was given to the cattle, and all the buildings closed up. This was done +to secure the interiors from intrusion on the part of animals. An +inscription was also placed on the door of the house.</p> + +<p>Promptly at nine o'clock the company, consisting of the Professor, +Harry, George, John and Angel, started on the journey across Wonder +Island. This was their sixth trip, only one of them by sea.</p> + +<p>Would this be any more successful than the preceding ones?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<h3>THE TRIP THROUGH THE DENSE FOREST</h3> + + +<p>On the march up Cataract River, and out toward the forest, the same +order was observed as on the previous trips. One must lead the way, and +act as scout, while the others were to remain with the team. They did +not anticipate much difficulty during the first two or three days from +savages, but it was always well to have some one in the lead so as to +point out the most desirable paths, as it must be remembered they had to +make their own trails through a wilderness. Much of it had been +traveled, it is true, but there was nothing approaching such a thing as +a road, or even a path, by which they could be guided.</p> + +<p>It was amusing to watch Angel, as he glided along from one tree to the +next, where the forests were in their paths. At other times he would be +in the wagon, or shamble along, and sometimes leap on the backs of the +yaks and ride there. The patient animals were so used to him that no +attention was paid to his antics, even though he occasionally sat on the +yoke between the animals.</p> + +<p>John was an interested observer of all the preparations, and was one of +the first to take his place alongside of the wagon. When the Professor +urged him to take a seat he looked up inquiringly, but did not comply. +The Professor did not urge him, but after several hours of walking, he +was again asked to mount, and he did so, thereby seeming to understand +what was required of him.</p> + +<p>When they camped at noon for the first meal, they were still on the +banks of the Cataract, but here it took a decided turn to the west; and +now the course for the afternoon must be to the southwest so the South +River could be reached above the falls.</p> + +<p>That river was reached early in the afternoon, and they recognized the +trail formerly made on the first journey along its banks. The first +encampment for the night was probably twenty miles from home, but the +next morning, after they had struck into an entirely new section of the +island, the journey grew more burdensome, as the land on both sides of +the stream became rough, and in many places the small streams crossed +offered such steep sides that frequent detours had to be made to enable +the team to get across.</p> + +<p>During the second day they did not, on account of this, cover more than +ten miles, and near the close of the day a second falls was reached, +showing that they were going up to a much higher altitude. Above the +falls the river turned abruptly to the south, and within five miles of +it the river forked, one branch going south and the other southwest.</p> + +<p>They were on the branch going west, and that course was followed, but +still the country was rough, and now became thickly wooded, which added +to the discomfort of traveling with a team. Magnificent trees grew on +every side, and in most places sprang up clear to the water's edge.</p> + +<p>"You have here a good illustration," remarked the Professor, "as to the +source of the debris which is found on the shores of the island. The +streams carry down the logs, trees and leaves, which, after being washed +out to sea, are finally left along the beaches."</p> + +<p>Our voyagers had passed many nights in the forests before, but this was +the first time they had come across such impenetrable jungles. The large +trees were actually so close together at many places that the wagon had +to be backed and worked around for long distances to enable them to make +any forward movements.</p> + +<p>Before noon of the third day it became so discouraging that they stopped +to consider the situation. Possibly a route away from the river would be +much better, and that course was decided on, so that the direction +agreed on was west, with a slight trend to the north.</p> + +<p>The reason why the course along the river would be the most direct was +judged from the fact that the lights, which they saw from their boat, +made the location of the savages fully fifty miles or over from the +northernmost cape where they had been cast ashore a few weeks before.</p> + +<p>The travel must, therefore, be to the southwest, and not to the west, +but at the rate they were going, with every hour more difficult, it was +hoped that the new course would in the end be quicker. All of that day +the struggle was a strenuous one, and when night came all were +exhausted, and were ready to retire as soon as the meal was over.</p> + +<p>They were in the midst of the thickest forest, and up to this time all +had retired, as they did on this occasion. The yaks were enclosed in a +railing made of small trees, so as to protect them, and the two +mattresses within the covered body made comfortable beds for all.</p> + +<p>Strange sounds occasionally disturbed them, but caused no particular +alarm, until Angel began to grow restless, about two in the morning. +George tried to quiet him, but he persisted in giving the alarm. +Suddenly a howl and a shriek awoke the occupants of the wagon and as +each arose he instinctively grasped a weapon. The sounds came from two +animals, one of which was close by; the other at a greater distance.</p> + +<p>"The one near us seems to be a wildcat, or an animal which utters a +characteristic shriek of that kind, but I am not sure as to the identity +of the other animal," remarked the Professor, as he listened intently to +the hideous howls and shrieks.</p> + +<p>It was pitch dark, so that it was impossible to recognize anything in +the wagon, and of course the dense forests only added to the gloom, +although the sky could be faintly seen directly above them through the +scraggly leaves. The Professor searched for one of the lanterns, when he +heard the yaks becoming uneasy, and running back and forth in the little +enclosure.</p> + +<p>John was awake, and his eyes seemed to have a sort of glimmer as the +light flared up. The rear end of the wagon led directly into the pen +where the animals were, and no sooner had the light rays illuminated the +enclosure than a heavy object sprang from an adjoining tree and landed +on one of the yaks.</p> + +<p>The latter was thrown across the pen with the impact of the force, and +the Professor, who had the lamp, could not level his gun, but without a +moment's hesitation John's gun was at his shoulder, and he fired before +either of the boys could recover themselves in the excitement.</p> + +<p>The firing of the gun seemed to raise pandemonium. The sudden appearance +of the light, as the animal made the leap, disconcerted him, and the +shot following immediately, caused him to utter a terrific growl. John +grasped the Professor's gun and shot the second time, and the shot was +at blank range. The animal gave a slight spring forward, and fell across +a tree trunk which was at one side of the enclosure, and on which they +had arranged the cooking utensils the night before.</p> + +<p>This was exciting enough for one night's adventure, but as John and the +boys were about to descend a crash in the trees to the right caused them +to halt. The Professor held out his light, but the thick wood and the +dense underbrush prevented any examination more than thirty or forty +feet beyond.</p> + +<p>The eagerness of the boys to return to the wagon caused the Professor to +loose his grip on the lamp, and before he could recover the hold, it +fell to the ground and was extinguished. The yaks appeared to be in a +frenzy now, and the howling beyond increased in intensity. After a +search the lamp was relit, and the two others also brought out and +lighted, and the appearance of the light caused a hurried retreat of the +howling beasts.</p> + +<p>"It is a puma," were the Professor's first words, "the most enormous +specimen I ever saw."</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig30" id="fig30"></a> +<img src="images/fig30.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 30 <span class="smcap">Puma</span></i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>"Well, these woods must be full of them, by the way they howled."</p> + +<p>The yaks were calmed down after some effort, and it was found that the +shoulder of Jack had been lacerated by the claws of the puma, but beyond +that no damage was done. Both of John's shots had taken effect, and it +delighted the Professor to point to the wound and then indicate, as best +he could, how they owed him a debt for his skill.</p> + +<p>The carcass was dragged out of the enclosure to keep the yaks quiet, and +when this was done they seemed relieved.</p> + +<p>"I would like to know what the other animal was?"</p> + +<p>"It is my opinion that it was a companion to this one. They, like all +animals, have a means for communicating their ideas to each other. Some +English scientists have found that the hen utters twenty-three distinct +notes, and that they convey different meanings. One single note, +differing from another, may convey the meaning of an entire sentence +uttered by man. The particular purring of a cat in one way means one +thing, and when emitted in a slightly altered tone indicates something +entirely different. Then, again, most animal sounds are accompanied by +some distinctive movement, as, for instance, the striking squeal of a +hen, accompanied by the crouching attitude, together indicate the +appearance of a hawk as plainly as though it uttered the warning in +words. It is obvious, therefore, that all the sounds made by animals, +such as cackling, clucking, crooning, purring, crowing, growling, and +roaring, as well as modifications of these sounds, impart some meaning +which can be distinguished by their kind, and are frequently recognized +by others."</p> + +<p>This explanation appealed to George. "I know the moment Angel is +pleased, or when he is excited, and now that I think of it, I am sure +that he has several ways of expressing his meaning, and I am going to +try and see whether I can tell the difference hereafter when he tries to +talk."</p> + +<p>There was little sleep that night, except on the part of John, who was +soon asleep. When morning broke they had an opportunity to examine the +dead animal. It had a uniform gray color, fading into a white in the +under part of its body, and with a very long, supple tail.</p> + +<p>"The animal is sometimes called the panther, or 'painter,' as it is +familiarly known; and it is regarded by some authorities as the cougar. +It inhabits the whole of America. Its home is among the branches of +trees, and is a dangerous antagonist when wounded or cornered."</p> + +<p>This incident made them desirous of quitting the forest by the nearest +route, but this was difficult to determine, as there were no elevated +hills in sight. In the forenoon of the third day, other animals were +sighted, and George, who was in the lead during the first part of the +trip, did not have the courage to go ahead very far, and soon after the +start was made, John came up and accompanied him, an act entirely +voluntary on his part, which increased the astonishment of them all.</p> + +<p>It is impossible to account for these remarkable actions of the human +mind while in such a state. Did he realize the danger to his friends? +Who can answer the riddle?</p> + +<p>But they must go on. The forest must be conquered. How far they had to +go was a mystery to them. One thing was certain: they were going toward +West River, but they were still less than half way. It would have been +the part of prudence to have taken the route to the north, through a +country which they had twice traversed, and which afforded far better +traveling, but it could not be helped now.</p> + +<p>The fourth day did not improve their condition in the least. The dense +wood was on every side. The inclination of the ground was so slight as +to give no indication whether they had reached the summit of the +tableland, or were still ascending to a higher level.</p> + +<p>In estimating the distance traveled in the four days it could not be +possible that they were over fifty miles from the Cataract. To add to +their perplexities, Jack began to walk with a perceptible limp. The +wound in the shoulder was inflamed, and a rest was necessary.</p> + +<p>In this emergency a council was called, and the Professor suggested that +some of the party should conduct an exploring expedition on foot to the +west, going not to exceed five miles, and then return. But as it was too +near night to make the attempt at once, it was agreed that an early +start should be made in the morning.</p> + +<p>The question now arose, who should go. Neither made a suggestion until +Harry ventured this opinion: "I am perfectly willing to take John with +me. I am sure he can be trusted. It will be imposing too much of a +burden on you," said he, looking at the Professor, "and I am active and +strong enough to stand the trip."</p> + +<p>This suggestion was acted on, and early in the morning Harry took a +quantity of ammunition, and the Professor gave John a similar supply and +a couple of the guns, one of which was strapped to his back, similar to +the manner in which Harry was equipped. The attention of John was then +directed to the forest in the west, and as Harry moved away he followed +with a comprehensive glance that gave all of them the greatest relief. +Prior to their departure, the yak's wound was examined, and John saw +this as well, so that from all indications they would have no reason to +have fears on his account.</p> + +<p>As usual, their bolos were taken along, and at intervals the trees were +blazed on both sides, this action being performed by John with a +regularity and precision that astonished Harry.</p> + +<p>Traveling under those conditions was not conducive to speed, but they +were now trying to find what lay beyond them, and to learn, if possible, +how much farther the dense growth existed beyond them. They went on for +three hours or more, and still no change, and they stopped to rest.</p> + +<p>Imagine yourself surrounded by these conditions. A companion who could +not talk, and who was, in all probability, demented, the eternal +silence, except as it would be occasionally startled into life by some +living thing; unable to even indicate his thoughts, or to consult with +him, as to direction, or to talk about the probabilities beyond them, +and you will feel that it took a brave heart to continue the journey. +But Harry possessed determination. He made up his mind to go on, until +he could find some news to take back, and so the quest continued for two +hours more.</p> + +<p>But Harry had forgotten that they started without food, and that it +would take them as long to get back as they had already journeyed, and +it was now fully noon.</p> + +<p>It seemed as though a hundred feet away it appeared clearer, but this +delusion had been repeated so often that he tired of it, and when, after +a rest, another start was made, he mentally made up his mind that if he +could not find a clearing within the next half hour they must return.</p> + +<p>The clearing beyond did not deceive him this time. He clearly saw an +elevation beyond, and he almost shouted, but he did not stop and laugh +in his joy at the sight. John saw it and instinctively knew its meaning. +Then, motioning to him, he pointed back in the direction of the wagon, +and started to retrace his steps.</p> + +<p>It was past noon, and Harry was hungry. John turned and followed and, +glancing at the sun, drew a small package from his coat, and handed +Harry several slices of barley bread. It affected him so much that he +could scarcely contain himself, and he could not help putting his arm +about him and indicate that his forethought and kind act was +appreciated, and John looked at Harry inquiringly, and proceeded to eat +his luncheon.</p> + +<p>Judging the time which had elapsed since the start in the morning, it +would take them fully five hours to retrace their steps, as the glazed +trees showed them the way readily, and they could, therefore, make the +trip in less than six hours consumed up to this time, so that they would +be back before six in the evening, but they had found the outlet, and +determination had won.</p> + +<p>The passage back through the forest was made with a happy heart, and +after they had gone two hours, John suddenly stopped, and grasped Harry +by the arm as he peered forward. Harry heard something before them. +Crackling leaves, and finally voices, were distinguished. They thought +the team must be miles away. John moved forward fully fifty feet, and +Harry followed. Soon the wagon top came in sight, and Harry bounded +along the blazed trail, with a cry, of relief.</p> + +<p>Jack's lacerated shoulder was not as bad as had been anticipated, and +toward noon the lameness was not so perceptible, so that, in order to +save time, it was concluded to follow the blazed path, which could be +made out easily, thus bringing them together fully three hours earlier +than Harry had anticipated.</p> + +<p>Harry explained what had been seen to the west, and that three or four +hours more of hard travel would bring them to an open country which, in +all probability, led to the West River.</p> + +<p>All was eagerness now, and they pressed forward, hoping to be able to +reach the open country before night set in.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2> + +<h3>SEEING THE FIRST SAVAGES</h3> + + +<p>George's patience in teaching Angel was most commendable. Hours were +devoted to this work. Even before leaving home the animal would +recognize certain sounds, and performed many acts at the word of +command. Such words as "come," "go," "take this," and others usually +employed, were fully comprehended, and the names of Harry and the +Professor were understood.</p> + +<p>Frequent tests were made by George and the Professor, acting in concert, +as this phase of the education greatly interested the latter, to +ascertain whether the orang performed the services from an understanding +of the meaning of the words, or whether it proceeded merely from the +constant repetitions of the words and acts conjointly.</p> + +<p>The value of this proceeding will be made apparent to the reader as we +proceed in this history; but when they were educating Angel the idea of +utilizing his future services, in a critical time, did not occur to +them.</p> + +<p>They camped for the night at the end of the trail; and now they hoped +that the morrow would open the route over a more comfortable path than +the last three days had offered them. Before going an hour on the way, a +campfire was found, which evidently had been used not many days before.</p> + +<p>There had not been any rains in their section of the country for ten +days previous to this, and it was obvious that no rain had fallen on the +ashes of this fire. From this it must be inferred that whoever made the +fire must have been there recently.</p> + +<p>The utmost vigilance would be necessary, in view of this discovery. The +wagon moved forward slowly. Every part of the country within the limits +of the trail was under scrutiny, and every sound and moving object fully +investigated before proceeding. This made travel necessarily slow. The +underbrush was very thick, and but few trees remained, and those were +scattered, mostly in clumps or in detached groups.</p> + +<p>Harry looked at the tall trees longingly many times, and the Professor +divined his meaning. "I have a notion to try prospecting from one of +these trees. We can, no doubt, see more from them than we can learn in a +day's travel. But trees of that kind are pretty hard to climb."</p> + +<p>"It might be done with a climbing ring," answered the Professor.</p> + +<p>"What is that?"</p> + +<p>"The cocoanut hunters and others put a hoop around a tree, and then get +inside of the hoop, with the back against the hoop, so that the feet can +get a purchase against the tree, and in that way the trees are scaled +with the greatest agility."</p> + +<p>"Well, if the savages can do it, I can."</p> + +<p>"It might be well to make the trial, as even thirty or forty feet would +give a fair view of the country. Before making the hoop we should select +a tree most suitable for observation."</p> + +<p>An oak tree with a bare trunk up to the first large limb was finally +selected. The diameter was fully two feet at the base.</p> + +<p>"With a tree of this size the hoop should be about three and a half feet +in diameter."</p> + +<p>"What material shall we make it out of?"</p> + +<p>"If we can find a small hickory sapling it will be the most serviceable, +because its natural strength and stiffness will permit us to use a small +and light pole."</p> + +<p>A search was made, and after a time several were cut and brought to the +tree. The thick end of the sapling was cut or pared off along one side +so it would bend in the direction of the slice, and this was put about +the tree and the ends brought together and lapped. Thongs were then used +to splice the lapped ends, and small nails driven in at intervals to +assure security.</p> + +<p>The use of hoops of this kind requires practice, and the natives use +their bare feet against the tree, which prevents slipping. Harry, +however, had shoes; not a very good thing to use against the bark, and +after numerous trials both boys found the task a trying one. Their bare +feet were too tender to use against the rough bark, and as a last resort +one of the old pair of shoes was brought out, and studded with nails.</p> + +<p>The climber gets inside the hoop, with the latter around the tree, and +resting against the small of the back, or a little higher up. The feet +are then braced against the tree, and the hoop grasped by both hands. In +climbing the body is suddenly moved toward the tree, and this motion +temporarily releases the outward pressure against the hoop, and at the +same moment the hoop is moved upwardly about a foot. One or both feet +then make an upward step, and this process is repeated.</p> + +<p>More than an hour was occupied in learning to manipulate the hoop, so as +to progress upwardly, and at the end of that time Harry made a slow and +careful ascent to the first limb, a distance of thirty feet, stopping at +intervals, as he made his way up, to view the ever-increasing landscape, +and to take the needed rest.</p> + +<p>"Do you see anything, Harry?" was George's eager questioning, as he +moved upwardly.</p> + +<p>"Nothing yet," was the invariable reply. When the first limb was reached +he seated himself, and had an opportunity to view the surroundings from +a far better vantage point.</p> + +<p>"Can you see the river?" was the Professor's inquiry.</p> + +<p>"It is too hazy to make out anything there. It is clearer to the south."</p> + +<p>"What can you see to the southwest?"</p> + +<p>Harry scanned the country in that direction for some time before +replying. "All I can see there are trees, trees, just like the forest we +have been going through; but directly west of us we would have +comparatively easy traveling. The forest seems to extend southwest, and +we have been traveling through it at an angle. If I could get higher I +might have a better view."</p> + +<p>He ascended fifteen feet higher, but even at that point the forest hid +the view to the southwest.</p> + +<p>"From your examination I judge our only hope is to reach the river and +travel down its banks?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; because we don't want any more of the forest with the team."</p> + +<p>"Before we go, let us take off the hoop; I want to use it again." And +Harry unwrapped the thongs and disengaged it from the tree.</p> + +<p>After luncheon the marching was resumed, this time due west to the +river. The trip during the day told on Jack, and a halt, was called +before they had gone five miles. Harry and John took their guns and +started south on a tour of investigation, making their way toward a +slight elevation which he had noticed from the observation point.</p> + +<p>It was really a hill, covered with trees, and gave the appearance, from +the tree top, as being a continuation of the forest range. This was good +news to carry back. While passing through the tallest of the trees, +Harry, who was ahead, felt himself suddenly grasped, and he uttered a +scream.</p> + +<p>John rushed forward just as Harry saw the repulsive form of a huge snake +which had wound itself around him. Harry was absolutely helpless in the +folds of the serpent. John's quick eye took in the situation at once, +and by the time he reached Harry the bolo was in his hand and poised. +With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last +coil, and the portion suspended from the tree fell alongside of the +combatants, and John's hands reached out to assist Harry.</p> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="illus4" id="illus4"></a> +<img src="images/illus4.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>"With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last coil"</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>Harry was frightened so that he could hardly utter a word, and after +some exertion he disentangled himself and gazed on the immense serpent. +When he had recovered partially he was too much excited to proceed, and +they returned to the camp with a story of the attack and the noble +rescue on the part of John.</p> + +<p>George's excitement was at fever heat. "We must get his skin." Harry was +willing, because a trophy of that kind was worth preserving. The team +was taken along, as it was fully a half mile from the camp. When the +Professor saw the serpent he congratulated Harry on his escape, who, but +for the fortunate presence of John, would have been killed.</p> + +<p>It measured twenty-two feet in length and its greatest diameter was +eight inches.</p> + +<p>"What is this—the boa constrictor?"</p> + +<p>"It belongs to the same family, but is known as the anaconda."</p> + +<p>"What is the difference between the boa constrictor and the python?"</p> + +<p>"The boas are the species found in the western hemisphere, whereas the +pythons inhabit the eastern countries. The anaconda is a native of +Brazil and some of the other South American countries. They are +non-poisonous, and depend for securing prey on their wonderful swiftness +and in the tremendous power which they exert when the victims are in +their grasp."</p> + +<p>As usual, George had been prospecting also, and when the skin had been +removed and the excitement died away, he exhibited a peculiar fruit. It +was the shape and size of a pear, but had a peculiar kidney-shaped +pendant at its large end.</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled when he saw it. "You have the fruit of the +Anacardium, or cashew tree. That is, it is a combined fruit and nut."</p> + +<p>"Is this little projecting part a nut?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and this evening we can try some of them; but they must be +roasted. The fruit can be eaten as it is, but it is like the persimmon; +it must be fully ripe, or it will be too astringent. It is a fine +medicine, and the sap of the tree produces a product like gum arabic, +and is known in commerce as acajou."</p> + + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<a name="fig31" id="fig31"></a> +<img src="images/fig31.png" alt=""/> +</div> + +<h3><i>Fig. 31. Acajou.</i></h3> + +<hr style="width: 45%;" /> + +<p>The elevation which Harry was anxious to gain was before them, less than +a mile, and as it was not more than four in the afternoon, the team was +driven forward and the slight ascent begun. In a half hour the summit +was reached. It was not at a great elevation, but the incline was a +gradual one, and it was hoped that from the elevated portion a better +glimpse could be obtained than the tree afforded.</p> + +<p>It was too late when they reached the camping place to attempt any +observations that night, but in the morning an investigation was made to +find a tree of sufficient size to afford a good view. When it was +finally found the hoop was again brought out and Harry slowly made his +way upwardly, and those below waited in suspense for news.</p> + +<p>He made a deliberate survey, and called down: "I can see the West River, +and directly to the southwest are white objects, but so far away that I +cannot tell what they are. They may be tents or huts, or something of +that kind. I couldn't say positively."</p> + +<p>"Do the objects appear to be at or near the river?" asked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"It is difficult to say whether the river goes in that direction. I can +see glimpses of the stream only here and there."</p> + +<p>"Do you see any mountains to the south?"</p> + +<p>"None whatever. Everything merges into a haze beyond the white objects I +referred to."</p> + +<p>"It is probable," said the Professor, "we have located them, as I find, +from an examination of the sailing chart, that the village is located at +about that point. I think our course should now be directed to the +river, as traveling will be better near its shores, and we would, I +think, be more likely to meet some of the inhabitants along the shore +than in the dense interior."</p> + +<p>The low mountain range beyond the West River was plainly visible from +the elevation. The Professor noted how its lower end sloped down, and he +knew their location beyond question, and explained that they were now +practically due east of the point where they were compelled, on the +tempestuous night, to turn back to the north.</p> + +<p>It was a long, weary night for them, because expectation ran high. They +were anxious, and yet dreaded the meeting, but they had sought it and +could not go back now. No fires were kindled that night, although George +had counted on some of the roast nuts. It would not be safe to hazard a +light.</p> + +<p>The utmost vigilance was now to be the watchword. There must be no +firing of guns or wandering from the camp on the part of either. At the +time the wagon was constructed the Professor had an eye to its use as a +means of defense, which was explained to the boys, and this offered a +great sense of security to them.</p> + +<p>The sides had been made high with this end in view, and not for the +purpose of hauling big loads. If attacked in the open, it would serve as +a fort, and would enable them to move around from one side, or end, to +the other without being exposed. In anticipation all the guns were +examined and the ammunition placed within reach and conveniently +arranged for any emergency.</p> + +<p>The provisions were also arranged to prepare for a siege if necessary. +During that evening the Professor for the first time explained in detail +how the natives would be approached.</p> + +<p>"I think it is well, now that we are about to come in contact with the +people here, to be prepared to meet them in the proper way, so as to +insure safety to ourselves. It is likely that we shall have to treat +with the natives, and thus come to some understanding, before we entrust +ourselves to their mercy. Above all things, we want to impress on them +the feeling that we are not antagonistic and have no hostile intentions. +We are unfortunate in not knowing the character of the dwellers on the +island. They may have had frequent contact with the outside world. That +may, or it may not, mitigate our lot. So we cannot count on that factor +too much. If they are low down in the scale of humanity, we may find a +still harder problem. In any event, however, this must be made plain. +The wagon is our fort. From that we can defy them, unless they have +firearms.</p> + +<p>"From this time on let us keep together——"</p> + +<p>Something unusual stirred beyond. The crackling of twigs was plainly +recognized, and the mumbling sound of voices could be made out. They +were human voices, but their intonations, as they came nearer, were +sufficient to show that the language was not that of civilized people. +They were more in the nature of successive grunts, not much more +definable than the noises of animals.</p> + +<p>They were wrought up to the highest tension, and the only fear was that +either Angel or the yaks would make some noise which might attract the +passers-by. To their great relief the sounds died away. This visit would +have been welcomed during the daytime, but at night they could not +afford to take any risks.</p> + +<p>This incident showed they were now in an enemy's country. The river was +fully ten miles to the west of them. How far the encampment or village +of the inhabitants was to the south they could only imperfectly +estimate, but it was certainly twenty miles or more.</p> + +<p>What they longed for at this stage more than anything else was the open +country. The proximity of the river would likely be the better place for +them, so early the next morning the team was gotten ready, and before +starting, the Professor made a survey of the surroundings in the +direction that their visitors had gone.</p> + +<p>At several places were indications of tracks, and these were followed, +the team coming along behind. Everything was covered with leaves where +the trees abounded, and in the more open areas the grass was so well +advanced that it was difficult to distinguish tracks in the earth, but +the broken-down grass plainly showed their trail, leading to the south.</p> + +<p>Aside from that, nothing could be gathered to give any indications until +they had proceeded over a mile, when a small rivulet, the first they had +noticed since leaving West River, crossed their route. The Professor +actually bounded forward at the sight and examined the footprints. The +marks of bare feet were visible where they crossed, and they were of +abnormal size.</p> + +<p>After a careful examination, the Professor said: "There must have been +at least a half dozen of them, judging by the different prints. See, +this one has a deformed foot, or the big toe is missing; and this one +must be a large man, judging from the deep impression made." Beyond the +vicinity of the stream all footprints were again lost.</p> + +<p>"As we are now likely to have an open country until we reach the river, +we can make more extended observations from the top of the wagon, and +one should be there constantly to notice any signs on either side."</p> + +<p>They were within five miles of the river, and George, who occupied the +post of lookout on the top bow of the wagon, called out excitedly: "I +can see them; there must be a dozen or more." The wagon stopped, and the +Professor and Harry hurriedly scrambled to the top. John saw the +movement and seemed to understand, for he also crawled up and looked +across the rolling landscape to the southwest.</p> + +<p>In the distance were unmistakable movements of beings moving to and fro. +They were distant at least two miles, and there was no evidence, from +the character of their movements, that anything unusual had occurred, +and it might therefore be inferred that the wagon had not yet been +discovered.</p> + +<p>At last they had come up to the people who occupied such a large share +of their speculations during the past year, and in "<span class="smcap">The +Tribesmen</span>" are set forth the meeting of the savages and the hostile +manner in which they were received, together with some of the things +which really show why the land they lived in might justly be called +"Wonder Island."</p> + +<p>THE END</p> + + + + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> + + +<h2><a name="GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS_USED_IN_TEXT" id="GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS_USED_IN_TEXT"></a>GLOSSARY OF WORDS USED IN TEXT</h2> + +<table> + + +<tr><td>Alloy. </td><td>A combination of two or more metals.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Actinic. </td><td>Photographic rays. Those vibrations above the +vibrations which produce violet.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Acutely. </td><td>To the point. Being keen.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Allied. </td><td>Attached to; bound to; an arrangement with.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Alienation. </td><td>To cause to turn away; to make indifferent.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Amplitude. </td><td>Scope; reach; breadth; fullness.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Antiquated. </td><td>Adapted to the uses or customs of olden times.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Animation. </td><td>Possessing animal life; sparkling; lively.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Antagonistic. </td><td>Against; opposed.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Agility. </td><td>Quick; sprightly.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Assumption. </td><td>Taking it for granted.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Bacteria. </td><td>A microscopic microbe, very minute, widely +distributed in all matter.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Betokened. </td><td>To give promise or evidence of; presage; indicate.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Bestowed. </td><td>To confer as a gift; to give freely as a gift.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Buccaneer. </td><td>A pirate or freebooter.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Bullion. </td><td>Gold or silver in mass, usually in convenient bar.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Calcareous. </td><td>Impregnated with lime, or largely composed of it.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Cardinal. </td><td>Of prime or special importance.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Caulking. </td><td>The process of filling the seams of vessels.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Cavities. </td><td>Holes; depressed portions.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Carbonate. </td><td>To impregnate or charge with carbonic acid.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Calcium. </td><td>Lime.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Canopied. </td><td>A covering. Usually a conical top.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Centrifugal. </td><td>Directed or tending away from the center.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Characterize. </td><td>To delineate or set forth in a particular way.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Consistently. </td><td>Standing together or in agreement.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Convolute. </td><td>Rolled one part on another or inward from one side.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Coefficient. </td><td>A number or letter put before an algebraic +expression, to show that one is to be divided by the +other.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Constant. </td><td>That which is permanent or invariable.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Convex. </td><td>Bulging outwardly; raised.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Conducive. </td><td>Helping; tending toward.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Contingency. </td><td>The awaiting of an event; in the event of.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Compounding. </td><td>Made up of two or more substances.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Contracted. </td><td>Made smaller; reduced in size.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Combustion. </td><td>Being consumed. Disintegration.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Contemplated. </td><td>To consider thoughtfully; to look at attentively.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Caucasian. </td><td>Of, pertaining to, or characteristic of the white +race of mankind.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Consistency. </td><td>Harmonious; not contradictory.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Clarified. </td><td>Made clear; not turbid or cloudy.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Crucial. </td><td>Decisive as between views or theories. Testing.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Cylindrical. </td><td>A barrel-shaped body.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Decoration. </td><td>To adorn with something ornamental.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Debris. </td><td>Accumulation of material.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Defect. </td><td>Something short; not perfect.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Density. </td><td>Closeness of parts.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Delver. </td><td>One who searches into things.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Demeanor. </td><td>Appearance; manner; action.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Domesticated. </td><td>To bring under the control of man.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Delusion. </td><td>The state of being deceived or led astray.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Dilapidated. </td><td>Torn up; fallen into decay; gone to ruin.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Discrimination. </td><td>Ability to select; to judge; to be able to pick out.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Deranged. </td><td>A disordered mind.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Deportment. </td><td>Manner of acting.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Dextrous. </td><td>Skilful; quick; adroit.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Designations. </td><td>A distinctive mark or appellation.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Depressed. </td><td>Lowered; made unhappy or unspirited.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Determination. </td><td>Insistence; firmness; fixed purpose.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Decomposition. </td><td>The act or process of separating anything.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Dimensions. </td><td>The measurements; sizes.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Dilemma. </td><td>A perplexing case to decide.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Duplicated. </td><td>Made in a similar manner.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Duct. </td><td>An opening, hole, or conveyor.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Ductility. </td><td>Capable of being drawn out.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Effective. </td><td>Fit for a destined purpose; a striking impression.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Emergency. </td><td>An unexpected happening calling for immediate +action.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Emaciated. </td><td>Greatly reduced in flesh.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Entranced. </td><td>To put into a state of ecstacy.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Ensue. </td><td>That which follows; to go after.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Enraptured. </td><td>Overpowered with emotion.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Entablature. </td><td>The uppermost member held in place by columns.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Episode. </td><td>A particular occurrence.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Essential. </td><td>The particular thing; the important element.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Estuary. </td><td>The portion at the mouth of a river where it +discharges into another body of water.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Exhilaration. </td><td>Lively, pleasing or enlivening sensation.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Extracted. </td><td>To take from. Taken out of.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Facial. </td><td>Pertaining to the face.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Facility. </td><td>Doing with ease.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fascination. </td><td>A resistible influence. A pleasing impulse.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fathom. </td><td>To find out; depth; penetration.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fermentation. </td><td>A chemical condition where germs are developed and +grow in a substance and change the elements +comprising it.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Feasible. </td><td>Easy to accomplish; that which is practical.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fiber. </td><td>A structure composed of filaments, like a vegetable +stalk.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Formation. </td><td>The manner in which articles or substances are built +up.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fracture. </td><td>A break or crack.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fraternity. </td><td>A body of persons held together by some common tie.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fusing. </td><td>To melt by heat.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fumigating. </td><td>To treat by means of gases.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Fulcrum. </td><td>The support against which a lever rests.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Granulating. </td><td>To form into small grains or particles.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Grotto. </td><td>A small cavern or cavern-like apartment.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Gruesome. </td><td>Suggesting gloomy or frightful thoughts.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Gunwale. </td><td>The upper portion of the hull of a ship or boat.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Horizontal. </td><td>At right angles to a line directed to the center of +the earth.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Hypnotized. </td><td>A treatment which acts directly on the mind or +nervous system.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Impervious. </td><td>Permitting no passage through or into.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Immoderately. </td><td>More than the usual; more than the ordinary.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Instructively. </td><td>Along educational lines; learning things.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Intonation. </td><td>The modulation of the voice.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Inactive. </td><td>Not vigorous.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Intestines. </td><td>That part of the digestive tube below the stomach.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Intimation. </td><td>A hint.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Intruder. </td><td>To enter or appear when not wanted.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Inscription. </td><td>A writing; an announcement.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Inevitable. </td><td>Anything which is bound to happen. A result.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Insulated. </td><td>Shielded from something.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Interim. </td><td>In the meantime. Within certain periods.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Incidence. </td><td>Happening at the same time. A circumstance.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Interpret. </td><td>To make plain. To bring to an understanding.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Ingenuity. </td><td>To devise; to bring forward out of the ordinary.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Inordinately. </td><td>More than the ordinary course or manner.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Indicate. </td><td>To show, or to point out.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Intensity. </td><td>With full vigor; strong; vivacious.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Inverted. </td><td>Upside down. Turned about.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Insistent. </td><td>To continue urging; determination.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Involuntary. </td><td>Without intent; in spite of all precaution.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Inefficient. </td><td>Not careful or prudent; without full capacity.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Jubilant. </td><td>Joyous.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Laboriously. </td><td>Consistently carrying out work without regard to the +amount of labor required.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Lacerated. </td><td>To injure or to tear the flesh.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Lee. </td><td>The side or direction opposite to that from which +the wind comes.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Malady. </td><td>Sickness. Particular kind of illness.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Manipulate. </td><td>The manner of handling. To artfully influence the +result.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Manifestation. </td><td>Made known; acknowledged; understood.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Maneuvered. </td><td>To make methodical change of position.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Maritime. </td><td>Pertaining to the sea, or to naval affairs.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Mercury. </td><td>A silver-white metallic metal in a liquid state.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Minimizing. </td><td>The smallest state. In the least difficult position.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Misgiving. </td><td>A feeling of doubt or apprehension.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Miniature. </td><td>Small; a little copy.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Momentum. </td><td>The power of overcoming resistance possessed by a +body.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Mobility. </td><td>The capacity to change or alter.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Monopoly. </td><td>Possessed of complete power. Full sway.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Nitrogenous. </td><td>Partaking of the qualities of nitrogen.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Normal. </td><td>A perpendicular; according to an established law or +principle.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Obliquely. </td><td>A deviation from the direct line.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Octagonal. </td><td>Eight-sided.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Orbit. </td><td>The course in which a planet travels.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Orifice. </td><td>A hole; an opening.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Orgy. </td><td>Wild or wanton revelry.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Ozone. </td><td>An allotropic condition of oxygen. A substance made +from oxygen.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Pandemonium. </td><td>A fiendish or riotous uproar.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Paleontologist. </td><td>A student in the origin of life on the globe.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Patriarch. </td><td>The elder; the one in a tribe on whom authority +vests.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Pathetically. </td><td>In a vein of sadness; arousing tender emotions.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Parallel. </td><td>On a line with; side by side the same distance.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Paralyzed. </td><td>Loss of power to control the muscles or other parts +of the body.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Penetrate. </td><td>To go into.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Perforation. </td><td>To make an opening or hole.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Periodical. </td><td>At regular intervals.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Peaty. </td><td>Having the characteristics of peat.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Personified. </td><td>To transform from a thought or speech into a person.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Perturbed. </td><td>To be disturbed in mind.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Perceptible. </td><td>Noticeable; seen.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Phenomena. </td><td>Something directly observable; anything visible.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Primitive. </td><td>The first way of doing things; the original plan or +method.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Prospecting. </td><td>Investigating; trying to discover new elements or +substances.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Profusion. </td><td>Many; an abundance.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Port. </td><td>A haven. The left side of a vessel.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Proportionally. </td><td>Relative magnitude, number or degree.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Predominating. </td><td>Overshadowing; possessing power.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Properties. </td><td>The elementary substances of any material.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Propagate. </td><td>To bring to a better condition or state. Making an +improved breed or type of animals or plants.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Prognosticate. </td><td>To foretell.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Promulgate. </td><td>To announce; to give out.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Privation. </td><td>Hardship. To be kept from the necessaries of life.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Promontory. </td><td>A high point of land extending out into the sea.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Progenitor. </td><td>An ancestor in the direct line.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Proximity. </td><td>Close to; in the neighborhood of.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Radiating. </td><td>To emit or send out rays.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Relaxation. </td><td>A change from the ordinary routine.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Retarding. </td><td>Holding back; making the object go slower.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Reticent. </td><td>Habitually keeping quiet or in reserve.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Regulation. </td><td>In accordance with some law or order established.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Refraction. </td><td>That property in light which causes a bend as the +ray passes from one substance through another.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Reverse. </td><td>In the opposite direction.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Rifling. </td><td>Spiral grooves in the bore of a gun.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Rotation. </td><td>Turning; moving around a common center.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Seepage. </td><td>Leaking; passing through.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Sequence. </td><td>That which follows as the result of a certain thing.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Secluded. </td><td>Kept hidden; not exposed.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Spherical. </td><td>Round like a globe.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Spiral. </td><td>Having the twist of a corkscrew.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Spawning. </td><td>The period when fish lay their eggs.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Stringers. </td><td>The longitudinal pieces which form the main frame +of a structure.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Standard. </td><td>A post. Also the flag or ensign of a country.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Strata. </td><td>Parts of layers of earth, rock, or other material.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Strenuous. </td><td>Vigorous; insistent.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Suppressing. </td><td>Trying to keep out of sight; hidden.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Substitute. </td><td>In place of.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Sulphide. </td><td>A compound of sulphur with another element.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Subsided. </td><td>To stop; to proceed no further.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Symptoms. </td><td>Indications; showing effects of certain illness or +treatment.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Synthesis. </td><td>The putting of different things together.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Theorist. </td><td>One who speculates; one who tries to arrange facts +to harmonize.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Timbre. </td><td>The peculiarity of a sound whereby it is +distinguished from another.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Tortuous. </td><td>Moving in a winding or irregular way.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Tourmaline. </td><td>One of the gems, found in various colors.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Traverse. </td><td>Across; traveling; to go over.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Triangulation. </td><td>The method of surveying whereby two known points +are used to find a third, by means of the angles +made.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Utilitarian. </td><td>One who tries to take advantage of any knowledge and +make use of it.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Untenable. </td><td>Without good ground.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Vacuum. </td><td>A space entirely devoid of matter.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Veered. </td><td>Turned aside or in a different direction.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Veritable. </td><td>Truthful; well known to be correct.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Vibration. </td><td>Any movement which is more or less irregular and +continuous.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Vividly. </td><td>Distinctly seen; brightly appearing.</td></tr> + +<tr><td>Wrench. </td><td>To twist violently. To injure by a forcible turn or +movement.</td></tr> + +</table> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="Other_books_from_THE_NEW_YORK_BOOK_COMPANY" id="Other_books_from_THE_NEW_YORK_BOOK_COMPANY"></a>Other books from</h2> + +<h2>THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY<br /> +<span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue</span><br /> +New York</h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</h2> + +<h3>By ROGER T. FINLAY</h3> + + +<p>A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable +experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the +South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the +exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools +and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them +but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The +books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to +know.</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +The Castaways</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +Exploring the Island</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +The Mysteries of the Caverns</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +The Tribesmen</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +The Capture and Pursuit</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +The Conquest of the Savages</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +Adventures on Strange Islands</p> + +<p>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> +Treasures of the Islands</p> + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2> + +<h3><span class="smcap">By</span> J. S. ZERBE</h3> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></p> + +<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all +subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of +tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles +involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the +rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty +illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a +complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most +comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.</p> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></p> + +<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental +principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the +work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been +developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using +technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It +has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred +original drawings.</p> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></p> + +<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical +shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of +shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work, +and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every +subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a +glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature +that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully +illustrated.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS</h2> + +<h3>By ELBERT FISHER</h3> + + +<p>This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who +make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet +with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their +adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter +relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries +through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of +boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The +books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each +chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the +author, and four striking halftones.</p> + +<p>1. From New York to the Golden Gate, takes in many of the principal +points between New York and California, and contains a highly +entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a +little useful information.</p> + +<p>2. From San Francisco to Japan, relates the experiences of the two boys +at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii, +Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and +a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text.</p> + +<p>3. From Tokio to Bombay. This book covers their interesting experiences +in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong and +finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field +seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great +Hyderabad region of South India.</p> + +<p>4. From India to the War Zone, describes their trip toward the Persian +Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site +of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan +through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where +they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa, +and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully +described.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>The Ethel Morton Books</h2> + +<h3>By MABELL S. C. SMITH</h3> + +<p>This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls. +Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our +young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their +accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know.</p> + +<p>In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the +entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of +swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted +as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are +illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text.</p> + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Chautauqua</span><br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship</span><br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Holidays</span><br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Rose House</span><br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton's Enterprise</span><br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0"><span class="smcap">Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge</span><br /></span> +</div></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><span class="smcap">The Hickory Ridge Boy Scouts</span></h2> + +<h4>A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS</h4> + +<h3>By Capt. Alan Douglas, Scout-master</h3> + + +<p>The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid +opportunities to use their recently acquired knowledge in a +practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, +astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp life. A clean, +wholesome story every boy should read.</p></div> + +<p>Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>This tale presents many stirring situations in which the boys are +called upon to exercise ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled +with healthful excitement.</p></div> + +<p>Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to +the credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow +fast, one after the other.</p></div> + +<p>Fast Nine; or, a Challenge from Fairfield</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description +of the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome +thereof, form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball +stories of recent years.</p></div> + +<p>Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest +undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the +good-natured rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many +interesting and amusing situations.</p></div> + +<p>Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face +of apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and +surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories +Captain Douglas has written.</p></div> + +<p>Under Canvas; or, The Hunt for the Cartaret Ghost</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys +by the exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long +puzzled older heads.</p></div> + +<p>Storm-bound; or, a Vacation Among the Snow Drifts</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training +comes to the rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all +concerned.</p></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge Boy Scout Series, all illustrated:—</h2> + +<div class="poem"><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Wild Animals of the United States—Tracking<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Reptiles of the United States<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Fishes of the United States<br /></span> +</div><div class="stanza"> +<span class="i0">Insects of the United States and Birds of the United States.<br /></span> +</div></div> + + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 20614-h.txt or 20614-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/6/1/20614</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig1.png b/20614-h/images/fig1.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a489576 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig1.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig10.png b/20614-h/images/fig10.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a1073e --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig10.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig11.png b/20614-h/images/fig11.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7682dce --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig11.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig12.png b/20614-h/images/fig12.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b8c79e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig12.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig13.png b/20614-h/images/fig13.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..06e4808 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig13.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig14.png b/20614-h/images/fig14.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9ca05a --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig14.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig15.png b/20614-h/images/fig15.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de737b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig15.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig16.png b/20614-h/images/fig16.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..98ea95f --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig16.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig17.png b/20614-h/images/fig17.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..01adbd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig17.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig18.png b/20614-h/images/fig18.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e758db --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig18.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig19-19a.png b/20614-h/images/fig19-19a.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2ae1e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig19-19a.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig2-3.png b/20614-h/images/fig2-3.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9200b5c --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig2-3.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig20.png b/20614-h/images/fig20.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d132cb --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig20.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig21-22.png b/20614-h/images/fig21-22.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..100fa9b --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig21-22.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig23.png b/20614-h/images/fig23.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e64c32 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig23.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig24.png b/20614-h/images/fig24.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..670c8a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig24.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig25.png b/20614-h/images/fig25.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1d1cd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig25.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig26.png b/20614-h/images/fig26.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e29754d --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig26.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig27.png b/20614-h/images/fig27.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..348b561 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig27.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig28.png b/20614-h/images/fig28.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9782490 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig28.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig29.png b/20614-h/images/fig29.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..230a34b --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig29.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig30.png b/20614-h/images/fig30.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b08ceaf --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig30.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig31.png b/20614-h/images/fig31.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b53cdd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig31.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig4.png b/20614-h/images/fig4.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f6fbcc --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig4.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig5-6.png b/20614-h/images/fig5-6.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7dcaaa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig5-6.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig7.png b/20614-h/images/fig7.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b28c5da --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig7.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig8.png b/20614-h/images/fig8.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0651597 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig8.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/fig9.png b/20614-h/images/fig9.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d29f478 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/fig9.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/illus1.png b/20614-h/images/illus1.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dafbff8 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/illus1.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/illus2.png b/20614-h/images/illus2.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..86fda8e --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/illus2.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/illus3.png b/20614-h/images/illus3.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b260ab --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/illus3.png diff --git a/20614-h/images/illus4.png b/20614-h/images/illus4.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d5f3d63 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614-h/images/illus4.png diff --git a/20614.txt b/20614.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..85cbaf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7579 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the +Caverns, by Roger Thompson Finlay + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Wonder Island Boys: The Mysteries of the Caverns + + +Author: Roger Thompson Finlay + + + +Release Date: February 17, 2007 [eBook #20614] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: THE +MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS*** + + +E-text prepared by Joe Longo, Mary Meehan, and the Project Gutenberg +Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net/c/) + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 20614-h.htm or 20614-h.zip: + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614/20614-h/20614-h.htm) + or + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614/20614-h.zip) + + + + + +The Wonder Island Boys + +THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS + +by + +ROGER T. FINLAY + +Illustrated + + + + + + + +The New York Book Company +New York +Copyright 1914 + + + + +[Illustration: _"The professor was reading the scrap, and silently +handed it to George"_] + + + + +CONTENTS + + + I. MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF THE TEAM + + The runaway team. Circumstances leading up to the present + condition. The singular occurrences. Examining the tree. The search + for the yaks. Red Angel as a scout. On the tracks. Losing the + trail. Red Angel's discovery. The wrecked wagon. The lost weapons + and ammunition. Breaking in new steers. The planting program. + Different plants and soils. Prospecting for ores and vegetation. + Discussing hunting trip. How people of different countries select + soils. Wild fruit and vegetables. Lessons from the actions of their + animals. Propagation of fruit and vegetables. Chemical changes + produced by different soils. The wild potato. + + II. WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT + + Determine to bring in the newly discovered lifeboat. Trip to South + River. Finding the broken yoke of their team. Recovering the + lifeboat. Uses for the bolo. Decision to row the boat around the + point. Making more guns. Preparing new tools. Alloys and their + uses. Hardness of metal. Bronze. Ancient guns. Manganese. Making + stocks for the guns. Commencing the hull of the new boat. Size of + the vessel. About shape or form of hulls. Momentum. Resistance. Red + Angel's attempt to whistle. Amusing performance. Teaching Red Angel + accomplishments. Vibration, the universal force. + +III. THE HIDEEN MESSAGE + + The new yoke for the yaks. Some of the mysteries. Discussion + concerning future discoveries. Rainbows. Musical pitch and colors. + Reflection and refraction. Riding the yaks. Completing some of the + guns. The trip after the wrecked wagon. Finding their runaway team. + Accounting for their disappearance. Prospecting. Sugar cane + discovered. Sorghum. The Tamarisk. Rigging up the lifeboat with + sails. Discovery of a hidden message in the lifeboat. Examining the + place where it was found. Determining the time when the message was + written. Rushing preparation of guns and ammunition. Galena. Lead. + Getting rid of the sulphur. Making bullets. + + IV. THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS + + Completing the guns. Description of the new ones. Polishing grit. + Emery. Corundum. Laying the keel of the big boat. Terrible winds. + The monsoons. Trade winds. Length of summers north and south of the + Equator. Disappearance of the flag from Observation Hill. George + and Angel's hunt for the flag. Disappointment. Angel finding the + flag. Angel's laugh. Facial expression in animals. Brass. The form + of bullets. Why pointed at one end and hollow in the other. Rifling + guns. Spiral movement. Molds for castings. The Professor's desire + to fully explore the cave. Weaving the sails for the new boat. + Angel's work on the loom. + + V. THE VOYAGE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ANGEL, AND THE DISCOVERY + + Completing the hull of the new boat. Making manilla rope. Decide to + take Angel along. Enticing him aboard. His consternation. Rounding + the cliffs. Discovering their first boat among debris. Taking it + along as a trailer. Sailing up Cataract River. Evidence that their + boat had been used by some one. Proof of its use by the natives. + One of the signs of civilization. Leverage. Fulcrum. Mechanical + powers. Delay of voyage owing to weather. Tourmaline. Harry's + invention. The bamboo tubes. Testing how fast the guns could be + loaded and fired. Cartridges. The marine works. The boats. Three + cheers for the new ship. + + VI. THE GRUESOME FINDS IN THE CAVE + + The cave. Taking the boat to explore the interior. The air pocket. + A board for charting the cave. The boat on the wagon. Entering the + cave. The lights. Returning for the boat. The peculiar noise at the + cave entrance. Methods for searching the cave. The domed chamber. + Making a circuit within it. The outlet. The second chamber. The + chalk icicles. Limestone. Volcanic action. Carbonic acid, and what + it produced. The caves of the world. What is learned in searching + caves. Their archaeological knowledge. A peculiar formation in the + large chamber. A platform within a recess. Skulls and skeletons. + Ancient weapons. Evidences of a terrible conflict. Musket balls. + Dirks and unknown forms of weapons. Singular copper receptacles. + Curiously wrought knives. Articles of furniture. Decayed clothing. + Kitchen utensils. Why the cave takes care of the smoke. + +VII. THE TREASURES OF THE CAVE + + The couch in the recess. Chests of gold. A pirates' lair. The + ancient coins. Peculiar articles of ornament. The lid with mocking + lock. Rings; bracelets. The buccaneers. The sermon. Ghastly relics. + A perceptible movement in the atmosphere. Startling supposition. A + possible outlet in the side of the hill. The slab of carbonate. The + writing on it. An accident and the finding of other skeletons. The + light shining into the cave. Discovery of the outlet. View of the + cataract from the opening in the hillside. The boat in the cave. + Taking it out by the hillside opening. The Professor's search. + Return of the boys with the team. Re-enter the cave. The Professor + lost. Hunting in the unknown passages. Return of the Professor. + Taking two of the skeletons to the laboratory. + +VIII. REMOVING THE VESSELS FROM THE CAVERNS + + Completion of the boat. Making a trial voyage. Rounding the cliffs. + Trip to the south. The forests and the mountains. On the south + coast. A raging storm. Seasickness and dizziness at great heights. + The calcareous slab from the cave. The letters on it. Photography. + Reagents. Photographic light. X-rays. Taking the copper vessels + from the cave. Gathering up the bones. Evidences of the strife. + Spanish inscriptions. Gold bullion. Silver ornaments and vessels. + Decayed chests. The coins. Peculiar guns. Non-effective powder. + Disappearance of Angel. Return of Angel with a rusted modern gun. + Iron or steel guns. Powder as a factor in making weapons. + + IX. MAKING ELECTRICITY + + Their present condition. What they had accomplished. Working for + love. Contemplating the hoard in the cave. Selfishness at the + bottom of the pirates' lives. Gathering sugar cane. Honey, and its + uses in ancient times. Beets and various tubers. Fattening + properties. Nitrogenous matter. The load of cane. Making a sugar + mill. Lime in sugar-cane juice. Clarifying sugar. A candy pulling. + Granulating sugar. The earth as a magnet. Electricity. Positive and + negative. Magnetic poles. Likes and unlikes. Making a magnet. + Retaining magnetism in a bar. + + X. STARTING ON THE VOYAGE TO THE WEST + + A barometer. Air pressure. A compass. The atmosphere. Dry weather. + Observing weather conditions. Providing compartments in the boat + for provisions. Bedding. Water supply. Faith. Preparing a tablet + for the Cataract. A terrific storm. A delayed departure. How delays + have often proved valuable to investigators. Starting the voyage to + the west. Striking a course. Observations on speed. Going with the + wind. Tacking. Angles of incidence. The action of air on a surface. + Determining the pressure of air by its velocity. Flying machines. + Time and speed in a vessel. Qualities necessary in a sailor. + + XI. A TERRIBLE VOYAGE AND THE SHIPWRECK + + The shadows of night. Recalling memories of their shipwreck. The + charting board. Cardinal points of the compass. How direction + traveled is laid out on the chart. Measurement by angles. A weary + night. The watches. The wind changing. The second day. Cliffs + beyond. Sailing against the wind. Rounding the northern point. The + fourth day. The increasing gale. Night. The lights to the south. + The gale turning to a storm. Driven back. A night without sleep. An + appalling monsoon. Springing a leak. The Professor exhausted. + Danger ahead. The cliffs. A maelstrom in sight. Averting the + danger. Recovery of the Professor. Steering for shore. Striking the + beach. The vessel shattered. Stranded miles from home. Taking up + the march. Putting an inscription on the boat. Nearing home. + +XII. THE RETURN TRIP. THE ORANG-OUTANS + + The blackened fire space. Discovery of their own camp in the + forest. An adventure in the woods. A huge bear. George's shot. + Charging the Professor, and his shot. Attacking George. Safety + behind a fallen tree. Search for the luggage. The cries of Angel. + The bear finding their packages. The bear making use of their + things. What they had left. The yellow pear. Guava. The coffee + tree. Cherries. Gathering coffee berries. How Angel made himself + understood. His excitement. The discovery of a number of + orang-outans. Red Angel visits them. He is not welcomed. Return of + the animal. The clearing in the woods. Recalling the fight of the + bears over the honey. + +XIII. THE STRANGE VISITOR + + The flag on Observation Hill. Approaching Cataract. The alarm by + Red Angel. The house intact. Discovery of a man at the stable. His + peculiar actions. Lost memory. Aphasia. Unable to speak. + Recognizing the signal flag on the strange man. Provided with + clothing. A peculiar malady. The instinct of self-preservation. + Going with George to Observation Hill. The actions of a sailor. The + stranger visits the workshop. Expert with the use of tools. + Projecting an exploring trip by land. Naming the stranger John. + Startled at sound of the name. Mechanically performing work. + Examining the skulls. + +XIV. AN EXCITING TRIP TO THE FALLS + + The food supply. Butter. Cream. Centrifugal motion. Difference in + specific gravity between cream and milk. Making a cream separator. + Vegetables. Onions. Chives. The stranger as a prospector. Procuring + samples. Peculiarities of his malady. An exciting encounter with a + bear. John's skill as a hunter. Another honey tree. Killed with a + spear. The bear pelt. Visiting the falls. Action to indicate that + John recognizes the falls. + + XV. THE STORY OF THE CAVE + + Mystery about John. Humanity's search. The desire to know and + acquire. Gathering supplies for an extended trip by land. The boys + visit the cave. Determine to search the chamber visited by the + Professor. Gorgeous calcareous hangings. The ghosts of past + centuries. Gold and silver vessels. Skeletons. A recess. A row of + chests. Spanish guns. The chained skeletons in the recess. An + arsenal. The struggle. Locked in the embrace of death. Ancient + origin of the cave. Paleontology. Stone and bronze ages. Atlantis, + the great continent in the Atlantic, which disappeared. Story of + the Egyptian priests. The actinic rays. Purifying action of + sunlight. Bacteria. Glass houses. The eye. How it expresses + character. Laughter. How it brightens the eye. Fishhooks. A fishing + party. The salmon. + +XVI. MUSIC AND ANIMALS + + Preserving fish. Why heat is used. The use of tin for cans. Music. + The violin made by the boys. Violin strings; what they are made of. + How they are prepared and treated. The concert. How the music + affected Red Angel. John enraptured. How it touched him. The change + in his eyes. The field mouse. How different animals are moved by + music. The lion. Hippopotamus. Tigers. Monkeys. Momentary flashes + of intelligence in John. Building a new wagon. Finding and making + paint. Lead. Fermentation. Flax. Driers. Turpentine. Synthetic + food. Analysis. Tubes for powder. Completing the guns. Stocking the + wagon with provisions. Starting on the trip. Jack and Jill. The + sixth trip. + +XVII. THE TRIP THROUGH THE DENSE FOREST + + The trip along Cataract River. The great forest. How Angel + traveled. Reaching South River. Discovering a second falls. Where + the debris on a seashore comes from. The jungle. Leaving the river. + The two animals in the night. The camp aroused. A fight in the + dark. The puma. The frightened team. The injured yak. Animal + language. The panther. Trying to avoid the forest. Growing denser. + John and Harry scouting through the forest. Blazing a trail. The + hidden luncheon. End of the forest. Returning to the wagon. The + noise in their path. The wagon following the trail. The injured yak + improving. + +XVIII. SEEING THE FIRST SAVAGES + + Teaching Angel. Finding a campfire. Determine from the conditions + that it was recently made. Prospecting from the tops of trees. A + climbing ring. How made and used. The climbing operation. Harry + sees another forest to the south. Clear in the west. The wounded + yak calls a halt. Resuming the journey. Harry in the grasp of a + giant anaconda. John severs its body with a bolo. Boa constrictor. + The python. The Cashew tree. Gum arabic. Seeing the West River. + Discovering signs of habitations to the south. Course to be + followed in meeting the natives. Hearing voices in the night. + Crackling of twigs. A party of savages. The next morning. Examining + the tracks made by the midnight party. Following the trail thus + made. The open country. The first view of the inhabitants. + + + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + + +"The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George" + +"'We have probably found a pirate's lair, and here is the booty'" + +"The Professor walked toward him and held out his hand" + +"With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last +coil" + + + + +LIST OF FIGURES + + + 1. The Broken Yoke + + 2. Top View of Boat + + 3. Side View of Boat + + 4. Cross Section of Boat + + 5. Force of Momentum + + 6. Red Angel + + 7. The Color Spectrum + + 8. Reflection Angle + + 9. The Hidden Message + +10. The First Gun + +11. The Bullet + +12. The Sea-going Boat + +13. The Cave + +14. The Slab Found in the Cave + +15. Old Coins Found in Cave + +16. Cane Crusher + +17. A Magnet + +18. Magnetic Induction + +19. The Two Magnets + +20. Making a Permanent Magnet + +21. Illustrating Wind Pressure, 1 + +22. Illustrating Wind Pressure, 2 + +23. Mariner's Compass + +24. Chart of the Voyage + +25. The Charting Board + +26. Guava + +27. Coffee + +28. Cream Separator + +29. The Lion and Cubs + +30. The Puma + +31. The Acajou + + + + +THE MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS + + + + +CHAPTER I + +MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF THE TEAM + + +The boys looked at the Professor in amazement. They were too much +excited and concerned at the new situation to be able to interpret what +the sudden disappearance of their team meant. + +The Professor turned to the boys: "Are you sure the yaks were tied +before we left them?" + +"I was particularly careful," answered Harry, "to tie both of them." + +"I am pretty sure that both were securely fastened, and they were in +that condition when I came back the last time," was George's reply. + +To understand the peculiar situation above referred to, it will be +necessary to go back and briefly relate some of the remarkable events +which had taken place in the lives of the three people concerned in this +history. + +George Mayfield and Harry Crandall, together with a Professor, were +mates on a ship training school, which sailed from New York one year +before. A terrific explosion at sea cast them adrift in mid-Pacific +Ocean, and after five days of suffering they were cast ashore on an +apparently uncharted island, without any food, and entirely devoid of +any tools, implements or weapons. + +Exercising the knowledge of the Professor, and the ingenuity of the +boys, they gradually dug from mother earth and from the rocks and trees +the articles necessary to sustain life, and eventually they found +different ores from which various implements and weapons were made. They +constructed numerous machines, crude, at first, and gradually developed +them. They succeeded in capturing yaks, a bovine species of animals, +some of which were trained like oxen; wagons were built; a shop +constructed; a water wheel installed; a primitive sawmill put up; a +primary battery made; articles of clothing woven; felt made; and +numerous things of this character originated from material which nature +had furnished in its crude state. + +While doing all this the desire to explore the island was a +predominating one. Four trips into the interior had been made in order +to ascertain whether or not it contained any human beings. During those +trips numerous evidences were found to show that savages were there, and +some indications that civilized people had visited the island. + +The peculiar happenings which excited their interest were the mysterious +things that occurred at various times, among which the following may be +briefly enumerated: The disappearance of a boat, which they built, and +which was left at the place where the team was lost; the subsequent +finding of the boat among debris on the seashore, having oars and rope +in it which were strange to them; the removal of the flagpole and flag +which had been erected up on a high point near the ocean, called +Observation Hill, and the fire in the forest. + +To the foregoing may be added the discovery of a prospecting hole, which +had been dug, evidently, by some one in the hope of finding mineral; a +yak with a brand on it; wreckage of a boat, which, undoubtedly, belonged +to their ill-fated ship; a gruesome skeleton on the seashore; and +finally one of the lifeboats of the schoolship and a companion to their +own, found on the shore of the stream where they now were. + +All these things were sufficient not only to cause alarm, but the +greatest consternation on the part of the boys. It must be said, +however, that the trials of the boys, under the calm, calculating +deportment of the Professor, had done much to make them self-reliant. +George, the elder, was of an exceedingly inquisitive turn of mind; he +was a theorist, and tried to find out the reason for everything. On the +other hand, Harry was practical in all his efforts; he could take the +knowledge obtained and profit by it, as the previous volumes show. It +was fortunate, therefore, as the Professor put it, that theory and +practice were personified in the two boys, who, although companionable, +were the exact opposites as types. + +The Professor never showed a preference, in any manner, for either. Like +the true philosopher he saw the value of the two distinct qualities, the +one useless without the other. + +When they had fully recovered from their astonishment, George was the +first to speak. "They may have broken the fastenings." + +The Professor, who had been intently examining the tree to which they +were hitched, said: "I can find no evidence of any undue wrench which +might show that they had gotten away by their own exertions. Let us see +whether we can follow the trail." + +The ground was covered with leaves, so that no earth was visible, and +the only sort of trail left in a forest, under those conditions, is the +slightly depressed tracks which the wheels make. They examined this, +noting also the overturned leaves, which are usually left in the wake of +cattle. + +The latter means seemed to be the only available way in which any trace +could be made out, and this they followed. It led directly to the west, +and toward the section they were desirous of exploring at the time the +present trip was inaugurated. + +"How fast do you suppose the team is traveling?" + +"Certainly not faster than we are now going. They cannot be hurried very +well, as you know, and we should be able to overtake them within an hour +or two." + +"But what shall we do if we find them in charge of somebody?" + +That suggestion brought up at once a very serious question. They had +made six pistols, very crude, it is true, but which served admirably as +weapons of defense; but the hazardous part of the present situation was +that only the Professor had one of the pistols, the others having been +left with the team. The only thing which added some comfort was the +knowledge that as the pistols required a special hook to enable them to +cock the firing plug, and as the Professor had this hook, those who took +the team might not be able to use the weapons against them. + +At this place it might be well to refer to Red Angel. Nearly nine months +before, on one of their trips, a baby orang-outan had been captured, and +the boys educated him, as best they could, and he really developed many +reasonable instincts. It was Red Angel who left the wagon and followed +them down the river, and who by his peculiar actions attracted attention +to their missing team. + +"We owe something to Angel for his cuteness in coming for us," said +Harry. + +The orang progressed rapidly, swinging, as he did, from tree to tree on +the route, and when no trees were in sight, would shamble along in a +peculiar way, as it is difficult for them to walk erect. Their feet are +not adapted to promote a graceful gait. + +"The track seems to be lost," said the Professor. "I cannot make it out, +either from the leaves or the depression. However, it appears best to +follow this course." + +Without stopping they proceeded in the same general direction. Red +Angel, who up to this time had followed the route taken by the party, +now turned to the right, and when George called, refused to return. As +George walked toward him, he kept advancing to the right, and could not +be induced to come back. + +"Probably we should follow him," was the Professor's conclusion. + +It was evident from Angel's antics that the change in the course +delighted him. + +George, who was ahead, soon stopped, and shouted back, gleefully. "Here +are the tracks! Good fellow, come here!" + +Angel understood this. He had actually sensed the direction taken by the +missing team, for here were the tracks. The only thing that grieved +George was the absence of the honey pot. Angel's weakness was honey, and +that was now with the team. + +Suddenly Angel, who was now in one of the large trees which grew all +along the course, began an excitable chatter, and vigorously jumped from +one limb to the next, and George, who knew his antics pretty well by +this time, stopped and prepared himself for some new and unexpected +development in this remarkable journey. Angel, on the other hand, +started off through the trees with wonderful agility, and it was all the +boys could do to follow. + +There, ahead of them, was the wagon perched against a tree, one of the +front wheels and an axle broken, and the tongue wrenched off; but the +yaks had disappeared. It is singular that the team had gone thus far +without meeting an obstruction. As it was, one wheel had locked with a +tree, and the yaks, by their tremendous power, had broken the parts +mentioned and gone on. + +Before the wagon was reached, however, numbers of articles were found +scattered along the trail, which were gathered up. + +The finding of the wagon was an intense relief. Their minds had been +perturbed with this occurrence, as never before, and they had met +numerous thrilling episodes before. + +"Something must have frightened the yaks, and they were going at a much +greater speed than at a walk when they collided with the tree," observed +the Professor. + +"Why do you think so?" asked Harry. + +"In the first place, the fact that our articles were scattered along the +path before they reached the tree; and, secondly, the wagon pole and the +wheel were strong enough to hold the yaks against the tree if they had +been moving along at their usual gait." + +"Well, I am thankful that we have the wagon, even though the yaks are +gone," said George, as he crawled into it. He peered out and continued +in a surprised tone: "Where do you suppose the pistols are? Did you +leave yours in the box, Harry?" + +"Yes; on the right side. Yours were there at the time. I saw all of +them." + +"They are not here now, and it is likely they have been lost with some +of the other things." Harry was up in an instant. + +"Where is the ammunition?" + +"It was all in the bottom of the box." + +It did not seem at all likely that the pistols or the ammunition could +fall out of the box. It is true other things had fallen along the way, +but this seemed to be such an unlikely occurrence that they could +scarcely credit it. + +The provisions were safe, and you may be sure that Angel was not only +petted, but he received a good share of the delicious sweet. + +It was now nearing night, and they were fully ten miles from home. Ten +miles is not a long tramp, but to travelers like ours, already weary +with their trudging and with the excitements of the day, it was +concluded to camp in the wagon for the night, and then proceed home +early in the morning. To take the wagon would be an impossibility. + +They really learned to love the patient yaks. For fully five months they +had been daily companions, and were now so well trained that some +discouragement was felt at being compelled again to break in others. +They had an ample supply of good material in the herd to pick from, but +it took time and patience to develop such a team as had been lost. + +During the entire night one of the trio kept watch, not so much from a +feeling of fear as in the hope the yaks would return during the night; +but they were doomed to disappointment. Morning came, but the yaks did +not, and after gathering together the most useful belongings, and +putting them into convenient bundles for carrying purposes, set out for +home. + +The first question taken up by the boys after their return was the +selection of a pair of young steers for the new team; and the work of +making a new pair of yokes was carried forward with energy. They were in +the midst of the planting season which had been interrupted when the +last journey was undertaken. + +Hitherto it had been the custom to devote at least one day each week to +hunting, on which occasions they also made trips to such points in the +island as had not been previously visited; and it was also a part of +their duty to examine the woods and the fields to find new specimens of +plants, fruits and flowers; and among the hills and ravines were many +kinds of ore, some of which they had been fortunate enough to find on +their entry to the island. + +The metals thus found were utilized, because they had set up a workshop +alongside the sawmill, and in it had a crude lathe adapted to work in +wood or iron. It will thus be seen that each tour was for prospecting +purposes, to supply their needs, as well as to learn what the island +contained. + +Each evening it was the habit to have a general discussion concerning +the events of the day, or with reference to matters of moment about the +work to be done on the morrow. + +George was much interested in the planting program. "What kinds of +vegetable would it be most advisable to plant in the space we have +prepared?" + +"One of the important points to consider in the planting of all crops is +whether the soil is adapted for it. When the United States were first +settled it was a surprising thing that many of the original settlers +would go miles inland, exposed to every sort of danger, to find land, +when there was plenty nearer the seashore or close to civilization. +There was a reason for that which we are only now beginning fully to +understand. Plants have a habit of growing in soil adapted for their +needs, and it would be an interesting study in going over our island to +consider the habits of plants in this respect." + +"Is that the reason why different countries have such different kinds of +plants?" + +"Yes; plants select their soil, and owing to these habits, every variety +of soil, in every climate, supports its own vegetable tribes. Of the +five thousand flowering plants of central Europe, only three hundred +grow on peaty soils, and those are mainly rushes and sedges. In the +native forests of northern Europe and America, the unlettered explorer +hails with joy the broad-leaved trees glittering in the sun among the +pines, as a symptom of good land, which he knows how to cultivate. The +rudest peasant in Europe knows that wheat and beans seek clay soils; the +northern German knows that rye alone and the potato are best adapted for +the blowing sands of that country; the Chinese peasant, that the warm +sloping banks of light land are fitted for the tea plant, and stiff, +wet, impervious flooded clays for his rice. Even the slaves in the +Southern States were aware that open alluvial lands were best suited to +cotton; and the degraded slaves of Pernambuco know that the cocoa grows +only on the sandy soils of the coast, just the same as in west Africa +the oil palms flourish on the moist sea sand that skirts the shore, and +the mangroves where muddy shallows are daily deserted by the retiring +tide." + +"Some time ago you stated in one of our talks that soil was the +necessary thing to select in order to propagate, or make good fruit and +grain out of the poor or wild kind. Were all our vegetables and grains +originally wild?" + +"Originally nothing in the way of fruit, flower, grain or garden +vegetables was anything but wild and unproductive, or bitter, tasteless +or unprofitable. Chemical changes are made in the plant by the soil in +which it grows, because it is from the soil that it gets its food. The +large and juicy carrot found at home is nothing but the woody spindle of +the wild carrot, and I have found several species of it here. Cabbages, +cauliflowers, Brussels sprouts and a host of other like vegetables were, +in their natural state, poor, woody, bitter stems, and had useless +roots. As I have already stated, the wild potato, which we are now +cultivating, has, in its original state, a bitter root, as you have +discovered." + + + + +CHAPTER II + +WORKING ON THE NEW BOAT + + +Early the following morning Harry sprang out of bed and hurriedly +shouted: "What did we do with the lifeboat in South River? Do you +remember whether we secured it when Angel came up and let us know about +the team?" + +The Professor and George were up in an instant. George was the first to +answer. "I left it the moment Angel came up." + +"I cannot remember," said the Professor, slowly, "but it seems to me, +now that I think of it, we left it on the banks, and it wouldn't do to +leave it there. You must go for it at once, and bring it down to the +bay, even though you cannot bring it around the cliffs." + +A hurried breakfast was prepared and the boys started off at an eager +pace for the river. They went directly southwest, aiming to strike the +river near the falls, and after passing over familiar ground, came +within several miles of it, when, in going down one of the sloping +descents, saw, in the distance, what appeared to be portion of the yoke +which the yaks carried. + +They hurried forward, and great was the delight at finding it was really +one of those they had made and used for months. It was a gratification +to know that the animals were east of the falls, and, probably, sooner +or later, would turn up at their home. Only one of the yokes was found, +but there was evidence that both of the yaks were freed, since the part +of the other yoke was still attached to the part found. + +The boys were glad of this, as they had such a friendly feeling for the +animals that they could not but feel that to be yoked together in the +forest would be a cruelty to them. + +"The Professor will be glad to know this," said George. "Look at this +part of the yoke, where it has been broken. I have no doubt that this is +where they struck the tree where the wagon caught." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 1. THE BROKEN YOKE_] + +"Let us take it with us, by all means," said Harry. An examination of +the yoke plainly showed where it had come in contact with bark with +considerable force. "What do you suppose caused them to be so frightened +as to run away?" + +They quickened their steps, and soon reached the river. There, on the +shore, was the lifeboat, as they had left it, and it was the work of +minutes only to set it adrift, and after depositing the yoke in the +bottom, the first task was to supply themselves with a pair of oars. + +The first article turned out in the way of tools was a bolo, a heavy +cleaver-like blade, used by many primitive tribes. This article was +duplicated by them, and always carried on all their expeditions. With +this several small trees were cut down, and a pair of oars fashioned for +each, and within an hour they were on their way down the stream, and in +two hours more had rounded the point of projecting land east of the +river mouth. + +"Don't let us take any more chances of losing this boat. I am in favor +of taking it around, and am willing to risk the tide, whatever it may +be." + +Harry's suggestion met with favor on the part of George, and when the +point was rounded and they were out in the ocean, the tide, although +coming in, had no terrors for them, but they boldly plied the oars, and +before four o'clock had rounded the cliff point, and steered the craft +into the mouth of Cataract River. + +The Cataract was a much smaller stream than South River, and it was on +the northern side of the island; whereas South River was on the +southerly side of the island. Less than a quarter of a mile from the +open sea was a cataract, at which their home was located, and the +cataract was utilized as the means for producing water power. + +Their appearance below the Cataract was hailed with delight by the +Professor, and you may be sure that when the boat was finally landed and +hauled up on the beach, all of them joined in the congratulations, which +was their due. + +"Just to think of it. If we had the boat we made, our lifeboat and all +the parts of the wreck of the other boat, we would have a pretty +respectable navy," was Harry's observation, when they landed. As it was, +they now had the wrecked after part of their own lifeboat, and here was +the other lying alongside. They knew the history of one of them. Would +they soon know why the other should have been found in the interior of +the island under such peculiar circumstances? + +"And where did you get the yoke?" asked the Professor, as his eye caught +sight of it. + +"Two miles this side of the falls." + +They little knew at this time what an important bearing the finding of +this boat would have on their future course, nor could they know how +this little incident would be of the greatest value to some of their +companions on the ill-fated ship. + +They now had possession of a boat which, while it was practically +unsinkable, was not of such size as to meet their demands for the +intended explorations. They felt that to attempt to circumnavigate the +island and take all the chances which a meeting with natives might +involve, would necessitate a much larger vessel. To add to the +difficulty, all the pistols but one had been lost in the last trip, and +to attempt to make explorations without proper weapons would be +foolhardy. If they knew one thing, with any degree of certainty, it was +that the island contained savages of some description, and provision +must be made for every contingency. + +Harry took upon himself the task of turning out more of the weapons, and +with the experience of the past four months in this line of work, +concluded he would attempt a better job than simply making pistols. It +was his ambition to make a firearm that would enable them to bag the +largest game, and also, at the same time, carry the bullets a greater +distance than the short eight-inch barrels could. + +To do this it was necessary to provide longer bits, and as the design of +the new guns contemplated a barrel at least eighteen inches long, the +bits had to be longer, in proportion, and the making of these consumed +nearly as much time as the actual drilling out of the barrels. + +George and the Professor put in a great deal of time with the new team. +Their knowledge of training, in view of the former experience with these +animals, was such that within a week they could drive the yaks without +much difficulty, although the new team was not by any manner of means as +efficient as the lost one. + +When the question of the kind of material for the guns came up, Harry +was much concerned, as in making the barrels that length would +necessarily greatly increase the weight. + +"I think it would be better to make an alloy for your purposes," said +the Professor, as they were discussing the matter. + +"What is an alloy?" + +"It is the combination of two or more metals." + +"In what way does the alloy make it better than the hardest steel?" + +"It is not hardness you want, but toughness. Metals have several +properties, which are utilized for various purposes in the arts. +Surprising as it may seem, wood has greater resisting power than +diamond, and yet the precious stone is the hardest of all substances." + +"But if we unite two metals are we not then making a new metal?" + +"Not necessarily so. In the case of brass it is true. This is made by +uniting two parts of copper and one of zinc. Both copper and zinc in +themselves are very soft, and copper cannot well be polished in its pure +state. Brass, however, is not only much harder, but is susceptible of a +very fine polish." + +"Are the alloys of all metals harder than the metals of which they are +made?" + +"This seems to be a universal law in the compounding of metals. Very few +metals are used alone in the various arts and manufactures. For every +purpose some combination has been found which makes the product better. +Even coins are so alloyed. Silver and gold in the form of money would be +entirely too soft, unless alloyed with some hardening metal. Some +substances, like arsenic, antimony and bismuth, are too brittle to be +used alone. The only metals which can be used alone are aluminum, zinc, +iron, tin, copper, lead, mercury, silver, gold and platinum." + +"What is bronze, of which all the ancient guns were made?" + +"That is a combination of copper and tin. This product was known fully +seven hundred years before the Christian era, and was used in the making +of guns until superseded by the various steel alloys of our day." + +"In what proportions are copper and tin united to make bronze?" + +"The proportions vary greatly. Ancient Celtic bronze had 12 parts tin +and 88 of copper; Egyptian, 22 tin, 78 copper; Chinese, 20 tin, 80 +copper; Roman, 15 tin, 85 copper; and in many specimens lead and zinc +were also used. Tin has a capacity to harden almost any metal." + +"What is the best metal to harden steel?" + +"Manganese, of which you will remember we have some samples; it is the +most serviceable, as we have neither nickel nor chromium." + +"What amount of that metal should we use to get the best results?" + +"About 14 per cent. of manganese has been found the best for such +purposes as would be required in gun barrels. There is a curious thing +which has been discovered in uniting manganese with steel. It becomes +fairly tough if 1 per cent. is used with the steel; if the quantity +added is between 1-1/4 and 3-1/2 the strength and ductility decrease; +but above that, up to 5 per cent., the steel becomes brittle; above +6-1/2 per cent. it again returns to ductility and toughness and its +maximum strength is found at 14 per cent." + +During the evenings all took a hand at cutting out the stocks for the +guns, and the plans upon which they were constructed will be fully +explained and illustrated in the order of the work done. + +Meanwhile it must not be supposed that work on the new boat had ceased. +Harry's plan, when fully worked out, provided for one twenty feet long +and six and a half feet wide amidships. + +The drawing (Fig. 2) shows the construction of the hull. As they had no +means for doing any fancy bending of the boards, the bottom was made +flat, and the sides sloping. The bottom and the sides were made in the +following manner: Two stringers (A, A) were first constructed, which +were made up of thin pieces nailed together, so they could be bent in +the proper shape for the bottom boards, which were laid crosswise and +nailed to these stringers. + +[Illustration: _Fig 2. TOP VIEW OF BOAT_] + +[Illustration: _Fig 3. SIDE VIEW_] + +For the upper edges of the sides, called the gunwale (B, B), similar +stringers were provided, but they extended farther fore and aft, and +amidships were fully six and a half feet apart, whereas the lower +stringers amidships were four and a half feet apart. This arrangement, +therefore, provided for sloping sides, and the side pieces ran up and +down on the inner course. It will be understood that the sides and +bottom thus formed were to be overlaid with thin boards running fore and +aft, as in Fig. 2, as they had no means for matching the boards and thus +putting them together tightly. + +The sides were two and a half feet high. Six and a half feet from the +forward end was a cross beam (C), into which the mast was to be stepped. +At the stern the bottom was sloping upwardly at an angle and brackets +(D) were extended back and joined at their rear ends, to which the lower +end of the rudder post was attached. + +Amidships a keel (E) was formed, projecting down from the bottom, this +keel being, at its widest part, two feet, and tapering down to merge +with the bottom, fore and aft. The cross section (Fig. 4) shows how well +he had formed the vessel, proportionally. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Cross Section._] + +In addition to the cross seats, similar arrangements for comfort were +made along the sides, and beneath the side seats were spaces in which +their supplies were to be placed. The space forward of the mast was +entirely closed over with a roof which sloped in both directions, and +here provision was made for two berths. This would also afford them +protection and serve as a means to keep out the water and insure at +least one dry spot for their comfort. + +As usual, George had some inquiries to make about the boat. "It has +always been a matter of wonder why all boats are made with the big +bulging part nearest the forward end?" + +The Professor's eyes twinkled. "Probably there are a great many others +who have had such thoughts. There is really no reason for it. It is not +known how the custom originated, except that in sailing vessels the +claim is that the ship can be maneuvered more easily by such +construction." + +"In what way does it make it easier to handle?" + +"When a ship is driven forward by the wind, all the force exerted on the +sails is transferred to the forward part of the ship, hence if made +narrow at its forward end it would be driven down into the water, and +the hull would, therefore, be submerged more at the forward than at the +rear end. Furthermore, by having a tapering rear end, the rudder has a +better opportunity of veering the ship around and you can see that the +bulging part, being located forward of the middle portion of the ship, +acts as a sort of pivot." + +"But it seems to me that none of the reasons given will apply to a +steamship, and still all the ships I have seen are made in the same way +as the sailing vessels." + +"That is exactly what I inferred in my answer to your first question. +The truth is, that in experiments which have been made, it is shown that +to have the widest part of a steamer near the stern, gives lines to a +hull which has less resistance than if made in the conventional way." + +"I thought probably the reason for making them so was just the same as +in the case of an arrow, where the heaviest part is at the forward end." + +"In that case an entirely different principle is involved. A body falls, +or is projected through the air, with its heaviest end foremost, because +of the greater momentum in that portion." + +"It is the force of a body in motion. When a body is projected through +the air it meets with the resistance of the atmosphere, and this also +serves to turn the heavy side around to the forward end, because the +force of momentum in the heavy end is much less affected by the +resistance of the air than the lighter end." (See Fig. 5.) + +[Illustration: _Fig. 5._] + +Red Angel had now been with them more than six months, and he was +probably a year old. When first captured he was a scrawny infant, dull +and stupid, like all of his class. He had wonderful powers in the way of +imitating habits and customs. The boys were very good vocalists, and +while at work Harry would sing, but George whistled. It was an amusing +sight to watch Red Angel when the boys engaged in the frequent concerts +at night. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 6. Red Angel._] + +But of all the screamingly funny exhibitions, the attempt of Angel to +imitate whistling was the most ludicrous. The orang's lips project too +much to a point, and the jaws are so narrowed that the lips will not +pucker. Whenever the boys commenced their concert Angel would be on +hand, and enjoyed every moment of the time, and the boys had many a +concert purely for his benefit. + +At the end of each concert the whistling would begin. This invariably +brought Angel to the front, and his exhibitions would be given with the +utmost gravity and earnestness. The invariable result would be such +uproarious fits of laughter on the part of all that he would take part +in the jollification, little suspecting that the laughter was at his +expense. + +The only sound which he could emit during these performances sounded +like a high-pitched stick rattling along a pale fence; but he was +inordinately proud of it. It had always been on one key, heretofore, and +without variation; but this evening Angel startled himself, as he did +the others, by actually sounding two additional notes. He repeated this +over and over. + +"I wonder if we could make him talk?" asked George, after the laughter +had subsided. + +"There is no reason why some tones cannot be imitated. As the orang +possesses wonderful powers of imitation and has, in captivity, developed +many traits, I see no reason why simple words, or sounds, cannot be +taught." + +"I know there are words which he does understand. Time and again I have +told him things, which he seems to understand. Now see if he understands +this: 'Angel, do you want some honey?'" + +His attempts at whistling ceased, and in a moment more was in the +kitchen. Harry, who by this time had recovered from his mirth, thought +it would be a good idea to attempt to teach him. + +"If canary birds and dogs can understand language, I do not see why +Angel shouldn't." + +"Unquestionably, any animal, by patience, will learn the meaning of +sounds. Constant repetition of certain notes causes birds to repeat +them. I have known dogs to perform almost anything they were told to do, +although they are not able to utter a single sound of the words emitted +in giving the command." + +"Well, what is it that causes sound?" + +"The most wonderful thing in nature is, that she manifests herself in +only one way, namely, by a movement, or a motion of some kind. Vibration +is the term used to designate this. Sound, light, heat, taste, smell, +and everything which becomes sensible to us is produced by vibration. +The movements of the heavenly bodies, swinging back and forth around the +sun, like huge pendulums, the movement of the sap in trees, up and down, +the beating of the heart, the winking eyelids are all motions which show +energy, development, life." + +"But what is it that makes us understand one sound from the others?" + +"Simply the difference in the kind of vibration. There are three things +which characterize sounds; namely, pitch, intensity and character. Pitch +depends on the rapidity of the vibrations; intensity on the extent or +the amplitude of the vibrations; and character on the substance or +instrument producing them. To illustrate: When you sing a very high note +the vibrations may be five thousand vibrations a second, or there may be +only two thousand during that time. That represents the pitch. In +singing that note you may sing it so loud that, like a pendulum, it will +swing way over to one side, or it may move only a short distance. That +represents intensity. If either you or George had sung that note I +should have been able to detect it, whatever its pitch or intensity, +because your voices are as unlike as different musical instruments, and +that is character, or timbre, as the French call it." + + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE HIDDEN MESSAGE + + +While the work of getting out the planking for the boat was going on, +and the plowing had now been resumed, since the new yoke of oxen were +fitted to do the work, the boys were not forgetful of the usual weekly +outing. They had several quite important things right at home which +needed looking into, if they wanted to solve some of the things on the +island. First, the cave, which they had twice attempted to explore; the +search for their lost boat, which had the strange rope and oars; and the +mystery of the flag and pole. + +These things weighed heavily on their minds, because these happenings +were close at hand. But what made the greatest impression on the minds +of all was the finding of the _Investigator's_ lifeboat. It seemed +almost like a call to them from the interior. The impatience of the boys +was almost beyond restraint, at times. + +"It does seem to me that we should not delay an hour in making some +effort to explore the direction the boat came from," was George's view +of the situation as they canvassed the subject. + +"That is my idea, also, and I am not in favor of giving much more time +to hunting or other forms of recreation until we know how that boat came +to South River." + +"Yes; I can appreciate how anxious you are," said the Professor, after +the boys had given their views. "What we are doing, however, is +essential from every point of view. We must prepare provisions, so that +we shall be able to know where we can get them in case of need. On the +other hand, weapons are necessary, which take time to construct. If, +however, it is thought advisable, we might make a trip of explorations +along the South River, beyond the falls, the time to be limited to a +week; but I have my doubts of the wisdom of such a course." + +This suggestion appealed strongly to the boys, who were always keen for +anything which savored of adventure, and it was some time before the +boys could reconcile themselves to the saner and more business-like +course of completing the boat and making the trip by water. + +The weather was beautiful, and vegetation was springing up in abundant +profusion everywhere. Magnificent showers fell at intervals, and the +rainbows, more beautiful than any they had ever heretofore seen, spanned +the heavens after the showers. + +This had been noticed during the previous year, but now, after nine +months of their life, with the wonderful insight which their needs had +instilled into them, made them very observant of every phenomenon. + +"I have often wondered," observed George, as he gazed at the beautiful +broad band which formed a crescent across the heavens, "why there are +never any rainbows in the middle of the day. They are never seen except +in the morning or in the evening, and usually only in the evening." + +"In order to understand that it will be necessary to explain what a +rainbow is. As I stated previously, light is merely vibration. Now +colors are formed by the different lengths of the vibrations, just the +same as the different musical notes are made by the different vibratory +lengths. To understand this more fully, I make a sketch (Fig. 7), which +shows just what I mean. You will see that red is the lowest musical +pitch, which we will call C, and to the right is a long, wavy line. D, +the next pitch higher, might resemble orange, with the wavy line a +little shorter, and so on, until we reach the highest note in the scale, +where the wave lengths are very short. You have probably noticed that a +drop of water in the sunshine glistens, and, if closely observed, may +have seen that it was colored, particularly blue or green. As the rays +of the sun strike the globe of water, they produce different wave +lengths, and in that way make it appear to you as being possessed of +colors. Now, a rainbow is nothing more nor less than sunlight passing +through the drops of water which are suspended in the air and causing a +refraction of the light. At noon the sun shines down from overhead, and +we are not in the proper position to see this refracted light; but in +the morning or in the evening the sun shines against the earth at an +angle. At those times we are able to see the effect of refraction by the +colors produced. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 7. THE COLOR SPECTRUM_] + +[Illustration: _Fig. 8. REFLECTION ANGLE_] + +"When you throw a ball against a wall at an angle, it bounds away at the +same angle. That is reflection, and is just exactly what light does when +a ray strikes a mirror. If, on the other hand, the glass had no mercury +on it to reflect the light, the ray would not go straight through, but +would bend, just as you have seen a stick in a glass of water appearing +as though it was bent below the water line. That is refraction." + +Two weeks of very vigorous work had now been put in since the yaks had +disappeared, and the wagon was still at the edge of the forest. George +was anxious to recover it, with the new team, and with Harry started out +early in the morning to make up as much as possible lost time, as every +hour was considered valuable in their enterprises. + +The yaks could be ridden as well as horses, but the greater part of the +way were driven. One of the guns which had been completed was taken +along, as well as the only pistol which the Professor had saved. In less +than three hours the forest was reached and they were soon within sight +of the wagon. + +"What have we there?" cried Harry, as they neared the spot. + +"Our yaks! And where do you suppose they have been?" + +Close by the wagon were the yaks, as though patiently waiting for the +boys. They made no resistance, nor show of fright, when the boys +approached. One of them, Jack, still had the strap tied to the horns, +and it was the halter which had been attached to the tree at South +River. + +A hasty examination was made, but if either of the boys came to any +conclusion concerning it, nothing was said. Without wasting time, the +team brought with them was yoked up and the broken wheel replaced by a +new one. The repairs to the wagon tongue did not take long, and they +were ready for the return. + +"What shall we do with Jack and Jill?" Those were the names bestowed on +the first team. "Let us see if they will follow us." + +They had gone fully one hundred feet before the yaks made any sign, and +then slowly followed, thus assuring them that no care or attention would +be required in that direction. Both boys were intensely delighted at the +recovery of their favorites and could not get home fast enough to give +the Professor the good news. + +Nearing home, the Professor, who was on the watch, came out to meet +them, waving his hat at the sight of Jack and Jill. When the latter came +up he went over and affectionately petted the creatures, who seemed to +realize the welcome. + +"I hope they are as glad as we are; I can understand why they got away; +look at the end of this thong." It plainly showed the teeth of some +animal which had gnawed the leather of which it was made. + +"So you have been out prospecting, too?" was Harry's query, as he saw +the queer-looking reeds on the table in the laboratory that evening. +"What do you call that?" + +"Our honey has been getting low, and I took the occasion to-day to bring +in some samples of sugar." + +"Is that sugar cane?" + +"Yes; the true sugar cane." + +"Is that different from sorghum?" + +"This is the species which grows in the southern part of the United +States. The kind you know and which is cultivated in the Northern +States, is the Chinese Sorgo, or, as we call it, sorghum. It is equal in +quality and in quantity to the southern species and is readily treated +to produce molasses or sugar." + +"What is that peculiar flower, if it is a flower? I never saw a flower +like that; it seems to be hard." + +"I was surprised to find this. It is called the Tamarisk. This long, +oval-shaped part is made by an insect which inhabits the plant, and is +eaten by the inhabitants in the plains east of the Mediterranean Sea. It +is there called Mount Sinai Manna, and is supposed to be the Manna which +the Jews found when they were in the Wilderness after the Exodus." + +"I think we have properly named this place Wonder Island." + +In the volume preceding this, when they first considered the building of +a new boat, it was decided to graft an extension to the after part of +their wrecked lifeboat; but when the second one was found, and +calculations were made as to its usefulness, it was discovered that such +a course would not be wise; hence the larger vessel was found to be the +only solution. + +The newly discovered boat was, however, a valuable addition, as it +afforded a means by which short trips could be made, and Harry quietly +set to work making a sail and rigging up a mast, so that the +long-cherished desire to make these trips could be undertaken before +they were ready to launch the real vessel. It was hauled up on shore and +caulked and new parts added to make it adaptable for the purpose. + +While engaged at this work he removed the cross seat which still +remained, and in doing so was surprised to find a piece of cardboard +which had been hidden, apparently, at the end of the board. Eagerly +picking it up, he saw writing on it, with the following words: "We +cannot hold out much longer. Wright and Walters were captured yesterday. +WILL." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 9. THE HIDDEN MESSAGE_] + +Harry could hardly contain himself, as he rushed up to the laboratory, +crying out: "George, come here, quickly! I have found something!" +Without waiting to see whether George heard, he rushed into the +Professor's den with the paper in his outstretched hand. "Look at this; +don't you remember Will Sayers? I am sure it is Will." + +George heard his excited voice, and appeared without any delay. + +"What is it now?" + +The Professor was reading the scrap, and silently handed it to George. +"Did you know either of the boys mentioned in this?" + +Neither had any recollection of Wright or Walters, but they inferred +that the writer must be Will Sayers, one of the companions. The +Professor had no recollection of the boy, nor could he remember the +other names. + +"Let us examine every part of the boat," was the Professor's first +suggestion. "We may find something more to give some clue." + +The boys rushed down to the beach where the boat was moored, the +Professor following. + +"Show us the exact location of this strip." + +"I had just taken off this cross seat, and as I did so this piece fell +from the end." + +"Let us put it back again and see how it fits into that place." + +When it was replaced they noticed that a crack was left at each end of +the seat, not exceeding an eighth of an inch. + +"It is very plain that the piece you found was at this end, and if it +was folded as this crease indicates, it could have been concealed there +and thus escaped our observation." After some minutes' examination, he +continued: "This piece must have been there for some time." + +"Why do you think so?" + +"You will notice that the end of the board has the marks of the folded +paper, showing it must have been in its place of concealment for some +time. Furthermore, the paper itself indicates that it has been there for +some time, by the discoloration on its outer side." + +"How long do you think it may have been there?" + +"It is impossible to say; but certainly for several months." + +"Doesn't it seem reasonable," Harry inquired, "to think it was some one +from the _Investigator_? Otherwise, how is it that they had possession +of the boat?" + +"That is the problem we shall now have to find out." + +Thus, in another direction, was found an evidence that savages were on +the island and that others had been wrecked and found a refuge there. +How much of a refuge it was to them they had no means of knowing. They +were thankful their own lives had been preserved and had been permitted +to accomplish so much during their enforced stay. + +"We are now vigorous and strong and have been blessed with energy as +well as health. It is our first duty to take up the task of finding our +comrades, whatever the cost may be. If that is your view, we should +proceed with that determination, but let us prepare for it in the best +manner possible. How long will it take to finish the six guns you are +now at?" said the Professor, looking at Harry. + +"I will try to have them ready within another week," was his reply. + +"In the meantime, George and I will prepare a new lot of powder; and for +your further information, I will state that I have been busy during the +past week in making preparations to extract some lead for bullets." + +This announcement was hailed with joy. Heretofore they had to depend on +the iron slugs which had been turned out, and they were not at all +satisfactory, because they lacked the proper weight. + +"Which is the lead?" asked George, who was examining the samples. + +"It is this bluish-gray sample of galena, which, as you see, looks like +lead itself, and is often mistaken for it; but it is far from being lead +of the kind we can work." + +"Why not?" + +"Because it is in what is called a sulphide form. Do you remember what a +sulphide is?" + +"Yes; it is where it is in combination with something." + +"That is a fairly good definition. More or less sulphur is found in all +metals, but when found in large quantities the ore is called a +sulphide." + +"How can we get rid of the sulphur?" + +"We can cook it and drive it off like steam. Lead melts at a low +temperature, comparatively, about 600 degrees Fahrenheit, so that with +our furnaces it will be a very easy matter to get a pure lead." + +During the rest of the day all were in the laboratory, superintending +the preparation for the work, and at the Professor's suggestion the boys +took the team in the morning and brought in over a hundred pounds of +galena to be treated. + +Before noon they had forty pounds of a very fine quality lead, and the +work of making molds for the bullets was begun. The Professor, however, +suggested that the boys should devote their time to the construction of +the boat and guns, and it was difficult to decide what was the proper +thing to do first. + +The Professor saw the dilemma and had a very earnest conference on the +subject. + +"You must not, by any means, be carried away with undue eagerness and a +desire for haste. The first essential of good business is to do +everything in order. It is better to plan carefully every step in +advance, so that you will know just when your energies will be required +for the next step. An eminent engineer, on one occasion, in answer to a +question as to why he was always prepared for an emergency, laid down +this rule: Whenever you have a problem to solve, work it out in more +ways than one. If one fails, you can apply the other immediately. +This can be done without a moment's delay. Therein lies the +answer--preparedness." + +The boys readily saw the force of the lesson. From that time on it was +not necessary to direct the order of events. Each saw to it that the +part allotted to him was carried out in a determined spirit. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE TERRIBLE MONSOONS + + +Of the two most urgent articles, namely, weapons or the boat, it was +decided that the guns should be completed first. The feeling that the +time would come when a visit from the savages might be expected at their +home, contributed to this decision. + +Six barrels, each eighteen inches long, and with a bore three-eighths of +an inch in diameter, had been turned out, and several of the stocks had +been made at odd times during the evenings. As Harry had sufficient +steel left for four barrels more, two days were devoted to boring them +out, in the hope that they would ultimately be able to finish them up. +They would then have a battery of ten guns, and the necessity of having +a number arose from the fact that they were muzzle-loaders, and could +not be reloaded rapidly. + +A sketch of the gun with the firing mechanism is furnished, in which it +will be seen that the firing plug travels in a bore formed through the +stock; in a line with the barrel. This plug had an upwardly extending +finger, so it could be drawn back against the resistance of the spring. +Below the plug was a trigger, with a hook-shaped forward end, in such a +position that when the plug was drawn back the hook would catch and hold +the plug until the lower right-angled projection of the trigger was +pulled back. This would release the plug, and the spring would then be +driven forward and explode the cap. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 10. THE FIRST GUN_] + +"It would be well," said the Professor, "to polish the inside of the +bored barrels, and thus make a much better weapon." + +"How can we do this?" asked Harry. + +"There are several ways, but the better plan would be to take a good +polishing material, in the form of a fine sand or grit, and mix it with +oil. This can then be put on a wiper which will snugly fit the bore, and +the barrel may then be put in the lathe and rotated at a high rate of +speed with the wiper in the bore, and during the rotation the wiper is +drawn in and out. This operation should be continued for an hour at +least, frequently withdrawing it to add more of the polishing grit." + +"What is the best grit to use?" + +"If we can find a sample of the adamantine spar, in sufficient +quantities, it would be the best substance." + +"What kind of material is that?" + +"It is a substance known as corundum." + +"Is that the same as emery?" + +"What is known as emery is the more or less impure product from the same +source. I think I have stated heretofore that both of these products +come from the precious gems; the blue variety is known under the name of +sapphire; the red as ruby; the yellow as oriental topaz, and the violet +as oriental amethyst." + +During that and the following day the Professor spent some time in +prospecting for the gems, but if he succeeded in finding any samples he +did not make the discovery known. + +A few days after this Harry announced that he was ready to lay the keel +of the new boat. All the material had been prepared, and was at the +beach. Prior to this the island had been visited by a heavy storm. They +had been frequent within the past month, but this was not considered +unusual. + +The Professor insisted that a temporary shed should be erected to cover +the material, as moisture would make it very undesirable for the vessel, +and a day was occupied in putting up the structure. + +An entire week thus passed, every hour of which was devoted with the +utmost diligence to the various enterprises. The keel was laid and the +work of putting on the bottom boards was progressing rapidly. One night, +a few days after the laying of the keel, a brisk wind sprang up, which +continued during the night, increasing in fury, and in the morning +evidences were seen on all sides of the effect of the tempest. + +"It seems very singular," was George's observation, "that we should have +such terrible winds here." + +The Professor had evidently expected the storms. "Do you remember the +experience we had less than a year ago? We had five days of this on the +ocean." + +"I had forgotten that. Do they occur every year?" + +"You may have heard of the monsoons, a periodical wind in the Indian +Ocean, which is a northeast wind, and they blow with greater or less +force from November to March." + +"What causes them to blow with such regularity during those periods?" + +"Ah! that is one of the things which it has been difficult to determine. +They appear to be modifications of the trade winds. While, as stated, +the northeast winds blow during the periods mentioned, they have the +southwest monsoons, which blow from April to October. As these violent +winds are the most tempestuous during the period when the sun crosses +the equator, it has been argued that it is due to the action of the sun +being in such a position that its rays strike the earth in the center of +its rotation, thus heating up the air and causing it to rise rapidly +along the middle belt." + +"Is that what we understand by the equinoctial storms?" + +"The equinoctial storms come in March and September, when the days and +nights are of equal length." + +"I was told by a teacher that the summers are longer north of the +equator than south of it; is that true?" + +"Yes; the summer north of the equator is about seven and a half days +longer." + +"What is the cause of that?" + +"The earth is at its greatest distance from the sun during the summer +months, and the angular motion of the earth in its orbit is slower. The +result is, that the interval from the March to the September equinoxes +is greater than from September to March." + +Harry made his way through the violent wind and rain to the boat shed. +He came back with a sorry-looking countenance. "I am afraid everything +is soaked beyond recovery." He was almost on the verge of tears. + +Before noon the rain abated somewhat, but the winds still blew strongly, +and when they ventured out to take stock of their surroundings, George +was the first to notice the disappearance of the flag on Observation +Hill. Rushing in to the Professor, he cried: "Our flag is gone." + +Harry was at the boathouse, and when George went down to inform him of +the new calamity, he was almost heart-broken. The Professor, however, +was not in the least perturbed. He laughingly chided them and soon +restored the boys to their usual gay and happy demeanor. + +"Such little incidents as we have met with this morning only give us +variety. We need something of this kind to add zest to life. Just +imagine what life would be if everything turned out just as you wanted +it or willed it? You would commit suicide within a week." + +The boys smiled, but at the same time their eyelids did double duty in +the blinking line for a little while. + +George straightened himself out and looked up the hill. "Well, I am +going for that flag whether it blows or not," and he started for the +hill. Angel, who was in the loft, swung down and made his way out of the +door, and before George had gone fifty feet, was at his heels. "And you +are going, too? Good boy!" and George actually hugged Angel. He +understood. + +Arriving at the hill he made an examination, and found that the +halliards had been broken and the wind carried away the flag, halliards +and all. As the wind came from the sea, the flag must be inland +somewhere. Search was made in every direction, but to no purpose. Every +rock and lodging place was examined, but it had disappeared. Angel was +an interested searcher. He really seemed to divine George's mission. At +every bush, or rock, or other possible landing place, he would be the +first, and peer around, and look up and down, just as he had seen George +do. + +The quest kept up for over an hour, and, sadly disappointed, he returned +with the news of his failure. The Professor took the loss lightly. "I +presume it is intended that we should work out our own rescue. After +all, I think that is the proper thing to do. If we depend on others we +are sure to meet with disappointment and failure. Cheer up, boys; flag +or no flag, let us do our duty." + +"I don't mind the loss of the flag so much because it prevents us from +having a signal, but I hate to think that we lost so much good time in +making and putting it up." + +The flag alluded to was sixteen feet long, laboriously made out of ramie +fiber, which was woven, and then dyed, and it was a hard task to haul +the pole, which was over fifty feet long, from the forest ten miles +away, to say nothing of the labor required to raise it. + +As soon as the thoroughly drenched material at the boathouse could be +brought out and dried in the sun, which now came out bright and warm, +the work proceeded with renewed vigor. Late that evening the Professor +appeared at the rear of the laboratory, and called loudly to the boys. + +When they appeared at the laboratory he was laughing immoderately, and +Angel stood on one of the tables with a simian grin. + +"What is the matter? Has Angel been experimenting again?" + +Before the Professor could answer, George caught sight of the flag. + +"What! The flag! Where did you get it?" + +"Ask Angel." + +The boys laughed, and George actually hugged the animal, in his delight. +Did Angel know what he had done? Ask those delvers into the mysterious +realms of thought, what prompted him to search for and restore the flag? +Is that any more remarkable than the recorded tricks of dogs and many +other animals? + +You know just how boys can laugh when they are really happy. Angel +imitated that laugh, and he had not been taught to do it, either. It +came without teaching. + +When the Professor had wiped away some of the tears which had come from +the excess of laughter at the imitating efforts of the animal, he said: + +"Did it ever occur to you why Angel has always had a solemn look? The +facial expression seldom, if ever, changes, and they rarely ever exhibit +mirth. You may imagine the condition of those animals, living in the +forests, with enemies all about them, and the struggle for existence an +everlasting one. They have never known amusing incidents as we +understand them. Naturally, the muscles of mobility in the face, which +express pleasure, never have been exercised, and those indicating fear +and anger unduly developed. Here is Angel, in a new atmosphere, where he +sees delight depicted on the countenance, and, gifted as he is, with +wonderful powers of imitation, has learned to actually laugh, and to +enjoy the scene." + +"Well, Professor, as we have one of the guns polished up and completed, +wouldn't it be well to make the bullets?" + +"For that purpose I suggest that we make the molds out of a metal or +alloy which has a higher fusing point than lead." + +"What is best for the purpose?" + +"We might make an alloy of copper and zinc." + +"Oh! You mean brass?" + +"Yes; that is readily cast and easily worked." + +"But what shape shall we make the bullets?" + +"They should be made long, with a pointed forward end." + +"Why is a long bullet better than a round or globe-shaped ball?" + +"There are several very important reasons. First, momentum is a prime +element in a missile. A long one contains double the metal of a +spherical one. Second, it can be made so that it will expand when the +explosion of the powder takes place." + +"In what way does it expand?" + +"You have noticed that the rear end of the bullet has a cavity. When the +explosion takes place the thin shell at the rear end of the bullet +expands, so that it tightly hugs the bore of the gun." + +"What is the object of having it do that?" + +"To give the ball the benefit of the charge of powder exploded. If it +does not fit tightly in the bore, more or less of the powder will pass +the ball, and thus the ball loses part of its force." + +"What is the object of rifling the gun?" + +"The object is to impart to the bullet a spiral motion, as it moves +through the air. Metals have not the same density on all sides and this +is particularly true of molded balls. As a result, when projected from +the gun, the heaviest side has a tendency to divert the ball and make it +more or less erratic in its motion, and, therefore, inaccurate. The +spiral motion has the effect of minimizing this difficulty. The cavity +formed at the rear of the projectile was devised particularly to cause +the thin lip of the bullet to be driven into the grooves formed in the +gun barrel, and by that means the boring motion was transmitted to the +bullet." + +"But as we have no means of rifling our guns, there will be no necessity +of putting the cavity in the rear end of our bullets." + +"We must have the cavity there, by all means." + +"What for?" + +"Simply because we do not want the bullet to turn around and travel end +over end after it leaves the gun." + +"How does the cavity prevent this?" + +"You have probably forgotten that a body travels through the air with +its heaviest end foremost. When a cavity is made it is lighter at that +end. Without the cavity, if the forward end is pointed, it will, on +leaving the gun, turn around and go through the air with the blunt end +foremost." + +The molds were made, as directed, of a hard brass composition, and when +they were ready to cast them the Professor cautioned against making any +castings with the molds in any position except upright, so that any +inequality in the density of the metal would not form itself on the side +of the cast article. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 11. THE BULLET_] + +Quite a time had now elapsed since the last exploration of the cave +beyond Observation Hill. The Professor had spoken about it on several +occasions. For some reason he was intensely interested in doing that. In +fact, he appeared to be more concerned about that than any other of the +unknown things about the island. + +The boys could not understand this peculiarity. He had never been +questioned on the subject directly, but it was evident he had a reason +for this predominating wish to continue the exploration. + +George was just as much interested, but, as the sequel will show, for an +entirely different reason. Ever restless, and always willing to +undertake anything which promised to delve into hidden things, he +approached the Professor one day with the suggestion about the cave. + +"I think we ought to take one day off and go to the cave." + +The Professor was interested at once. "It will not do to attempt it +now." + +"And why not?" + +"I am afraid we could not get in very far, unless we had a boat." + +"Then why not use our lifeboat?" + +This suggestion met with instant favor. + +"True, I had forgotten about that." + +It did not take George long to reach Harry with the news that the cave +was to be explored by means of the boat. After considering the matter +for some time it was decided to put off the trip for several days at +least, principally because the late heavy rains had, in all probability, +so filled the cave that they might be stopped in their progress before +going very far. + +It should be stated that when they entered the cave the first time, +water was found about two hundred feet from its mouth and that barred +their further progress. On the second trip the water had receded, so +they could go in six hundred feet before coming to the water's edge. The +late rains may have filled the cavities, thus making progress still more +difficult. + +Harry was carrying forward the boat construction, and by the occasional +aid of George was bringing the hull to a completed state. While this was +being done, George was at work with the loom, slowly weaving out the +fabric for the sails. As the mast had been stepped back over six feet +from the prow, it was concluded to make a mainsail and a jib, a small +triangular sail which is attached to the forwardly projecting jib-boom. +The two sails would afford greater speed than a single sail, and that +was one consideration. The other was, that with two sails the mast would +not need to be so long, and the dimension of the mainsail could be +reduced, and still get the same efficiency. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 12. THE SEA-GOING BOAT_] + +The weaving of a large sail in one piece was impossible, as the loom +could turn out goods only thirty inches wide, and as it could be +operated by hand power solely, it will be seen that the sails required +not only time, but an immense amount of patience. It is no wonder that +George was anxious to take a day off at the cave, or anywhere else that +afforded a change. + +While at work Angel was his constant companion. It is remarkable what a +degree of friendship and companionship grew up between the two. In the +course of time the weaving process became so familiar to Angel that +whenever George would throw the bobbin, containing the weft, through the +opening of the woof threads, the animal stood ready to pull the heddles +forward, so as to force the last weft thread up against the one +previously threaded across. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE VOYAGE FOR THE BENEFIT OF ANGEL, AND THE DISCOVERY + + +Within the next week the boat hull was practically completed, and now +needed caulking. For this purpose the hemp, which had been found, as +previously stated, was broken up, and as much of the woody portions +removed as could be taken out, so as to make it available for filling in +the crevices between the planking. + +The mast was stepped in, and a sufficient quantity of manilla rope +twisted for the sails, and also a supply put aboard for other needs. The +sails were not yet completed, but they would doubtless be ready by the +time the other parts were. + +In one of their evening conferences George expressed his concern about +the future of Angel. + +"For my part I do not want to leave him behind." + +"Then why not take him with us?" asked the Professor. + +Harry had some doubts on this point, but George was too insistent to +brook any thought of leaving him behind. + +"I make this suggestion, George: Before the time of sailing it would be +advisable for you to make several trips with Angel in the small boat, +and see how he behaves. In some respects he would be an acquisition to +us." + +The boys had not forgotten how the animal, during their various trips, +had been of material assistance, nor the times when nutting how Angel +understood what they were after, and would climb trees and shower them +down, and then gravely help to load them into the wagon; and they +remembered the recovery of the flag. Such service was appreciated. + +As it was, Angel was invited to take a sail. The lifeboat recovered in +South River had been named No. 2, as they insisted on calling their own +wrecked vessel No. 1. + +No. 2 was launched. A small sail, had been rigged up, and two good oars +provided for it. Angel was completely at the command of George, and when +he was called and taken down to the landing in front of the boathouse, +he went without any hesitancy. But to induce him to enter the boat was +another matter. + +Suspecting there would be some difficulty, George pulled a small jar of +honey from his pocket, and silently began to eat it. Angel's eyes +blinked. It was such an unheard of thing for George to do this without +extending an invitation to join. He shambled over, but George walked to +the boat and sat down in it, not appearing to notice the eager look on +the animal's face. + +Without further urging he stepped aboard, and George put his arm around +him, as Harry, with oar in hand, pushed the boat from the shore. Angel +was startled, and tried to get away, but soothing words soon quieted +him, and before they reached the mouth of the Cataract he was leaning +over the gunwale and playing with the water in the most approved +boy-like fashion. + +When, however, they had passed the comparatively calm waters in the +estuary, and were rounding the cliffs, poor Angel forgot his sport, and +sat as one paralyzed, gazing at the sight of the waves beating against +the shore line. George went up to him, and spoke encouragingly, and it +was fully a half hour before he was restored to his usual calm. Then, +apparently, he noticed for the first time the peculiar rocking motion of +the vessel. Every time it swayed to the right or to the left he would +give that peculiar chuckle which always indicated delight. + +They went around the point to the east, and passed down the coast in a +southerly direction, going as far as the cape north and east of the +mouth of South River. + +"Steer for the shore, George; steer for the shore; what is that to the +right?" said Harry, pointing to the beach. + +"It looks like a boat, sure enough." + +As the wind was coming directly from the shore they had to depend on the +oars to bring the vessel around, and as they came in could distinctly +make out the side of a boat lying among debris, in an inclined position, +against a rather steep beach. + +"It is our boat, Harry." The moment their vessel came alongside, Angel +jumped off and leaped over to the boat on the shore. Evidently he also +had recognized it. + +"Well, isn't this a find?" + +"How long do you suppose this has been here? I am glad we gave Angel an +outing." + +"Shall we take it with us?" + +"Yes; if we have to carry it overland," was Harry's reply. + +"Let us float it." + +It was not much of a task to do this, and with a short rope it was +hitched to the stern of No. 2. Angel remained in the recovered boat, and +when No. 2 was pushed from the shore, and the sail set, its movement did +not seem to perturb him in the least, but when the oscillations again +began to be perceptible, he commenced to gurgle, and George knew they +had a good sailor to take with them. + +The sail took a little over three hours, and as they passed up the +Cataract River, and approached their home, the boys set up a welcoming +shriek, in imitation of incoming steamers, which so delighted Angel that +he scampered in a delirium of joy from one end of the craft to the +other. It is doubtful whether he had ever in his short life had such a +glorious time, and that he remembered it his subsequent history +furnishes the best evidence. + +The Professor was just as much delighted as the boys at the sight of +their first marine production, which had gotten away from them and +stranded them on the cliffs three months before. "I am sorry now that +you named the other boats, because this is really No. 1." + +"Never mind; this is good enough to be No. 3. Just look at our navy!" + +"Where did you find it?" + +"Near the point, south of the bay." + +"Then it must have been washed there during the late storms, because I +do not think it is possible that it could have gone there at the time it +escaped you, as the wind was blowing directly to the west at that time." + +The boys now remembered the circumstance, and as they recalled the +condition of the driftwood around it when they found it on the beach, it +was plain that the storm had been their friend in this case. + +"Have you been using oars on the boat?" was the Professor's inquiry, as +he bent over the side and examined the notches which were made for the +oars. + +"No; why do you ask?" + +"This boat has been used by some one, and not very long ago, at that. +Notice how the forward sides of these notches are worn. It also seems +that civilized people have been using the boat." + +The information was so startling that neither of the boys could answer +for a moment. Did they have another mystery to contend with? + +But George was alert on the questioning end of any proposition. "Do you +really think white people have had the boat? I do not see anything that +would make you think so." + +"If they were savages they wouldn't use the oarlocks or notches, as they +row free-hand, almost without exception; but get a white man in a boat, +and the first thing he looks for is a place to put his oars in. This +incident in itself shows one of the distinguishing features between the +civilized and the uncivilized people." + +"In what way is one civilized and the other not?" + +"I did not say one was civilized and the other uncivilized. The most +wonderful thing in the advancement of the human race from a state of +savagery to civilization, was the discovery and utilization of a +fulcrum. Whenever man, in an advanced state, undertakes to do anything, +he uses a fulcrum of some kind." + +"In what way is it so useful?" + +"Primarily, in the form of a wedge, a pulley, a wheel and axle, an +inclined plane, a screw or a lever. All these forms do the same thing as +the simple lever; and what sort of mechanism could be made without some +of these elements? The row-lock is simply the fulcrum for the oar, is it +not? When Archimedes discovered the principles of the lever, he was so +excited that he declared he could move the earth if he could find a +fulcrum." + +A careful examination of the notched gunwale showed conclusively that it +had been used to a considerable extent. George sat and pondered over +this. "I am sure we never used the boat enough with the oars to wear it +in this way. Had you examined this when you said that the boat had not +been long at the point where we found it?" + +"No," answered the Professor; "I simply remembered that on the day you +lost it the wind was blowing to the west, and as you found it to the +east of the cliffs, I inferred it must have been carried around since +that time." + +"It is evident then that the people who used this boat live to the west +of us?" + +"That is my only conclusion." + +"Then you think the fire in the forest, and the light which we saw that +night beyond the West River, were made by those people?" + +"I am sure the fire we saw was made by savages, but I am not so certain +about the lights having been made by them." + +Harry looked at the Professor, and then at George, and slowly shook his +head. "Wasn't it lucky we didn't meet them when we made our trip to the +river?" + +That evening the inevitable subject of their forthcoming voyage was +again discussed, and to the surprise of the boys, the Professor urged +delay. His reasons were expressed as follows: + +"While we have had some very severe storms of the kind which may be +expected, we are not sure that the weather is yet fully settled. That is +the only reason I urge delay. If, on the other hand, we should decide to +take an overland journey, we could set out at once." + +Harry was opposed to taking another trip by land. "We have really found +out more by the water route than going by land. For that reason it would +be well for us to make at least one adventure by sea." + +These arguments prevailed in the minds of all, and while it would take +some time before all preparations could be made, all were happy at the +thought that when they did undertake the journey something definite +would be learned to clear up a few of the mysteries of Wonder Island. + +The Professor did find some samples of tourmaline, in a finely divided +state, and this gem was used to polish the gun barrels, so that all the +weapons were finally put into condition where they could be used. During +an hour each day all took a part in practicing in a range specially +prepared near the workshop. Distances were laid off accurately, and the +regulation targets set up. In this manner they became accustomed to +loading and firing with facility and a considerable degree of accuracy. + +If anyone, not knowing the situation, had dropped in on this scene, he +would have considered himself in the midst of a great naval and military +camp. At the workshop were the guns, arranged in order; boxes provided +for the bullets; small turned out wooden cups for powder, each cup +carrying twenty little tubes of bamboo, each with a measured charge of +powder, and longer bamboo tubes with percussion caps in them. + +It was Harry's brilliant idea to separate each charge of powder and put +it into a special tube. This tube had one end closed, and the other +provided with a stopper, so that in loading the stopper could be drawn +out and held by the teeth while the powder was poured into the gun. The +caps were put into a bamboo tube which was just large enough to take the +caps, which were dropped in, one after the other, and it can be seen +that it would be an easy matter to turn the tube upside down, and thus +bring out one cap at a time. This also facilitated the reloading of the +gun. + +During the practice with the gun one serious defect was found; and that +was to remove the cap after each shot. Sometimes the body of the cap +would not split, and as a result, a knife or some pointed instrument +would have to be employed to dislodge it so as to make room for the new +cap. + +Harry found a way to remedy this. An opening was made through the stock +at one side, and a sliding piece, like a collar, put over the nipple +which holds the cap. A finger attached to this collar enabled the +marksman to draw back the collar, and this would bring with it the cap, +which would then fall out of the side opening. + +All these little details may seem to be useless care, but rapidity in +loading and firing, with muzzle-loaders, in an engagement might be their +salvation. + +A test was made of the improved firearm, to determine how fast the gun +could be loaded and fired. The test made by Harry showed that it took +two seconds, after a shot, to bring down the piece, and draw back the +collar to release the cap; three seconds to grasp one of the powder +tubes, remove the stopper and bring it to the muzzle of the gun; two +seconds to pour in the powder; two seconds to drop the tube in its +receptacle and grasp the bullet; two seconds to ram it home, and three +seconds to put on the cap and cock the gun for firing. That was nearly a +quarter of a minute. + +He was very much dissatisfied with this exhibition of speed--or rather +of slowness, so after considering the matter for some time, hit upon the +plan of reducing the rear end of the bullet, so he could wrap a paper +tube on that and tie it. Then he purposed filling the tube with powder, +and closing the rear end by folding over the end of the tube. In this +way he would entirely overcome the need of the little bamboo tubes for +holding the powder. + +But no paper was available, nor could he think of anything which could +be used as a substitute. In despair he repaired to the Professor. + +"What is the difficulty now?" said the Professor, with a smile. + +"No difficulty, particularly, but I wish we could have paper, or +something like it. I want to make cartridges." + +"I thought you had all that arranged for?" + +"So I did, but it takes me a quarter of a minute to load, and I must do +better than that." + +He mused a while. "We could make paper, and I think we have the +facilities at hand for doing it; but it will take quite a time to +arrange for it. Aside from that I do not, at this moment, know of +anything which will be a fair substitute." + +He was chagrined at this failure. But, after all, four shots a minute +were not so bad. The perfection of the guns must await their return. + +Now, let us go down to the marine works, on the shore below the +Cataract. Here were the three vessels lined up side by side, and also +the after part of the lifeboat. The shed, which was the boathouse, had +nearly all their tools, and besides the bench, was a forge and the +primitive blower which the Professor and George had made and set up. +Wood, parts of planks, thin boards, of all sorts and description, were +scattered about. It looked business-like, and Harry was intensely proud +of it. + +The sail was completed, and taken down to be bent on the cable. The jib +had already been installed in place, and when the sails were hoisted and +they walked out from the shore and glanced back to get a full view, the +entire Naval Bureau congratulated itself on the magnificent appearance +of the fleet, and particularly of the new creation in maritime +architecture. + +It is not out of place to say that the Professor and George both +showered the highest compliments on Harry, for he deserved it. But the +officials of the establishment were not the only ones to admire the fine +sight. Angel came, and he took it in. It was the finest climbing he had +enjoyed in many a day. The Professor took off his hat. "I propose three +cheers for our ship." + +They were given, and with each cheer the hats circled their heads. This +was a new code of procedure to Angel. He couldn't understand it. Without +waiting for explanations, he shot down the mast, and landed on shore. It +was the most comical proceeding they had ever witnessed on his part, and +when he looked at the group, and then at the ship, he said as plainly as +though he had uttered it: "What does all this mean?" + +When the laughter was over, George proposed three cheers for Angel. The +hats came off and the cheers were given. Then the same smile which he +had so well learned illuminated his projecting face, and he swung his +long arm around as he had seen it done, and another step had been taken +in his education. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE GRUESOME FINDS IN THE CAVE + + +Another week had thus passed by--seven days of unceasing toil. The +Professor again brought up the subject of the cave. The subject did not +need any argument. It fell on willing ears. + +"How shall we take the boat around?" was the matter which interested +George. + +"Sail it around, of course," was Harry's view. + +Both looked at the Professor. "If we sail it there, which will be an +easy matter, how can we haul it up the sides of the cliffs? From my +present recollection the mouth of the cave is fully thirty feet or more +from the water line. The air pocket is not over eight or ten feet. At +any rate, it is much lower." + +"Then why not haul it around on the wagon, and lower it down the walls?" + +"That seems the most feasible plan." + +They now knew what preparations were needed for the exploration. Two +lamps had been taken before, and one was lost in the cave. Since that +several more had been made, so that three were provided, together with a +supply of matches. + +When the wagon was ready the Professor brought out several boards, and +deposited them in the wagon. The boys looked at the boards inquiringly, +as the Professor turned back from the wagon. "Oh, yes, the boards; we +want something to write on so that we can chart the cave. We must not be +caught as we were the last time." + +"But how can we possibly chart the cave when we have only one boat?" And +George laughed at the idea of making a plan of the interior by standing +at one point. + +"You measured the height of the falls without going to the top, if you +will remember." + +He had forgotten that. But the boat was at last secured in the wagon, +and proceeded to the cliffs. It was fortunate that the team could be +taken to a point directly over the mouth of the cave, and in a little +while the ropes were attached to it and slowly lowered, Harry taking the +precaution to follow it down and to dislodge it from the steps which +appeared in its path. + +The team was then securely hitched, and taking all their implements, +such as lamps and boards, together with two of the guns and an ample +supply of ammunition, descended to the entrance. The boat was at the +mouth, and it was suggested that a preliminary survey of the interior +should first be made, in order to ascertain how far the boat would have +to be carried before reaching the water. + +The lamps were lighted, and the boys led the way. After passing the +point, about two hundred feet from the mouth, and at almost the +identical spot where the water was found at the first exploration, the +water glistened before them. Returning toward the opening a loud beating +sound was heard, which at first startled them. It was evidently at the +mouth of the cave. It sounded like the beating of a stick against some +hard substance. + +The nearer they came to daylight, the more distinct were the sounds. As +heretofore explained, near the entrance the cave made a turn to the +right at an angle, so that when at a distance of fifty feet from the +opening it was impossible to see daylight, except what little was +diffracted from the angle at the turn. + +This angle was reached, and the beating, rather irregular, was plain +enough to cause some alarm. The boat was beyond the open mouth and at +one side, so that it could not be seen by anyone within the recessed +walls. + +All stood still, while the beatings continued. Occasionally there would +be a cessation, to be repeated again. Whatever it was it was not far +away. The Professor whispered: "Get the guns ready; we must take some +chances." + +Cautiously the company moved forward; the end of the boat first appeared +in sight, and as George peered beyond the projecting point of the ledge, +he threw up his hands and burst out in laughter. Angel was in the boat, +imitating Harry in the building operation. The sudden appearance did not +startle him in the least, nor did he stop beating his lullaby, after he +noticed the broad smiles that greeted him. + +With an eye to every advantage, Harry had attached to the sides of the +boat, amidships, two short standards, about three feet high, on top of +which two of the lamps were mounted, so they would be out of the way, +and thus give them freedom to handle the oars and the weapons, as well +as afford them a better light, than if carried by hand. The Professor +was much pleased with this arrangement. + +The boat was not particularly heavy, but it was a task to drag it over +the uneven floor and along the tortuous path which had to be taken by +their burden, but when the water was reached they were repaid for the +labor by the ease with which they could explore the interior. + +Before starting the journey the Professor, as usual, uttered a few words +of advice: "One of us must sit in the bow, one at the stern, and the +other amidships. The one at the stern must propel the boat, as we cannot +row through many of the places, and as the water is not deep, that will +not be a difficult task. The ones at the bow and amidships should have +the guns, and if there is no objection, I will take my place on the +middle seat, where I can best take the observations on the way. The +other places you should decide between yourselves." + +"I am willing to take the bow, if Harry agrees." Harry sanctioned the +arrangement, and when the lamps were securely fastened, Harry pushed the +boat forward through the cavern. It did not take long to reach the +slight turn which led to the large chamber, which was over one hundred +feet long. + +On the way to the chamber Harry had an opportunity to measure the depths +of the water, and at intervals the Professor would call out for the +depths, as he was making notes of the descent formed by the floor to the +chamber. The oars gave a pretty fair idea, showing that the floor was +only about five feet lower at the chamber than where the boat was +launched. + +Reaching the chamber Harry was directed to steer it to the right and +skirt the wall going to the left, so that every part of it could be +examined. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 13 THE TREASURE CAVE_] + +"I have another reason for this careful examination," remarked the +Professor, as he was intently engaged in making notes on the board +tablets. "It may be likely that the chamber has more than one outlet and +if so, we must explore it also. Of course, I am most interested in the +outlet to the south." + +A circuit was made until they reached the outlet to the south, which +Harry had discovered when the light on the ledge disappeared. The water +throughout the cavern within the chamber was not over eight feet deep, +and at the outlet to the south he could not touch bottom with the +twelve-foot pole they carried. This outlet was contracted, and, judging +from the width of the boat, could not be more than eight feet across, +but it gradually widened, and the waters became shallower as they +advanced. + +George, who was in the bow, held up his hand as a warning. "Stop!" was +all he said. All peered forward. The lights threw their beams forwardly +through a broadening channel, beyond which appeared to be white forms +ranged along the opposite wall. + +"What depth have you, Harry?" asked the Professor, without seeming at +all concerned. + +"About five feet." + +"Move straight ahead, until I tell you to stop." + +The pole was thrust down and the boat moved forwardly fully fifty feet +before a halt was called. + +"I think we are now in the middle of this chamber. Before exploring it +let us make a thorough examination of its characteristics." + +"Look at those wonderful icicles hanging from the roof!" George gazed on +them with wonder and admiration. Harry, on the other hand, with the +utilitarian idea in his mind, inquired: "Why couldn't all that chalk be +utilized for making plaster?" + +"That product is used in the arts, but it costs too much to transport it +from the places where it is found in its natural state, as science has +found a much cheaper way of producing it from limestone." + +"Are all these rocks limestone?" + +"Beyond question. Only a few of the caves so far found are in any other +formation than limestone." + +"What kind of cave are those?" + +"Where they have been produced by volcanic action. There the walls are +of volcanic rock." + +"Why is it that these underground channels are formed in this way?" + +"They are formed by the erosive action of the water wearing out the +softer portions of the rock beneath a harder roof or wall. This action +is brought about by carbonic acid acting on the rock and producing what +is called carbonate of lime, and the stalactites and stalagmites found +in all these caverns are of that material." + +"What is the difference between the two names you have just mentioned?" + +"Stalactite means trickling or dropping, and as applied to these +formations it means conical or cylindrical accretions of the carbonate. +Stalagmite is the term used to designate the calcareous formations found +on the floors of caverns, which are usually the droppings from the +roof." + +"Where are most of the caves found?" + +"They occur most frequently along rocky shores of open seas, as in this +case. Some of them are celebrated for their great extent, others for +their gorgeous interiors, like this chamber. Some show the most +beautiful draperies, or veils; in some cases portions of the ceiling +have representations of magnificent inverted candelabra, and what appear +to be carvings in the purest white." + +"In what parts of the world are most of them found?" + +"It does not seem that any portion of the world has a monopoly. The most +celebrated are the grotto of Antiparas, in Greece; the Adelsberg caverns +in Carniola, and the Mammoth in Kentucky. The latter is the largest in +the world, the windings of which extend forty miles and through which is +a subterranean river. In the river are eyeless fish, and fish with eyes, +but sightless. Others are the Luray, in Virginia; the Wyandotte, in +Indiana; Weir's, in Virginia; the Big Saltpeter, in Missouri, and +Ball's, in New York. Of seashore caverns, the most famous and remarkable +is Fingal's, on the coast of Scotland. Extensive caves are also found in +the Azores, Canary Islands, in Iceland, in various portions of England, +France and Belgium. Many of them are of immense value to the +paleontologist." + +"In what way are they of any use?" + +"They have been of the greatest service, because in the early days of +man, and before he knew enough to build his own habitation, he made the +cave his home. You have heard of the 'cave man,' have you not? During +the old stone period in England and other European countries, these +caverns were the only abodes of man, and in them have been found layers +from twenty to thirty feet thick, of successive accretions of bone, +stalagmites and various articles of human manufacture." + +This information added interest to the examination of the walls, and the +eagerness of the boys to discover something new and startling was at its +keenest edge. Before they had made a half circuit George announced that +he could see a large opening, which turned to the right, and thus formed +a bend to the general direction that the cavern had made. + +A digression is necessary, in order to be able to understand all the +elements in this remarkable voyage. The mouth of the cave was northeast +of the Cataract home, and distant about a half mile, in a straight line. +The opening for the first six hundred feet, which had been charted by +them on the previous occasion, ran directly south, but from that point +it turned toward the southwest, and this now, in a measure, explained +the eagerness of the Professor to explore it, as he believed the cavern +led to a point near their home. + +"There is no water in the opening," was the further information from +George, as they approached the contracted end of the chamber. + +"Before we land let us see the other side of the chamber," was the +Professor's suggestion. + +The boat was veered around to the left, and before they had proceeded +fifty feet it was apparent that a similar opening led out to the south, +and a dry floor was visible, like in the other outlet. The boat was +landed, and drawn up, two of the lamps taken out and the guns examined. +The opening led into a second chamber, which looked like a canopied +grotto of marble. Where they stood the chamber had the appearance of a +huge letter A, the side walls of which ran together in the distance, but +these walls were broken up by the most enchanting series of columns, and +delicate entablatures, and the outlines of the figures were like +blanched frescoes. It was such a weird and startling sight that the boys +could not repress their amazement. + +After they had fully entered the chamber Harry's quick eye caught a +peculiar formation to the right, on a raised sort of platform, behind +which seemed to be a recess. He had noticed it because it contrasted so +strangely with the uniformly white glare of all the surrounding +surfaces. He quickly made his way across, and as he reached it, stepped +back in alarm. + +"Come here, quickly; are those skulls and skeletons?" + +The Professor did not need a second invitation. Scattered about on the +elevation were found four skulls, and the bones comprising the remains +of four human beings. The skulls were first arranged side by side, and +the Professor intently examined them. + +"These are skulls of the Caucasian race, beyond a doubt. All are, +apparently, well formed and normal. But what is this?" + +In the side of one skull was a perforation, with the bone fractured on +all sides of the orifice. + +"Do you think it is a bullet wound?" + +"It has that appearance. As there seems to be no corresponding hole in +any other portion of the skull, we may be able to find the missile +inside, if death was caused by that means." + +Harry had noticed a rattling sound when the skull was put in place, and +mentioned this. After some hesitation the course of the fractured +opening was traced through, and embedded near the top and on the +opposite side, was a large lead ball, or what had been, undoubtedly, +spherically shaped before it entered and passed through the bones. + +"This is evidence to me that these remains have been here a long time." + +"Why; because it is in the form of a ball, and not a bullet?" + +"Yes; and there is also another reason why these people came here and +met their fate many, many years ago." + +"What is that?" + +"In this calcareous formation the preservative qualities of the +carbonates would prevent rapid decomposition. These skulls are turning +to the same material that we see all about us. See how brittle the bones +are. Our bones are of lime formation, being largely composed of the +carbonate, the same as the stalactites." + +The other substances now lying about were noticed. The excitement +engendered at the sight of the bones was enough temporarily to blind +them to the numerous things found scattered about. Here was a dirk, the +edges entirely worn away, and whitened. There were the metal ribs of +what seemed to be a case, or a receptacle of some kind. Lying at one +side was an ancient type of firearm, long, heavy, and with an immense +bore. Another and another were found--a regular arsenal, with the +scattered remnants of peculiar little copper receptacles with whitish +powder in them. + +Harry, who was about to remove the powder, was stopped by the Professor. +"We must retain everything as we find it, as nearly as possible. We do +not yet know what the little vessels contain." + +Not an article of clothing thus far had been found. A little higher up +on the platform, two more skeletons were seen, both of which had +fractured skulls, one of them showing two cavities which could not have +been accidental, as both showed the same kind of fracture, and inclined +across the skull in the same direction on the left side. + +Alongside these skeletons were more of the long, wicked-looking firearms +which had been found previously near the other bodies. There was every +evidence to show that a terrible fight had terminated the existence of +the band. More long knives, with curiously wrought handles, were lying +behind the last skeletons, and on a more careful examination, a knife of +an entirely different pattern was found within the ribbed cavity of one +of them. + +Still farther back, new articles appeared. Articles of furniture, many +of them coated with the fallen carbonates; and here were the first +articles of clothing, some of which were so decomposed as to crumble at +the touch. Others were still firm. Some of the articles, like a mantle, +had threads intact running in one direction, and the other cross thread +all converted into dust, which disappeared when the garment was held up. + +On some of the garments were metal trimmings. "They look like silver," +said George, excitedly; "and what is this? It seems to be silver," as he +brushed a bracelet-like piece of ornamentation with the sleeve of his +coat. As they advanced new articles came in sight; a bench; a veritable +chair, or couch, the covering of which was there merely to give it form, +but the substance had gone. Only the wood remained and that largely +decayed. + +And now on every side, at the rear and along the walls of the recess, +were evidences of human habitation. Cutlasses, knives, and at one side, +what appeared to be the kitchen, were numerous pots and kettles of +various sizes and descriptions, nearly all of them of copper. + +"How could they possibly cook in here without being smothered to death?" +asked Harry. + +"The cavern seems to be large enough to take care of all the smoke," was +the Professor's reply. + +"Well, I don't understand why they should have taken the trouble to come +in such a long distance, when they would be just as safe nearer the +mouth?" + +"Before we leave this place we may be able to answer your two questions +in a way that will surprise, if not startle, you," was the Professor's +answer. + +This vague reply did not detract any from the interest which the boys +took in the search. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THE TREASURES OF THE CAVE + + +While Harry was in the act of drawing back one of the couches, an object +behind it seemed to fall apart with a jingling sound. + +"What was that?" exclaimed George. + +"I think we have found something here that will make us do some +thinking," answered Harry, as he bent down to take up some of the +detached pieces which came from what now appeared to be a large chest. +He picked up one of the round pieces. "Gold, gold; look at it!" + +"I suspected something of the kind when I saw the skeletons. Carefully, +boys; let us remove this piece of furniture. Undoubtedly, we are in +pirates' lair, and here is the booty." + +[Illustration: _"We have probably found a pirate's lair, and here is the +booty"_] + +The boys were too much overcome for words. They looked at the gold, and +then at each other. George arose and walked back and forth. Harry, with +the coin in his hand, brushed it and held it close to the light. + +"With this we can buy anything we want," George finally uttered. + +"Whom will you buy it from?" was Harry reply. The Professor only smiled. +Of what use was money to them? George had forgotten that. + +"Here is another one." + +"Another what?" + +"A chest, something like yours." The lid, with its mocking lock, opened +easily, and there, coated with the universal carbonate, were a mass of +coins, articles of ornament, rings, bracelets, and pieces the names or +uses of which were entirely unknown to them. + +"Now that we have them, what shall be done with the treasures?" + +The boys did not answer for some time. Here was wealth; more, probably, +than either had ever dreamed of; but it was of no earthly use to them. +They must, of course, preserve it. They had discovered it, and under all +the laws were entitled to possession. + +"Well, have we gotten together all the gold and silver and precious +stones? Just imagine us as buccaneers! Owners of an island we haven't +conquered, and possessors of a fortune without working for it!" and the +Professor laughed at the thought of it. The boys, too, laughed, but when +they looked over at the ghastly skeletons, the joy was suddenly checked. + +The Professor saw the reason. "Isn't this a sermon? You have become +acquainted with it early in life; some learn it very late, and others +never get the lesson. Riches; death! Possessors of every material thing +that earth can give, and the grave beyond it! The unfortunates there had +all this, but their skeletons have stood guard over it for a century or +more." + +The Professor still smiled, but the boys were very grave. It was, +indeed, an impressive lesson. + +"Why are you so quiet? Are you mourning for them?" Then, without waiting +for more gloomy feelings, he continued: "How high above the mouth of the +cave do you think we are?" + +This sudden change in the tone of the Professor was almost startling to +them. How indifferent! It appeared almost like desecration. + +"I have no idea," was Harry's faltering reply. He looked around to +assure himself that it was not all a dream. The sudden acquisition of +what appeared to be an immense store of wealth, the ghastly relics +below, seemed to stun him. + +"Have you a reason for wanting to know how high up we are?" asked George +when he had partially recovered. + +"You wanted to know a little while ago how the smoke in the cavern might +affect them. Haven't you noticed a perceptible movement in the +atmosphere since we entered the chamber?" + +The boys started and stared at him. Could it be that the cave had an +outlet in the hills? + +"Was that the reason you suggested we should make a circuit around the +chamber after we entered it?" + +"Yes; and I know where the outlet is." + +"And does that explain why the pirates made their home at this end?" + +"Undoubtedly; and what will be still more interesting information is, +that the opening is within sight of the cataract." + +Could anything be more exciting than this information? + +"I now see the reason why you always wanted to come back to the cave. +Did you suspect this when we first entered the cave?" + +"No; but I had an idea we should find this after we made our second +trip." + +"What did you see?" + +"Nothing but what Harry brought to me." + +"What was that?" both exclaimed, eagerly. + +"The slab of carbonate which Harry brought me for the marking tablet, +and on which we made the chart of the cave." + +"What did you find on it?" + +"If you will recall, I brought it with me. It is now in the boat." Harry +dashed down to the boat and brought it back, turning it over and over on +the way. + +The slab referred to was about two inches thick, a foot long, and +probably ten inches wide, a little irregular in formation. + +"When we returned home that evening, after the trip referred to, I took +the slab and transferred the chart we had made to a board. In doing so, +I noticed that the lime had been chipped away from one side, but that +did not cause me to make any investigation at the time. + +"Some days afterwards I again took it up, and could see plainly through +the carbonate what appeared to be the shadows of some characters, and it +at once occurred to me that, owing to the sunlight and the comparatively +dry atmosphere in which it had been kept after its removal, that the +lime would turn or change its color, but the lime on this background did +not change in the same degree where the characters had been placed, and +when we get into the sunlight you will be able to see just what I saw." + +Looking at the slab, there was nothing to indicate any characters +imprinted in it. + +"Where is the opening, Professor?" + +"Come here; directly below where we found the first skeleton; keep the +light back in the recess; there; now look to the left and see that small +streak of light about ten feet from the floor." + +George could restrain himself no longer, but rushed forward. As he +crossed a slightly elevated obstruction, his foot caught on a spur and +he pitched forward. Harry, who was following, saw him fall. George, +slightly stunned, had raised himself partly as Harry came up. When Harry +saw him he was arising from a nest of bones which showed the remains of +two more pirates, the two skulls lying close together, directly behind +the little ridge over which George had fallen. + +"Here are some more of them," cried Harry, as the Professor came up. +"What a fight they must have had!" + +The outlet at this point was fully eight feet wide, and without the +lights it was still too dark to distinguish anything. George's light had +been extinguished in the fall, but Harry's lamp was still available, and +all were eager now to find the outlet. Harry now led the way, and within +seventy-five feet, at a pronounced angle in the throat of the cave, he +recognized the first real glimmer of sunlight. + +"See the steps here!" was his cry. And beyond, as plainly formed as +though cut a year ago, instead of a century, were steps leading up to a +contracted opening, partly hidden by shrubbery. + +When Harry emerged from the opening, the first sight that met his gaze, +after he had fully recovered the use of his eyes, was their home, not a +thousand feet away. George brushed his way out, and he stood there, not +knowing whether to run or to shout or to cry. Every emotion appealed to +the boys for mastery. All previous experiences during the past year +paled into insignificance in comparison with the hour just spent in the +pirates' lair. + +The opening from which they left the cavern was on the side of a hill, +not particularly steep, formed by projecting strata of limestone, in the +clefts of which vegetation grew, and at a distance the rocks could be +seen only at intervals on account of the shrubbery. No one could +possibly suspect an opening into the walls anywhere along the hillside. +The outlet was not more than twenty feet from the rather level ground, +which sloped off toward the west and in the direction of Cataract River. + +They sat there silently for a time, but evidently the Professor was not +disposed to allow too much time for reflections which he knew must be +gloomy to the boys' impressionable minds. + +"What are you thinking about, boys? Have you had enough excitement for +one day?" + +George was the first to reply: "I have been thinking about what we ought +to do with the gold." + +"Why the gold? I have been thinking of the boat." + +"Do you think we ought to leave the gold there? Isn't that of more +importance than the boat?" + +"I do not think so, George; we can use the boat to good advantage, but +where can you utilize the gold?" + +"But why would it not be a good idea to get it out and take it over to +the Cataract?" + +"I should advise against that very strongly." + +"What are your reasons?" + +"Suppose we should be attacked at the Cataract and find the home +untenable; this place would be a safe retreat, and we should, in any +event, have our treasure here in safety. It has been secure for the last +century or so. I think it will keep for a few months more." + +"It had never occurred to me that we could use this place for such a +purpose. That is a capital idea. And did you have this in mind all +along, Professor?" + +"Yes." + +After a time, when the subjects had been fully discussed, it was decided +to try to bring the boat out by the new entrance, and after making all +the measurements, ample room was found for this. They returned and +carried and dragged it to the opening, and after some labor it was +finally pushed through the opening, and when the ropes were attached it +was lowered down the hillside, and dragged to a position where it could +be taken by the team. + +"You should go for the team now, and I will continue the explorations +until you return," and so saying, the Professor went up the hill and +entered the cave, leaving one of the lights at the opening. + +The boys went back to the mouth of the cave and found the team, as well +as Red Angel, who had remained there, and within a half hour were back +again to the land entrance. The light was still where the Professor had +placed it, and the boys at once entered the passageway, and went down +the steps leading to the pirates' chamber. + +All the bones of the skeletons had been removed from the passageway, +where George had fallen, but the other skeletons were in the same place +originally seen when they discovered the remains. + +The Professor was not in sight, nor did they see any glimmer of his +light. + +It was he, undoubtedly, who had removed the bones from the passageway, +but they did not stop to notice where they were deposited. When they +first came in both were busy discussing the situation, in careless +tones, without any pretense at suppressing their voices, but now that +the Professor was not in sight, and no evidence that he was anywhere +near, the scene about them began to be most weird and uncanny. They +spoke in undertones, and when Harry suggested that they might call the +Professor, and thus let him know of their return, it was some time +before George would consent. + +It became evident, as he did not appear, that something must be done, +and Harry shouted loudly, and his voice reechoed through the cavern and +came back to them from every quarter. In a few moments they were +overjoyed to see the glimmer of a light directly to the east, which was +in the opposite portion of the chamber, where, as his light moved +forward, plainly showed another recess, or, probably, an opening similar +to the one through which they had entered from the west side of the +hill. + +"Have you been waiting long?" was his inquiry. + +"No; we came in less than ten minutes ago. Have you found anything new?" + +"Nothing new, but many additional things; but we must take another day +for this." + +This was said so significantly that they looked at each other, debating +in their minds whether or not the question should be pursued any +further. + +"Haven't you had enough for one day?" and he said this with such a +jovial mien that it restored their composure and satisfied them that +another day would bring the answer that they craved. + +As they passed out George turned to the Professor and asked: + +"Why did you remove the remains in the passageway?" + +"Because I thought it might be well to examine them at our leisure, and +therefore enable us, if possible, to learn something of their history. I +have put them near the steps close to the entrance." + +As they passed out he requested Harry to bring up the boards from the +boat, as well as some ropes and part of the canvas, which was usually +carried with them to be used as a means for signaling. The bones were +arranged on the boards, and kept separate from each other; after which +the canvas was severed and tied around the two human frames, to keep +them in place, and deposited in the boat, after it had been loaded in +the wagon. + +It was now past two o'clock, and none of them felt any hunger until they +neared home. The trip had occupied over four hours, and hungry as they +were, the reaction, after the stirring events of the day, was so marked +that it was difficult to rouse them sufficiently to prepare the meal. + +Somehow, the work at the factory, the building of the boat, and the care +of the stock did not interest them the following day. They went around +like people in dreams. Their thoughts were centered in the cavern on the +hill, and many, many times during the day their eyes involuntarily +turned that way. Was it unnatural that such should be the case? When, if +ever, in the history of human kind had such treasure been bestowed where +the gift had been so lightly considered that they did not even stop long +enough to count its value? It seemed such an unnatural thing to do, and +yet the only feeling was one of curiosity. + +During the entire day the boys rarely spoke to the Professor about the +events of the previous day. He was busy in the laboratory with the two +skeletons, and remained secluded. + +"What do you think the Professor found in the cave while we were getting +the team?" + +"I have had a curiosity to know, as well as yourself. Shall we ask him?" + +"I do not think it would be well to do so. You know he is always willing +and anxious to be of service to us and to answer every question; it +looks like an imposition to insist on what he evidently wishes to +avoid." + +"That is the feeling I have had. I love him because he has been so +unselfish, and during the time we have been associated, I do not +remember ever having heard him utter an unkind word." + +"I have often thought I wish we knew of some way to make him understand +how we appreciate him and his noble ways. You remember the birthday +party we had for him? That touched him, as it did us, and it was the +only time I ever saw him confused or in tears." + +"I wish we knew his history. Did you ever hear him say a word about his +friends or relatives? What affects me most is, that when any subject +comes up, he always considers it from the standpoint of service to us. +He never considers himself." + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +REMOVING THE VESSELS FROM THE CAVERNS + + +The boat was finally completed, and the boys were very anxious to have a +sail in it to know how it would act. The utmost care had been taken to +have it well caulked, and it was again put into the water, after all the +leaky spots had been closed up. + +For the purpose of the test it was decided to put aboard a load of +stone, of a weight equal to what their contemplated load would be, and +this they estimated, not counting their combined weight, at six hundred +pounds. This would be ample for all purposes. + +The day selected was bright, with a fair wind. By agreement Harry was +selected as the skipper, as he knew every part of the boat. It devolved +on him to take command for the day, but he would not consent to be the +permanent captain, as he thought that a duty which devolved on the +others as well. + +Angel was invited, you may be sure, and he enjoyed the idea of a sail +when he recollected, as was no doubt the case, his former trip. There +was evidence of the remembrance in the animal, when they saw him at the +boat, on more than one occasion, swinging back and forth on the rigging. + +The Professor was in his element in the boat. It was a glorious journey +for him, and the boys knew it was appreciated on his part. The wind was +blowing from the west, so the sails were tacked and an easy sail made +for the mouth of the Cataract. + +Outside the sea was rolling, but not disagreeably so; but a much +stronger breeze sprang up toward midday, and before two o'clock it was +very brisk. The cliffs were rounded, and as the wind had not changed +quarters, the sails were set for a southern course. This brought them +around the bay and toward the headland to the east of the mouth of South +River. + +That region had always possessed a fascination for George and an +attraction for the Professor as well. George, particularly, was anxious +to penetrate the river, and sail up to the falls, but Harry's more +practical views prevailed. "If we want to explore the river we can do it +any day with a wagon, or on foot; but while we have the ship out, why +not take a sail down the coast toward the mountains?" + +The Professor concurred in this as the most liable to give them the best +results, as they were out for the purpose of making tests of the craft +on the open sea. + +After sailing for an hour along the coast to the south, the shore line +turned to a southwesterly direction, and the mountain range was now +clearly perceptible, extending southwest, and along which it appeared +that the coast followed. The wind changed and came from the mountains, +and made progress slow. There was also a decided change in the +temperature, and by four o'clock it was impossible to follow the coast +except by constant tacking. + +The boat was turned to the north, and with the strong wind, which had +now perceptibly increased, began to make good time. As evening +approached, the wind increased, until it blew with considerable +violence, every minute being more boisterous, and the Professor +suggested that the jib be taken down, which was done; but the increasing +gale, and the terrible strain on the mast and sail, made the boys look +inquiringly at the Professor, for a word of warning. + +He sat there grimly during the raging storm, and with the halliards +gradually let down the mainsail when the tempest had reached such a +point that it appeared to sweep everything from the boat. + +Where was Angel during all this uproar? Forward in the housed portion of +the boat, curled up in a corner, and apparently unconscious, the little +creature did not seem at all perturbed. + +"Don't you think he is seasick?" + +"It is not likely. Seasickness is akin, you know, to that dizzy feeling +some people have when at a height. The natural instincts of the animal +prevent him from having any feeling of discomfort at a height. The trees +are their homes, and for that reason they can swing from branch to +branch and sway back and forth in the loftiest trees without an +uncomfortable feeling." + +The heavy blow continued until they had reached the cliffs, when it +abated somewhat, and the boys anxiously inquired whether it would be +safe to make the entrance to the river during the gale. + +"We are out for the purpose of testing the boat. To make an attempt to +round the cliff and steer it into the mouth of the river in this wind +will be the best test of its maneuvering ability." + +As stated, the wind was now blowing from the southwest, and they were +northeast of the mouth of the stream they wished to enter. They stood +out to sea in order to make a starboard tack, and it was a gratification +to see the magnificent manner in which the vessel responded, and before +six o'clock they found themselves sailing up the river, and safely +landed at the boathouse. + +An examination showed that the crossbeam supporting the mainmast was +split from end to end, and only the roof structure held it in place. +Thus the trip had a warning lesson for them, and Harry was not slow to +take advantage of it and install a larger crosspiece. + +George had entirely forgotten the incident of the calcareous slab which +had on it the tracings of the cave, and which had been the means of +giving the Professor the first hint that they were in a pirate's cave. + +The first thing in the morning he went over to the laboratory, and +called attention to the slab. "Here it is," said the Professor. "You +will note that the light shows some characters which can readily be made +out, and at the corner here, where a portion has been chipped away, it +has the appearance of something else besides calcium." + +"Why, it looks like wood." + +"That is what it is. I should not have noticed the wood if the peculiar +lettering had not shown up through the coating." + +"What are the letters, and do you know what they stand for?" + +"We had better not pass judgment on that until we have removed all the +calcium." + +At this moment Harry came in to view the slab. It was the slab he had +carelessly picked up in the cave, and therefore it had a great +fascination for him. The calcium was carefully chipped off, and it was +found to be a piece of oak board, with a smooth cut-off end, parallel +sides, nine inches wide, nearly two inches thick, and about eleven +inches long, the opposite end having the appearance of being broken. The +only letters which could be made out were "HI," and a portion of another +letter which could not be determined. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 14. THE SLAB FOUND IN THE CAVE_] + +"What do you think the letters were intended to indicate?" + +"They might be the name of a ship, or some sign. I do not think it was +part of a ship. I tried to find something in the cave, on the day I went +in while you went after the team, which would afford some clue, but so +far nothing confirms me in any view which I may have." + +"Isn't it curious that these letters should show through only after the +slab was exposed to the light?" + +"Why is that any more curious than photography is?" + +"Because in photography something is put on the glass or the sheet that +the negatives are made of, and it turns and makes a mark under certain +conditions." + +"Well, here is something put on this slab that turns also. Photography +is a wonderful thing. Dr. Draper, the first great photographer, and who +was also a scientist, says that every wall, or other object, which you +stand before, has your photograph imprinted on it. The only question is +to find some chemical which will develop the picture." + +"What is meant by developing the picture?" + +"You remember some time ago we talked about reagents, and the properties +of certain chemicals to act on others, and in doing so, to make a +change. Sometimes the change is a complete one, and makes a new product; +in other cases the result is a complete change of color. Now, in +photography, if a certain chemical is placed on a glass or a film, and +the film is exposed, the light and dark portions of the object show on +the film. The sunlight, or the actinic rays in the sunlight, affect the +chemical material so that when the fixing chemical is applied it +prevents a change in the condition of the chemical." + +"What do you mean by the actinic ray?" + +"All light is vibration; the greatest motions which are perceptible to +the eye, being known as violet. Now there are still more rapid +vibrations than are put forth to make the violet rays, which are called +the actinic rays, and are the ones which affect the chemicals so +acutely." + +"Is it then possible to photograph with a light that is not perceptible +to the eye?" + +"You have heard of the x-rays, no doubt; they are the actinic or ultra +violet, which are above the visible light. These light vibrations are of +such a character that they penetrate many substances. A curious effect +of this was shown some time ago when a photograph was taken of the side +of a vessel which had several coats of paint over the old name, and the +photograph showed not only the new name, but also the old one beneath." + +The time had now arrived when they must make preparations for the +proposed voyage of discovery around the island. It was a momentous time +for them. The boys could not help but look with longing eyes to the +cave. Before they went it was felt something more should be learned +about its mysteries. + +The Professor was not at all backward in encouraging this feeling. + +"Wouldn't it be a good thing to take such things out of the cave as we +can make use of here, and during our trip?" said Harry. + +"What things do you think we could utilize?" + +"Probably the guns; and then they have some cooking utensils." + +"And why," suggested George, laughingly, "couldn't we take some of the +money along?" + +"That would be a comfortable feeling to have plenty of money in our +pockets. Very well, we'll take this afternoon for the trip." + +An early start was made, the lamps carefully trimmed and the guns, +together with the bolos, collected. It was a short walk to the opening, +and Angel, although not invited, accompanied the party. + +Together they descended, and soon reached the scene of the conflict at +the large recess to the left of the entrance. The Professor, after +reviewing the scene, suggested that the bones should be carefully +gathered together and deposited at a place where they could be buried. + +[Illustration: _Portugese Coin, 1700. Spanish Pistole Peruvian Dollar._] + +[Illustration: _Fig. 15. Old Coins found in Cave._] + +"We do not want them here as evidences of the strife." + +After all had been gathered and carried to the spot selected, the first +task was to gather the treasure found in the chests. And here a sight +met their eyes which staggered them. One of the chests which Harry first +found contained not only an immense quantity of gold coin, of Spanish +and other mintages, but curious other pieces, all ancient, as shown by +the inscriptions, and long yellow bars, the last of which attracted +George's attention. + +"What are these bars?" + +"They are gold bullion, made by melting up various articles, and +probably the coin itself, so as to make it convenient for +transportation." + +"My! how heavy they are! and look at the number!" + +When all had been assorted the Professor suggested that as they had +plenty of copper utensils, the latter might be used as receptacles for +the gold. The other chest contained but little coin, but here the +interest was not less pronounced than in the other chest, because the +vessels found were not only of beautiful, but many of curious, design. +Some were of silver, as well, and the boys knew that those would be +serviceable for their table, and at their suggestion all such were laid +aside to be removed to the Cataract. + +The kitchen utensils afforded a more varied collection than had been +anticipated. Six of the larger copper vessels were required to hold the +money, jewelry and other articles taken from the two decayed chests, and +there were still remaining at least a dozen more smaller jars and pots, +some with handles, which would be exceedingly useful in their kitchen. + +All these were carefully put aside, and the smaller silver articles +deposited in them. And now the guns! Seven skeletons were found, two of +which had been removed to the Cataract by the Professor. After all the +guns had been collected, twelve were counted. + +"I suppose each fellow had two of them," was Harry's conclusion. + +"If you will go over into the chamber to the east you will find a +sufficient number to assure you that they were not lacking firearms." + +The boys now understood. He had told them on the second day's +exploration that he did not find anything new, but only something more. +Why not go and see it now. But they were restrained. A dozen guns were +certainly enough. These were also set aside, and it was then agreed to +place the vessels containing the treasure in a secluded nook, in the +extreme corner of the large recess. Samples of the clothing, some of the +knives or daggers, as well as the little trinkets, found near each of +the bodies, were deposited in the receptacles that had been selected for +removal. + +All this accumulation of material was more than they had bargained for +when they left the Cataract, so that the failure to bring the team was +keenly felt. However, it was the work of an hour, only, to get the team, +and it was a pretty fair load which went from the pirates' haunts to the +home on the river. + +George's curiosity could not keep him from taking some of the coins +which he exhibited when they returned, and which they would have ample +leisure to examine. + +Harry's thoughts were turned to the firearms. They were certainly of an +antiquated pattern. The first thing was their length. Two of them were +unusually long, fully six and a half feet. + +"I wonder why it was they made their guns so long?" he inquired. + +"The reason was, probably, that the quality of powder was so bad that +the bullet would get out before all the powder was consumed. All the +ancient pistols were very inefficient, because of the short barrel. Even +down to the time of the American Revolution the guns on board of war +vessels were not capable of throwing shot very far, and the most +effective ones were those with long barrels." + +"In what respect is the powder of to-day more powerful than in olden +times?" + +"Particularly in the fact that formulas have been devised which make a +higher expansion, or give a greater volume of gas. The other feature of +value is, that chemical means have been discovered whereby the moment a +sufficient amount of heat has developed in the powder it instantly +burns--not a slow fusing, like the old powders--but the combustion is +instantaneous. These two factors working together have greatly improved +even the black powders." + +After their return the interest in the articles was so great, and the +inventory took so much time, that the disappearance of Angel had been +entirely forgotten. All remembered him going along, and no one had seen +him enter the cave. None of them believed he could be induced to go in, +hence no particular notice was taken of his movements. + +An hour after the return, Harry saw Angel coming over the field at the +east of the Cataract, dragging something after him laboriously. All +stood and watched him as he neared home. He had a stick, apparently, but +it seemed to be unusually heavy. + +George ran out to assist him, and when he came up he gravely handed to +article to George. It was the barrel of a gun, with part of the +flintlock still attached, but it was rusted almost beyond recognition, +the bore completely filled with dirt, accumulation and rust. + +"Where do you suppose the little rascal found this?" + +The Professor examined it. "Outside of the cave, undoubtedly. The +curious part about it is, that this weapon is of an entirely different +and more modern pattern than those we have samples of." + +Harry took the gun and ran in to where the others were deposited, and +true enough, it was not only shorter, but it had a smaller bore, and +what is more, the outside of the barrel was octagonal, whereas the +barrels of those inside of the cave were all round. + +As the Professor predicted, the guns which they recovered were too much +rusted to be of any service, and furthermore, they were made of iron, +very much softer than the steel of which their own guns were +constructed, and it is questionable whether they would be able to +withstand a charge of the comparatively high power powder which had been +made for the modern guns. + +As curiosities the weapons were good things to have; otherwise they were +of no value. This was not so with the vessels, which could be and were +utilized in the kitchen and in that capacity were of the highest use. +The table was supplied with articles of the purest silver, and it had a +royal look. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +MAKING ELECTRICITY + + +In order that you may get some sort of idea concerning the condition of +our little colony, at this time, it would be well to give a brief review +of the situation. When they landed on the island the year before, with +nothing but the clothing they wore, the prospect of being delivered was +not a flattering one, as day after day passed by. + +Here were two boys, unused to the privations of life, with youth and +vigor, cut off from all the pleasures of manhood, surrounded by dangers, +and day after day having mysteries thrust upon them which only increased +their fears. These things necessarily must have produced an impression +much deeper than would be the case with hardened men. + +In the effort to discover, produce and build the various tools, weapons, +and articles of clothing, to hunt food, and in the endeavor to learn +about the condition of the island, and guard themselves against foes +which might be all about them, imposed immense responsibilities. + +In their struggles were personified the contests of the human race from +the beginning of the world, in the effort to conquer nature, and to make +it contribute to their necessities. + +The Professor knew how such a condition would tend to make active minds +either productive of good, or to fly out in the opposite direction and +cultivate the low and sordid instincts. Occupation, work, the +utilization of the mind, and above all, to direct their energies into +useful channels, had been the Professor's one absorbing aim. + +The boys had responded, as all boys will, not for the love of gain or +for power or glory. Our boys had none of these. Other boys do not need +them any more than those on Wonder Island. What they do need is a true +stimulus for work; and when that evening they were gathered together in +the cozy little living room at the Cataract, the Professor who for two +days had been particularly reticent and retired, said: + +"Can you imagine the condition of the pirates who gathered all that +hoard in the cave? What do you think their aim was in life?" + +"It seems to me," was Harry's reply, "that the only thing they were +after was wealth." + +"If what we see in the cave is any indication, the principal thing they +lived for was to kill somebody," was George's conclusion. + +The answers made him smile. "You have, I presume, answered the question +in the two sentences. But there is something that you haven't mentioned, +which is at the bottom of it all." + +"Yes; wanting to kill to get the money." + +"That only states your previous answers in a more concrete way. There is +one word which describes it accurately: Selfishness. When a man inquires +into the secrets of nature; when he tries to turn the knowledge gained +into account, either for money or glory; when he consistently devotes +his days to labor, and his nights to thoughts to find out how he may do +something better, or quicker, or cheaper, it might all be denominated +selfishness, and so it is, in a way. It is a selfishness, however, that +does no injury to a fellow-man. That kind of selfishness is the great +quality which has produced the wonderful things that we see all about +us, and which distinguishes the man from the brute creation." + +"But I have read of a great many men who made millions and millions and +who never did any of the things you have just referred to," answered +Harry. + +"Then do you think they are any better than the pirates were?" + +Notwithstanding the exciting times, food was a necessity, and it had to +be found and prepared. It could not be bought. All the gold in the cave +would not purchase a single meal. More barley had to be ground and the +stock of honey was almost exhausted. Their duties in the shop, +consequent on the haste exhibited to get the boat and weapons ready, +contributed to the low state of supplies. + +George announced that there was less than two pounds of the honey left, +and proposed that a trip be taken to the flats, where the Professor had +found the sugar cane. All joined in the journey to the cane field, and +Angel was invited to join, which invitation was accepted by him +gleefully. + +The bolos were taken for the purpose of cutting the cane, and on the way +George's inevitable question point was in evidence. "What did people use +for sweetening purposes before cane was discovered?" + +"Honey was the principal source of the world's sweets. But cane is not +the only kind of vegetable from which the principle has been extracted. +There are many kinds of reeds which furnish a sweetish substance. Sugar +cane was first made known in eastern Europe by the conquest of Alexander +the Great. Nearchus, one of his admirals, in sailing down the Indus, +found the reed, and it was, previous to that time, known throughout the +greater part of India. He described it as a kind of honey growing in +canes and reeds. From this you may infer that honey was the principal +source of sweets in his time." + +"What are the other principal plants or substances that sugar is made +from?" + +"Mainly from beet, tubers of various kinds, such as the common dahlias, +and numerous vegetables, from milk, fruit, gum arabic, as well as fish." + +"I have heard it said that sugar contains all that is necessary to +sustain life. Is that true?" + +"That is a mistaken idea. It will sustain life for quite a time and with +the addition of nitrogenous matter has great fattening properties, but +without that it is not valuable as food." + +"What do you mean by nitrogenous matter?" + +"Meat, fish, eggs, milk, beans, peas, and the like, all contain a large +amount of nitrogen." + +"I remember my arm being burned on one occasion, and mother made a syrup +out of sugar and put it on. In what way was the sugar beneficial?" + +"In the first place, sugar is one of the most powerful antiseptics +known. It acts, therefore, as an aid to healing, since it protects the +wound from foreign substances and from poisonous and harmful germs. In +the next place, it is a great preservative for either fruit or flesh." + +The cane was cut close to the root, and the top and leaves trimmed off. +Within several hours a full load was thus procured. The boys enjoyed the +pith, and George playfully gave some to Angel. His surprise knew no +bounds. When he knew what the cane was good for, he simply gorged on it. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 16. Cane Crusher._] + +Harry at once set to work on turning up two rollers from hickory, the +rollers being eight inches in diameter, and eighteen inches long, and +each being provided with a spindle four inches in diameter. One end of +each of the spindles was longer than the other, so pulleys could be +attached, the object being to provide a means whereby they might be +turned by suitable belts from the water wheel. In addition, the top +roller was made so it would yield, and had levers resting on the +spindles, and provided with weights, so the rollers would press out the +juice, whatever the quantity that might be placed between the rollers. + +It was really a simple little machine to put up, but it required a day +for both of them. Vessels were now provided for the juice, and when they +were filled, the Professor suggested that a little lime should be put +into the juice, after it had been strained through the ramie cloth. + +"What is the object of putting in lime?" + +"To precipitate the impurities." + +The action of the lime was plainly visible, and after it had been +allowed to settle, the clarified portion was drawn off, and the process +of boiling down was proceeded with. As fast as one of the vessels was +boiled down, more of the cane was crushed, the juice being dipped from +one vessel to the second one, until the entire load was crushed and the +juice boiled down to a thick consistency. + +Here was molasses, at any rate a good substitute for honey, and it was +so homelike to get the real article. That night they had molasses candy. +It felt like old times. It was a real candy pulling, and no one enjoyed +it more than Angel. From the moment he had the first taste of the pulp +of the cane, he was the most interested one of the party. But the fun +came the next morning, when George brought out, for his benefit, some of +the taffy which had been set out to harden. The chuckle which he +emitted, when he tried to pry off a piece of the sweet morsel, was too +amusing for words. + +When the entire amount of juice had been boiled down and it had readied +the point where it had the appearance of granulating, the fire was +withdrawn, and the whole mass stirred until it was cooled, and the +result was a fine sample of beautiful brown sugar which weighed +forty-three pounds. + +Nevertheless food was an important item in their preparations, the +necessities for doing everything in their power to insure the success of +the maritime enterprise. One of the most valuable adjuncts for sailing +is a compass. No attempt had been made to produce the implement, and +when the needs of the expedition were being discussed, Harry was curious +to know the reason why the compass always pointed north and south. + +The Professor was very much interested in all electrical phenomena and +replied: "The earth is a huge magnet, and any body which is magnetized +has a north and a south pole. The needle which is also a magnetized body +has, in like manner, a north and a south pole." + +"But in what manner does that make the needle point in one way only?" + +"Electricity is a very curious thing. While the current unquestionably +moves from one end to the other of a conductor, it also exhibits itself +in the form of rings around the wire. This may not be understood in the +absence of a sketch. For that purpose I make a drawing (Fig. 17) which +shows a conductor (A), through which a current is passing, and this +current is represented by the spiral line (B) which goes around the +conductor." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 17. A MAGNET_] + +"Well, is magnetism the same as electricity?" + +"Both exhibit the same manifestations. Magnetism is nothing more than a +body charged with electricity. The electricity, which appears to travel +around the conductor (A), extends out for some distance from its body, +and produces what is called a magnetic field. This is the case whether +the magnet is a permanent one, like the earth, or whether the conductor +is charged by a dynamo." + +"What is the difference between the north and the south pole?" + +"There is really no difference. The terms north or south and positive or +negative are mere relative designations, and are distinguished simply by +the movement or direction of the travel of the current. You will +remember when we made the battery, it was shown that the current, +outside of the battery, moved from the positive to the negative pole. +That was merely stating that it moved from the north to the south pole +outside of the earth, and from the south to the north pole inside of the +earth. The current is, therefore, from one magnetic pole to the other." + +"What I cannot understand is why the magnetic poles should be at the +north pole and at the south pole." + +"The magnetic poles are not at the poles of the rotation of the earth, +but hundreds of miles away, to one side of the poles on which the earth +rotates; but they are near enough to the real poles, for all purposes, +so that the needle points to what we call the north pole of the earth. +Any magnetized body must have these two opposite poles. If it is a body, +like a bar of iron, one end is called north and the other south. Look at +this other sketch (Fig. 18) and you will see how the currents flow in +the two magnets. In this case the large body (E) represents the earth +and the small body (M) the magnet. Now notice that the current going +around the large body moves to the right, or to the north pole, whereas +the current in the small magnet (M) flows in the opposite direction." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 18. MAGNETIC INDUCTION_] + +"And does the current flowing around the bars, as you have shown, make +the small magnet turn around so that it is always parallel with the +large magnet, and make the north pole of one magnet at the same end with +the south pole of the other magnet?" + +"Yes; to make it still clearer, I make two more drawings (Figs. 19 and +19a), in which two sets of magnets are shown. In the first of these +pairs of magnets (Fig. 19), the two north poles approach each other, and +the two south poles are opposite each other. The currents, if you will +notice, at the north poles move toward each other, and at the south +poles move away from each other. They are, therefore, acting against +each other, and the result will be that the magnets will move away from +each other. If, now, one of the magnets is turned so the poles of one +magnet approach the opposite poles of the other magnet, as shown in the +second view (Fig. 19a), they will attract each other, because the +current is permitted to flow through the two magnets in the same +direction without one conflicting with the other." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 19. Fig. 19a. THE TWO MAGNETS_] + +"Is that the reason it is stated that likes repel and unlikes attract?" + +"Yes." + +In order to take advantage of this knowledge, knowing that the earth is +a great permanent magnet, it was necessary to make a small magnet, and +so suspend it that it would turn freely, and the magnetic north and +south could then be determined. + +To do this the battery which had been previously made was brought into +play. George took a hand in the work, and while they were preparing the +metal for the little bar, said: "You spoke about a permanent magnet. +What other kinds of magnets are there?" + +"Magnets are permanent or temporary. A permanent magnet is one in which +the electricity resides, or remains, as it does in the earth. A +temporary magnet is one which has magnetism imparted to it only while a +current of electricity is passing around it." + +"How is the current made to pass around it?" + +"By wrapping an insulated wire around it, and sending a current through +the wire. When that is done the same thing is done to the bar as the bar +of the permanent magnet exhibits. As soon, however, as the current +through the wire ceases, the bar is again demagnetized. That is, it +ceases to be a magnet." + +"We have the small bars ready, Professor. What is the next step?" + +"It must be hardened so as to make it a flinty steel. The harder the +better, so that it will preserve the magnetism imparted to it." + +"Is that the better way to make the temporary magnet?" + +"No; in that case the bar should be of the softest iron. Remember, +therefore, that for a permanent magnet, use the hardest steel, and for a +temporary one, the softest iron." + +"Then as we want to make a permanent magnet, must we harden both of the +bars?" + +"No; for our uses, one must be left soft, because on that we shall want +to wind some insulated wire to make a temporary magnet." + +The small amount of wire which was on hand was then coated with a thin +layer of the ramie fiber, which was carefully wrapped around, so that +the different layers of wire could not touch each other. When this was +completed, a spool was constructed, which fitted over the little bar or +rod, because they were rounded off, and one end of the soft iron rod +extended out beyond the spool. + +The opposite ends of the winding were then brought out and attached to +the terminal wires of the battery. A test showed that the magnet thus +made would readily pick up pieces of iron or steel. The Professor then +took the hardened steel rod, through which a small hole had been bored, +midway between its ends, and laying it down on the table, the projecting +end of the temporary magnet which projected from the spool was put into +contact with the hard steel rod, and slowly drawn along to the end. The +soft bar magnet was then raised up and again repeated, as shown in the +drawing (Fig. 20), where the dotted line (A) represents the movement of +the end of the temporary magnet. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 20. MAKING A PERMANENT MAGNET_] + +This was repeated over and over a great many times, and finally the hard +steel bar was found to have a charge of magnetism, and for the purpose +of providing a means for holding the magnetism, a C-shaped piece of iron +was put on the bar, as shown in the detached figure. + +"Is that the reason," asked Harry, "why a small piece of metal is always +put across the ends of a horseshoe magnet when it is not in use?" + +"Yes." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +STARTING ON THE VOYAGE TO THE WEST + + +"If I remember correctly, you stated some time ago, Professor, that the +barometer indicated the pressure of the atmosphere, and in that way it +was useful in letting us know what the weather would be. Before we sail, +would it not be well to make one of them? If we had possession of one of +the articles, we might not have been caught in the storm the first time +we took out No. 3." + +"That is a good suggestion. I intended to propose that, because with the +barometer and the compass we shall be equipped with two of the most +useful instruments needed." + +"I cannot comprehend how the air pressure has anything to do with the +weather. Is the air pressure really greater at one time than at +another?" + +"Heated air ascends, does it not?" + +"Yes; I can understand that." + +"As it ascends it is, therefore, lighter at that point than normally. On +the other hand, moist air is heavier than dry air. These two conditions +would be indicated by the barometric column, would they not?" + +"I presume they would; but when the air is moisture laden we don't need +a barometer to tell it is going to rain. We know it and feel it. What I +particularly wanted to know was how the barometer by its actions would +indicate it ahead for any length of time." + +"The barometer does not indicate with any degree of accuracy on land; +but on sea it has a much better application. The instrument shows the +present pressure of the atmosphere, and its variations correspond to +atmospherical changes which have already taken place, the effects of +which may follow their cause at a greater or less interval." + +"Then how could it be ascertained from the instrument when there would +be a storm or rain?" + +"After a continuance of dry weather, if the barometer begins to fall +slowly and steadily, rain will certainly ensue; but if the fine weather +has been of long duration, and the mercury may fall for two or three +days before any perceptible change takes place; the more time elapses +before the rain comes, the longer the wet weather is likely to last." + +"Then what indicates dry weather?" + +"If, after a great deal of wet weather, with the barometer below its +mean height, the mercury begins to rise steadily and slowly, fine +weather will come, though two or three wet days may first elapse; and +the fine weather will be more permanent in proportion to the length of +time that passes before the perceptible change takes place." + +"Is this the case at all times of the year?" + +"The seasons affect the barometer, it is true. A sudden fall of the +barometer in the autumn or in the spring indicates wind; in the summer +or in hot weather it prognosticates a thunderstorm; in winter, after +frost, a sudden fall of the mercury shows a change of wind or a thaw +with rain; but in a continued frost a rise of mercury indicates +approaching snow." + +"It seems, then, that a man must be pretty well versed in the weather to +be able to read the signs." + +"That is a correct observation. The instrument in the hands of one who +has had experience with its use is absolutely necessary; it is not a +very satisfying device for those who do not take the time or trouble to +read all the signs, and note all the indications." + +As detailed in a preceding chapter, the hardened steel rod for the +compass was brought out for the purpose of securing it in a little case, +so that it might be utilized to give them the true north. + +It was a difficult task to find a means of suspending it, for the reason +that they had no tools which would make fine and carefully pivoted +balances, but eventually this was done, and they were gratified to see +the little rod or bar swing around and point north and south. + +The work of arranging suitable closets for the various provisions and +providing a miniature kitchen was the next thing in order. This occupied +several days. Instead of taking the bedding in their house, it was +decided that new mattresses should be made up from the barley, of which +there was quite a quantity on hand. + +One of the receptacles taken from the cave was a copper jar, which held +five gallons of water. A top was made for this which could be sealed up, +to hold a reserve supply of water. In addition two other vessels were +also provided for the regular supply, and also fitted with covers, so +that they had about ten gallons, an amount which was considered +sufficient. + +The matter of fuel was a more difficult one to solve, unless they +intended to prepare most of the food before starting; but George +insisted that the small stove should be put aboard, and about fifty +pounds of the coal stowed away. + +"How long do you think we should provision for?" was George's inquiry, +as they were carrying the various things aboard. + +Harry had no ideas on the subject, but the Professor ventured the +opinion that at least two weeks' supply should be arranged for. + +This conclusion rather startled the boys, who had not expected more than +a few days' trip, and when they questioned him about his reasons for +making the statement, he said: "Did you ever hear of the old lady who +attended a special meeting of prayer for rain? She came with an +umbrella, and the people laughed and chided her. The minister reproved +them, saying: 'She, at least, has faith, which you have not.' We are +going for two purposes: one is to learn something about the island we +are on, and the other to rescue our companions if they can be found. We +couldn't rescue them and let them starve." + +Those words impressed them as nothing theretofore had, that the +Professor believed they were really going to find their former +shipmates, and that they would have stirring times before them. + +Nothing so stimulates the actions of men, or boys, as the prospect of +adventure. Their trip had a double meaning, and it is not venturing too +much to say that their feelings were most tense during the entire period +in which they were engaged at the task of fitting out the little ship. + +At last the day was set for the departure. The cattle could take care of +themselves. A tablet was prepared to be put up on their dwelling, +stating who were the owners of the habitation, their present +destination, and briefly relating the knowledge they possessed of the +inhabitants of the island, a statement of the direction they had taken, +and the kind of boat to which they trusted their destiny, and when they +expected to return. + +A copy of this was then carried to the pole on Observation Hill, and +nailed to the mast, to replace the small tablet which had hitherto +filled that place. They were to launch the boat for the start on the +morrow. + +That night a storm blew up from the west, as most of the winds had +previously blown from that quarter during the past month. The storm was +severe during the entire night, and abated somewhat in the forenoon, but +it again increased in fury before noon and continued with more or less +vigor all that day and during the night. + +"I am afraid this storm will prevent us from starting for several days, +on account of its widespread character. The sea for hundreds of miles +has been subject to this monsoon, and we would have a very rough time +until the sea quiets down." + +The delay was a bitter thing for the boys. Expectation had run high. +Anticipation doesn't mildly or easily brook waiting. They did not know +what to do, or how to pass the time in the interim. It was such a new +and trying condition for them. + +The Professor noticed how they chafed under the restraint, but +apparently took no heed of it. However, he encouraged them in every +effort they made to divert themselves and to occupy their minds during +the waiting period. + +During one of these spells which come on all more or less during such +trying hours, George could not hold in any longer, but broke out +impatiently: "What is the use of waiting any longer? The storm may keep +up for a week." + +"Then do you think we had better venture a start under these +conditions?" + +George thought a while. He appreciated the risk. Harry, too, was anxious +and nervous, and expressed a willingness to take the risk. + +"Let me put another side to the question," said the Professor. "We are +perfectly safe here. You take no risks by remaining. You have in the +cave treasure that will make you millionaires. You cannot afford to take +any risks. If we knew something of the conditions on the island, and had +a certain knowledge that our comrades were in danger, the considerations +I have named should not deter us from starting. But with all these +things in the dark, and with the monsoons likely to break out again at +any time, the question is whether we can afford to risk the safety of +the enterprise because of impatience at delay." + +"Yes," answered Harry. "I have thought of these things, and I feel that +the Professor's advice should be followed." + +The boys were particularly surprised that he should refer to the money +in the cave as a reason why they should consider their actions in the +matter. It was so unlike him to refer to any sordid considerations as a +reason for not performing a great duty. + +"I would also remind you that one of the greatest boons ever given to +the great investigators of the world came through delays. Time is a +wonderful reasoner. It is also a great modifier of events. Darwin was +prevented for twenty years in promulgating his great thesis; some of the +most marvelous inventions took years to bring out and develop into such +a state as to make them acceptable to the world. Delays, patiently +borne, make strong men. The impetuous think they represent wasted +opportunities. Davy Crockett enunciated one of the greatest principles +of human action when he said, 'Be sure you are right, then go ahead.' It +was only another way of advising against recklessness or impatience in +any enterprise." + +Thus three days passed, and not without misgivings, the signal was given +for the start. Angel accompanied them, and with a new flag which the +days of leisure had given them an opportunity to prepare, the little +craft sailed down the waters of Cataract, in a shining sun, bound for a +haven which might mean rest, or to a shore which might offer no welcome +to them. The wind was coming mildly from the north, and when they had +cleared the shore line and were beyond the influence of the swells, +their course was directed to the west. Several miles beyond was a point +which projected out to sea; they could see this plainly from Observation +Hill, and during the last long trip inland they reached the sea beyond +this cape. + +The shore line beyond was absolutely unknown to them, but it extended to +the west as far as they could see, and when night set in the faint mist +prevented them from judging how much farther it ran in that direction. + +Without proper instruments at sea, distance is always a difficult matter +to judge, and the boys were constantly venturing guesses as to the +distance traveled. The start was made shortly after nine o'clock, and it +was now past six in the evening. + +"How far do you think we have gone during the day?" was George's +question. + +The Professor made a mental calculation before replying. "If we have +traveled at the same speed during the entire course that we made during +the first three miles to the cape, we have gone about thirty miles." + +"Do you know it is three miles to the cape?" + +"Yes, it is approximately that distance. I measured it by triangulation +some time ago, using our house and Observation Hill as the base line." + +The boys had neglected to take this precaution. + +"What was your object in doing that?" + +"So that we might have some means to observe the speed our boat could +make. If we knew the speed of the wind, we might be able to calculate +our distance." + +"But the wind has been coming from the north and we are sailing due +west. Would not the difference in the speed of the wind make a +difference in the speed of the boat?" + +"It was for that reason I stated if our rate of travel was the same we +would have made that distance. The wind has been variable at different +points along the coast, so that our average may have been four miles per +hour." + +"At what speed has the wind been during the day; I mean the average +speed?" + +"Less than eight miles an hour?" + +"If the wind had been coming from the east we could have made much +better time, and we might then have been near the mouth of the West +River," was Harry's conclusion. + +"Why do you think we should have made better time?" asked the Professor. + +"Because we should then have been going with the wind." + +"You are entirely wrong in your assumption. Sailing ships travel faster +when tacking than when sailing with the wind." + +The boys looked at the Professor in astonishment. + +"It does not seem possible," replied George, "that any movement of the +wind pushing sidewise could be more effective than a pressure straight +ahead. Can you explain the reason for the statement?" + +"When the wind blows straight against a sail, certain eddies are +produced which cause a convolute stream around its edges. These currents +are counter to the forward movement of the vessel. Assuming that this +normal pressure of the wind is 1,000 pounds, it is estimated that fully +half is lost in effectiveness. On the other hand, if the ship is moving +forward at right angles to the direction of the wind, and the sail is +set at forty-five degrees, that is what is called a tack; while it has +only about six-sevenths the surface that it had when going with the +wind, the sail is constantly going into new wind and, therefore, the +pressure is a constant one and most efficiently applied to the surface." + +"Do you mean by this that if I hold up a sail so that the wind blows +flat against it, the pressure will not be as great as if I held it at an +angle?" + +[Illustration: _Fig. 21. Fig. 22. ILLUSTRATING WIND PRESSURE_] + +"No; I had reference to a moving object. I can better explain the +phenomenon by illustrating the two conditions: In the drawing (Fig. 21), +let A represent a sail with 100 square feet of surface. The darts (1) +represent the wind blowing dead against it. This is called the normal +position. You will see the darts representing the direction of the +movement of the wind. Now look at the next sketch (Fig. 22). Here the +sail (B) is put at an angle of forty-five degrees from the direction of +the wind. The sail is still the same size vertically, but it is somewhat +smaller horizontally across the line (C), this diminution in size being +about one-seventh of the entire area. The darts (D) in both cases +represent the movement of the boat, and the darts (2) in the last sketch +show the wind striking the sail at an angle." + +"In the first sketch the darts (1) strike the sail normally, as you say, +in what way do the darts (2) in the next figure strike the sail?" + +"At an angle of incidence. If you will notice the behavior of the wind +in the first view it will be seen that the wind curves around the edges +of the sail, and strikes against the back of it, and thus produces the +retarding effect I referred to. On the other hand, by examining the +second sketch, the darts (2) plainly show their course across the sail +diverted from their straight source, and behind the bulging sail the air +does not press against the sail, but tries to continue in a straight +line. As a result a partial vacuum is formed along the region designated +by E, and this produces a most effective pull, since the sail constantly +tries to move forward and fill this vacuum. Is this made clear to you?" + +"I can plainly see now what the action of the air is, but does the air +push just as hard against each square foot when it is at an angle as +when it is blowing against it straight?" + +"That is a good observation, and one that might ordinarily be +overlooked. No, it does not, but the difference can be readily +calculated." + +"Then supposing the sail to be 10 feet square, and the wind is blowing +against it straight, as in the first sketch, at the rate of twenty miles +an hour; what pressure would there be against the entire sail?" + +"At that speed of wind the pressure on each square foot of surface is 2 +pounds, and this multiplied by 100 equals 200 pounds." + +"When it is at forty-five degrees, what is the pressure on each square +foot?" + +"This is determined in the following manner: Square the speed of the +wind, which means multiplying 20 by 20, and this produces the square, +400. In mathematics, as in many of the sciences, a constant is employed. +A constant is a figure which never varies. In this case the constant is +designated by the decimal .005. That means 5/1000th, or reduced to its +lowest denomination, 1/200th. If, now, we divide 400 by 1/200, the +result will be 2 pounds. This figure thus represents the pressure of air +on each square foot of surface, which, multiplied by the sail area, 100 +square feet, makes 200 pounds." + +"If that is the push when it is normal, what will it be at 45 degrees?" + +"Each angle of incidence has its own figure, or coefficient, or for your +better understanding, value, and the value at 45 degrees is .666. So +that by multiplying 200 by this value, we get a total pressure of 133.2 +pounds." + +"These figures are used a great deal in flying machines; are they not?" + +"Yes; and that is a subject which we might pursue, but there are some +things right ahead that may for the present interest us more." + +Through the haze which had now settled down, a faint outline of land was +made out in the distance. The course was altered to the northeast, and +after a quarter-hour sail, land was again espied ahead, so that to avoid +the shore the course was taken due north. This was evidence that the +land projected northwardly, and the Professor suggested that the effort +should be made to chart as accurately as possible the shore line. This +could be done mentally. + +"I had forgotten to take any note," said Harry. "What is the proper +thing to observe in making these calculations?" + +"Two things must always be uppermost in the mind of the explorer on the +sea: First the time, and second the speed. Time can always be accurately +determined, but the question of speed can come by experience only. A +good sailor can very accurately determine speed by an examination of the +passing water, where the sea is comparatively calm. I have known where +the distances have been thus estimated within a hundred feet in each +mile in a ten-mile course, and where the speeds were varied along the +route. Then, a good observer must have the gift of direction. If he has +sailed one hour at a certain speed in a given direction his mental chart +may be of the greatest service to him. In our case it would be +invaluable. It is a quality well worth our effort to acquire." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A TERRIBLE VOYAGE AND THE SHIPWRECK + + +The shadows of night were now upon them. How vividly it recalled to +their minds the horrors of the five days and nights during which they +were tossed about in the little lifeboat a year before. Then they were +helpless, and now strong. At that time everything was dark and gloomy, +without a ray of hope. Contrast the situation at this time. + +What a gratification it must have been to look back during the past +twelve months and mentally calculate what they had accomplished. They +had delved in many of the hidden mysteries of nature and learned the +secrets. Such knowledge had been put to use. They had discovered many +things that gave them pleasure, but in doing so found others that +startled and grieved them. Things inexplainable and impossible to fathom +had crossed their paths on almost every side. + +But they were now doing the work of men. The Professor knew how they had +developed, and grown brave and strong. He knew it better than the boys +could realize themselves. What a source of pleasure it must have been to +the kindly faced, gray-haired Professor, as he looked at his charges in +admiration and love. Could anything be more inspiring than the +contemplation of the work he had done? + +And now the inevitable charting board was brought out, and the plan +adopted which would enable them to trace the coast line. It was +explained that all sailing was by the points of the compass, and for +this purpose the compass was made to correspond with the regulation +instrument. This is shown in Fig. 23. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 23. MARINER'S COMPASS_] + +The four cardinal points are north, south, east and west. Exactly midway +between each of the four points are the divisions designated northeast, +southeast, southwest and northwest. Then, again, intermediate, the last +divisions and the cardinal points are other markings which show that the +angles are nearer one of the cardinal points than the other, so that a +course may be marked off, by the compass, which, if followed for a +certain time, and the speed of that period determined, can be traced and +thus marked out on paper so that the outline of the coast can thereby be +laid out. + +[Illustration: _The Northern Shore OF WONDER ISLAND. Chart showing Voyage +in "No. 3." Fig. 24._] + +The Professor had the charting board before him. "I have marked our +starting point, which is designated as A. It will be remembered that we +marked a course due west, passing the headland three miles from Cataract +River. This is line 1. When we saw the land ahead of us last night, we +changed our course by the compass to northwest, thus making a new line +of travel, which you see is designated as 2. B was the point where the +turn was made." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 25. THE CHARTING BOARD_] + +"But in what manner did you know how to transfer it to the board?" + +"The board has two lines crossing each other at right angles to +correspond with the two lines on the compass. The compass was put on the +middle of the board, and the upper board turned so that the needle was +on a line with the N----S line." + +The boys now noticed for the first time that there were two boards, one +above the other, and that the lower one was a little larger, and was +attached to the boat. "Why do you have the lower board attached to the +boat and larger than the upper one?" + +"The lower board has on it a section of the compass, and the upper end a +pointer, as you notice, and the line T represents the boat's direction, +so that when the compass was placed on the upper board, the latter was +turned so that it corresponded with the points of the compass. The +little pointer then accurately pointed to northwest, on the lower board, +and by this means the changing of the upper board, so as to keep it due +east and west at all times, will enable us to keep on our course." + +It was a long and weary night. One of them slept while the others were +on duty. The boys knew the time on shipboard, where the day begins at +midnight, and is divided into watches of four hours each, thus making +three watches for the night and three for the day. A bell is struck +every half hour, so that each watch is noted by the eight strokes of the +bell. What is called the dog-watches occur between 4 and 8 P.M., this +period being divided in the first dog-watch between 4 and 6, and the +second dog-watch between 6 and 8. + +"Why should such peculiar times be taken, or the periods be divided up +in that way?" + +"For the very reason that we discussed the arranging of our time of +watch last night; namely, so that one person would not have the same +watch every night. It was agreed by us that one should have three hours' +uninterrupted sleep, while the others were on duty, so that each would +in turn get three hours' work. Our arrangements are somewhat different +from shipboard time, on account of our number, but the principle is the +same." + +During the night the wind changed to the north, so that progress was +slow and required considerable tacking, and when the Professor came on +duty he found the course still to the north, and on questioning Harry, +found that the wind had been rather regular during his watch. Within a +half hour of the time he took charge the western shore faded away, and +the course was directed to NWW, in which direction they continued until +well along in the forenoon. Then, as the land receded again, another +tack was made, WbS, which means West by South. + +The winds, however, were perverse during the second day. After a calm +the wind veered to the west, and when in the afternoon the course was +changed to SSW they had to sail close to the wind, and made slow +progress. + +Let us see what they found on the day's journey along the northern point +which they rounded the second day of the journey. Cliffs, like their +own, were distinctly visible in the evening and during the morning of +the second day, but when morning broke on the third day they saw a +beautiful shore line, and beyond the mountain range which was seen by +them on their land trip to West River. It was now certain that the mouth +of that river had been passed during the night and all regretted this. + +During the whole of the third day they were forced to sail in the teeth +of the wind, which necessitated frequent tacking. Not a sign of human +habitation was seen on this day, but during the night, when the boys +were on duty, they declared that they had seen lights to the south. The +interest was most intense. Were they really rounding the island? + +The course for the opening morning of the fourth day was SWbW, and early +in the day they were not more than a mile from the shore, and then the +shore gradually receded, but the course was not changed. The wind began +to blow with greater force, and came from the southwest. As night +approached it increased, but they continued tacking, hoping that they +might reach the western extremity, and thus be able to run to the east +before the wind. + +Before eight o'clock lights were distinctly visible. They had reached +the vicinity of human habitations. The boys were too excited to think of +the watches which had thus far been observed. Aside from that, the wind +had now reached such a violent stage that it was impossible to make any +headway against it. + +A consultation was had. "We must either turn to the north or go to +shore. I fear this sudden change in the direction of the wind," was the +Professor's opinion of the situation. It would not be wise to risk the +shore. All knew that and sadly they turned the craft to the north. It +was well that they did so. Every moment, it seemed, some new impetus +would be given the wind. It howled on every side of them; the waves +drifted across the little ship, until everything was dripping with +moisture, and the only dry spot was within the little housed enclosure +which had been well protected on the open rear side, thanks to the +watchful suggestions of the Professor. + +To add to their discomfort of mind, the land was not in sight. There was +nothing to steer by except the compass and the chart which had been laid +out. They were now going north over the course that had been traversed +for the past two days--the west coast of the island. + +It was a long, long night. No one slept, because fear and anxiety was +ever with them. They remembered now with vividness the days spent on the +ocean when they were wrecked. It was a terrible succession of hours, +with the wind and the lightning and the rain one continuous orgy. The +Professor sat at the tiller. The sails had been taken down long before. +The impact of the driving storm against the housed structure was +sufficient to drive it forward, so that the vessel could be guided. + +It seemed that every blow against the boat would wrench it to atoms, but +if any part had given way it was not apparent. Harry, who sat nearest +the housed structure, suddenly sprang up, and pointing down, cried out: +"It is leaking; look how it boils!" It was forethought on the part of +the Professor to put in a supply of the oakum used for caulking +purposes. Harry sprang for it, and George grasped the bailing pan. After +a struggle a sufficient amount was driven into interstices to keep out +at least a portion of the seepage. This knowledge was most oppressive. +When a boat of this kind once springs a leak, due to a severe wrench of +the shell itself, it is a difficult matter to remedy it, without +structurally strengthening it. + +Morning was now appearing, and still no land appeared in sight. More +leaks appeared, and the boys were now constantly bailing and repairing. +The Professor had held the tiller for more than six hours, but he did +not appear to be exhausted. At every attempt of the boys to relieve him, +he only said that they had more important work in bailing and caulking. + +He finally changed the course due east, and it was more by luck than +exact calculation that they made out the northern end of the island +which was passed the first night out. In one night they had traveled a +distance coming back that required two days and nights to traverse in +the other direction. As it was they were headed for the cliffs at the +point of land, and it must be avoided. + +Harry saw the danger, and went back to consult the Professor. He had the +tiller firmly in his grasp, and his body bent over it to keep it steady; +but when Harry reached him, and touched him, there was no response. +Almost frantic, he cried to George: "Come here, quickly; something is +the matter!" + +George was there in an instant, and caught up the Professor, while Harry +grasped the tiller, as it was released, and turned it to starboard. The +little boat responded, but Harry knew that if turned too far, the wind +might catch it on the beam and crush it to atoms. + +The Professor had fainted, and when George finally revived him, he +looked about, and seeing Harry at the tiller, told him that he must turn +to the left to avoid the cliffs, and when he was advised of what had +bean done, he grasped Harry's hand, and commended him for the knowledge +and foresight which had been exhibited in that trying moment. + +The cliffs were ahead and to the right. The crucial time must come +within the next half hour. The point must not only be cleared, but they +must pass it at a distance beyond the influence of the powerful swells +and waves, which are always present at points situated like this. The +storm was from the west, and the promontory pointed to the north. Under +the circumstances, the sea at the end of the land was a raging +maelstrom, and the counter influence of the raging waves, beyond the +point, offered as great a danger as at its extremity. + +And now the leaks appeared at every side. Despair almost overtook Harry, +and he moved from one point to the next with the oakum and the caulking +tool. The Professor had insisted on again taking the helm. He had been +refreshed by the few moments' relaxation. Slowly he moved over to the +tiller. Would he ever make it? The boys stopped their work, fascinated +with the nerve-racking intensity of it. They knew the point had been +passed. The Professor smiled, and held up his hand as a signal, and the +boys rushed to him and actually cried, as he put his arms about them. + +It must not be imagined that they were out of their peril now. Nearly a +foot of water was in the bottom. The storm was, in a measure, blanketed +by the cliffs, and there was now no alternative but to reach the shore. +It was fortunate that they were on the lee side of the land, but even +there the waves rolled up on the shore, and the Professor knew that any +landing which might be made would be hazardous in the extreme. + +The vessel was approaching a shelving beach. Fortunately, from what +could be distinguished of its character, it was not a broken or rocky +shore. + +"Boys, can you put up the mainsail?" The Professor's voice had a +wonderful ring to it, for one so nearly exhausted. Without waiting to +question they sprang to the halliards and drew it up, while the boat in +the meantime was turned to port to ease the operation. + +The boys looked on in wonder as the tiller was turned and, when the boat +had gained headway, was pointed to the shore. It fairly darted through +the surf and the billows which marked the shore line, but before the +boat touched the beach, the Professor motioned them to come back. "Now +hold fast, when we strike." + +In another instant they seemed to be lifted by a giant wave, and as it +receded the boat, impelled forwardly by the sail, struck the sand of the +beach the moment after the tiller had been brought hard to port. The +result was that the boat was now spun around with its stern toward the +oncoming wind, but the impact was so great that the entire left side of +the little ship was crushed like an egg shell. + +"Release the boom, quickly!" + +When that had been done the wrecked vessel was still, and the Professor +was lifted out of the boat, but he stood there grasping the side, too +stiff to move, but with that same smile on his countenance which had +told the boys on so many occasions before, how gratified he was at their +safety. + +Poor Angel was actually a wreck. He had remained within the housed +enclosure ever since the storm began. When the rocking and tossing of +the boat ceased, and he heard nothing but the beating wind, he could not +understand what had happened. + +All had forgotten the little animal. George was the first to go to his +rescue, and found him crouching in the extreme end of the enclosure. +After some coaxing he moved toward George, and when he was led out and +saw about him on one side the raging waves and on the other side the +land, his chatter turned to a chuckle, and he leaped to the land, +shambled up the bank, and catching the limb of the nearest tree, was +soon in its top, as happy as though ocean storms were unknown. + +Meals had been forgotten since the day before. The boat was so high up +on the beach that they had no fears for the waves. Hunger asserted +itself now, and the moment the stove was brought out, Angel was down in +a moment, came over to George, and looked up inquiringly into his face. +It was such a comical situation, coming so close upon the heels of their +great catastrophe, that he could not help laughing. He knew what that +look meant, and Angel had more than the usual share of sugar. That with +the nuts, of which there was always an abundant supply, was a feast for +the little fellow. + +After the meal a careful examination was made of the boat. The entire +left side, from the bow to a third of the way back from the midship +bulge, was broken to atoms. The inside of the boat was filled with sand +which had been driven in when the impact took place. To repair it would +be impossible without suitable lumber, to say nothing of tools. They sat +down, not with a feeling of despair, so that they might the better form +a judgment as to the wisest course to pursue. + +"What interests me most," said George, "is to know where we are. Do you +think we are anywhere near West River?" + +The Professor sat there musing, but did not answer. Harry ventured the +opinion that they must be far east of the mouth of that river. + +Finally the Professor gave his views: "It is simply impossible for us to +speculate on the course of the river, because we were unfortunate enough +to pass it by in the night. It seems to me more probable, however, that +it finds its way to the sea to the east of the point we came around." + +"What reason have you for thinking so?" + +"Simply because the mountains were not, apparently, far inland, and it +seems to me that the promontory is merely an extension of the mountains +or the high ridge we saw." + +"I would certainly feel more comfortable," continued George "if I knew +we were anywhere near the river." + +But some decision must be made, and that without delay. If they were +near West River the distance home was fully seventy-five miles. +Preparations must be made for the trip on foot. The boat was, probably, +in as safe a condition as it could be higher up, nevertheless it was +concluded to take no chances, and all the provisions were removed, and +by means of levers and blocks, it was carried inland fully thirty feet +farther. A good supply of provisions was then taken, the guns and +ammunition removed, and put in separate piles, and arranged in +convenient packages for easy transportation. + +The residue was carefully stored within the housed enclosure, and +carefully covered over. What grieved them most was the bedding, which +must be left, but the Professor insisted that all the articles of ramie, +which would afford some covering, should be taken along. They would now +be compelled to sleep in the open air, with nothing else to cover them. + +With a last look at their ship, they moved toward the east with heavy +hearts. + +Harry stopped before they had gone far. "It occurs to me that we ought +to put some inscription on the boat. If any of our friends should +discover the boat it might guide them to us." + +"That is a capital idea," answered the Professor; and they returned to +put up the proper notice. + +It was past noon, but they hoped to cover at least ten miles before +evening should set in, but the way was rough and broken. "I think," +mused the Professor, as they halted on the journey, "we made a mistake +in not following the seashore. The only reason that prompted me to take +this course was the appearance of the shore to the east of our landing +place. It looked so uninviting that I felt sure we should find traveling +inland more comfortable." + +During the first five miles of the journey the ascent was gradual, but +not steep, at any place, but now the land gradually showed a change in +character, growing smoother and more open, and they knew the grade had +changed and was taking them down to a lower level. + +Before evening came, emerging from a light wood, great was the delight +at seeing a beautiful river before them. It was a broad stream, and they +divined that it must be the West River, which, they had so longed to +reach. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE RETURN TRIP. THE ORANG-OUTAN + + +Here they were on the banks of a broad stream, tired and hungry. The +experiences which they had gone through made the task of seeking +suitable shelter an easy one. An entire month of preparation had been +wasted. Aside from the lights which were seen on the fourth day on the +western shore, they had no more knowledge than when they started. It +seemed to be very discouraging. + +But they were going home. This was the most comforting thought and it +made up for a great deal of the disappointments. There was real grief at +the loss of the boat. True, it could be recovered, but all this meant +time and hard work. It should be said, however, that at no time had +either of the boys ever found fault with the tasks that were allotted to +them. + +In this fact the Professor found much comfort. It was a strong factor, +as he knew, in the lives of the boys. It required the highest sort of +courage to bear misfortune without complaining. + +The camp for the night was soon made, and after a hearty meal all +retired for the night. Early in the morning the boys were at work, as +soon as the morning meal was finished, constructing a raft of sufficient +size to carry them across, and when the timbers had been securely lashed +and all their luggage placed aboard, the poles and primitive paddles +gave them a trying half hour to make the trip. + +The stream was rather wide at this point, and it was believed to be near +the sea, and the suggestion was made to follow the stream down for an +hour, to ascertain whether the ocean would appear in view, and if not, +to take up the trail for the east. + +In less than a half hour the sea was in sight. The course was then +directed east, but after traveling the entire forenoon through the most +difficult paths, it was decided to change the course to the south. + +"If you recall, we took a more southerly course when we left the West +River on our overland trip, and found much better traveling." + +The Professor's words recalled the incident, and the result was a change +to the southeast. This was now the sixth day after leaving home in the +No. 3. During the day at least twenty miles was made. Shortly before +night, George, who was in the lead, stopped, and then moved forward, +gazing at the ground intently. + +Harry saw the movement and was at his side in an instant. "What is it?" +It was not necessary to continue his inquiry. Directly ahead was a +slightly cleared space, with a blackened space in the center, where a +fire undoubtedly had been made, and a few bones were still scattered +about as mute evidences of occupation. + +The Professor looked at it a moment, and then smiled. "Don't you +remember our own camp fire?" This was the case. While they could not +remember the particular spot, they knew the old trail had been crossed, +and it was a comfortable, homelike feeling to come across the spot. + +"Let us camp here again," said Harry, as he threw down his pack. On this +occasion they did not have the wagon and the yaks, but they had an ample +supply of food and there was no difficulty in making a fire. + +Their first adventure came about noon of the seventh day. Plenty of +evidences of animals had been found, but they were not eager to hunt. +The trail for home had far more fascination than all the animals on the +island. It was the custom to stop at intervals for rest. During one of +these stops the cracking of bushes was heard, as though produced by a +cautious tread. The boys were alert at once and, with their guns in +hand, moved in the direction of the noises. + +Not two hundred feet away was an immense bear, of the same species they +had shot near that place nine months before. The boys separated, as they +approached, under the guiding direction of the Professor, and when +within seventy-five feet, Harry asked whether or not he should shoot. + +Bruin was slowly moving away, not directly ahead, but as though crossing +Harry's path. When the word was given, Harry took deliberate aim. George +reserved his shot, as advised. The moment the shot struck, the animal +turned, thus exposing a fair mark for George, who now fired. With a howl +at the second shot, the bear turned toward George, who immediately ran +to the right, and on the call of the Professor, circled to the right. + +This brought the animal within range of the Professor's gun, and he +fired. It did not in the least check his pursuit of George, and the +Professor now became alarmed at his safety. Call after call was made to +advise him to turn to the right. + +Harry followed as fast as he could run, and while keeping the animal in +sight, could not approach closely enough to get another shot. While +running, it occurred to him that he had not reloaded, and it would be +impossible to reload while running. + +The Professor realized the situation, and immediately reloaded, and +calling after Harry, told him that he had a charged weapon. Harry heard, +but he was so excited and fearful for George that he could not decide +whether to stop or go on. He could see the bear, but George was not in +sight. + +The Professor followed as rapidly as he could. Harry saw the bear +lumberingly cross a large fallen tree and pass on to the right, and +thinking George had taken that course, did not wait to go up to the +tree. Before the Professor reached Harry, who was now running at right +angles to the course of the Professor, George emerged from his place of +concealment behind the tree and laughed at the sport, which might have +had serious results but for the dead tree. + +You may be sure no further effort was made to follow up the bear, and +they took up the search for their luggage, which had been left behind. +During all this hubbub, Angel had been left with the luggage, and he now +appeared along the trees, swinging from branch to branch, uttering the +most fearful shrieks and chattering, as he was in the habit of doing +when alarmed or excited. + +"Something is after Angel; quick!" called out George, as Angel made his +way over to him. Harry grasped the loaded gun from the Professor and +started toward the direction from which the orang had come, but he +stopped suddenly after going several hundred feet. + +"The bear has our things." The Professor and George came up, and there, +with his powerful claws and massive jaws, was Bruin, devouring their +best morsels and playing havoc with the packages that were piled +together. + +The boys looked at the Professor, and he playfully answered the look by +saying, "We really don't want any bear meat to-day, do we?" George +thought it was a good joke on the hunters, but Harry was angered. "Let +us finish him. See him break that gun?" + +The Professor was busy reloading Harry's gun, which he had exchanged +with him, and handed it to George. They approached, but not close enough +to venture a shot, when the animal deliberately turned away and darted +into the bush. + +What was left of their luggage worth taking could easily be carried by +either of them. Practically all of the food was gone or ruined, and the +bear was recompensed for the little inconvenience by the two pounds or +more of sugar which was taken. + +"Well, boys, everything has its compensations. We have nothing to carry, +and traveling will be easy for the rest of the trip. Let us take a good +laugh over the experience." + +Harry was too much annoyed, first at the failure to hit the brute and +then at the mean trick in eating up and destroying their things while +they were trying to follow him. The Professor suggested that it would be +fun to visit Bruin's house that night when he came home and told his +family what a neat trick he had played on some hunters, and Harry +laughed, but it was an awfully forced effort. + +When evening came they estimated that the distance still to be traveled +could not exceed thirty-five miles, and they were seeking a good spot +for the camp. The Professor was the first to make his appearance with a +small yellow pear, which he held up. + +"What have you found now?" George inquired, as he came running forward +with a branch in his hand. + +"Pears!" exclaimed Harry, as he took it from the Professor's hand. + +"Not exactly a pear; but a fine fruit which we can use to good +advantage. It is the guava." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 26. Guava._] + +"What a beautiful white flower! I did not know that the guava had such a +delightful odor. In what way is it prepared and used?" + +"You will see, by tasting it that the pulp is very aromatic and sweet. +Its principal use is for jellies and preserves, and the rind stewed with +milk makes an excellent marmalade." + +"Have you found many of them?" + +"There are several trees over there, and it seems to me that it is a +good place to put up for the night, and we can gather a quantity of +them." + +Several trees were in sight, about 18 feet high, beautiful branching +specimens, and beneath one of them the camp was made for the night. + +While they were seated the Professor noticed the branch which George had +brought. It was a stem about two feet long, with a lot of leaves on each +side, and at the juncture of the leaves with the stem were rows of what +appeared to be nuts. These were in the form of clusters. + +He picked it up. "I thought I had made a good find in the guava, but +this is still better." + +"The nuts around the stem are what attracted me, and my curiosity was +aroused." + +"You took this from the coffee tree." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 27. Coffee._] + +"Is it the real coffee?" + +"It is the genuine article. I have searched for it from time to time. +Let us go over and see the tree. We must cultivate its acquaintance." + +They responded with alacrity. They were now going to have coffee. The +tree was fully twenty feet high, and the branches extended out +horizontally from all sides. + +"Earlier in the season these nuts, as George called them, looked like +cherries." + +"But where is the coffee?" + +"Inside the berry. Each berry contains two seeds. You know how the +coffee berry looks. Let us open one of them. See, it is smaller than the +ordinary berries, as you know them, but the kind we know are cultivated, +which makes them larger, and fuller in appearance. These will make fine +coffee, however, and I think we shall have to divide our load with the +guavas." + +"Where did coffee originally come from? Is it found in many places +throughout the world?" + +"The plant is supposed to be a native of Arabia in Asia, and of +Abyssinia, in Africa. From Arabia it was carried to most of the tropical +countries, but many varieties have been found in the western hemisphere. +Even in Canada certain kinds of coffee plants are known. It is not, +therefore, a wholly tropical plant. The Abyssinian coffee has been known +from the earliest times." + +"What is regarded as the best kind of coffee?" + +"The best coffee of commerce is the Mocha, and next comes Java, and the +principal coffee center of the world is Brazil." + +On the morning of the eighth day they were awake early, and the boys +began work on the berries. Angel took a hand in the proceedings, and as +soon as he discovered what the boys were after he volunteered to harvest +them. At this time the berries had somewhat hardened, and when Angel +knew what was wanted, his long dextrous fingers were able to strip off +more of the fruit in one stroke than the four hands of the boys. Harry +was on the lower limb, and as fast as he had stripped a supply, would +drop them into the outstretched cloth which the Professor and George +held. + +Angel eyed this proceeding, for a time, and then imitated Harry. How did +he ever learn the art of picking coffee berries? The orang lives +principally on nuts and berries, and the instinct to gather these was a +natural one. + +In an incredible short space of time fully a bushel had been taken off. +It was the original idea of the boys to cut off the limbs, but they had +seen none of the trees before this, and the Professor advised them to +pick the fruit itself. Without Angel's expert help it would have been a +long job. + +With a load of guavas and another of coffee, the five guns, and a few of +the other relics of their ill-fated expedition, was sufficient for the +two days' journey still before them. That afternoon, while resting by +the side of a little stream that flowed to the north, the antics of +Angel attracted attention. He was usually so quiet that no notice was +taken of him. + +He had two peculiar ways of making himself understood. One was a +gurgling sound, which indicated pleasure and contentment; and the other +a chatter, or half a shriek, when intensely excited or alarmed. But now +he did neither of these things. The sounds emitted could not well he +described. + +The sounds were made while springing from branch to branch. When he had +attracted George's attention he ran forward, usually along the branches, +but close to the ground. George followed. Whenever he attempted to go +back to his comrades, Angel would come back, and in his most beseeching +way endeavor to induce George to follow. His actions were well +understood in this respect, because it will be remembered that he +directed the attention to the missing team, and afterwards rediscovered +the trail after it had been lost. + +"Follow him, George, and we will bring the packages," was Harry's +suggestion. + +It was not necessary for them to go far. Beyond, in some large trees, +were three immense orang-outans, intently gazing on the newcomer. George +ran back, crying out: "See the orang-outans in the trees! Isn't this the +place we captured Angel?" + +Harry threw down the load and was by the side of George without a +moment's delay. "Where is Angel? I am afraid this is the last of the +little fellow." And Harry showed his grief. They saw Angel on his way to +the trees, and without waiting for an invitation, was up among the +branches, visiting his friends, and, probably, his parents. + +All stood there awaiting the results breathlessly. Not a word was +spoken. Without hesitation he swung himself to the last limb, on which +the patriarch perched. Not a hand was lifted against him, but they +looked too astonished to speak, even if they could. + +Angel went from one to the other. He petted them, as George had often +petted him. He knew what a caress meant, but his kin did not. It was too +much for George. "Come down, Angel; good boy; come down." And he said it +pathetically, too. + +Not a hand was held out to him, nor did he get any sort of welcome, and +yet he had expected so much, from what he tried to tell George, while on +the way to his old home. It was too much for him. He heard that familiar +voice, and the call that was always a welcome one, and he slowly +descended the tree, not with that springy motion which characterized his +ascent, but hesitatingly and in measured swings. + +He went up to George and leaned against him, and then they knew that +Angel intended to go home with them again. But they could not help +watching the effect of Angel's actions on the animals in the trees. +Ordinarily, they will quickly spring away from any intruders, as they do +not generally consider the trees high enough to give protection. Their +remarkable agility enables them to travel faster by the tree line than +man can follow on foot. + +But now that Angel was again with the boys, all sense of fear seemed to +leave the three creatures in the trees. They looked down at the +proceedings, and as the boys passed by they sat in their specially +prepared seats, as though they knew the care which had been bestowed on +their offspring. + +This little incident affected all more than it is possible to tell. The +animal was really a marvelous character. True, George had spent hours +and days in his education. He knew many of the words, and could execute +missions, and did many things to aid George in the work at home, and it +would have been a trial and a sorrow to miss him. + +The next day would see them home again, and they could hardly restrain +themselves at the thought of it. What if some one should have visited +them while absent? Why might not the savages have found their abode? +These were questions ever uppermost in the minds of all. + +Before noon they reached the Cataract River to the west of the forest. +This seemed like an old friend. And what was more: before they had gone +many miles, the Professor pointed to a clearing, and remarked: "Do you +remember this place?" + +The boys looked about, as they moved forward. "I do not recollect the +place," was George's answer, but Harry now recalled the fight of the +bears, and the honey tree, and without saying a word he ran to the tree, +which was still lying there, and said one word, "Honey." + +George now remembered, and Angel began to gurgle. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE STRANGE VISITOR + + +In the afternoon of the ninth day, emerging from the forests, the first +sight that met their eyes was the flag floating from the top of +Observation Hill. Never before had the flag looked so glorious, and they +could not repress a shout and a cheer. The distance home was at least +four miles, but tired as they were, no one felt like stopping for a +rest. + +Everything at the home seemed quiet and peaceful. The cattle were there, +lazily scattered about, apparently not knowing or caring whether their +masters were absent. The boys were moving along jauntily, happy as +larks, singing snatches of songs, and amusing the Professor with sallies +of wit and humor. + +Angel was just as happy and was enjoying the prospects of coming home. +Long before the home was neared he started off on a race, with George at +his heels. Burdened as he was, it was impossible to keep up with the +animal, so that the latter was at the house long before George came +near. He was surprised to see Angel bounding toward him with his +peculiar chattering that betokened excitement, and he stopped and +hesitated what to do. + +Depositing his load on the ground, he ran back, and signaled to the +others. Angel came up and tried to tell them in his peculiar way of some +danger ahead. Two hundred feet south of the house was a thick growth of +underbrush, and to that the party made its way. + +Arriving there, a consultation was had, on the course of procedure. +Nothing was, apparently, disturbed. No sign of human presence was +manifest. The door which opened to the main room, facing the west, was +closed, as well as the room of the workshop. + +"If anyone is about the premises he must be beyond the house, as it is +evident some signs would show in the house or shop. Prepare your guns +and let us go forward." + +The house was cautiously approached, and reached, and Harry quietly +gained the door, and the secret bolt opened. The door was slowly opened +and he peered in. It was unoccupied, and all rushed in. A small +trap-door on the northern side was now opened, which gave a view toward +the shop and cattle-yard. + +What they saw there startled them beyond measure, for seated on a log, +outside of the cattle-shed, was a man, with a straggling, unkempt beard, +vacantly gazing into space. + +"How shall we attract his attention?" asked Harry, breathlessly. + +"Let us rush out the front door. He is, apparently, alone." + +At the signal, with their guns ready, they filed out, and moved toward +him. He raised his eyes, and at first was a little startled, but again +relaxed, and seemed to take no particular notice of their approach. The +Professor walked toward him, and held out his hand. The stranger made no +motion or protest, either of fear or recognition, and as the Professor's +hand touched him, his hand was involuntarily extended. + +[Illustration: _"The professor walked toward him and held out his +hand"_] + +Not a word was uttered by him. The Professor turned to the boys. "He is +demented, or has lost all knowledge of his condition or surroundings. +Poor fellow!" + +The Professor addressed him. He looked startled at the sound of a human +voice, and as the voices continued, began to look inquiringly at one and +then at the other. He was a man fully fifty years of age, strong, well +built, but somewhat emaciated. His eyes had no luster, the beard was +long and shaggy, and aside from the torn and almost unrecognizable +trousers, the only article of clothing was an equally dilapidated shirt. + +George grasped Harry, excitedly. "Where did he get that shirt? That is +the one we used as our first signal flag, and which we lost five months +ago." Such was indeed the case. The only thing in its torn and tattered +condition, which enabled him to recognize it were the initials of +George, which he had noticed. + +Thus was one of the mysteries explained. Despite every attempt at +conversation, not a word escaped his lips. The Professor took him by the +arm, and led him to the house. He entered and looked around not +particularly interested, but more in curiosity than otherwise. + +"What do you suppose he has been living on, and where has he been +staying?" + +At the suggestion of the Professor, some food was brought, and placed +before him. He gazed at it. A knife and fork were on the table. He +reached for them slowly, and when he had grasped both began to eat +ravenously. He finished without looking up, and when the last morsel was +eaten stared about, and a faint smile appeared, which was the first +facial change that had crossed his features since they met him. + +He was conducted to a reclining chair, and such articles of clothing as +they could find were brought out and laid before him. He gazed on them, +and slowly picked up one after the other. His feet were bare, and +appeared to have been scratched and torn, but they were hardened by +contact with the earth. An old pair of shoes, the ones discarded by the +Professor, when they turned out the first lot of shoes, was set before +him. + +He picked them up and mechanically put them on. "Now let us leave him +alone for a while." They went out, closing the door, and Harry stole +around to the small port which he had opened, and watched the stranger. + +His demeanor did not change after they left; he simply glanced about the +room. When his eyes fell on the table, he arose and cautiously +approached, and suddenly seized the table knife, with just a slight +change of countenance. This he attempted to secrete beneath his ragged +shirt. + +"Do you think he is dangerous?" + +"His malady is a peculiar one, and arises from various causes. I do not +think we need fear him." + +"But see how he took that knife." + +"That was simply an instinct; that of self-protection. Any other +implement would have been as acceptable as a knife. Possibly, the sight +of the knife, temporarily, may have brought back some glimmering +remembrance of his sane moments." + +"Do you think he is insane?" + +"No; it does not appear to be of such a character. He seems to exhibit +loss of memory. Imbecility, idiocy, and lunacy exhibit marked +tendencies, and have been made the careful study of many eminent men, +and it is even now one of the disorders least understood by the medical +fraternity." + +"What is a lunatic?" + +"Blackstone, the great English authority on law, defines it as 'one that +hath had understanding, but by grief, disease, or other accident hath +lost the use of his reason.' This eminent authority also stated that +lunatics may have frequent lucid intervals, and might enjoy the use of +their senses during certain periods of the moon. It is from that source +we are indebted to the still prevailing idea of the moon's influence on +the human mind. That view was exploded long ago, and shown to have no +foundation." + +"What is the difference between a lunatic and an insane person?" + +"The original term was lunatic, in accordance with Blackstone's +definition; but in medical science the terms insanity and mental +alienation have taken its place." + +"Doesn't he act peculiarly? He does not seem to know we are present. +What I cannot understand is, how he knows enough to get anything to +eat." + +"That is a peculiar thing in nature. Here is a man who has, outwardly, +the appearance of an intelligent being, incapable of talking, or +uttering intelligible sounds, with memory so submerged that he doesn't, +likely, recognize his own kind, and yet has been able to find food for +at least five months, to our knowledge. It shows that, irrespective of +mind, nature has implanted some kind of an instinct of preservation in +living beings. The subject is one that has been discussed from many +standpoints, and it can never be exhausted." + +The boys now went over the entire premises, carefully examining every +part. Evidences were plenty to show that the man had slept in the shed +adjoining the stable, and the shells of nuts as well as barley heads +were found around the place he had slept. + +There was everything to indicate that his trials and sufferings on the +island had deranged him. Probably his was a case like many instances +known, where consciousness of self--the absolute loss of memory, had +caused disappearances, and many instances have been recorded where +intelligence finally asserted itself and brought back former +recollections. + +The instinct to clothe himself was shown when they returned. The +Professor went up to him kindly and spoke. The words were repeated in +German and French, but not one word did he utter, nor did he give the +least visible sign of recognition. + +During the afternoon he wandered around from place to place. The boys +were too much fascinated to turn their attention to anything. George +started out for a trip to Observation Hill, accompanied, as usual, by +Angel. The strange man was passed on the way. Without a sign he +followed. George was a little frightened, but soon recovered, as he +walked along unconcernedly. + +They crawled up the steep ascent, instead of going around the gentler +ascent, and when the pole was reached, the stranger for the first time +took any interest in anything he saw. He looked up at the flag, and then +out over the sea, and as he did so, he put up his hand to shade his eyes +from the glare of the sun. This was the only human thing which was +noticed about him. + +When George left, he followed, walking erect, and he could not help +admiring his strong, although drawn, features, and the admirable build +of his frame. He would be an antagonist to fear as an enemy. + +On the return, George stated the occurrence, and the Professor said that +the man was no doubt used to the sea, as his walk betrayed that, and the +incident of shading his eyes is a common one to all seafaring men. + +But now came up the great question of the future course to be followed. +What should be done? The determination to again attempt further +explorations was fixed in the minds of all; but how should it be +conducted? Should they again brave the dangers of the sea, or make the +next trip by land? + +The only means available by sea would be the partially damaged boat, +which was seventy-five miles away, and plans were considered either to +bring it to the Cataract by boat, or to repair it where it lay; either +course had its disadvantages. + +One day the stranger wandered over to the workshop where Harry was +engaged. He had never been inquisitive, as nothing seemed to interest or +appeal to him. When he saw the machinery, the lathe, and, finally, the +electric battery, he stood still and gazed. Slowly he made his way to +the battery which had the terminal wires lying loose. He picked them up, +and brought the ends together, and the spark seemed to fascinate him. +The experiment was repeated several times, but the wires were soon +dropped, and he resumed his usual demeanor. + +Harry ran over to the laboratory, and informed the Professor, who came +at once, and arrived just as he was dropping the wires. + +"The best thing for him is something to do. In this way, the association +with tools, if he has any knowledge of them, may awaken some +recollections of his past. I have watched him for the past three days +and I am sure he is not deranged, in the sense of being demented. Let us +try what employment will do." + +Harry was engaged in dressing a board with a plane when the man came in. +The Professor led him to the bench and placed a plane in his hand, and +by making a motion with his hand and pushing the man's hand along with +the plane, he took notice of the motion and mechanically drew the plane +back and forth. + +He not only planed the board, but he followed up the roughened parts and +finished the job in a workmanlike manner. The saw was placed in his +hands, and he handled this with a facility that surprised both of them. +He did not look like a mechanic, but on the other hand had every +appearance of a literary man, but he was, unquestionably, used to tools. + +After considering the all-important question of the exploring +expedition, which subject was an ever present one, it was agreed that +the wisest course would be a trip by land. They now knew the location of +the inhabitants of the island, and with proper equipment, they ought to +be able properly to defend themselves. Another element which might prove +of value to them was the new acquisition in the man who had come so +unaccountably to their home. + +One of the first things necessary was to give him some name by which he +could be known, and which he would in time recognize. This was debated +over and over, without coming to any conclusion. Eventually, in the +absence of anything better, it was decided to call him simply John. + +When Harry went to the shop where he was at work, he addressed him as +John; and at the uttering of the word started, as though he had been +alarmed. Harry noticed it, and repeated the name several times, with the +same result, and he hastened to inform the Professor of this experience. +The Professor went down without delay, and it was evident from the +actions of the man that he recalled something familiar in the name, as +in every instance he would put his hands to his head and give an +inquiring look. + +"It is my impression that John is his name, as he would be more likely +to remember that than anything else connected with his life. Let us keep +him occupied, and his work may also be the means of bringing back +familiar things." + +The boys, in company with John, set about preparing a good bed for the +newcomer, and he took a part in it most heartily, and seemed to +understand when the Professor pointed to him and the bed that it was +intended for him. + +The interest was more intense when he was taken to the boathouse, which +Harry had opened, and when he saw the boats, his eyes opened wide and +grew brighter, but they suddenly lost their color and he relapsed into +his former state. + +It was truly pitiful to watch him, and when in the evening they sat +together and conversed, they felt that at times he must have gotten some +glimpses of his individuality. + +In the morning when George went out to the cattle pens to milk, he +mechanically grasped a pail and followed, and the milking operation +seemed to be a familiar one to him. Thus, he was a mystery, for the +reason that he seemed to be at home in every direction where it called +for any special activity. This was made the more mystifying when, during +the next day, he wandered over to the laboratory, and his eyes caught +sight of the skulls and the skeletons which were on exhibition. + +He walked over to the skulls, and picking up one poised it on his hand, +slowly turning it around, as though trying to discover what it meant. +The one selected had one side partially crushed, and this attracted his +attention. He placed the fingers of the other hand in the shattered +part, and seemed to realize that some agency must have caused it. The +whole deportment while examining it was that of one who was called upon +to make an examination of it for the purpose of determining the cause of +the injury. + +When he laid it down, he looked at the Professor, who quietly took up +the skull and pointed to the fracture, endeavoring by his conversation +to strike a word or keynote by which some recollection would be started; +but he was mute and soon again became listless. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +AN EXCITING TRIP TO THE FALLS + + +The food supply was now the first thing to consider, as all necessaries +in the way of vegetables, as well as meats, had been exhausted when they +started on the last trip, and a new lot had to be laid in. The matter of +butter was always a hard problem to take care of, and George referred to +this difficulty, and before they sailed away the Professor told him +that, on their return, the first thing to do would be the construction +of a machine which would simplify the production of the butter. + +"As we are going to use more butter, I think it would be a good thing to +start in on our cream separator," said George, who, while he was not an +adept, like Harry, to devise the things required, was always ready to +suggest things that could be made to advantage. + +"I know that Harry will be very glad to set to work on that, so we might +as well commence," answered the Professor. + +"What is the principle of the separator that causes the cream to break +away from the milk?" + +"Centrifugal motion is employed to bring it about." + +"But how does that motion affect it?" + +"When you put a ball on an elastic and swing it about your head in a +circle, the elastic stretches in proportion to the speed at which you +swing it. You have probably seen it done. It is stretched in proportion +to its weight, also. These two things, therefore, are properties of +centrifugal motion. Cream is the fatty portion of the milk. It is +contained in little globules, and when the milk is allowed to stand, the +milk surrounding the globules, being heavier than the cream, forces its +way to the bottom, and the cream by that means goes to the top. The +inventor has taken advantage of this fact by making a machine which will +take the milk and impart to it a very high centrifugal motion, and in +doing so the milk particles, on account of their greater weight, force +their way outwardly and the cream inwardly. The machine is also so +arranged that the cream and milk are drawn from it at separate points, +and this operation is a continuous one." + +Harry quickly understood the machine from the drawing made for his +guidance, and in Figure 28 a sketch is made, showing how it was +constructed. + +[Illustration: _Fig. 28. Cream Separator._] + +A frame was made which had a base (A) and two standards or uprights (B, +B), and between these uprights were a pair of horizontal bars (C, C). +These bars served as supports for a vertical tube (D), the tube being +journaled in the center of the cross bars, so that it extended above and +below the bars, and had a small pulley (E) between them. + +Below the lower cross bar the vertical tube has two radiating tubes (F, +F), closed at their outer ends, but communicating with the bore (G) of +the tube (D) by means of two orifices (H, H). The bore (G) extends down +to a point a little below the orifices (H, H), and a small tube (I) runs +through the tube D, within the tubes F, F, the ends of the tube being +open. A duct (J) centrally through the tubular piece (D) communicates +with the bore of the tube I. One each side of the tube D is a little +tube (K), which communicates with the inner end of each tube (F). A +receptacle (L) is attached to the tube D below each tube (K), to catch +the cream. + +The operation of the machine is as follows: When milk is poured into the +top of the tube D, and the latter is set to rotate at a high speed, it +passes down and out through the ducts (H, H), into the horizontal tubes +(F, F), with the result that the cream is prevented by the heavier milk +from reaching the outer open ends of the tube I. As a result, only the +milk passes inwardly through the inner tube, and is discharged +downwardly through the duct (J), whereas the cream passes out through +the small tubes (K). + +The quest for a supply of vegetables was now a part of the daily +occupation of some in the colony, as the garden had not yet advanced to +that stage where anything could be gotten from it. One morning John was +missing, and there was a great deal of speculation as to his +disappearance. + +Before noon he reappeared, carrying in his arms as large a quantity of +vegetables as he could carry. Harry was the first to see and welcome +him. He recognized beets and was delighted to find that John understood +what they were after. When the Professor was informed, he gave a hearty +welcome, and John seemed to recognize that his efforts were appreciated. + +"Ah! I see you have some onions," he said, as he beamed on him. + +"Onions!" + +"Yes; the wild onion, the progenitor of all the onions. One variety of +this is a species called chives, used as a salad, and is known +throughout Europe under that name." + +"But this beet is very small; is it also wild?" + +"There are four varieties of the beet. This is the most common of them +all, and grows in a wild state in many parts of the world. The +Mangelwurzel is a larger beet, and coarser, and is much used for cattle +feed. If you want to give your cows a treat, this would be the food to +give them. Then there is a kind called the chard, also a good variety. +If possible, we should try and get John to show us where he found them. +Undoubtedly it was along the sandy part of the island." + +The first real surprise manifested by John was when the yaks were +hitched up and he was invited to join them on a trip. His eyes seemed to +show some glimmer of intelligence when he slowly crawled up into the +wagon. Their course was directed toward the forest to the west, and the +trip there, which occupied nearly two hours, was a constant source of +pleasure to all. + +On the way the animals were stopped at intervals to allow the Professor +and George to collect specimens of plants and to seek for ores. And here +occurred the first real symptoms of returning consciousness on the part +of John. As the Professor was moving toward a hill, with a small pick, +he was seen to pick up one of the little hammers and follow. + +Without seeming to notice either of the party, he undertook to explore +on his own account, moving here and there along the hillside and +occasionally stopping to examine and chip off samples, which he +carefully laid down, but when this was done, entirely forgot to collect +them. The act of procuring the samples seemed to be the absorbing +element. He thus went on, never returning to the places where they were +deposited. + +"That action on his part shows a remarkable phase of his malady. Notice +how carefully he puts them down and how uniformly he forgets that he has +done so. The mind, in his condition, is so disordered that it cannot +reason with any degree of sequence. He recalls only one thing at a time; +but if I am not mistaken, he is a man of culture, and his every act +shows that he was a man of broad intellect. I hope we shall be able to +restore him to his normal condition." + +The guns had been taken along, as usual, in order to do some hunting, +and while the Professor and John were engaged in prospecting, the boys +were after game, in which they were more than ordinarily successful, the +bag for the first hour being a half dozen pheasants and several +squirrels. + +When the Professor returned to the wagon with several loads of samples +which the two had gathered, George insisted on penetrating the forest +still farther, their direction being toward the falls in South River. +Before long they came across the trail which had been taken by the yaks +when they made their flight some three months before. They were now not +to exceed two miles from the falls. + +Angel, who was with them, now began one of his peculiar chattering +exhibitions which betokened alarm, and the yaks exhibited a restless +disposition. Harry moved forward to ascertain the cause, and before he +had gone two hundred feet, saw the cause of the disturbance. It was one +of the largest bears which they had so far seen, standing alongside of a +large fallen tree and vigorously working his immense paws. + +He ran back to the party and gave the information, and the Professor +seized a gun, but John instinctively, as it were, grasped one of the +spears and darted forward in the direction Harry had taken. The bear +paid no attention to the party, and when the Professor came up, he said: +"How fortunate it is that we shall be under obligations to the bears for +our second treat of honey. I do not think we ought to attack him after +rendering us this service." + +John was restrained from going forward, and he cast a peculiar glance +toward the Professor. "If there is honey there," replied George, +eagerly, "let us drive him away, at any rate." + +But Bruin would not be driven away. He sprang down from the log, +growling and pacing back and forth. Occasionally he would leap back on +the log. It was plain, that he was after the honey and regarded it as +his special property. + +"Well, George, suppose you give him a shot as a reminder that we need +some of that honey?" + +He needed no urging, and taking a rest alongside a sapling, fired a shot +with one of the long guns. The shot was answered by a terrific growl, +which ended in a prolonged roar. Without waiting for another summons, he +made a line for George, who ran back. This was more than John could +stand, who now ran directly to the bear with his sole weapon, the spear. + +Neither of them could restrain him, but all sprang after him. It was a +challenge the bear sought, and John did not in the least check himself +until within ten feet of the animal, when, with a light spring to one +side, he directed the spear against the side of the bear as he passed in +his rush. While the spear entered the animal, it did not reach a vital +spot. + +Harry was about to fire, but the Professor held up a hand. "Have a care, +unless you are able to control yourself well. You are likely to hit +John." The bear turned, but John made no motion to avoid him, and again +the bear charged. This time John did not jump aside to exceed two feet, +and again plunged the spear forward, and as the bear's lumbering body +moved forward fully ten feet or more before he could bring himself to a +halt, they saw that the spear had broken off, and the terrific growl of +the animal showed how badly he had been wounded. + +John made no effort to escape, although he plainly saw the broken end of +the weapon, and the Professor, surprising as it may seem, did not +encourage a shot. The effect of the last stab was apparent, however, as +Bruin did not turn after the last attack, but, with an expiring growl, +sank down. + +He was a magnificent specimen. The Professor went up to John and held +out his hand in recognition of his wonderful feat, and he seemed to +realize the nature of the commendation bestowed on him. + +The work of skinning the animal was participated in by all. John seemed +to enjoy it, and by his actions showed that he was at home in this sort +of work. You may be sure that his actions throughout the day were such +as to give him a warm place in their hearts, and they recognized what a +valuable ally had come to them. + +The excitement made them forget the honey tree. They were recalled to +that by Angel. He had made his way there after the battle ended, and was +now in the seventh heaven of delight, and when George arrived to take +possession, Angel was covered with a mass of the delicious sweet and +fairly gorging himself. + +As no provision had been made for carrying the honey home, the boys +remembered the first attempt at conveying it, and after the skin had +been removed, it was taken to the hive, and it was a pleasure to all to +remove the comb and every part of the coveted treasure. A luncheon was +prepared, and for the first time in two months the use of their sugar +was dispensed with. + +"As we are so near the falls, why not go there, and possibly the sight +of it may recall something to John?" + +George and Harry looked at the Professor for an inkling of his reason +for the remark, but he appeared not to notice them. + +As the distance was not great, the course was directed along the very +trail that the runaway yaks had taken from the river some months before. +The moment the river was reached, John sprang from the wagon and made +his way to the shore and stood there gazing, and as his eyes turned to +the right and he saw the falls, he slowly turned to the Professor, as +though he was about to say something, but there the quest of his eyes +ended, and all recollection seemed to leave him. + +George could not restrain himself any longer. "Why did you make the +remark that it would be well to bring John here to see whether or not he +would be able to remember anything?" + +"I was anxious to see if he would recognize the stream, and possibly +recall the boat." + +"What boat?" + +"The boat we left here." + +"And do you think John took the boat?" + +"It is my opinion he took the boat, and then forgot it. During that +lapse it was washed down to the sea by the flood." + +"But how do you account for the oars and the rope which we found in it?" + +"He must have put them there." + +"Where do you suppose he got the oars and the rope?" + +"That is the peculiar part of the problem. The rope, if you will +remember, looked as though it was made by savages. At any rate, it was +not a regulation rope; but the oars were undoubtedly taken from the +_Investigator's_ lifeboat." + +This was interesting news to the boys. It did seem probable, after all, +that John had something to do with the lifeboat as well as their own +boat. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +THE STORY OF THE CAVE + + +An hour or more was spent on the shore of the river, passing along its +banks and investigating the proximity of the falls, but if there was a +glimmer of intelligence, John did not exhibit it. All realized this one +thing: that if his memory could be brought to its normal condition, he +would be able, undoubtedly, to reveal some of the mysteries they longed +to unravel. For all they knew, he might have been one of the crew of the +_Investigator_, but this, after all reflections, was out of the +question, because life on shipboard is rather intimate, and boys, above +all others, are most likely to remember faces. + +Neither had the slightest knowledge of ever having seen him, and it was +now felt that they must await the time when he would again regain his +consciousness by the orderly course of nature. + +While on the way home, George, who was seated by the Professor, mused +over the occurrences of the day. "It has always been a wonder to me to +know why it is that humanity must always be surrounded by a mystery of +some sort. It seems there is always something just beyond him, and he +must struggle and work to find it out. Why is it?" + +"You have asked the great question of the ages. It is an eternal +question. Why should man know everything? That would be omnipotence. If +you stop to consider, it will occur to you that the moment man knows +everything he ceases to be a man. All energy, all effort, and every +instinct in life fades away. The association of man with man would +cease. Take the simple act of one lady calling on another. Do you think +it is merely to look at her friend, or is it done to make some inquiry? +Every action in life has in it some desire to acquire something, to get +that which man did not possess before. The quest for the things of this +life become and are the great pleasures which man enjoys. It is not +their possession. Men pursue pleasure. That is a seeking after something +just as much as hunting for wealth." + +Returning to their home, the samples which the Professor and John had +gathered were carefully taken to the laboratory, and several of the +large copper receptacles cleaned for the honey. This was the part which +Angel enjoyed more than anything else. And here it may be remarked that, +when John was installed, Angel was a little shy with the stranger, but +gradually became accustomed to his presence. Somehow John could not +fully understand the creature, and often would be seen following his +motions; but within a week Angel would permit himself to be caressed +without objection, and he seemed to know that no harm could come from +the kindly faced man. + +Notwithstanding the mystery of their new friend, there could be but one +course to follow. They lived on the island and were a part of it. The +longing to know what the other side of the island contained was an +ever-constant inquiry. Something must be done to forward their efforts +in that direction. + +During the four weeks at home a good supply of provisions had been +gathered, and now the plans were made for an overland journey. The +wrecked boat was still near the mouth of West River. It would be a +week's trip to bring it home, and this was not considered advisable, +particularly as the monsoons were still blowing, with greater or less +violence and frequency. + +It may well be imagined that the boys had not forgotten the cave. It was +their constant talk by day and their dreams at night. It had a +fascination which was constantly drawing them in that direction, but, +singularly, they never entered it. But one day George suggested that +they make a search on their own account. Harry quickly assented, and +taking up the two lamps, together with their weapons, were soon at the +entrance. + +They cautiously went down the stone steps and directed their way to the +recess where the treasure was deposited. The skeletons had been buried +on a previous visit, so they did not have that grim recollection to +ponder over. + +What interested them most was the chamber to the east which had been +examined by the Professor, and to that they made their way. During the +first two hundred feet the direction was to the east, or nearly so, and +then the walls suddenly turned to the right, and here a sight met their +eyes which bewildered them. + +The chamber was a gorgeous one, not so large as the one in which the +pirates had their booty, but the calcareous hangings on the walls were +far superior and possessed greater decorative effect. From a point near +the center of the cavern, they turned and examined all sides, and to the +south was what appeared to be an outlet, and this was approached. + +They moved nearer with a silent tread, as though fearing the ghosts of +the past century would rise to receive them. They saw a recess, cut like +a room in the side of the walls, symmetrical in form, and fitted with +all the comforts and luxuries that humanity could wish, but it was +crumbled, and crumbling, and everything fell at the touch. + +Here, scattered about, were the remains of a table, and among its +crumbled ruins were gold and silver vessels. There was a mass of debris, +among which could be recognized articles of human manufacture and use, +but all covered with the everlasting carbonate of lime, which gave it +the color of death and the shroud of a sepulcher. + +Not a word was spoken. They moved from place to place and touched the +objects. What appeared to have some resemblance of a rigid form fell +away, just as they had seen it in the other portion of the cave. What +surprised them most was the entire absence of any firearms, although +they remembered that the Professor had said the other portions of the +cave would show that the pirates had plenty of guns. + +This incited them to further search. Could it be possible that the +Professor had not seen this part of the cave? Their own tracks could be +made out in the soft stalagmites on the floor, and retracing their steps +to the center of the chamber, they searched back and forth to determine +whether or not he had visited this portion. + +Nothing was found to satisfy them on this point, but, passing on beyond +the first recess entered, they were amazed to find a second grottoed +recess, similar to the first, but much longer, and here, with merely a +wall separating them from the other recess, was an orgy of bones and +weapons. + +It was such an unlooked-for sight that they almost staggered at the +scene. At one side was a row of chests, fully six feet long, all white +and crumbling, and these were filled with the long Spanish guns of which +they had several specimens. + +Here everything was in confusion. The final act in the drama enacted +here, whether before or after the battle in the other chamber, bore +evidences of annihilation. Here were skeletons, locked in their dying +embraces, still grasping cutlasses with which they closed the act. But +what interested them more than anything else were four skeletons, +reclining on a raised portion, with chains on wrists and ankles, which +looked like a mockery in their surroundings. + +The captives had taken no part in the struggles. Were they being +defended? and who were the captors? The boys had no time to consider +these things. Other matters attracted them. The nook close by was a +veritable arsenal. It contained chests which, undoubtedly, were filled +with gold. The sights, their surroundings, the evidences of untold +treasure everywhere were enough to unnerve them for the time, and +George, with a voice almost hoarse, suggested that it would be well to +return. It was some time before they could make their way back to the +entrance, and when it was reached, they sat down, not knowing what to +say or what interpretation to put on the last discovery. + +Nothing was said to the Professor about the visit to the cave. It must +be confessed that they felt a little sheepish about this, as such a +thing as deceiving the Professor was farthest from their thoughts, but +there was no concerted agreement to keep him in the dark. Either would +have scorned to enter into such an agreement. + +The boys were more than surprised that evening when the Professor +brought out some of the treasures he had brought from the cave and +exhibited them. Among them was a crude implement of stone, which had the +appearance of a cutting instrument. Another was a small stone vessel, +unmistakably showing human manufacture. + +The sight of these did not, at first, interest the boys, but when the +Professor stated that the cave was undoubtedly of very ancient origin, +George could not resist the inevitable question, "How can that be +determined?" + +"In the study of paleontology an effort has been made to classify the +different periods of man's life on the planet, so that we have the stone +age, which is the earliest, the bronze age, and the age of iron." + +"How far back in the history of the world has evidence been found of the +existence of man?" + +"In the chalk cliffs of England, and also in like formations in Germany, +skulls have been found which indicate an existence back to a period +fully 500,000 years ago." + +"What reason is there to assume that if they were found in those chalk +deposits, that they must have been that far back?" + +"Because it was fully that long ago in the period of the world formation +when the chalk beds were made, and this seems to be conclusive evidence +of great antiquity." + +"Is it not singular that more evidence of that condition is not found +than the recovery of a few bones?" + +"Not when it is considered that the earth is constantly undergoing +change, first in one place and then in another. Have you ever heard of +the great continent, which was supposed to be lost in mid-Atlantic, +called Atlantis? Plato refers to it, and attributes the first knowledge +of it as coming from Solon, who visited Egypt and there learned from the +wise men that a great country, to the west of the Pillars of Hercules, +which Gibraltar was called in ancient times, had disappeared thousands +of years before; and they further informed the great Grecian lawgiver +that the earth had been peopled and repeopled many times before in ages +past." + +"Why was it necessary to repeople the earth? Were they all destroyed?" + +"They pointed out that at certain stages of the world's history great +floods came and destroyed all the people inhabiting the low places, and +at other times the terrific volcanic eruptions destroyed those who lived +in the hills, and at other times entire continents, like Atlantis, +disappeared, so that the earth had to be repeopled and the arts and +sciences learned over anew." + +It is wonderful to relate how the life on the island affected the health +of all. They lived outdoors and had plenty of sunshine and vigorous +exercise. In the laboratory, the Professor made it a constant habit to +do all his work in the sunlight, to which he exposed himself at all +times. The boys often spoke of this, and one day, while talking on the +subject, he remarked: + +"It is surprising how little the majority of people value sunlight. It +is not the visible sunlight that performs the wonders in giving strength +to man. If you recall, we spoke about the actinic rays which cause the +chemical changes on the photographic plate. It is those unseen rays +which produce the aurora borealis, exert a curative effect upon leprosy +and tuberculosis, fill the atmosphere on the sunny side of a street with +oxygen and nitrogen, and do many other marvelous things." + +"In what manner does the invisible light produce these results?" + +"In its sparkling radiations microbes die, decay ceases, the iron in the +blood becomes chemically strong; ozone is manufactured from the dirt and +dust, which are also destroyed; the perspiration becomes active and +carries off waste from the muscles and cleanses the skin; dead tissues +are purified and the muscles invigorated; and all life is made to +thrive." + +"Does the sunlight have the same effect on all the animal creations?" + +"This is true of all animate life, except minute organisms, or what are +called bacteria." + +"If that is the case, why do worms and the like hide themselves in the +earth?" + +"In that case it is the instinct of self-preservation. The most of them +are eyeless, so that sunlight exposes them to birds and other enemies. +Professor Mast demonstrated that they are very favorably influenced by +exposure to sunlight. Dr. Dolly has shown, by a series of very brilliant +experiments, that the butterfly will live three times longer in sunlight +than in the shadow; and Professor Yerkes has also proven that the +jellyfish, while inactive in the dark, becomes very strenuous in +sunlight." + +"If that is the case, why wouldn't it be a good thing to have all houses +made of glass?" + +"That is really what has been proposed. The Government of the United +States has set a good example in this respect by devoting over one-half +of the space of the new post-office building in Washington to an +arrangement which permits the interior to be flooded with sunlight." + +In the really strenuous times which our colonists had passed through the +pleasures of fishing had been forgotten, and as that was an article of +food which all relished, and of which they had been deprived for some +time, Harry insisted that at least a portion of the following day should +be spent in that way. + +John saw the preparations which were going on and entered into the +spirit of it in his usual listless way, but it must be said that there +was now more eagerness in his actions than had been theretofore noticed. + +All saw the change that was perceptibly coming over him, and the +particular thing that George noticed was the character of the eye. "I +wish you would explain, Professor, why it is that the eyes of people so +affected are dull, and that when they recover the eye becomes bright?" + +"That change in the character of the eye is expressed by everyone under +certain conditions. How much brighter the eye is when you are affected +by laughter. That is due to the duct which lubricates the eyeball. +Anything pleasant causes an undue amount of discharge, so that the +eyeball glistens, and we call it looking bright. The same principle +holds good in the case of one who is dull or listless, or, as in our +friend's case, has nothing to stimulate the flow of the secretions. The +moment he is affected, this is shown on the eyeball sooner than by any +other part of his body." + +It will be remembered that in a former volume it was stated how Harry +had prepared a number of very creditable fishhooks, and these were now +attached to the ramie fiber cord and suitable poles were easily obtained +for the day's outing. + +Aside from John, it was a merry party that left the Cataract that +morning, and Angel was among them. Several good fishing spots were +known, but the Professor suggested that a change be made and that the +trial for the day should be in the river below the Cataract, in the hope +that larger and gamer fish might be found. In all former trials only the +tame fish were caught. + +Less than a quarter of a mile below the Cataract, and close to the mouth +of the river, was a small cove, with deep water, bounded by a sandy +shore. Here the party stopped and cast their lines. The Professor, +however, used a fly and fished with it at the surface of the water. As +on the previous occasion, he was the first to land a magnificent +specimen, which was so large that he had difficulty in landing it. + +"What is that beauty?" + +"It is a salmon; or it might be more correct to call it a salmon-trout. +Trout belong to the salmon family, and they are all game." + +"Well, he certainly made a fight for it." + +"Does the salmon live in salt as well as in fresh water?" + +"They have a habit of remaining off the coast in salt water during the +winter months in northern latitudes, and then entering the rivers when +the spawning season begins, ascending the rivers slowly, despite every +obstacle that may be put in their way. When they reach a favorite spot, +the eggs are laid and are hatched out in countless numbers." + +"Has it been discovered why they do this?" + +"In order to escape their enemies, who seek the eggs. Even with the care +which they take in breeding, millions are destroyed, and it has been +estimated that if all the eggs laid were hatched out the number would be +so great as to prevent navigation along the shores of the coasts where +they thrive. In the rivers of Oregon and Washington the shoals of salmon +are frequently so great in the rivers as to make it impossible for a +boat to be navigated through them." + +Harry was awarded with the second catch, which was fully fifteen inches +in length. It had a nearly cylindrical body, covered with exceptionally +large scales, and its head above convex. The striking thing about it was +the color, the back being of a bottle-green, light on the sides, and +silvery white underneath. + +The Professor was on hand at once. "You have captured a fine specimen of +the mullet, not considered, generally, as a game fish. It is a +particularly fine table fish." + +George came in for his share of luck, as well as John, who seemed to +enjoy the sport immensely. His eyes showed that. It was a pleasure to +all at this opportunity to bring something into the life of the poor +unfortunate so that he might be brought back to light again. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +MUSIC AND ANIMALS + + +During the evening George suggested that as the trip was to be overland +it might be wise to can some of the fish, or to use some of the +receptacles found in the cave for this purpose. + +"We might do that," said the Professor, "or they might be salted down, +and that would not necessitate the receptacles, if we dried them." + +The salted fish did not appeal to either of the boys, and it was +accordingly agreed to put up several packages for food. + +"Will it be much trouble to preserve them by putting them in cans?" + +"If proper precautions are taken they can be preserved. The difficulty +is that the air is not excluded, and the mischief is caused by the gases +which form, in that case, and when the pressure becomes too great the +receptacle bursts." + +"Why are the fish, or other substances, so canned heated and put into +the cans while in that state?" + +"When a can is filled with the material in a heated state it has been +expanded to its highest point, and after the package is sealed properly, +no air can enter it, so that it is prevented from changing its condition +by any chemical action. Our difficulty will be to get a proper metal for +the cans." + +"What is the best to use?" + +"Tin, for the reason that tin is not affected by any of the acids which +are formed by fish or by fruit, which may be put in them." + +It has been stated that the boys were both musically inclined, and +George had taken several courses of lessons on the violin before he +joined the training ship. If there was anything more than another that +was missed, particularly in the evenings, it was the lack of musical +instruments, to which all had been accustomed. As a result, the boys had +for some time worked on a violin, which was now nearing completion, and +they hoped it could be finished before the start was made. + +The Professor discovered the partly constructed violin, and at once +showed his appreciation of their enterprise. "Now that you have the +body, what are you going to do for strings?" and he laughed at the +bewildered look. They had forgotten the one essential thing. + +Without a word, he left them, and when he returned, held in his hand a +dozen or more hard, bony-like and dried-up reeds. "Possibly these will +do for your purpose." + +"What are they?" + +"These are the intestines of the wildcat we shot about ten months ago." + +"Well, aren't they as good as the intestines of the common cat?" + +"Undoubtedly; but violin strings are not produced from that source." + +"Aren't they known as catgut?" + +"That is true; but it is a mistake. The strings of commerce are made +principally from the intestines of sheep, and, singularly, have been +always designated as 'catgut.' Other articles from the same source are +hatters' bowstrings, clockmakers' cords, and thongs for whips and laces +for boots." + +"What are the best kinds of strings for musical instruments?" + +"Those obtained from Milan, Italy, are considered the best, on account +of their transparency and exceeding strength. Most frequently each +string is made up of two or three separate strands, twisted together +with the utmost care. But there is another use of the greatest value, +and that is as a thread for sewing up wounds in internal surgery, +because, being of animal matter, the thread will, in course of time, be +absorbed into the system, and thus remove itself, without requiring a +second operation to remove it from the wound." + +"How is it prepared to make it suitable for our purpose!" + +"The ones here I thoroughly cleaned at the time, as I knew they would +come in handy for particular purposes, but I had no idea of this kind in +view at the time. We must soak them and remove the inner and outer +lining. Potash, in solution, is best for the purpose. We must then draw +them through small holes, to give them uniformity, and keep them in a +receptacle which is filled with sulphur fumes. That is for the purpose +of fumigating them. They are then ready for the instrument. I think the +different sizes will give you a variety." + +The directions were carried out, and during the following week the +violin was prepared for its initial test. The Professor was pleased with +the knowledge that the instrument was ready. It was plain that he +expected important results from that source with John. It is well known +that music possesses a wonderful power in the treatment of demented +people, and he was very anxious to try it in the case of one who had +lost all memory. + +On the evening appointed the violin was brought in, and the boys had +arranged a program. Harry had a fine baritone voice, while George could +take a high note and sustain it as well as most sopranos. When all the +preliminaries had been arranged, the instrument was produced, and after +a little preliminary tuning, George played "America." + +At the first strains of the violin, Angel, who was in the loft, came +down. He didn't stop to notice anyone but George. This was something so +unheard of that he appeared to be hypnotized, as he shuffled over to +George, and looked up at the instrument. He appeared to be entranced, +and when the music stopped he laid his hand on George's knee, and looked +up appealingly. There was not a single motion in his features which +showed appreciation or pleasure or excitement; but aside from that every +action of his body indicated exhilaration and undue animation. + +The boys had eyes for the animal only; but the Professor watched John to +the exclusion of everything else. When the first strains vibrated he +glanced around, and saw the musician. From that moment until George +dropped the violin his eyes never ceased the stare. As the music +continued he appeared to be enraptured, if such a thing could be said of +a mute expression. + +The Professor drew closer to him, and intently watched his eyes, and +before the first verse had ended the situation was so intense that the +Professor's hand involuntarily beat time, and it was evident that the +tremulous motion, which John now and then exhibited, was the inward +struggle for light. + +Without turning from John, when the music ceased, he cried out to +George, in a suppressed tone: "Keep on; keep on!" This brought the boys +to the knowledge of the other drama which was being enacted. "Slower, +George, slower," was the request of the Professor; and while "America" +requires the jubilant strain of action and liberty, he obeyed the +injunction. + +"Keep it up; can you play 'Home, Sweet Home'?" George could, and did, +and as the familiar strains floated through the air, John moved forward, +his head drooped down, both hands grasped the chair and he listened with +an intentness that was painful to witness. + +When George stopped at the whispered suggestion, John raised his eyes +and looked around. The look was a different one than they had ever +noticed before. When he glanced at the Professor, Harry said: "Did you +notice the difference in his eyes?" + +He rubbed his hands over his eyes, and stroked his head, and they +thought a glimmer of a smile crossed his features. When they were about +to retire that night, the Professor could not help but express his +gratification at the results achieved through the aid of the violin. + +"I could not help thinking how nearly allied Angel and John were in the +manner of acting during the course of the music. I have no doubt but in +course of time the animal will, just like John, show the facial +expressions which characterize either pleasure or pain." + +"But I have seen Angel actually laugh." + +This was true; it had been noticed on several occasions. But so far John +had not laughed, and he had not changed his facial expression in such a +manner as to make it noticeable, and the evening's entertainment had +done more to affect him than anything which had occurred, and it was +their earnest hope that this might be a means to his delivery. + +Harry was the only one to notice a field mouse which had appeared soon +after George began to play, and the little animal was joined by others, +but the subsequent events of the evening attracted his attention, so +that no notice was taken of them until they were about to retire, when +they scampered away and Harry then related how they had acted. + +"That is an interesting thing. Some time ago the keeper of the Central +Park Zooelogical Gardens, in New York, employed a violinist to play for +the animals, and the results were very interesting. The first animals +approached were a lioness and five cubs. The tune played was 'America.' +She listened with mute and dignified appreciation, and her five little +cubs ranged up alongside in a row, and in the same attitude, all with a +wondering expression, and sometimes would act just as you often have +seen dogs do, turn their heads aside obliquely, as though the sound +could be better understood. The old lion in the adjoining cage also +stopped his restless movement, and peered at the player attentively. The +next animal was a tigress. When the playing commenced she first looked +startled. Her mate entered the cage and escorted her out into the yard +while he took up his position and listened, and refused to allow her to +return. The hippopotamus, on the other hand, got mad, and sought the +water for seclusion. The elephant appeared to be the most +discriminating, for while he deliberately turned his back when a +plaintive tune was played, was so delighted when a rattling dancing jig +was executed, he actually danced about in ecstacies of joy. The wolves, +foxes and hyenas could not be made to appreciate any of the tunes, but +the monkeys enjoyed all the tunes, if being sad when doleful tunes are +played give happiness, and they partook of the exhilaration when lively +sounds came from the instrument." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 29. THE LION AND CUBS_] + +The warm summer days were now at hand, and all realized that this was +the proper time to carry out the long-delayed project of fully exploring +the western shore of their little continent. This had been deferred +before John came, in order that more complete preparations could be +made, and to await settled weather, and now that he was here further +delay had been urged in the hope that memory would be restored and thus +give them an addition that could be depended on. One puzzling feature of +his malady was that he understood, in a measure, what was told him, but +it was noticed that whatever was spoken had to be accompanied by some +manual action. If told to get a pail of water, he would remain inactive +until a pail was taken up or pointed out. So in yoking up the yaks, +merely pointing at the yokes would be sufficient to start the lagging +memory. He quickly learned to manipulate the guns, and spent hours in +practicing by shooting at the target. + +Singular as it may seem, he showed some intelligence at the good shots, +but all these flashes were momentary only, and it was further noticed +that he would remember an act performed the day before and repeat it in +precisely the same way. It was like an imitative process, and the +Professor suggested that he was now in the condition of a child, +learning all things anew, to which was added some glimpses of things he +had learned before. + +A new wagon was necessary, as the one which had been used for the past +eight months was clumsy and badly worn. All took a part in this +important work, and it was here that the workmanlike qualities of John +showed themselves. He was a treasure in this respect. The lathe was a +pleasure to him, and so with bench work, and within ten days a new and +larger wagon was turned out. + +"I only wish," said Harry, "that we could paint it up, and thus make a +real finished article out of it." + +"Your idea is a good one, but in order to make a lead paint will take +too long a time to provide a carbonate which will answer the purpose." + +"Why does it take so long?" + +"We have plenty of lead, but to get the base for the paint it will be +necessary to cast a lot of thin gratings, and use earthen pots, partly +filled with vinegar. A layer of the lead gratings must then be put down +and the earthen pot stood on them and partly filled with acetic acid, or +vinegar. A board should cover each pot and spent tannin bark placed +around them. This must be built up in the form of a stack. Fermentation +soon sets in, and the result will be the formation of carbonic acid, and +in five or six weeks the metallic lead converted into what is called the +carbonate which may be washed and ground up with oil, and sold as the +white lead of commerce." + +"Instead of that what should we use?" + +"We have plenty of flax, as you know. From that we can make linseed oil, +and with a proper coloring matter, which is not necessary, however, we +can provide a paint that will be very serviceable." + +"Then why not use the madder dye which we made for dyeing the flag?" + +"Just the thing. In addition we must have a dryer of some kind. I +suggest that we distil some of the rosin, or the sap from the pitch pine +trees, for that purpose." + +"What kind of product shall we obtain from that?" + +"Turpentine." + +Thus day after day passed in preparation, each hour, almost, suggesting +some new addition to their stock, which would contribute to protection, +comfort, or necessity. Among other things suggested, in order to relieve +them as much as possible from carrying such a large burden in the way of +provisions, was the making of synthetic foods. + +George had this in mind for some days before he broached the subject to +the Professor. "I understood you to say that if we had synthetic foods +we could carry several weeks' rations about our persons, and the load +would not be a heavy or perceptible one at that? If such is the case, +why can't we prepare some of the food in that way as a matter of +precaution? What is the meaning of the word 'synthetic,' and how is such +food made?" + +"The word is the direct opposite of 'analyses.' In analyzing, the +elements composing any substance are separated from each other. In +synthesis the different elements are put together to form the substance. +Thus, take water as an illustration: Its component parts are two parts +of hydrogen and one of oxygen. Knowing this to be the case, the chemist +takes that many parts of oxygen and hydrogen, and by uniting them water +is formed which is just as much a true water as though it fell from the +heavens or was taken from a well or spring." + +We should not go far out of the way in stating that the Professor was +putting in some time in this direction, while the other work was going +on, and this was confirmed later on when he requested Harry to furnish a +number of small tubes like those used for the powder, and it was noticed +that a quantity of bamboo was taken to the laboratory and cut up into +short sections. + +The guns and ammunition were now ready, a supply of food had been +prepared, and George insisted on baking a quantity of barley bread, +which was carefully wrapped up, so that it would not be dried out or be +liable to get wet. The wagon was admirably adapted for the purpose. The +wheels were not extraordinarily large, but they had wide treads, and the +body was high at the sides so as to serve as a fortress in case of +trouble. An extra yoke was taken, a supply of sugar and also of honey +put in the vessels which the cave supplied, and only a small store of +vegetables, as they depended on finding these en route. + +The start was agreed upon for the following morning. Observation Hill +was visited, and a new inscription affixed to the pole, so that any +passing ship might know their plight, and be able to direct its course +to the west. The value of the chart made by the Professor was now +appreciated, as that was also tacked up in its proper place. + +Jack and Jill were the yaks selected for the journey, as they were tried +and true, and had now grown to be strong and well domesticated. Freedom +was given to the cattle, and all the buildings closed up. This was done +to secure the interiors from intrusion on the part of animals. An +inscription was also placed on the door of the house. + +Promptly at nine o'clock the company, consisting of the Professor, +Harry, George, John and Angel, started on the journey across Wonder +Island. This was their sixth trip, only one of them by sea. + +Would this be any more successful than the preceding ones? + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +THE TRIP THROUGH THE DENSE FOREST + + +On the march up Cataract River, and out toward the forest, the same +order was observed as on the previous trips. One must lead the way, and +act as scout, while the others were to remain with the team. They did +not anticipate much difficulty during the first two or three days from +savages, but it was always well to have some one in the lead so as to +point out the most desirable paths, as it must be remembered they had to +make their own trails through a wilderness. Much of it had been +traveled, it is true, but there was nothing approaching such a thing as +a road, or even a path, by which they could be guided. + +It was amusing to watch Angel, as he glided along from one tree to the +next, where the forests were in their paths. At other times he would be +in the wagon, or shamble along, and sometimes leap on the backs of the +yaks and ride there. The patient animals were so used to him that no +attention was paid to his antics, even though he occasionally sat on the +yoke between the animals. + +John was an interested observer of all the preparations, and was one of +the first to take his place alongside of the wagon. When the Professor +urged him to take a seat he looked up inquiringly, but did not comply. +The Professor did not urge him, but after several hours of walking, he +was again asked to mount, and he did so, thereby seeming to understand +what was required of him. + +When they camped at noon for the first meal, they were still on the +banks of the Cataract, but here it took a decided turn to the west; and +now the course for the afternoon must be to the southwest so the South +River could be reached above the falls. + +That river was reached early in the afternoon, and they recognized the +trail formerly made on the first journey along its banks. The first +encampment for the night was probably twenty miles from home, but the +next morning, after they had struck into an entirely new section of the +island, the journey grew more burdensome, as the land on both sides of +the stream became rough, and in many places the small streams crossed +offered such steep sides that frequent detours had to be made to enable +the team to get across. + +During the second day they did not, on account of this, cover more than +ten miles, and near the close of the day a second falls was reached, +showing that they were going up to a much higher altitude. Above the +falls the river turned abruptly to the south, and within five miles of +it the river forked, one branch going south and the other southwest. + +They were on the branch going west, and that course was followed, but +still the country was rough, and now became thickly wooded, which added +to the discomfort of traveling with a team. Magnificent trees grew on +every side, and in most places sprang up clear to the water's edge. + +"You have here a good illustration," remarked the Professor, "as to the +source of the debris which is found on the shores of the island. The +streams carry down the logs, trees and leaves, which, after being washed +out to sea, are finally left along the beaches." + +Our voyagers had passed many nights in the forests before, but this was +the first time they had come across such impenetrable jungles. The large +trees were actually so close together at many places that the wagon had +to be backed and worked around for long distances to enable them to make +any forward movements. + +Before noon of the third day it became so discouraging that they stopped +to consider the situation. Possibly a route away from the river would be +much better, and that course was decided on, so that the direction +agreed on was west, with a slight trend to the north. + +The reason why the course along the river would be the most direct was +judged from the fact that the lights, which they saw from their boat, +made the location of the savages fully fifty miles or over from the +northernmost cape where they had been cast ashore a few weeks before. + +The travel must, therefore, be to the southwest, and not to the west, +but at the rate they were going, with every hour more difficult, it was +hoped that the new course would in the end be quicker. All of that day +the struggle was a strenuous one, and when night came all were +exhausted, and were ready to retire as soon as the meal was over. + +They were in the midst of the thickest forest, and up to this time all +had retired, as they did on this occasion. The yaks were enclosed in a +railing made of small trees, so as to protect them, and the two +mattresses within the covered body made comfortable beds for all. + +Strange sounds occasionally disturbed them, but caused no particular +alarm, until Angel began to grow restless, about two in the morning. +George tried to quiet him, but he persisted in giving the alarm. +Suddenly a howl and a shriek awoke the occupants of the wagon and as +each arose he instinctively grasped a weapon. The sounds came from two +animals, one of which was close by; the other at a greater distance. + +"The one near us seems to be a wildcat, or an animal which utters a +characteristic shriek of that kind, but I am not sure as to the identity +of the other animal," remarked the Professor, as he listened intently to +the hideous howls and shrieks. + +It was pitch dark, so that it was impossible to recognize anything in +the wagon, and of course the dense forests only added to the gloom, +although the sky could be faintly seen directly above them through the +scraggly leaves. The Professor searched for one of the lanterns, when he +heard the yaks becoming uneasy, and running back and forth in the little +enclosure. + +John was awake, and his eyes seemed to have a sort of glimmer as the +light flared up. The rear end of the wagon led directly into the pen +where the animals were, and no sooner had the light rays illuminated the +enclosure than a heavy object sprang from an adjoining tree and landed +on one of the yaks. + +The latter was thrown across the pen with the impact of the force, and +the Professor, who had the lamp, could not level his gun, but without a +moment's hesitation John's gun was at his shoulder, and he fired before +either of the boys could recover themselves in the excitement. + +The firing of the gun seemed to raise pandemonium. The sudden appearance +of the light, as the animal made the leap, disconcerted him, and the +shot following immediately, caused him to utter a terrific growl. John +grasped the Professor's gun and shot the second time, and the shot was +at blank range. The animal gave a slight spring forward, and fell across +a tree trunk which was at one side of the enclosure, and on which they +had arranged the cooking utensils the night before. + +This was exciting enough for one night's adventure, but as John and the +boys were about to descend a crash in the trees to the right caused them +to halt. The Professor held out his light, but the thick wood and the +dense underbrush prevented any examination more than thirty or forty +feet beyond. + +The eagerness of the boys to return to the wagon caused the Professor to +loose his grip on the lamp, and before he could recover the hold, it +fell to the ground and was extinguished. The yaks appeared to be in a +frenzy now, and the howling beyond increased in intensity. After a +search the lamp was relit, and the two others also brought out and +lighted, and the appearance of the light caused a hurried retreat of the +howling beasts. + +"It is a puma," were the Professor's first words, "the most enormous +specimen I ever saw." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 30. PUMA_] + +"Well, these woods must be full of them, by the way they howled." + +The yaks were calmed down after some effort, and it was found that the +shoulder of Jack had been lacerated by the claws of the puma, but beyond +that no damage was done. Both of John's shots had taken effect, and it +delighted the Professor to point to the wound and then indicate, as best +he could, how they owed him a debt for his skill. + +The carcass was dragged out of the enclosure to keep the yaks quiet, and +when this was done they seemed relieved. + +"I would like to know what the other animal was?" + +"It is my opinion that it was a companion to this one. They, like all +animals, have a means for communicating their ideas to each other. Some +English scientists have found that the hen utters twenty-three distinct +notes, and that they convey different meanings. One single note, +differing from another, may convey the meaning of an entire sentence +uttered by man. The particular purring of a cat in one way means one +thing, and when emitted in a slightly altered tone indicates something +entirely different. Then, again, most animal sounds are accompanied by +some distinctive movement, as, for instance, the striking squeal of a +hen, accompanied by the crouching attitude, together indicate the +appearance of a hawk as plainly as though it uttered the warning in +words. It is obvious, therefore, that all the sounds made by animals, +such as cackling, clucking, crooning, purring, crowing, growling, and +roaring, as well as modifications of these sounds, impart some meaning +which can be distinguished by their kind, and are frequently recognized +by others." + +This explanation appealed to George. "I know the moment Angel is +pleased, or when he is excited, and now that I think of it, I am sure +that he has several ways of expressing his meaning, and I am going to +try and see whether I can tell the difference hereafter when he tries to +talk." + +There was little sleep that night, except on the part of John, who was +soon asleep. When morning broke they had an opportunity to examine the +dead animal. It had a uniform gray color, fading into a white in the +under part of its body, and with a very long, supple tail. + +"The animal is sometimes called the panther, or 'painter,' as it is +familiarly known; and it is regarded by some authorities as the cougar. +It inhabits the whole of America. Its home is among the branches of +trees, and is a dangerous antagonist when wounded or cornered." + +This incident made them desirous of quitting the forest by the nearest +route, but this was difficult to determine, as there were no elevated +hills in sight. In the forenoon of the third day, other animals were +sighted, and George, who was in the lead during the first part of the +trip, did not have the courage to go ahead very far, and soon after the +start was made, John came up and accompanied him, an act entirely +voluntary on his part, which increased the astonishment of them all. + +It is impossible to account for these remarkable actions of the human +mind while in such a state. Did he realize the danger to his friends? +Who can answer the riddle? + +But they must go on. The forest must be conquered. How far they had to +go was a mystery to them. One thing was certain: they were going toward +West River, but they were still less than half way. It would have been +the part of prudence to have taken the route to the north, through a +country which they had twice traversed, and which afforded far better +traveling, but it could not be helped now. + +The fourth day did not improve their condition in the least. The dense +wood was on every side. The inclination of the ground was so slight as +to give no indication whether they had reached the summit of the +tableland, or were still ascending to a higher level. + +In estimating the distance traveled in the four days it could not be +possible that they were over fifty miles from the Cataract. To add to +their perplexities, Jack began to walk with a perceptible limp. The +wound in the shoulder was inflamed, and a rest was necessary. + +In this emergency a council was called, and the Professor suggested that +some of the party should conduct an exploring expedition on foot to the +west, going not to exceed five miles, and then return. But as it was too +near night to make the attempt at once, it was agreed that an early +start should be made in the morning. + +The question now arose, who should go. Neither made a suggestion until +Harry ventured this opinion: "I am perfectly willing to take John with +me. I am sure he can be trusted. It will be imposing too much of a +burden on you," said he, looking at the Professor, "and I am active and +strong enough to stand the trip." + +This suggestion was acted on, and early in the morning Harry took a +quantity of ammunition, and the Professor gave John a similar supply and +a couple of the guns, one of which was strapped to his back, similar to +the manner in which Harry was equipped. The attention of John was then +directed to the forest in the west, and as Harry moved away he followed +with a comprehensive glance that gave all of them the greatest relief. +Prior to their departure, the yak's wound was examined, and John saw +this as well, so that from all indications they would have no reason to +have fears on his account. + +As usual, their bolos were taken along, and at intervals the trees were +blazed on both sides, this action being performed by John with a +regularity and precision that astonished Harry. + +Traveling under those conditions was not conducive to speed, but they +were now trying to find what lay beyond them, and to learn, if possible, +how much farther the dense growth existed beyond them. They went on for +three hours or more, and still no change, and they stopped to rest. + +Imagine yourself surrounded by these conditions. A companion who could +not talk, and who was, in all probability, demented, the eternal +silence, except as it would be occasionally startled into life by some +living thing; unable to even indicate his thoughts, or to consult with +him, as to direction, or to talk about the probabilities beyond them, +and you will feel that it took a brave heart to continue the journey. +But Harry possessed determination. He made up his mind to go on, until +he could find some news to take back, and so the quest continued for two +hours more. + +But Harry had forgotten that they started without food, and that it +would take them as long to get back as they had already journeyed, and +it was now fully noon. + +It seemed as though a hundred feet away it appeared clearer, but this +delusion had been repeated so often that he tired of it, and when, after +a rest, another start was made, he mentally made up his mind that if he +could not find a clearing within the next half hour they must return. + +The clearing beyond did not deceive him this time. He clearly saw an +elevation beyond, and he almost shouted, but he did not stop and laugh +in his joy at the sight. John saw it and instinctively knew its meaning. +Then, motioning to him, he pointed back in the direction of the wagon, +and started to retrace his steps. + +It was past noon, and Harry was hungry. John turned and followed and, +glancing at the sun, drew a small package from his coat, and handed +Harry several slices of barley bread. It affected him so much that he +could scarcely contain himself, and he could not help putting his arm +about him and indicate that his forethought and kind act was +appreciated, and John looked at Harry inquiringly, and proceeded to eat +his luncheon. + +Judging the time which had elapsed since the start in the morning, it +would take them fully five hours to retrace their steps, as the glazed +trees showed them the way readily, and they could, therefore, make the +trip in less than six hours consumed up to this time, so that they would +be back before six in the evening, but they had found the outlet, and +determination had won. + +The passage back through the forest was made with a happy heart, and +after they had gone two hours, John suddenly stopped, and grasped Harry +by the arm as he peered forward. Harry heard something before them. +Crackling leaves, and finally voices, were distinguished. They thought +the team must be miles away. John moved forward fully fifty feet, and +Harry followed. Soon the wagon top came in sight, and Harry bounded +along the blazed trail, with a cry, of relief. + +Jack's lacerated shoulder was not as bad as had been anticipated, and +toward noon the lameness was not so perceptible, so that, in order to +save time, it was concluded to follow the blazed path, which could be +made out easily, thus bringing them together fully three hours earlier +than Harry had anticipated. + +Harry explained what had been seen to the west, and that three or four +hours more of hard travel would bring them to an open country which, in +all probability, led to the West River. + +All was eagerness now, and they pressed forward, hoping to be able to +reach the open country before night set in. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +SEEING THE FIRST SAVAGES + + +George's patience in teaching Angel was most commendable. Hours were +devoted to this work. Even before leaving home the animal would +recognize certain sounds, and performed many acts at the word of +command. Such words as "come," "go," "take this," and others usually +employed, were fully comprehended, and the names of Harry and the +Professor were understood. + +Frequent tests were made by George and the Professor, acting in concert, +as this phase of the education greatly interested the latter, to +ascertain whether the orang performed the services from an understanding +of the meaning of the words, or whether it proceeded merely from the +constant repetitions of the words and acts conjointly. + +The value of this proceeding will be made apparent to the reader as we +proceed in this history; but when they were educating Angel the idea of +utilizing his future services, in a critical time, did not occur to +them. + +They camped for the night at the end of the trail; and now they hoped +that the morrow would open the route over a more comfortable path than +the last three days had offered them. Before going an hour on the way, a +campfire was found, which evidently had been used not many days before. + +There had not been any rains in their section of the country for ten +days previous to this, and it was obvious that no rain had fallen on the +ashes of this fire. From this it must be inferred that whoever made the +fire must have been there recently. + +The utmost vigilance would be necessary, in view of this discovery. The +wagon moved forward slowly. Every part of the country within the limits +of the trail was under scrutiny, and every sound and moving object fully +investigated before proceeding. This made travel necessarily slow. The +underbrush was very thick, and but few trees remained, and those were +scattered, mostly in clumps or in detached groups. + +Harry looked at the tall trees longingly many times, and the Professor +divined his meaning. "I have a notion to try prospecting from one of +these trees. We can, no doubt, see more from them than we can learn in a +day's travel. But trees of that kind are pretty hard to climb." + +"It might be done with a climbing ring," answered the Professor. + +"What is that?" + +"The cocoanut hunters and others put a hoop around a tree, and then get +inside of the hoop, with the back against the hoop, so that the feet can +get a purchase against the tree, and in that way the trees are scaled +with the greatest agility." + +"Well, if the savages can do it, I can." + +"It might be well to make the trial, as even thirty or forty feet would +give a fair view of the country. Before making the hoop we should select +a tree most suitable for observation." + +An oak tree with a bare trunk up to the first large limb was finally +selected. The diameter was fully two feet at the base. + +"With a tree of this size the hoop should be about three and a half feet +in diameter." + +"What material shall we make it out of?" + +"If we can find a small hickory sapling it will be the most serviceable, +because its natural strength and stiffness will permit us to use a small +and light pole." + +A search was made, and after a time several were cut and brought to the +tree. The thick end of the sapling was cut or pared off along one side +so it would bend in the direction of the slice, and this was put about +the tree and the ends brought together and lapped. Thongs were then used +to splice the lapped ends, and small nails driven in at intervals to +assure security. + +The use of hoops of this kind requires practice, and the natives use +their bare feet against the tree, which prevents slipping. Harry, +however, had shoes; not a very good thing to use against the bark, and +after numerous trials both boys found the task a trying one. Their bare +feet were too tender to use against the rough bark, and as a last resort +one of the old pair of shoes was brought out, and studded with nails. + +The climber gets inside the hoop, with the latter around the tree, and +resting against the small of the back, or a little higher up. The feet +are then braced against the tree, and the hoop grasped by both hands. In +climbing the body is suddenly moved toward the tree, and this motion +temporarily releases the outward pressure against the hoop, and at the +same moment the hoop is moved upwardly about a foot. One or both feet +then make an upward step, and this process is repeated. + +More than an hour was occupied in learning to manipulate the hoop, so as +to progress upwardly, and at the end of that time Harry made a slow and +careful ascent to the first limb, a distance of thirty feet, stopping at +intervals, as he made his way up, to view the ever-increasing landscape, +and to take the needed rest. + +"Do you see anything, Harry?" was George's eager questioning, as he +moved upwardly. + +"Nothing yet," was the invariable reply. When the first limb was reached +he seated himself, and had an opportunity to view the surroundings from +a far better vantage point. + +"Can you see the river?" was the Professor's inquiry. + +"It is too hazy to make out anything there. It is clearer to the south." + +"What can you see to the southwest?" + +Harry scanned the country in that direction for some time before +replying. "All I can see there are trees, trees, just like the forest we +have been going through; but directly west of us we would have +comparatively easy traveling. The forest seems to extend southwest, and +we have been traveling through it at an angle. If I could get higher I +might have a better view." + +He ascended fifteen feet higher, but even at that point the forest hid +the view to the southwest. + +"From your examination I judge our only hope is to reach the river and +travel down its banks?" + +"Yes; because we don't want any more of the forest with the team." + +"Before we go, let us take off the hoop; I want to use it again." And +Harry unwrapped the thongs and disengaged it from the tree. + +After luncheon the marching was resumed, this time due west to the +river. The trip during the day told on Jack, and a halt, was called +before they had gone five miles. Harry and John took their guns and +started south on a tour of investigation, making their way toward a +slight elevation which he had noticed from the observation point. + +It was really a hill, covered with trees, and gave the appearance, from +the tree top, as being a continuation of the forest range. This was good +news to carry back. While passing through the tallest of the trees, +Harry, who was ahead, felt himself suddenly grasped, and he uttered a +scream. + +John rushed forward just as Harry saw the repulsive form of a huge snake +which had wound itself around him. Harry was absolutely helpless in the +folds of the serpent. John's quick eye took in the situation at once, +and by the time he reached Harry the bolo was in his hand and poised. +With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed above the last +coil, and the portion suspended from the tree fell alongside of the +combatants, and John's hands reached out to assist Harry. + +[Illustration: _"With a single stroke the body of the snake was severed +above the last coil"_] + +Harry was frightened so that he could hardly utter a word, and after +some exertion he disentangled himself and gazed on the immense serpent. +When he had recovered partially he was too much excited to proceed, and +they returned to the camp with a story of the attack and the noble +rescue on the part of John. + +George's excitement was at fever heat. "We must get his skin." Harry was +willing, because a trophy of that kind was worth preserving. The team +was taken along, as it was fully a half mile from the camp. When the +Professor saw the serpent he congratulated Harry on his escape, who, but +for the fortunate presence of John, would have been killed. + +It measured twenty-two feet in length and its greatest diameter was +eight inches. + +"What is this--the boa constrictor?" + +"It belongs to the same family, but is known as the anaconda." + +"What is the difference between the boa constrictor and the python?" + +"The boas are the species found in the western hemisphere, whereas the +pythons inhabit the eastern countries. The anaconda is a native of +Brazil and some of the other South American countries. They are +non-poisonous, and depend for securing prey on their wonderful swiftness +and in the tremendous power which they exert when the victims are in +their grasp." + +As usual, George had been prospecting also, and when the skin had been +removed and the excitement died away, he exhibited a peculiar fruit. It +was the shape and size of a pear, but had a peculiar kidney-shaped +pendant at its large end. + +The Professor smiled when he saw it. "You have the fruit of the +Anacardium, or cashew tree. That is, it is a combined fruit and nut." + +"Is this little projecting part a nut?" + +"Yes; and this evening we can try some of them; but they must be +roasted. The fruit can be eaten as it is, but it is like the persimmon; +it must be fully ripe, or it will be too astringent. It is a fine +medicine, and the sap of the tree produces a product like gum arabic, +and is known in commerce as acajou." + +[Illustration: _Fig. 31. Acajou._] + +The elevation which Harry was anxious to gain was before them, less than +a mile, and as it was not more than four in the afternoon, the team was +driven forward and the slight ascent begun. In a half hour the summit +was reached. It was not at a great elevation, but the incline was a +gradual one, and it was hoped that from the elevated portion a better +glimpse could be obtained than the tree afforded. + +It was too late when they reached the camping place to attempt any +observations that night, but in the morning an investigation was made to +find a tree of sufficient size to afford a good view. When it was +finally found the hoop was again brought out and Harry slowly made his +way upwardly, and those below waited in suspense for news. + +He made a deliberate survey, and called down: "I can see the West River, +and directly to the southwest are white objects, but so far away that I +cannot tell what they are. They may be tents or huts, or something of +that kind. I couldn't say positively." + +"Do the objects appear to be at or near the river?" asked the Professor. + +"It is difficult to say whether the river goes in that direction. I can +see glimpses of the stream only here and there." + +"Do you see any mountains to the south?" + +"None whatever. Everything merges into a haze beyond the white objects I +referred to." + +"It is probable," said the Professor, "we have located them, as I find, +from an examination of the sailing chart, that the village is located at +about that point. I think our course should now be directed to the +river, as traveling will be better near its shores, and we would, I +think, be more likely to meet some of the inhabitants along the shore +than in the dense interior." + +The low mountain range beyond the West River was plainly visible from +the elevation. The Professor noted how its lower end sloped down, and he +knew their location beyond question, and explained that they were now +practically due east of the point where they were compelled, on the +tempestuous night, to turn back to the north. + +It was a long, weary night for them, because expectation ran high. They +were anxious, and yet dreaded the meeting, but they had sought it and +could not go back now. No fires were kindled that night, although George +had counted on some of the roast nuts. It would not be safe to hazard a +light. + +The utmost vigilance was now to be the watchword. There must be no +firing of guns or wandering from the camp on the part of either. At the +time the wagon was constructed the Professor had an eye to its use as a +means of defense, which was explained to the boys, and this offered a +great sense of security to them. + +The sides had been made high with this end in view, and not for the +purpose of hauling big loads. If attacked in the open, it would serve as +a fort, and would enable them to move around from one side, or end, to +the other without being exposed. In anticipation all the guns were +examined and the ammunition placed within reach and conveniently +arranged for any emergency. + +The provisions were also arranged to prepare for a siege if necessary. +During that evening the Professor for the first time explained in detail +how the natives would be approached. + +"I think it is well, now that we are about to come in contact with the +people here, to be prepared to meet them in the proper way, so as to +insure safety to ourselves. It is likely that we shall have to treat +with the natives, and thus come to some understanding, before we entrust +ourselves to their mercy. Above all things, we want to impress on them +the feeling that we are not antagonistic and have no hostile intentions. +We are unfortunate in not knowing the character of the dwellers on the +island. They may have had frequent contact with the outside world. That +may, or it may not, mitigate our lot. So we cannot count on that factor +too much. If they are low down in the scale of humanity, we may find a +still harder problem. In any event, however, this must be made plain. +The wagon is our fort. From that we can defy them, unless they have +firearms. + +"From this time on let us keep together----" + +Something unusual stirred beyond. The crackling of twigs was plainly +recognized, and the mumbling sound of voices could be made out. They +were human voices, but their intonations, as they came nearer, were +sufficient to show that the language was not that of civilized people. +They were more in the nature of successive grunts, not much more +definable than the noises of animals. + +They were wrought up to the highest tension, and the only fear was that +either Angel or the yaks would make some noise which might attract the +passers-by. To their great relief the sounds died away. This visit would +have been welcomed during the daytime, but at night they could not +afford to take any risks. + +This incident showed they were now in an enemy's country. The river was +fully ten miles to the west of them. How far the encampment or village +of the inhabitants was to the south they could only imperfectly +estimate, but it was certainly twenty miles or more. + +What they longed for at this stage more than anything else was the open +country. The proximity of the river would likely be the better place for +them, so early the next morning the team was gotten ready, and before +starting, the Professor made a survey of the surroundings in the +direction that their visitors had gone. + +At several places were indications of tracks, and these were followed, +the team coming along behind. Everything was covered with leaves where +the trees abounded, and in the more open areas the grass was so well +advanced that it was difficult to distinguish tracks in the earth, but +the broken-down grass plainly showed their trail, leading to the south. + +Aside from that, nothing could be gathered to give any indications until +they had proceeded over a mile, when a small rivulet, the first they had +noticed since leaving West River, crossed their route. The Professor +actually bounded forward at the sight and examined the footprints. The +marks of bare feet were visible where they crossed, and they were of +abnormal size. + +After a careful examination, the Professor said: "There must have been +at least a half dozen of them, judging by the different prints. See, +this one has a deformed foot, or the big toe is missing; and this one +must be a large man, judging from the deep impression made." Beyond the +vicinity of the stream all footprints were again lost. + +"As we are now likely to have an open country until we reach the river, +we can make more extended observations from the top of the wagon, and +one should be there constantly to notice any signs on either side." + +They were within five miles of the river, and George, who occupied the +post of lookout on the top bow of the wagon, called out excitedly: "I +can see them; there must be a dozen or more." The wagon stopped, and the +Professor and Harry hurriedly scrambled to the top. John saw the +movement and seemed to understand, for he also crawled up and looked +across the rolling landscape to the southwest. + +In the distance were unmistakable movements of beings moving to and fro. +They were distant at least two miles, and there was no evidence, from +the character of their movements, that anything unusual had occurred, +and it might therefore be inferred that the wagon had not yet been +discovered. + +At last they had come up to the people who occupied such a large share +of their speculations during the past year, and in "THE TRIBESMEN" are +set forth the meeting of the savages and the hostile manner in which they +were received, together with some of the things which really show why the +land they lived in might justly be called "Wonder Island." + +THE END + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +GLOSSARY OF WORDS USED IN TEXT + + + Alloy. A combination of two or more metals. + + Actinic. Photographic rays. Those vibrations above the + vibrations which produce violet. + + Acutely. To the point. Being keen. + + Allied. Attached to; bound to; an arrangement with. + + Alienation. To cause to turn away; to make indifferent. + + Amplitude. Scope; reach; breadth; fullness. + + Antiquated. Adapted to the uses or customs of olden times. + + Animation. Possessing animal life; sparkling; lively. + + Antagonistic. Against; opposed. + + Agility. Quick; sprightly. + + Assumption. Taking it for granted. + + Bacteria. A microscopic microbe, very minute, widely + distributed in all matter. + + Betokened. To give promise or evidence of; presage; indicate. + + Bestowed. To confer as a gift; to give freely as a gift. + + Buccaneer. A pirate or freebooter. + + Bullion. Gold or silver in mass, usually in convenient bar. + + Calcareous. Impregnated with lime, or largely composed of it. + + Cardinal. Of prime or special importance. + + Caulking. The process of filling the seams of vessels. + + Cavities. Holes; depressed portions. + + Carbonate. To impregnate or charge with carbonic acid. + + Calcium. Lime. + + Canopied. A covering. Usually a conical top. + + Centrifugal. Directed or tending away from the center. + + Characterize. To delineate or set forth in a particular way. + + Consistently. Standing together or in agreement. + + Convolute. Rolled one part on another or inward from one side. + + Coefficient. A number or letter put before an algebraic + expression, to show that one is to be divided by the + other. + + Constant. That which is permanent or invariable. + + Convex. Bulging outwardly; raised. + + Conducive. Helping; tending toward. + + Contingency. The awaiting of an event; in the event of. + + Compounding. Made up of two or more substances. + + Contracted. Made smaller; reduced in size. + + Combustion. Being consumed. Disintegration. + + Contemplated. To consider thoughtfully; to look at attentively. + + Caucasian. Of, pertaining to, or characteristic of the white + race of mankind. + + Consistency. Harmonious; not contradictory. + + Clarified. Made clear; not turbid or cloudy. + + Crucial. Decisive as between views or theories. Testing. + + Cylindrical. A barrel-shaped body. + + Decoration. To adorn with something ornamental. + + Debris. Accumulation of material. + + Defect. Something short; not perfect. + + Density. Closeness of parts. + + Delver. One who searches into things. + + Demeanor. Appearance; manner; action. + + Domesticated. To bring under the control of man. + + Delusion. The state of being deceived or led astray. + + Dilapidated. Torn up; fallen into decay; gone to ruin. + + Discrimination. Ability to select; to judge; to be able to pick out. + + Deranged. A disordered mind. + + Deportment. Manner of acting. + + Dextrous. Skilful; quick; adroit. + + Designations. A distinctive mark or appellation. + + Depressed. Lowered; made unhappy or unspirited. + + Determination. Insistence; firmness; fixed purpose. + + Decomposition. The act or process of separating anything. + + Dimensions. The measurements; sizes. + + Dilemma. A perplexing case to decide. + + Duplicated. Made in a similar manner. + + Duct. An opening, hole, or conveyor. + + Ductility. Capable of being drawn out. + + Effective. Fit for a destined purpose; a striking impression. + + Emergency. An unexpected happening calling for immediate + action. + + Emaciated. Greatly reduced in flesh. + + Entranced. To put into a state of ecstacy. + + Ensue. That which follows; to go after. + + Enraptured. Overpowered with emotion. + + Entablature. The uppermost member held in place by columns. + + Episode. A particular occurrence. + + Essential. The particular thing; the important element. + + Estuary. The portion at the mouth of a river where it + discharges into another body of water. + + Exhilaration. Lively, pleasing or enlivening sensation. + + Extracted. To take from. Taken out of. + + Facial. Pertaining to the face. + + Facility. Doing with ease. + + Fascination. A resistible influence. A pleasing impulse. + + Fathom. To find out; depth; penetration. + + Fermentation. A chemical condition where germs are developed and + grow in a substance and change the elements + comprising it. + + Feasible. Easy to accomplish; that which is practical. + + Fiber. A structure composed of filaments, like a vegetable + stalk. + + Formation. The manner in which articles or substances are built + up. + + Fracture. A break or crack. + + Fraternity. A body of persons held together by some common tie. + + Fusing. To melt by heat. + + Fumigating. To treat by means of gases. + + Fulcrum. The support against which a lever rests. + + Granulating. To form into small grains or particles. + + Grotto. A small cavern or cavern-like apartment. + + Gruesome. Suggesting gloomy or frightful thoughts. + + Gunwale. The upper portion of the hull of a ship or boat. + + Horizontal. At right angles to a line directed to the center of + the earth. + + Hypnotized. A treatment which acts directly on the mind or + nervous system. + + Impervious. Permitting no passage through or into. + + Immoderately. More than the usual; more than the ordinary. + + Instructively. Along educational lines; learning things. + + Intonation. The modulation of the voice. + + Inactive. Not vigorous. + + Intestines. That part of the digestive tube below the stomach. + + Intimation. A hint. + + Intruder. To enter or appear when not wanted. + + Inscription. A writing; an announcement. + + Inevitable. Anything which is bound to happen. A result. + + Insulated. Shielded from something. + + Interim. In the meantime. Within certain periods. + + Incidence. Happening at the same time. A circumstance. + + Interpret. To make plain. To bring to an understanding. + + Ingenuity. To devise; to bring forward out of the ordinary. + + Inordinately. More than the ordinary course or manner. + + Indicate. To show, or to point out. + + Intensity. With full vigor; strong; vivacious. + + Inverted. Upside down. Turned about. + + Insistent. To continue urging; determination. + + Involuntary. Without intent; in spite of all precaution. + + Inefficient. Not careful or prudent; without full capacity. + + Jubilant. Joyous. + + Laboriously. Consistently carrying out work without regard to the + amount of labor required. + + Lacerated. To injure or to tear the flesh. + + Lee. The side or direction opposite to that from which + the wind comes. + + Malady. Sickness. Particular kind of illness. + + Manipulate. The manner of handling. To artfully influence the + result. + + Manifestation. Made known; acknowledged; understood. + + Maneuvered. To make methodical change of position. + + Maritime. Pertaining to the sea, or to naval affairs. + + Mercury. A silver-white metallic metal in a liquid state. + + Minimizing. The smallest state. In the least difficult position. + + Misgiving. A feeling of doubt or apprehension. + + Miniature. Small; a little copy. + + Momentum. The power of overcoming resistance possessed by a + body. + + Mobility. The capacity to change or alter. + + Monopoly. Possessed of complete power. Full sway. + + Nitrogenous. Partaking of the qualities of nitrogen. + + Normal. A perpendicular; according to an established law or + principle. + + Obliquely. A deviation from the direct line. + + Octagonal. Eight-sided. + + Orbit. The course in which a planet travels. + + Orifice. A hole; an opening. + + Orgy. Wild or wanton revelry. + + Ozone. An allotropic condition of oxygen. A substance made + from oxygen. + + Pandemonium. A fiendish or riotous uproar. + + Paleontologist. A student in the origin of life on the globe. + + Patriarch. The elder; the one in a tribe on whom authority + vests. + + Pathetically. In a vein of sadness; arousing tender emotions. + + Parallel. On a line with; side by side the same distance. + + Paralyzed. Loss of power to control the muscles or other parts + of the body. + + Penetrate. To go into. + + Perforation. To make an opening or hole. + + Periodical. At regular intervals. + + Peaty. Having the characteristics of peat. + + Personified. To transform from a thought or speech into a person. + + Perturbed. To be disturbed in mind. + + Perceptible. Noticeable; seen. + + Phenomena. Something directly observable; anything visible. + + Primitive. The first way of doing things; the original plan or + method. + + Prospecting. Investigating; trying to discover new elements or + substances. + + Profusion. Many; an abundance. + + Port. A haven. The left side of a vessel. + + Proportionally. Relative magnitude, number or degree. + + Predominating. Overshadowing; possessing power. + + Properties. The elementary substances of any material. + + Propagate. To bring to a better condition or state. Making an + improved breed or type of animals or plants. + + Prognosticate. To foretell. + + Promulgate. To announce; to give out. + + Privation. Hardship. To be kept from the necessaries of life. + + Promontory. A high point of land extending out into the sea. + + Progenitor. An ancestor in the direct line. + + Proximity. Close to; in the neighborhood of. + + Radiating. To emit or send out rays. + + Relaxation. A change from the ordinary routine. + + Retarding. Holding back; making the object go slower. + + Reticent. Habitually keeping quiet or in reserve. + + Regulation. In accordance with some law or order established. + + Refraction. That property in light which causes a bend as the + ray passes from one substance through another. + + Reverse. In the opposite direction. + + Rifling. Spiral grooves in the bore of a gun. + + Rotation. Turning; moving around a common center. + + Seepage. Leaking; passing through. + + Sequence. That which follows as the result of a certain thing. + + Secluded. Kept hidden; not exposed. + + Spherical. Round like a globe. + + Spiral. Having the twist of a corkscrew. + + Spawning. The period when fish lay their eggs. + + Stringers. The longitudinal pieces which form the main frame + of a structure. + + Standard. A post. Also the flag or ensign of a country. + + Strata. Parts of layers of earth, rock, or other material. + + Strenuous. Vigorous; insistent. + + Suppressing. Trying to keep out of sight; hidden. + + Substitute. In place of. + + Sulphide. A compound of sulphur with another element. + + Subsided. To stop; to proceed no further. + + Symptoms. Indications; showing effects of certain illness or + treatment. + + Synthesis. The putting of different things together. + + Theorist. One who speculates; one who tries to arrange facts + to harmonize. + + Timbre. The peculiarity of a sound whereby it is + distinguished from another. + + Tortuous. Moving in a winding or irregular way. + + Tourmaline. One of the gems, found in various colors. + + Traverse. Across; traveling; to go over. + + Triangulation. The method of surveying whereby two known points + are used to find a third, by means of the angles + made. + + Utilitarian. One who tries to take advantage of any knowledge and + make use of it. + + Untenable. Without good ground. + + Vacuum. A space entirely devoid of matter. + + Veered. Turned aside or in a different direction. + + Veritable. Truthful; well known to be correct. + + Vibration. Any movement which is more or less irregular and + continuous. + + Vividly. Distinctly seen; brightly appearing. + + Wrench. To twist violently. To injure by a forcible turn or + movement. + + + + + * * * * * + + + + +Other books from + +THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY +147 Fourth Avenue +New York + + + + +THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + +By ROGER T. FINLAY + + +A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable +experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the +South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the +exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools +and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them +but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The +books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to +know. + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Castaways + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + Exploring the Island + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Mysteries of the Caverns + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Tribesmen + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Capture and Pursuit + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + The Conquest of the Savages + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + Adventures on Strange Islands + + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS + Treasures of the Islands + + + + +THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS + +BY J. S. ZERBE + + +CARPENTRY FOR BOYS + +A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all +subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of +tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles +involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the +rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty +illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a +complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most +comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys. + + +ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS + +The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental +principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the +work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been +developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using +technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It +has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred +original drawings. + + +PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS + +This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical +shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of +shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work, +and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every +subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a +glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature +that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully +illustrated. + + + + +THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS + +By ELBERT FISHER + + +This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who +make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet +with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their +adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter +relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries +through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of +boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The +books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each +chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the +author, and four striking halftones. + +1. From New York to the Golden Gate, takes in many of the principal +points between New York and California, and contains a highly +entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a +little useful information. + +2. From San Francisco to Japan, relates the experiences of the two boys +at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii, +Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and +a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text. + +3. From Tokio to Bombay. This book covers their interesting experiences +in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong and +finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field +seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great +Hyderabad region of South India. + +4. From India to the War Zone, describes their trip toward the Persian +Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site +of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan +through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where +they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa, +and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully +described. + + + + +The Ethel Morton Books + +By MABELL S. C. SMITH + +This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls. +Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our +young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their +accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know. + +In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the +entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of +swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted +as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are +illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text. + + Ethel Morton at Chautauqua + + Ethel Morton and the Christmas Ship + + Ethel Morton's Holidays + + Ethel Morton at Rose House + + Ethel Morton's Enterprise + + Ethel Morton at Sweet Brier Lodge + + + + +THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUTS + +A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS + +By Capt. Alan Douglas, Scout-master + + + I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol + + Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid + opportunities to use their recently acquired knowledge in a + practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, + astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp life. A clean, + wholesome story every boy should read. + + II. Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good + + This tale presents many stirring situations in which the boys are + called upon to exercise ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled + with healthful excitement. + +III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot + + Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to + the credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow + fast, one after the other. + + IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge from Fairfield + + They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description + of the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome + thereof, form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball + stories of recent years. + + V. Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop + + After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest + undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the + good-natured rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many + interesting and amusing situations. + + VI. Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day + + Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face + of apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and + surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories + Captain Douglas has written. + +VII. Under Canvas; or, The Hunt for the Cartaret Ghost + + It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys + by the exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long + puzzled older heads. + +VIII. Storm-bound; or, a Vacation Among the Snow Drifts + + The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training + comes to the rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all + concerned. + + + + +Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge Boy Scout Series, +all illustrated:-- + + Wild Animals of the United States--Tracking + + Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States + + Reptiles of the United States + + Fishes of the United States + + Insects of the United States and Birds of the United States. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: THE +MYSTERIES OF THE CAVERNS*** + + +******* This file should be named 20614.txt or 20614.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/6/1/20614 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/20614.zip b/20614.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..66edbc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/20614.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58e8238 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #20614 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/20614) |
